Paper-8-Cost AC CMA

INTERMEDIATE : PAPER - 8
6
01
-2
US
AB
LL
SY
COST
ACCOUNTING INTERMEDIATE
STUDY NOTES
The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

CMA Bhawan, 12, Sudder Street, Kolkata - 700 016
First Edition: July 2016
Revision: October 2017
Revised Edition: January 2018
Reprint: January 2019
Edition: August 2019
Published by :
Directorate of Studies
The Institute of Cost Accountants of India (ICAI)
CMA Bhawan, 12, Sudder Street, Kolkata - 700 016
Printed at :
M/s. Sap Prints Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
28A, Lakshmi Industrial Estate
S.N. Path, Lower Parel (W)
Mumbai - 400 013, Maharashtra
Copyright of these Study Notes is reserved by the Institute of Cost

Accountants of India and prior permission from the Institute is necessary
for reproduction of the whole or any part thereof.
Syllabus - 2016
PAPER 8: COST ACCOUNTING
Syllabus Structure:
The syllabus comprises the following topics and study weightage:
Introduction to Cost Accounting

Cost Ascertainment - Elements of Cost
A
Cost Accounting Standards 40%
Cost Book Keeping
B Methods of Costing 30%
C Cost Accounting Techniques 30%
C
30%
A
40%
B
30%
ASSESSMENT STRATEGY
There will be written examination paper of three hours
OBJECTIVES
To provide an in depth study of the Cost Accounting Principles and Techniques for identification, analysis and
classification of cost components to facilitate managerial decision making.
Learning aims
The syllabus aims to test the student’s ability to:
 Understand and explain the conceptual framework of Cost Accounting
 Explain the basic concepts and processes in determination of cost of products and services
 Understand the Cost Accounting Standards (CAS)
 Apply marginal costing in decision making
 Apply the concept of Standard Costing for variance analysis
Skill set required
Level B: Requiring the skill levels of knowledge, comprehension, application and analysis.
COST ACCOUNTING
INTRODUCTION TO COST ACCOUNTING [40 MARKS]
1. INTRODUCTION TO COST ACCOUNTING:
(a) Definition, Scope, objectives and significance of cost accounting, its relationship with financial
accounting and management accounting
(b) Cost Objects, Cost centers and Cost Units
(c) Elements of cost
(d) Classification of costs
2. COST ASCERTAINMENT - ELEMENTS OF COST:
(a) Material Costs:
(i) Procurement of Materials,
(ii) Inventory Management and Control,
(iii) Inventory Accounting & Valuation
(iv) Physical Verification, treatment of losses
(v) Scrap, spoilage, defectives and wastage.
(b) Employee Costs:
(i) Time keeping, Time booking and payroll,
(ii) Labour Turnover, Overtime and idle time
(iii) Principles and methods of remuneration and incentive schemes
(iv) Employee cost reporting and measurement of efficiency.
(c) Direct Expenses
(d) Overheads:
(i) Collection, classification and apportionment and allocation of overheads
(ii) Absorption and treatment of over or under absorption of overheads
(iii) Reporting of overhead costs
3. COST ACCOUNTING STANDARDS (Basic Understanding only)
(CAS 1 to CAS 24)
4. COST BOOK KEEPING:
(a) Cost Accounting Records, Ledgers and Cost Statements
(b) Items excluded from cost and normal and abnormal items/cost
(c) Integral accounts
(d) Reconciliation of cost accounting records with financial accounts
(e) Infrastructure, Educational, Healthcare and Port services
METHODS OF COSTING [30 MARKS]
5. METHODS OF COSTING:
(a) Job Costing
(b) Batch Costing
(c) Contract Costing
(d) Process Costing – Normal and abnormal losses, equivalent production, Joint and By Products.
(e) Operating Costing or Service Costing – Transport, Hotel and Hospital
COST ACCOUNTING TECHNIQUES [30 MARKS]
6. COST ACCOUNTING TECHNIQUES: (Basic Understanding only)
(A) Marginal Costing
(i) Meaning of Marginal Cost and Marginal Costing
(ii) Absorption Costing vs. Marginal Costing
(iii) Break-even analysis
(iv) Margin of safety
(v) Application of Marginal Costing for decision making (simple problems only)
(B) Standard Costing & Variance Analysis
(i) Concept of standard cost and standard costing
(ii) Advantages and limitations
(iii) Computation of variances relating to material and labour costs only
(C) Budget and Budgetary Control (simple problems only)
(i) Concepts, Types of Budgets
(ii) Budgetary Control Vs Standard Costing
(iii) Advantages and limitations
(iv) Preparation of Budgets (simple problems only)
Contents
COST ACCOUNTING
Study Note 1 : Introduction to Cost Accounting
1.1 Definition, scope, objectives and significance of Cost Accounting, its relationship with
Financial Accounting and Management Accounting 1
1.2 Cost Object, Cost Centers and Cost Units – Elements of Cost 7
1.3 Classification of Cost 13
Study Note 2 : Cost Ascertainment - Elements of Cost

2.1 Material Cost (CAS-6) 23
2.2 Employee Costs (CAS-7) 71
2.3 Direct Expenses (CAS-10) 116
2.4 Overheads (CAS-3) 121
Study Note 3 : Cost Accounting Standards

3.1 Preface to Cost Accounting Standards (CASs) 171
3.2 Objectives and Functions of Cost Accounting Standards Board 172
3.3 CAS 1-24 as issued by The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 174
Study Note 4 : Cost Book Keeping

4.1 Cost Accounting Records, Ledgers and Cost Statements 185
4.2 Items excluded from Cost and Normal and Abnormal Items/Cost 200
4.3 Integral Accounts 201
4.4 Reconciliation of Cost Accounting Records with Financial Accounts 211
4.5 Infrastructure, Educational, Healthcare and Port Services 224
Study Note 5 : Methods of Costing

5.1 Job Costing 233
5.2 Batch Costing 245
5.3 Contract Costing 249
5.4 Process Costing – Joint & By-Products 264
5.5 Operating Costing or Service Costing – Transport, Hotel and Hospital 296
Study Note 6 : Cost Accounting Techniques

6.1 Marginal Costing 307
6.2 Standard Costing & Variance Analysis 341
6.3 Budget and Budgetary Control 366
Cost Accounting
Study Note - 1
INTRODUCTION TO COST ACCOUNTING
This Study Note includes

1.1 Definition, scope, objectives and significance of Cost Accounting, its relationship with
Financial Accounting and Management Accounting
1.2 Cost Objects, Cost Centres and Cost Units – Elements of Cost
1.3 Classification of Costs
1.1 DEFINITION, SCOPE, OBJECTIVES AND SIGNIFICANCE OF COST ACCOUNTING, ITS RELATIONSHIP
WITH FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING
Way back to 15th Century, no accounting system was there and it was the barter system prevailed.
It was in the last years of 15th century Luca Pacioli, an Italian found out the double entry system of
accounting in the year 1494. Later it was developed in England and all over the world upto 20th
Century. During these 400 years, the purpose of Cost Accounting needs are served as a small branch
of Financial Accounting except a few like Royal wallpaper manufactory in France (17th Century), and
some iron masters & potters (18th century).
The period 1880 AD- 1925 AD saw the development of complex product designs and the emergence
of multi activity diversified corporations like Du Pont, General Motors etc. It was during this period that
scientific management was developed which led the accountants to convert physical standards into
Cost Standards, the latter being used for variance analysis and control.
During the World War I and II the social importance of Cost Accounting grew with the growth of each
country’s defence expenditure. In the absence of competitive markets for most of the material required
for war, the governments in several countries placed cost-plus contracts under which the price to be
paid was cost of production plus an agreed rate of profit. The reliance on cost estimation by parties to
defence contracts continued after World War II.
In addition to the above, the following factors have made accountants to find new techniques to
serve the industry :-
(i) Limitations placed on financial accounting
(ii) Improved cost consciousness
(iii) Rapid industrial development after industrial revolution and world wars
(iv) Growing competition among the manufacturers
(v) To control galloping price rise, the cost of computing the precise cost of product / service
(vi) To control cost several legislations passed throughout the world and India too such as Essential
Commodities Act, Industrial Development and Regulation Act...etc
Due to the above factors, the Cost Accounting has emerged as a speacialised discipline from the
initial years of 20th century i.e after World War I and II.
In India, prior to independence, there were a few Cost Accountants, and they were qualified mainly
from I.C.M.A. (now CIMA) London. During the Second World War, the need for developing the
profession in the country was felt, and the leadership of forming an Indian Institute was taken by some
The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 1

Cost Accounting
members of Defence Services employed at Kolkata. However, with the enactment of the Cost and
Works Accountants of India Act, 1959, the Institute of Cost and Works Accountants of India (Now called
as The Institute of Cost Accountants of India) was established at Kolkata. The profession assumed further
importance in 1968 when the Government of India introduced Cost Audit under section 233(B) of the
Companies Act, 1956. At present it is under Section 148 of the Companies Act, 2013.
Many times we use Cost Accounting, Costing and Cost Accountancy interchangeably. But there are
differences among these terms. As a professional, though we use interchangeably we must know the
meaning of each term precisely.
Cost Accounting : Cost Accounting may be defined as “Accounting for costs classification and analysis
of expenditure as will enable the total cost of any particular unit of production to be ascertained
with reasonable degree of accuracy and at the same time to disclose exactly how such total cost is
constituted”. Thus Cost Accounting is classifying, recording an appropriate allocation of expenditure
for the determination of the costs of products or services, and for the presentation of suitably arranged
data for the purpose of control and guidance of management.
Cost Accounting can be explained as follows :-
Cost Accounting is the process of accounting for cost which begins with recording of income and
expenditure and ends with the preparation of statistical data.
It is the formal mechanism by means of which cost of products or services are ascertained and
controlled.
Cost Accounting provides analysis and classification of expenditure as will enable the total cost of any
particular unit of product / service to be ascertained with reasonable degree of accuracy and at the
same time to disclose exactly how such total cost is constituted. For example it is not sufficient to know
that the cost of one pen is ` 25/- but the management is also interested to know the cost of material
used, the amount of labour and other expenses incurred so as to control and reduce its cost.
It establishes budgets and standard costs and actual cost of operations, processes, departments or
products and the analysis of variances, profitability and social use of funds.
Thus Cost Accounting is a quantitative method that collects, classifies, summarises and interprets
information for product costing, operation planning and control and decision making.
Costing : Costing is defined as the technique and process of ascertaining costs.
The technique in costing consists of the body of principles and rules for ascertaining the costs of
products and services. The technique is dynamic and changes with the change of time. The process
of costing is the day to day routine of ascertaining costs. It is popularly known as an arithmetic process.
For example If the cost of producing a product say ` 200/-, then we have to refer material, labour and
expenses accounting and arrive the above cost as follows:
Material ` 100
Labour ` 40
Expenses ` 60
Total ` 200
Finding out the breakup of the total cost from the recorded data is a daily process. That is why it
is called arithmetic process/daily routine. In this process we are classifying the recorded costs and
summarizing at each element and total is called technique.
Cost Accountancy: Cost Accountancy is defined as ‘the application of Costing and Cost Accounting
principles, methods and techniques to the science, art and practice of cost control and the ascertainment
of profitability’. It includes the presentation of information derived there from for the purposes of managerial
decision making. Thus, Cost Accountancy is the science, art and practice of a Cost Accountant.
2 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

(a) It is a science because it is a systematic body of knowledge having certain principles which a cost
accountant should possess for proper discharge of his responsibilities.
(b) It is an art as it requires the ability and skill with which a Cost Accountant is able to apply the
principles of Cost Accountancy to various managerial problems.
(c) Practice includes the continuous efforts of a Cost Accountant in the field of Cost Accountancy.
Such efforts of a Cost Accountant also include the presentation of information for the purpose of
managerial decision making and keeping statistical records.
Objectives of Cost Accounting
The following are the main objectives of Cost Accounting :-
(a) To ascertain the Costs under different situations using different techniques and systems of costing
(b) To determine the selling prices under different circumstances
(c) To determine and control efficiency by setting standards for Materials, Labour and Overheads
(d) To determine the value of closing inventory for preparing financial statements of the concern
(e) To provide a basis for operating policies which may be determination of Cost Volume relationship,
whether to close or operate at a loss, whether to manufacture or buy from market, whether
to continue the existing method of production or to replace it by a more improved method of
production....etc
Scope of Cost Accountancy
The scope of Cost Accountancy is very wide and includes the following:-
(a) Cost Ascertainment: The main objective of Cost Accounting is to find out the Cost of product /
services rendered with reasonable degree of accuracy.
(b) Cost Accounting: It is the process of Accounting for Cost which begins with recording of expenditure
and ends with preparation of statistical data.
(c) Cost Control: It is the process of regulating the action so as to keep the element of cost within the
set parameters.
(d) Cost Reports: This is the ultimate function of Cost Accounting. These reports are primarily prepared
for use by the management at different levels. Cost reports helps in planning and control,
performance appraisal and managerial decision making.
(e) Cost Audit: Cost Audit is the verification of correctness of Cost Accounts and check on the
adherence to the Cost Accounting plan. Its purpose is not only to ensure the arithmetic accuracy
of cost records but also to see the principles and rules have been applied correctly.
To appreciate fully the objectives and scope of Cost Accounting, it would be useful to examine the
position of Cost Accounting in the broader field of general accounting and other sciences. i.e Financial
Accounting, Management Accounting, Engineering and Service Industry.
Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting: Financial Accounting is primarily concerned with the
preparation of financial statements, which summarise the results of operations for selected period of
time and show the financial position of the company at particular dates. In other words Financial
Accounting reports on the resources available (Balance Sheet) and what has been accomplished with
these resources (Profit and Loss Account). Financial Accounting is mainly concerned with requirements
of creditors, shareholders, government, prospective investors and persons outside the management.
Financial Accounting is mostly concerned with external reporting.
Cost Accounting, as the name implies, is primarily concerned with determination of cost of something,
which may be a product, service, a process or an operation according to costing objective of

Cost Accounting
management. A Cost Accountant is primarily charged with the responsibility of providing cost data for
whatever purposes they may be required for.
The main differences between Financial and Cost Accounting are as follows:
Financial Accounting Cost Accounting

(a) It provides the information about the business (a) It provides information to the management
in a general way. i.e Profit and Loss Account, for proper planning, operation, control and
Balance Sheet of the business to owners and decision making.
other outside partners.
(b) It classifies, records and analyses the (b) It records the expenditure in an objective
transactions in a subjective manner, i.e manner, i.e according to the purpose for
according to the nature of expense. which the costs are incurred.
(c) It lays emphasis on recording aspect without (c) It provides a detailed system of control for
attaching any importance to control. materials, labour and overhead costs with
the help of standard costing and budgetary
control.
(d) It reports operating results and financial (d) It gives information through cost reports to
position usually at the end of the year. management as and when desired.
(e) Financial Accounts are accounts of the (e) Cost Accounting is only a part of the financial
whole business. They are independent in accounts and discloses profit or loss of each
nature. product, job or service.
(f) Financial Accounts records all the (f) Cost Accounting relates to transactions
commercial transactions of the business connected with Manufacturing of goods
and include all expenses i.e Manufacturing, and services, means expenses which enter
Office, Selling etc. into production.
(g) Financial Accounts are concerned with (g) Cost Accounts are concerned with internal
external transactions i.e. transactions transactions, which do not involve any cash
between business concern and third party. payment or receipt.
(h) Only transactions which can be measured in (h) Non-Monetary information likes No of Units /
monetary terms are recorded. Hours etc are used.
(i) Financial Accounting deals with actual (i) Cost Accounting deals with partly facts and
figures and facts only. figures and partly estimates / standards.
(j) Financial Accounting do not provide (j) Cost Accounts provide valuable information
information on efficiencies of various workers/ on the efficiencies of employees and Plant &
Plant & Machinery. Machinery.
(k) Stocks are valued at Cost or Market price (k) Stocks are valued at Cost only.
whichever is lower.
(l) Financial Accounting is a positive science as (l) Cost Accounting is not only positive science
it is subject to legal rigidity with regarding to but also normative because it includes
preparation of financial statements. techniques of budgetary control and
standard costing.
(m) These accounts are kept in such away to (m) Generally Cost Accounts are kept
meet the requirements of Companies Act voluntarily to meet the requirements of the
2013 as per Sec 128 & Income Tax Act, 1961 management, only in some industries Cost
Sec 44AA. Accounting records are kept as per the
Companies Act.

Cost Accounting and Management Accounting:

Management Accounting is primarily concerned with management. It involves application of
appropriate techniques and concepts, which help management in establishing a plan for reasonable
economic objective. It helps in making rational decisions for accomplishment of these objectives. Any
workable concept or techniques whether it is drawn from Cost Accounting, Financial Accounting,
Economics, Mathematics and Statistics, can be used in Management Accountancy. The data used
in Management Accountancy should satisfy only one broad test. It should serve the purpose that it is
intended for. A Management Accountant accumulates, summarizes and analysis the available data
and presents it in relation to specific problems, decisions and day-to-day task of management. A
Management Accountant reviews all the decisions and analysis from management’s point of view
to determine how these decisions and analysis contribute to overall organizational objectives. A
Management Accountant judges the relevance and adequacy of available data from management’s
point of view.
The scope of Management Accounting is broader than the scope of Cost Accountancy. In
Cost Accounting, primary emphasis is on cost and it deals with its collection analysis relevance
interpretation and presentation for various problems of management. Management Accountancy
utilizes the principles and practices of Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting in addition to other
management techniques for efficient operations of a company. It widely uses different techniques from
various branches of knowledge like Statistics, Mathematics, Economics, Laws and Psychology to assist
the management in its task of maximising profits or minimising losses. The main thrust in Management
Accountancy is towards determining policy and formulating plans to achieve desired objective of
management. Management Accounting makes corporate planning and strategy effective.
From the above discussion we may conclude that the Cost Accounting and Management Accounting
are interdependent, greatly related and inseparable.
Advantages of Cost Accounting
Cost Accounting has manifold advantages, a summary of which is given below. It is not suggested that
having installed a system of Cost Accounting, a concern will expect to derive all the benefits stated
here, the nature and the extent of the advantages obtained will depend upon the type, adequacy
and efficiency of the cost system installed and the extent to which the various levels of management
are prepared to accept and act upon the advice rendered by the cost system.
The Cost Accounting System has the following advantages:-
(i) A cost system reveals unprofitable activities, losses or inefficiencies occurring in any form such as
(a) Wastage of man power, idle time and lost time.
(b) Wastage of material in the form of spoilage, excessive scrap etc., and
(c) Wastage of resources, e.g. inadequate utilization of plant, machinery and other facilities.
(ii) Cost Accounting locates the exact causes for decrease or increase in the profit or loss of the
business. It identifies the unprofitable products or product lines so that these may be eliminated
or alternative measures may be taken.
(iii) Cost Accounts furnish suitable data and information to the management to serve as guides in
making decisions involving financial considerations.
(iv) Cost Accounting is useful for price fixation purposes. Although sale price is generally related more
to economic conditions prevailing in the market than to cost, the latter serves as a guide to test
the adequacy of selling prices.
(v) With the application of Standard Costing and Budgetary Control methods, the optimum level of
efficiency is set.
(vi) Cost comparison helps in cost control. Comparison may be period to period, of the figures in
respect of the same unit or factory or of several units in an industry by employing Uniform Costs
and Inter- Firm Comparison methods. Comparison may be made in respect of cost of jobs,
process or cost centres.

Cost Accounting
(vii) A cost system provides ready figures for use by the Government, wage tribunals and boards, and
labour and trade unions.
(viii) When a concern is not working to full capacity due to various reasons such as shortage of
demands or bottlenecks in production, the cost of idle capacity can readily worked out and
repealed to the management.
(ix) Introduction of a cost reduction programme combined with operations research and value
analysis techniques leads to economy.
(x) Marginal Costing is employed for suggesting courses of action to be taken. It is a useful tool for
the management for making decisions.
(xi) Determination of cost centres or responsibility centres to meet the needs of a Cost Accounting
system, ensures that the organizational structure of the concern has been properly laid
responsibility can be properly defined and fixed on individuals.
(xii) Perpetual inventory system which includes a procedure for continuous stock taking is an essential
feature of a cost system.
(xiii) The operation of a system of cost audit in the organization prevents manipulation and fraud
and assists in furnishing correct and reliable cost data to the management as well as to outside
parties like shareholders, the consumers and the Government.
Limitations of Cost Accounting system
Like any other system of accounting, Cost Accountancy is not an exact science but an art which
has developed through theories and accounting practices based on reasoning and commonsense.
Many of the theories cannot be proved nor can they be disproved. They grownup in course of time
to become conventions and accepted principles of Cost Accounting. These principles are by no
means static, they are changing from day to day and what is correct today may not hold true in the
circumstances tomorrow.
Large number of Conventions, Estimates and Flexible factors: No cost can be said to be exact as they
incorporate a large number of conventions, estimations and flexible factors such as :-
(i) Classification of costs into its elements.
(ii) Materials issue pricing based on average or standard costs.
(iii) Apportionment of overhead expenses and their allocation to cost units/centres.
(iv) Arbitrary allocation of joint costs.
(v) Division of overheads into fixed and variable.
Cost Accounting lacks the uniform procedures and formats in preparing the cost information of a
product/ service. Keeping in view this limitation, all Cost Accounting results can be taken as mere
estimates.
Installation of Cost System or Cost Accounting System
From what has been stated in the preceding sections, it will be seen that there cannot be a readymade
cost system suitable for a business. Such system has to be specially designed for an undertaking to
meet its specific needs. Before installing a cost system proper care should be taken to study and taken
into account all the aspects involved as otherwise the system will be a misfit and full advantages will
not be realized from it. The following points should be looked into and the prerequisites satisfied before
installing a cost system:-
(i) The nature, method and stages of production, the number of varieties and the quantity of each
product and such other technical aspects should be examined. It is to be seen how complex or
how simple the production methods are and what is the degree of control exercised over them.
(ii) The size, layout and organisation of the factory should be studied.

(iii) The methods of purchase, receipt, storage and issue of materials should be examined and
modified wherever considered necessary.
(iv) The wage payment methods should be studied.
(v) The requirements of the management and the policy adopted by them towards cost control
should be kept in view.
(vi) The cost of the system to be installed should be considered. It is needless to emphasize that the
installation and operation of system should be economic.
(vii) The system should be simple and easy to operate.
(viii) The system can be effectively run if it is appropriate and properly suited to the organisation.
(ix) Forms and records of original entry should be so designed and to involve minimum clerical work
and expenditure.
(x) The system should be so designed that cost control can be effectively exercised.
(xi) The system should incorporate suitable procedure for reporting to the various levels of
management. This should be based on the principles of exception.
1.2 COST OBJECT, COST CENTERS AND COST UNITS – ELEMENTS OF COST
Cost: Cost is a measurement, in monetary terms, of the amount of resources used for the purpose of
production of goods or rendering services.
Cost in simple, words, means the total of all expenses. Cost is also defined as the amount of expenditure
(actual or notional) incurred on or attributable to a given thing or to ascertain the cost of a given thing.
Thus it is that which is given or in sacrificed to obtain something. The cost of an article consists of actual
outgoings or ascertained charges incurred in its production and sale. Cost is a generic term and it is
always advisable to qualify the word cost to show exactly what it meant, e.g., prime cost, factory cost,
etc. Cost is also different from value as cost is measured in terms of money whereas value in terms of
usefulness or utility of an article.
Elements of Cost
Elements of Cost
Material Labour Expenses
Direct Materail Direct Labour Direct Expenses
Indirect Material Indirect Labour Indirect Expenses
Direct Material + Direct Labour + Direct Expenses = Prime Cost

Indirect Material+ Indirect Labour + Indirect Expenses = Overheads
Direct Material Cost
Direct material cost can be defined as ‘The Cost of material which can be attributed to a cost object
in an economically feasible way’. Direct materials are those materials which can be identified in
the product and can be conveniently measured and directly charged to the product. Thus, these

Cost Accounting
materials directly enter the product and form a part of the finished product. For example, timber in
furniture making, cloth in dress making, bricks in building a house. The following are normally classified
as direct materials :-
(i) All raw materials, like jute in the manufacture of gunny bags, pig iron in foundry and fruits in canning
industry.
(ii) Materials specifically purchased for a specific job, process or order, like glue for book binding,
starch powder for dressing yarn.
(iii) Parts or components purchased or produced, like batteries for transistor-radios.
(iv) Primary packing materials like cartons, wrappings, card-board boxes, etc.
Indirect Material Cost

Materials, the costs of which cannot be directly attributed to a particular cost object. Indirect materials
are those materials which do not normally form a part of the finished product. It has been defined as
“materials which cannot be allocated but which can apportioned to or absorbed by cost centres or
cost units”. These are:
(i) Stores used in maintenance of machinery, buildings, etc., like lubricants, cotton waste, bricks and
cements.
(ii) Stores used by the service departments, i.e., non-productive departments like Power House, Boiler
House and Canteen, etc., and
(iii) Materials which due to their cost being small, are not considered worthwhile to be treated as
direct materials.
Direct Labour / Employee Cost

The cost of employees which can be attributed to a cost object in an economically feasible way. In
simple words, it is that labour which can be conveniently identified or attributed wholly to a particular
job, product or process or expended in converting raw materials into finished goods. Wages of such
labour are known as direct wages. Thus it includes payment made to the following groups of labour:
(i) Labour engaged on the actual production of the product or in carrying out of an operation or
process.
(ii) Labour engaged in adding the manufacture by way of supervision, maintenance, tool setting,
transportation of material etc.
(iii) Inspectors, analysts etc., specially required for such production.
Indirect Labour/ Employee Cost

The labour / employee cost which cannot be directly attributed to a particular cost object. The wages
of that labour which cannot be allocated but which can be apportioned to or absorbed by cost
centres or cost units is known as Indirect Labour. In other words paid to labour which are employed
other than on production constitute indirect labour costs. Example of such labour are: charge-hands
and supervisors; maintenance workers; men employed in service departments, material handling and
internal transport; apprentices, trainees and instructors; clerical staff and labour employed in time
office and security office.
Direct or Chargeable Expenses
Direct expenses are expenses relating to manufacture of a product or rendering a service which can
be identified or linked with the cost object other than direct material cost and direct employee cost.
Direct expenses include all expenditure other than direct material or direct labour that is specifically

incurred for a particular product or process. Such expenses are charged directly to the particular
cost account concerned as part of the prime cost. Examples of direct expenses are: (i) Excise duty;
(ii) Royalty; (iii) Architect or Supervisor’s fees; (iv) Cost of rectifying defective work; (v) Travelling
expenses to the city; (vi) Experimental expenses of pilot projects; (vii) Expenses of designing or drawings
of patterns or models; (viii) Repairs and maintenance of plant obtained on hire; and (ix) Hire of special
equipment obtained for a contract.
Overhead
Overheads comprise of indirect materials, indirect employee cost and indirect expenses which are
not directly identifiable or allocable to a cost object. Overheads may defined as the aggregate of
the cost of indirect material, indirect labour and such other expenses including services as cannot
conveniently be charged directly to specific cost units. Thus overheads are all expenses other than
direct expenses. In general terms, overheads comprise all expenses incurred for or in connection with,
the general organization of the whole or part of the undertaking, i.e., the cost of operating supplies
and services used by the undertaking and includes the maintenance of capital assets.
Prime Cost
The aggregate of Direct Material, Direct Labour and Direct Expenses. Generally it constitutes 50% to
80% of the total cost of the product, as such, as it is primary to the cost of the product and called Prime
Cost.
Cost Object
Cost object is the technical name for a product or a service, a project, a department or any activity
to which a cost relates. Therefore the term cost should always be linked with a cost object to be more
meaningful. Establishing a relevant cost object is very crucial for a sound costing system. The Cost
object could be defined broadly or narrowly. At a broader level a cost object may be named as a
Cost Centre, where as at a lowermost level it may be called as a Cost Unit.
Cost Centre
CIMA defines a cost centre as “a location, a person, or an item of equipment (or a group of them) in
or connected with an undertaking, in relation to which costs ascertained and used for the purpose of
cost control”. The determination of suitable cost centres as well as analysis of cost under cost centres
is very helpful for periodical comparison and control of cost. In order to obtain the cost of product or
service, expenses should be suitably segregated to cost centre. The manager of a cost centre is held
responsible for control of cost of his cost centre. The selection of suitable cost centres or cost units
for which costs are to be ascertained in an undertaking depends upon a number of factors such as
organization of a factory, condition of incidence of cost, availability of information, requirements of
costing and management policy regarding selecting a method from various choices. Cost centre
may be production cost centres operating cost centres or process cost centres depending upon the
situation and classification.
Cost centres are of two types-Personal and Impersonal Cost Centre. A personal cost centre consists of
person or group of persons. An impersonal cost centre consists of a location or item of equipment or
group of equipments.
In a manufacturing concern, the cost centres generally follow the pattern or layout of the departments
or sections of the factory and accordingly, there are two main types of cost centres as below :-
(i) Production Cost Centre: These centres are engaged in production work i.e engaged in converting
the raw material into finished product, for example Machine shop, welding shops...etc
(ii) Service Cost Centre: These centres are ancillary to and render service to production cost centres,
for example Plant Maintenance, Administration...etc
The number of cost centres and the size of each vary from one undertaking to another and are
dependent upon the expenditure involved and the requirements of the management for the purpose
of control.

Cost Accounting
Responsibility Centre
A responsibility centre in Cost Accounting denotes a segment of a business organization for the
activities of which responsibility is assigned to a specific person. Thus a factory may be split into a
number of centres and a supervisor is assigned with the responsibility of each centre. All costs relating
to the centre are collected and the Manager responsible for such a cost centres judged by reference
to the activity levels achieved in relation to costs. Even an individual machine may be treated as
responsibility centre for cost control and cost reduction.
Profit Centre
Profit centre is a segment of a business that is responsible for all the activities involved in the production
and sales of products, systems and services. Thus a profit centre encompasses both costs that it incurs
and revenue that it generates. Profit centres are created to delegate responsibility to individuals and
measure their performance. In the concept of responsibility accounting, profit centres are sometimes
also responsible for the investment made for the centre. The profit is related to the invested capital.
Such a profit centre may also be termed as investment centre.
Cost Unit
Cost Unit is a device for the purpose of breaking up or separating costs into smaller sub divisions
attributable to products or services. Cost unit can be defined as a ‘Unit of product or service in relation
to which costs are ascertained’. The cost unit is the narrowest possible level of cost object.
It is the unit of quantity of product, service of time (or combination of these) in relation to which costs
may be ascertained or expressed. We may, for instance, determine service cost per tonne of steel,
per tonne-kilometre of a transport service or per machine hour. Sometimes, a single order or contract
constitutes a cost unit which is known as a job. A batch which consists of a group of identical items
and maintains its identity through one or more stages or production may also be taken as a cost unit.
A few examples of cost units are given below:
Industry / Product Cost Unit
Automobile Number of vehicles
Cable Metres / kilometres
Cement Tonne
Chemicals / Fertilizers Litre / Kilogram / tonne
Gas Cubic Metre
Power - Electricity Kilowatt Hour
Transport Tonne-Kilometre, Passenger-Kilometre
Hospital Patient Day
Hotel Bed Night
Education Student year
Telecom Number of Calls
BPO Service Accounts handled
Professional Service Chargeable Hours
Cost Allocation
When items of cost are identifiable directly with some products or departments such costs are charged
to such cost centres. This process is known as cost allocation. Wages paid to workers of service
department can be allocated to the particular department. Indirect materials used by a particular
department can also be allocated to the department. Cost allocation calls for two basic factors - (i)
Concerned department/product should have caused the cost to be incurred, and (ii) exact amount
of cost should be computable.

Cost Apportionment
When items of cost cannot directly charge to or accurately identifiable with any cost centres, they are
prorated or distributed amongst the cost centres on some predetermined basis. This method is known
as cost apportionment. Thus we see that items of indirect costs residual to the process of cost allocation
are covered by cost apportionment. The predetermination of suitable basis of apportionment is very
important and usually following principles are adopted - (i) Service or use (ii) Survey method (iii) Ability
to bear. The basis ultimately adopted should ensure an equitable share of common expenses for the
cost centres and the basis once adopted should be reviewed at periodic intervals to improve upon
the accuracy of apportionment.
Cost Absorption
Ultimately the indirect costs or overhead as they are commonly known, will have to be distributed over
the final products so that the charge is complete. This process is known as cost absorption, meaning
thereby that the costs absorbed by the production during the period. Usually any of the following
methods are adopted for cost absorption - (i) Direct Material Cost Percentage (ii) Direct Labour Cost
Percentage (iii) Prime Cost Percentage (iv) Direct Labour Hour Rate Method (v) Machine Hour Rate,
etc. The basis should be selected after careful maximum accurancy of Cost Distribution to various
production units. The basis should be reviewed periodically and corrective action whatever needed
should be taken for improving upon the accuracy of the absorption.
Conversion Cost
This term is defined as the sum of direct wages, direct expenses and overhead costs of converting raw
material to the finished products or converting a material from one stage of production to another
stage. In other words, it means the total cost of producing an article less the cost of direct materials
used. The cost of indirect materials and consumable stores are included in such cost. The compilation
of conversion cost is useful in a number of cases. Where cost of direct materials is of fluctuating nature,
conversion cost is used to cost control purpose or for any other decision making. In contracts/jobs
where raw materials are on account of the buyers conversion cost takes the place of total cost in the
books of the producer. Periodic comparison/review of the conversion cost may give sufficient insight
as to the level of efficiency with which the production unit is operating.
Cost Control
Cost Control is defined as the regulation by executive action of the costs of operating an undertaking,
particularly where such action is guided by Cost Accounting.
Cost control involves the following steps and covers the various facets of the management:
Planning: First step in cost control is establishing plans / targets. The plan/target may be in the form of
budgets, standards, estimates and even past actual may be expressed in physical as well as monetary
terms. These serves as yardsticks by which the planned objective can be assessed.
Communication: The plan and the policy laid down by the management are made known to all those
responsible for carrying them out. Communication is established in two directions; directives are issued
by higher level of management to the lower level for compliance and the lower level executives report
performances to the higher level.
Motivation: The plan is given effect to and performances starts. The performance is evaluated, costs are
ascertained and information about results achieved are collected and reported. The fact that costs
are being complied for measuring performances acts as a motivating force and makes individuals
endeavor to better their performances.
Appraisal and Reporting: The actual performance is compared with the predetermined plan and
variances, i.e deviations from the plan are analyzed as to their causes. The variances are reported to
the proper level of management.

Cost Accounting
Decision Making: The variances are reviewed and decisions taken. Corrective actions and remedial
measures or revision of the target, as required, are taken.
Advantages of Cost Control
The advantages of cost control are mainly as follows
(i) Achieving the expected return on capital employed by maximising or optimizing profit
(ii) Increase in productivity of the available resources
(iii) Reasonable price of the customers
(iv) Continued employment and job opportunity for the workers
(v) Economic use of limited resources of production
(vi) Increased credit worthiness
(vii) Prosperity and economic stability of the industry
Cost Reduction
Profit is the resultant of two varying factors, viz., sales and cost. The wider the gap between these two
factors, the larger is the profit. Thus, profit can be maximised either by increasing sales or by reducing
costs. In a competition less market or in case of monopoly products, it may perhaps be possible to
increase price to earn more profits and the need for reducing costs may not be felt. Such conditions
cannot, however, exist paramount and when competition comes into play, it may not be possible to
increase the sale price without having its adverse effect on the sale volume, which, in turn, reduces
profit. Besides, increase in price of products has the ultimate effect of pushing up the raw material
prices, wages of employees and other expenses- all of which tend to increase costs. In the long run,
substitute products may come up in the market, resulting in loss of business. Avenues have, therefore, to
be explored and method devised to cut down expenditure and thereby reduce the cost of products.
In short, cost reduction would mean maximization of profits by reducing cost through economics and
savings in costs of manufacture, administration, selling and distribution.
Cost reduction may be defined as the real and permanent reduction in the unit costs of goods
manufactured or services rendered without impairing their suitability for the use intended. As will be
seen from the definition, the reduction in costs should be real and permanent. Reductions due to
windfalls, fortuities receipts, changes in government policy like reduction in taxes or duties, or due
to temporary measures taken for tiding over the financial difficulties do not strictly come under the
purview of cost reduction. At the same time a programme of cost reduction should in no way affect
the quality of the products nor should it lower the standards of performance of the business.
Broadly speaking reduction in cost per unit of production may be affected in two ways viz.,
(i) By reducing expenditure, the volume of output remaining constant, and
(ii) By increasing productivity, i.e., by increasing volume of output and the level of expenditure
remains unchanged.
These aspects of cost reduction are closely linked and they act together - there may be a reduction in
the expenditure and the same time, an increase in productivity.

Cost Control vs. Cost Reduction: Both Cost Reduction and Cost Control are efficient tools of management
but their concepts and procedure are widely different. The differences are summarised below:
Cost Control Cost Reduction

(a) Cost Control represents efforts made towards (a) Cost Reduction represents the achievement
achieving target or goal. in reduction of cost.
(b) The process of Cost Control is to set up a (b)
Cost Reduction is not concern with
target, ascertain the actual performance maintenance of performance according to
and compare it with the target, investigate standard.
the variances, and take remedial measures.
(c) Cost Control assumes the existence of (c) Cost Reduction assumes the existence of
standards or norms which are not challenged. concealed potential savings in standards
or norms which are therefore subjected
to a constant challenge with a view to
improvement by bringing out savings.
(d) Cost Control is a preventive function. Costs (d) Cost Reduction is a corrective function. It
are optimized before they are incurred. operates even when an efficient cost control
system exists. There is room for reduction in the
achieved costs under controlled conditions.
(e) Cost Control lacks dynamic approach. (e) Cost Reduction is a continuous process of
analysis by various methods of all the factors
affecting costs, efforts and functions in an
organization. The main stress is upon the why
of a thing and the aim is to have continual
economy in costs.
1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF COST
Types of costing have been designed to suit the needs of individual business conditions. The basic
principles underlying all these methods are the same i.e. to collect and analyze the expenditure
according to the elements of costs and to determine the cost of each Cost Centre and or Cost Unit.
Classification of cost is the arrangement of items of costs in logical groups having regard to their nature
or purpose. Items should be classified by one characteristic for a specific purpose without ambiguity.
Scheme of classification should be such that every item of cost can be classified. In view of the above,
cost classification may be explained as below:
As per Cost Accounting Standard 1 (CAS-1), the basis for cost classification is as follows:
(a) Nature of expense
(b) Relation to Object – Traceability
(c) Functions / Activities
(d) Behaviour – Fixed, Semi-variable or Variable
(e) Management decision making
(f) Production Process
(g) Time Period
Classification of cost is the process of grouping the components of cost under a common designation
on the basis of similarities of nature, attributes or relations. It is the process of identification of each item
and the systematic placement of like items together according to their common features.

Cost Accounting
(a) Classification by Nature of Expense

Costs should be gathered together in their natural grouping such as Material, Labour and Other Direct
expenses. Items of costs differ on the basis of their nature. The elements of cost can be classified in the
following three categories. 1. Material 2. Labour 3. Expenses
Cost Classification by nature
Material Labour Expenses
Material Cost: Material cost is the cost of material of any nature used for the purpose of production
of a product or a service. It includes cost of materials, freight inwards, taxes & duties, insurance ...etc
directly attributable to acquisition, but excluding the trade discounts, duty drawbacks and refunds on
account of excise duty and vat.
Labour Cost: Labour cost means the payment made to the employees, permanent or temporary for
their services. Labour cost includes salaries and wages paid to permanent employees, temporary
employees and also to the employees of the contractor. Here salaries and wages include all the
benefits like provident fund, gratuity, ESI, overtime, incentives...etc
Expenses: Expenses are other than material cost or labour cost which are involved in an activity.
(b) Classification by Relation to Cost Centre or Cost Unit:
If expenditure can be allocated to a cost centre or cost object in an economically feasible way then
it is called direct otherwise the cost component will be termed as indirect. According to this criteria for
classification, material cost is divided into direct material cost and indirect material cost, Labour cost
is divided into direct labour and indirect labour cost and expenses into direct expenses and indirect
expenses. Indirect cost is also known as overhead.
Cost Classification by relation to cost centre
Direct Indirect
Material Labour Expenses Material Labour Expenses
Direct Material Cost: Cost of material which can be directly allocated to a cost centre or a cost object
in an economically feasible way.
Direct labour Cost: Cost of wages of those workers who are readily identified or linked with a cost centre
or cost object.
Direct Expenses: Expenses other than direct material and direct labour which can be identified or
linked with cost centre or cost object.
Direct Material + Direct labour + Direct Expenses = Prime Cost
Indirect Material : Cost of material which cannot be directly allocable to a particular cost centre or
cost object.

Indirect Labour : Cost of wages of employees which are not directly allocable to a particular cost
centre.
Indirect expenses: Expenses other than of the nature of material or labour and cannot be directly
allocable to a particular cost centre.
Indirect Material + Indirect Labour + Indirect Expenses = Overheads
(c) Classification by Functions:
A business enterprise performs a number of functions like manufacturing, selling, research...etc.
Costs may be required to be determined for each of these functions and on this basis functional costs
may be classified into the following types:-
(i) Production or Manufacturing Costs
(ii) Administration Costs
(iii) Selling & Distribution cost
(iv) Research & Development costs
Cost classification by function
Production Administration Research & Selling Distribution

Development
(i) Production or Manufacturing Costs: Production cost is the cost of all items involved in the production of
a product or service. These refer to the costs of operating the manufacturing division of an undertaking
and include all costs incurred by the factory from the receipt of raw materials and supply of labour and
services until production is completed and the finished product is packed with the primary packing.
The followings are considered as Production or Manufacturing Costs:-
(1) Direct Material
(2) Direct Labour
(3) Direct Expenses and
(4) Factory overhead, i.e., aggregate of factory indirect material, indirect labour and indirect
expenses.
Manufacturing cost can also be referred to as the aggregate of prime cost and factory overhead.
(ii) Administration Costs: Administration costs are expenses incurred for general management of an
organization. These are in the nature of indirect costs and are also termed as administrative overheads.
For understanding administration cost, it is necessary to know the scope of administrative function.
Administrative function in any organization primarily concerned with following activities :-
(1) Formulation of policy
(2) Directing the organization and
(3) Controlling the operations of an organization. But administrative function will not include control
activities concerned with production, selling and distribution and research and development.
Therefore, administration cost is the cost of administrative function, i.e., the cost of formulating policy,
directing, organizing and controlling the operations of an undertaking (Administrative cost will include

Cost Accounting
the cost of only those control operations which are not related to production, selling and distribution
and research and development). In most of the cases, administration cost includes indirect expenses
of following types:
(1) Salaries of office staff, accountants, directors
(2) Rent, rates and depreciation of office building
(3) Postage, stationery and telephone
(4) Office supplies and expenses
(5) General administration expenses.
(iii) Selling & Distribution Costs: Selling costs are indirect costs related to selling of products are services
and include all indirect costs in sales management for the organization. Distribution costs are the costs
incurred in handling a product from the time it is completed in the works until it reaches the ultimate
consumer.
Selling function includes activities directed to create and stimulate demand of company’s product
and secure orders. Distribution costs are incurred to make the saleable goods available in the hands
of the customer.
Following are the examples of selling and distribution costs:
(1) Salaries and commission of salesmen and sales managers.
(2) Expenses of advertisement, insurance.
(3) Rent, rates, depreciation and insurance of sales office and warehouses.
(4) Cost of insurance, freight, export, duty, packing, shipping, etc.,
(5) Maintenance of Delivery vans.
(iv) Research & Development Costs: Research & development costs are the cost for undertaking
research to improve quality of a present product or improve process of manufacture, develop a new
product, market research...etc. and commercialization thereof.
R&D Costs comprises of the following:-
(1) Development of new product.
(2) Improvement of existing products.
(3) Finding new uses for known products.
(4) Solving technical problem arising in manufacture and application of products.
(5) Development cost includes the costs incurred for commercialization / implementation of research
findings.
Pre-Production Costs:
These are costs incurred when a new factory is in the process of establishment, a new project is
undertaken, or a new product line or product is taken up but there is no established or formal production
to which such costs may be charged. Preproduction costs are normally treated as deferred revenue
expenditure and charged to the costs of future production.
(d) Classification based on Behaviour – Fixed, Semi-variable or Variable
Costs are classified based on behaviour as fixed cost, variable cost and semi-variable cost depending
upon response to the changes in the activity levels.
Cost classification by behaviour
Fixed Variable Semi-variable

Fixed Cost: Fixed cost is the cost which does not vary with the change in the volume of activity in the
short run. These costs are not affected by temporary fluctuation in activity of an enterprise. These are
also known as period costs. Example: Rent, Depreciation...etc.
Variable Cost: Variable cost is the cost of elements which tends to directly vary with the volume of
activity. Variable cost has two parts (i) Variable direct cost (ii) Variable indirect costs. Variable indirect
costs are termed as variable overheads. Example: Direct labour, Outward Freight...etc.
Semi-Variable Costs: Semi variable costs contain both fixed and variable elements. They are partly
affected by fluctuation in the level of activity. These are partly fixed and partly variable costs and vice
versa. Example: Factory supervision, Maintenance...etc.
(e) Classification based on Costs for Management Decision Making
Ascertainment of cost is essential for making managerial decisions. On this basis costing may be
classified into the following types.
Marginal Costing: Marginal Cost is the aggregate of variable costs, i.e. prime cost plus variable
overhead. Marginal cost per unit is the change in the amount at any given volume of output by which
the aggregate cost changes if the volume of output is increased or decreased by one unit. Marginal
Costing system is based on the system of classification of costs into fixed and variable. The fixed costs
are excluded and only the marginal costs, i.e. the variable costs are taken into consideration for
determining the cost of products and the inventory of work-in-progress and completed products.
Differential Cost: Differential cost is the change in the cost due to change in activity from one level to
another.
Opportunity Cost: Opportunity cost is the value of alternatives foregone by adopting a particular
strategy or employing resources in specific manner. It is the return expected from an investment other
than the present one. These refer to costs which result from the use or application of material, labour
or other facilities in a particular manner which has been foregone due to not using the facilities in the
manner originally planned. Resources (or input) like men, materials, plant and machinery, finance etc.,
when utilized in one particulars way, yield a particular return (or output). If the same input is utilized in
another way, yielding the same or a different return, the original return on the forsaken alternative that
is no longer obtainable is the opportunity cost. For example, if fixed deposits in the bank are proposed
to be withdrawn for financing project, the opportunity cost would be the loss of interest on the deposits.
Similarly when a building leased out on rent to a party is got vacated for own purpose or a vacant
space is not leased out but used internally, say, for expansion of the production programme, the rent
so forgone is the opportunity cost.
Replacement Cost: Replacement cost is the cost of an asset in the current market for the purpose
of replacement. Replacement cost is used for determining the optimum time of replacement of an
equipment or machine in consideration of maintenance cost of the existing one and its productive
capacity. This is the cost in the current market of replacing an asset. For example, when replacement
cost of material or an asset is being considered, it means that the cost that would be incurred if the
material or the asset was to be purchased at the current market price and not the cost, at which it was
actually purchased earlier, should be take into account.
Relevant Costs: Relevant costs are costs which are relevant for a specific purpose or situation. In the
context of decision making, only those costs are relevant which are pertinent to the decision at hand.
Since we are concerned with future costs only while making a decision, historical costs, unless they
remain unchanged in the future period are irrelevant to the decision making process.
Imputed Costs: Imputed costs are hypothetical or notional costs, not involving cash outlay computed
only for the purpose of decision making. In this respect, imputed costs are similar to opportunity costs.
Interest on funds generated internally, payment for which is not actually made is an example of
imputed cost. When alternative capital investment projects are being considered out of which one or
more are to be financed from internal funds, it is necessary to take into account the imputed interest
on own funds before a decision is arrived at.

Cost Accounting
Sunk Costs: Sunk costs are historical costs which are incurred i.e. sunk in the past and are not relevant
to the particular decision making problem being considered. Sunk costs are those that have been
incurred for a project and which will not be recovered if the project is terminated. While considering
the replacement of a plant, the depreciated book value of the old asset is irrelevant as the amount is
sunk cost which is to be written-off at the time of replacement.
Normal Cost & Abnormal Cost: Normal Cost is a cost that is normally incurred at a given level of output
in the conditions in which that level of output is achieved. Abnormal Cost is an unusual and typical
cost whose occurrence is usually irregular and unexpected and due to some abnormal situation of the
production.
Avoidable Costs & Unavoidable Costs: Avoidable Costs are those which under given conditions of
performance efficiency should not have been incurred. Unavoidable Costs which are inescapable
costs, which are essentially to be incurred, within the limits or norms provided for. It is the cost that must
be incurred under a programme of business restriction. It is fixed in nature and inescapable.
Uniform Costing: This is not a distinct system of costing. The term applies to the costing principles and
procedures which are adopted in common by a number of undertakings which desire to have the
benefits of a uniform system. The methods of Uniform Costing may be extended so as to be useful in
inter-firm comparison.
Engineered Cost: Engineered Cost relates to an item where the input has an explicit physical relationship
with the output. For instance in the manufacture of a product, there is a definite relationship between the
units of raw material and labour time consumed and the amount of variable manufacturing overhead
on the one hand and units of the products produced on the other. The input-output relationship can
be established the form of standards by engineering analysis or by an analysis of the historical data. It
should be noted that the variable costs are not engineered cost but some administration and selling
expenses may be categorized as engineered cost.
Out-of-Pocket Cost: This is the portion of the cost associated with an activity that involve cash payment
to other parties, as opposed to costs which do not require any cash outlay, such as depreciation
and certain allocated costs. Out-of-Pocket Costs are very much relevant in the consideration of price
fixation during trade recession or when a make-or-buy decision is to be made.
Managed Cost: Managed (Programmed or Discretionary) Costs all opposed to engineering costs, relate
to such items where no accurate relationship between the amount spent on input and the output can
be established and sometimes it is difficult to measure the output. Examples are advertisement cost,
research and development costs, etc.,
Common Costs: These are costs which are incurred collectively for a number of cost centres and are
required to be suitably apportioned for determining the cost of individual cost centres. Examples are:
Combined purchase cost of several materials in one consignment, and overhead expenses incurred
for the factory as a whole.
Controllable and Non-Controllable Costs: Controllable Cost is that cost which is subject to direct
control at some level of managerial supervision. Non-controllable Cost is the cost which is not subject
to control at any level of managerial supervision.
(f) Classification by nature of Production or Process:
Cost Classification by nature of Production or Process
Batch Process Operation Operating Contract Joint

Cost Cost Cost Cost Cost Cost

Batch Costing: Batch Costing is the aggregate cost related to a cost unit which consists of a group of
similar articles which maintains its identity throughout one or more stages of production. In this method,
the cost of a group of products is ascertained. The unit cost is a batch or group of identical products
instead of a single job, order, or contract. This method is applicable to general engineering factories
which produces components in convenient economical batches.
Process Costing: When the production process is such that goods are produced from a sequence
of continuous or repetitive operations or processes, the cost incurred during a period is considered
as Process Cost. The process cost per unit is derived by dividing the process cost by number of units
produced in the process during the period. Process Costing is employed in industries where a continuous
process of manufacturing is carried out. Costs are ascertained for a specified period of time by
departments or process. Chemical industries, refineries, gas and electricity generating concerns may
be quoted as examples of undertakings that employ process costing.
Operation Cost: Operation Cost is the cost of a specific operation involved in a production process
or business activity. The cost unit in this method is the operation, instead of process. When the
manufacturing method consists of a number of distinct operations, operation costing is suitable.
Operating Cost: Operating cost is the cost incurred in conducting a business activity. Operating cost
refer to the cost of undertakings which do not manufacture any product but which provide services.
Industries and establishments like power house, transport and travel agencies, hospitals, and schools,
which undertake services rather than the manufacture of products, ascertain operating costs. The
cost units used are Kilo Watt Hour (KWH), Passenger Kilometer and Bed in the hospital....etc. Operation
costing method constitutes a distinct type of costing but it may also be classed as a variant of Process
Cost since costs in this method are usually compiled for a specified period.
Contract Costing: Contract cost is the cost of contract with some terms and conditions between
contractee and contractor. This method is used in undertakings, carrying out, building or constructional
contracts like constructional engineering concerns, civil engineering contractors. The cost unit here is a
contract, which may continue over more than one financial year.
Joint Costs: Joint costs are the common cost of facilities or services employed in the output of two
or more simultaneously produced or otherwise closely related operations, commodities or services.
When a production process is such that from a set of same input two or more distinguishably different
products are produced together, products of greater importance are termed as Joint Products and
products of minor importance are termed as By-products and the costs incurred prior to the point of
separation are called Joint Costs. For example in petroleum industry petrol, diesel, kerosene, naphtha,
tar is produced jointly in the refinery process.
By-product Cost: By-product Cost is the cost assigned to by-products till the split-off point.
(g) Classification by Time:
A cost item is related to a specific period of time and cost can be classified according to the system of
assessment and specific purpose as indicated in the following ways :-
Classification by Time
Historical Pre-determined
Cost Cost
Standard Cost Estimated Cost

Cost Accounting
Historical Costs: Historical Costs are the actual costs of acquiring assets or producing goods or services.
They are post-mortem costs ascertained after they have been incurred and they represent the cost of
actual operational performance. Historical Costing follows a system of accounting to which all values
are based on costs actually incurred as relevant from time to time.
Predetermined Costs: Pre-determined Costs for a product are computed in advance of production
process, on the basis of a specification of all the factors affecting cost and cost data. Predetermined
Costs may be either standard or estimated.
Standard Costs: A predetermined norm applies as a scale of reference for assessing actual cost,
whether these are more or less. The Standard Cost serves as a basis of cost control and as a measure
of productive efficiency, when ultimately posed with an actual cost. It provides management with
a medium by which the effectiveness of current results is measured and responsibility of deviation
placed. Standard Costs are used to compare the actual costs with the standard cost with a view to
determine the variances, if any, and analyse the causes of variances and take proper measure to
control them.
Estimated Costs: Estimated Costs of a product are prepared in advance prior to the performance
of operations or even before the acceptance of sale orders. Estimated Cost is found with specific
reference to product in question, and the activity levels of the plant. It has no link with actual and
hence it is assumed to be less accurate than the Standard Cost.
Techniques of Costing:
A. Marginal Costing
B. Standard Costing
C. Budgetary Control
D. Uniform Costing
A. Marginal costing
Marginal Costing is the ascertainment of marginal costs and of the effect on profit of changes in
volume or type of output by differentiating between fixed costs and variable costs. Several other terms
in use like Direct Costing, Contributory Costing, Variable Costing, Comparative Costing, Differential
Costing and Incremental Costing are used more or less synonymously with Marginal Costing.
The term direct cost should not be confused with direct costing. In absorption Costing, direct cost
refers to the cost which is attributable to a cost centre of cost unit (e.g., direct labour, direct material
and direct expenses including traceable fixed expenses, i.e., the fixed expense which are directly
chargeable). In Direct Costing (or Marginal Costing), factory variable overhead is taken as a direct
cost while in the Absorption Cost Method, it is Indirect Cost.
B. Standard Costing
Standard Costing is defined as the preparation and use of standard cost, their comparison with
actual costs and the measurement and analysis of variances to their causes and points of incidence.
Standard Cost is a predetermined cost unit that is calculated from the management’s standards of
efficient operation and the relevant necessary expenditure. Standard Costs are useful for the cost
estimation and price quotation and for indicating the suitable cost allowances for products, process
and operations but they are effective tools for cost control only when compared with the actual costs
of operation. The techniques of standard costing may be summarised as follows :-
(i) Predetermination of technical data related to production. i.e., details of materials and labour
operations required for each product, the quantum of inevitable losses, efficiencies expected,
level of activity, etc.
(ii) Predetermination of standard costs in full details under each element of cot, viz., labour, material
and overhead.

(iii) Comparison of the actual performance and costs will the standards and working out the variances,
i.e., the differences between the actual and the standards.
(iv) Analysis of the variances in order to determine the reasons for deviations of actuals from the
standards.
(v) Presentation of information to the appropriate level of management to enable suitable action
(remedial measures or revision of the standard) being taken.
C. Budgetary Control
Budgetary Control may be defined as the process of continuous comparison of actual costs and
performance with the pre-established budgets in relation to the responsibilities of the executives to the
specific budgets for the achievement of a target in accordance with the policy of the organisation and
to provide a basis for revision of budget. Therefore, Budgetary Control involves mainly establishment
of budgets, continuous compassion of actual with budgets for achievement of targets, revision of
budgets in the light of changed circumstances.
The classification of budgets into various categories certainly helps to make the budgetary control
more effective because the maximum use is made of the functional budgets. Functional Budgets over
the goals to be attained by the functional executives and thus assume the greatest significance.
D. Uniform Costing
Uniform Costing may be defined as the application and use of the same costing principles and
procedures by different Organizations under the same management or on a common understanding
between members of an association. It is thus not a separate technique or method. It simply denotes
a situation in which a number of organizations may use the same costing principles in such a way as
to produce costs which are of the maximum comparability. From such comparable costs valuable
conclusions can be drawn. When the Uniform Costing is made use of by the different concerns
the same management it helps to indicate the strengths and/or weaknesses of those concerns. By
studying the findings, appropriate corrective steps may be taken to improve the overall efficiency of
the organizations. When used by the member concerns of a trade association Uniform Costing helps to
reduce expenditure on a comparative marketing, to determine and follow a uniform pricing policy, to
exchange information between the members for comprised and improvement and so on.
Inter-firm Comparison as the name denotes means the techniques of evaluating the performances,
efficiencies, deficiencies, costs and profits of similar nature of firms engaged in the same industry or
business. It consists of exchange of information, voluntarily of course, concerning production, sales
cost with various types of break-up, prices, profits, etc., among the firms who are interested of willing
to make the device a success. The basic purposes of such comparison are to find out the work points
in an organization and to improve the efficiency by taking appropriate measures to wipe out the
weakness gradually over a period of time.
SELF EXAMINATION QUESTIONS:

1. Define profit centre.
2. State the objective of Cost Accounting.
3. ''Cost may be classified in a variety of ways according to their nature and the information needs of
the management” Discuss.
4. State the benefits accrue out of Cost Accounting.
5. Write short notes on the following:
(a) Out of Pocket Cost.
(b) Sunk Cost
(c) Opportunity Cost
(d) Imputed Costs

Cost Accounting
Multiple Choice Questions:

1. Batch Costing is suitable for-
A. Sugar Industry B. Chemical Industry C. Pharma Industry D. Oil Industry
2. Joint Cost is suitable for-

A. Infrastructure Industry B. Ornament Industry. C. Oil Industry D. Fertilizer Industry
3. Cost units of Hospital Industry is-

A. Tonne B. Student per year C. Kilowatt Hour D. Patient Day
4. Cost units of Automobile Industry is-

A. Cubic meter B. Bed Night C. Number of Call D. Number of vehicle
5. Depreciation is a example of-

A. Fixed Cost B. Variable Cost C. Semi Variable Cost D. None of these
[Ans: C, C, D, D, A]
State whether the following statement is True (or) False:

1. Differential Cost is the change in the cost due to change in activity from one level to another.
2. Cost unit of Hotel industry is student per year.
3. Multiple Costing is suitable for the banking Industry.
4. Direct Expenses are expenses related to manufacture of a product or rendering of services.
5. Profit is result of two varying factors sales sales and variable cost.
[Ans: T, F, F, T, F ]
Fill in the blanks:

1. Differential cost is the change in the cost due to change in _____________ from one level to another.
2. Management accounting is primarily concerned with __________________.
3. In Cost Accounting stock are valued at ___________ only.
4. Profit is the resultant of two varying factors viz _______________ and _______________.
5. ___________ cost are historical costs which are incurred in the past.
[Ans: (1) activity; (2) management; (3) cost; (4) sales, cost; (5) sunk.
Match the following:
1 Historical Cost A Specific Situation

2 Opportunity Cost B Student year
3 Relevant Cost C Imputed Cost
4 Cost unit for education D Value of alternative foregone
5 Notional Cost E Sunk cost
[Ans: (1) - (E); (2) - (D); (3) - (A); (4) - (B); (5) - (C).

Study Note - 2
COST ASCERTAINMENT - ELEMENTS OF COST
2.1 Material Costs (CAS - 6)

2.2 Employee Costs (CAS - 7)
2.3 Direct Expenses (CAS - 10)
2.4 Overheads (CAS - 3)
2.1 MATERIAL COST (CAS-6)
Material is any substance (Physics term) that forms part of or composed of a finished product. i.e
material refers to the commodities supplied to an undertaking for the purpose of consumption in the
process of manufacturing or of rendering service or for transformation into products. The term ‘Stores’
is often used synonymously with materials, however, stores has a wider meaning and it covers not
only raw materials consumed or utilized in production but also such other items as sundry supplies,
maintenance stores, fabricated parts, components, tools, jigs, other items, consumables, lubricants......
etc. Finished and partly finished products are also often included under the term ‘Stores’. Materials
are also known as Inventory. The term Materials / Inventory covers not only raw materials but also
components, work-in-progress and finished goods and scrap also.
Material cost is the significant constituent of the total cost of any product. It constitutes 40% to 80% of
the total cost. The percentages may differ from industry to industry. But for manufacturing sector the
material costs are of greatest significance. Inventory also constitutes a vital element in the Working
Capital. So it is treated as equivalent to cash. Therefore the analysis and control on Material Cost is
very important.
Objectives of Material Control System:

Material Control: The function of ensuring that sufficient goods are retained in stock to meet all
requirements without carrying unnecessarily large stocks.
The objectives of a system of material control are as following:-
(a) To make continuous availability of materials so that there may be uninterrupted flow of materials
for production. Production may not be held up for want of materials.
(b) To purchase requisite quantity of materials to avoid locking up of working capital and to minimise
risk of surplus and obsolete stores.
(c) To make purchase competitively and wisely at the most economical prices so that there may be
reduction of material costs.
(d) To purchase proper quality of materials to have minimum possible wastage of materials.
(e) To serve as an information centre on the materials knowledge for prices, sources of supply, lead
time, quality and specification.

Cost Accounting
(f) Study of Material can be better explained as follows:
Material
Purchase & Storage Issue

Receipt
Control
Requisites of Material Control System:

(a) Coordination and cooperation between the various departments concerned viz purchase,
receiving, inspection, storage, issues and Accounts and Cost departments.
(b) Use of standard forms and documents in all the stages of control.
(c) Classification, coordination, standardization and simplification of materials.
(d) Planning of requirement of material.
(e) Efficient purchase organization.
(f) Budgetary control of purchases.
(g) Planned storage of materials, physical control as well as efficient book control through satisfactory
storage control procedures, forms and documents.
(h) Appropriate records to control issues and utilization of stores in production.
(i) Efficient system of Internal Audit and Internal Checks.
(j) System of reporting to management regarding material purchase, storage and utilization.
Purchase Flow:
The main functions of a purchase department are as follows :-
(a) What to purchase? – Right Material with good quality
(b) When to purchase? – Right Time
(c) Where to purchase? – Right Source
(d) How much to purchase? – Right Quantity
(e) At what price to purchase? – Right Price
To perform these functions effectively, the purchasing department follows the following procedure:-
(a) Receiving purchase requisitions.
(b) Exploring the sources of supply and choosing the supplier.
(c) Preparation and execution of purchase orders.
(d) Receiving materials.
(e) Inspecting and testing materials.
(f) Checking and passing of bills for payment.

Purchase Organization:
Purchasing involves procurement of materials of requisite quantity and quality at economic price. It
is of extreme importance particularly to a manufacturing concern because it has bearing on all vital
factors of manufacture such as quantity, quality, cost, efficiency, economy, prompt delivery, volume
of production and so on. Purchase department in a business concern can be organized into two types
i.e Centralized Purchasing System and De-centralized Purchasing System. Purchasing process in most
of the organisation is a centralised function because the advantages of a centralised purchasing out
weight its disadvantages. Lets us see the merits and demerits of both the systems.
Merits of a centralised & De-merits of decentralized purchase organization:
(a) When materials are purchased favourable terms (Trade discount, Economies of transport...etc)
can be obtained because the quantity involved will be large. In case of decentralized system
these benefits cannot be realized.
(b) Specialised purchasing officer can be appointed with the specific purpose of highly efficient
purchases functions of the concern. In case of decentralized purchase system, the business entity
cannot afford a specialized purchasing officer in every location.
(c) Effective control can be exercised over the stock of materials because duplication of purchase
of the same materials may easily be avoided in centralized purchase system, where as in
decentralized purchase system, duplication of purchase of same material cannot be avoided.
(d) Under centralized purchase system effective control can be exercised on the purchases of all the
materials as the purchase function is channelized through one track which would make the system
of receiving, checking and inspection efficient. Where as in decentralized purchase system it is
very difficult to exercise controls.
(e) Under centralized system of purchase materials, components and capital equipments can be
suitably standardised so that the maximum purchasing benefits be availed of, storage facilities can
be improved and available production facilities can be greatly utilized to the maximum possible
extent. Under decentralized purchase system standardization of materials, storage facilities.....etc
is very difficult to achieve.
(f) Under centralized system of purchase closer cooperation between the financial and purchasing
departments can be achieved which may not be easy under decentralized purchase system.
De-Merits of a centralized & Merits of decentralized purchase organization :
(a) In may take unnecessarily long time to place a purchase order under centralized purchase system
because to collect the relevant data from various departments/ branches/locations may take
more time, These delays can be avoided under decentralized purchase system.
(b) In case of centralized purchasing system, branches at different places cannot take advantage of
localized purchasing, whereas under decentralized purchase system localization savings can be
realized.
(c) Due to the Chances of misunderstanding / miscommunication between the branch and the
centralized purchasing office may result in wrong purchase of material also. Whereas under
decentralized purchase system, the chances of miscommunication/ misunderstanding is very
limited.
(d) Centralized system will lead to high initial costs because a separate purchasing department for
purchase of materials is to be setup. No such costs are required to be incurred in the decentralized
system.
(e) Replacement of a defective item may take long time resulting in strain on smooth production flow
under centralized system of purchase. No such delay in decentralized system.
Now let us see the various material control documents in detail.

Cost Accounting
Purchase Requisition:
Purchases Requisition is a request made to the Purchase Department to procure materials of given
description and of the required quality and quantity within a specified period. It is a formal request
and it authorizes the Purchase Department to issue a Purchase Order to secure materials intended for
periodic requirements of a given material or materials to provide guidance to the Purchase Department
to estimate the future requirements in order to secure maximum purchase benefits in the form of higher
discount and better credit terms. The extent and range of materials requirements provide a basis for
preparation of a purchase budget. The actual requirements of a given period can be summarised
from the purchases requisition and compared with the purchase budget in order to determine the
variances and the reasons thereof. This form is prepared by storekeeper for regular items and by the
departmental head for special materials not stocked as regular items.
The Purchase Requisition is prepared in three copies. Original will be sent to Purchase department,
Duplicate copy will be retained by the indenting (request initiating) department and the triplicate will
be sent to approver for approving the purchase requisition.
Purchase Requisition provides the three basic things :-
(a) What type of material is to be purchased?
(b) When to be purchased?
(c) How much is to be purchased?
The specimen form of Purchase Requisition is as shown below :
Modern Ltd
Purchase Requisition or Indent
Purchase Req Type: Special / Regular :
Purchase Req No : Purchase Requisition Date :
Department :
S.No Material Code Description Quantity Material Required by date Remarks

of the Goods Required
Requested by Approved by
For use in Purchase Dept.

Quotations from
(1) PO Placed : Yes /No

(2) PO No:
(3)

Purchase Order:
Purchase Order (PO) is a request made in writing to selected supplier to deliver goods of requisite
quality, quantity, (as per the purchase requisition) at the prices, terms and conditions agreed upon. It is
a commitment on the part of the purchaser to accept the delivery of goods contained in the Purchase
Order if the terms included therein, are fulfilled. Purchase Order contains the following details :-
(a) Purchase Order No; (b) PO Date; (c) Supplier Name and Address; (d) Material Code; (e) Material
description; (f) Grade & Other particulars of the material; (g) Quantity to be supplied; h) Price; i) Place
of delivery; j) Taxes; k) Terms of Payment (Credit period) .....etc
Usually a purchase order is made in five copies, one each for suppliers, Receiving/Stores Department,
Originating Department, Accounts Department and filing. Thus we see that all the departments
concerned with the materials are informed fully about all the details of every purchases and it becomes
easier for everyone to follow up on any relevant matter.
Modern Ltd
Purchase Order

To PO No:
Supplier XXXXXX PO date:
Quotation
Reference:
Address PR No:

Please supply the following items in accordance with the instructions mentioned there in
on the following terms and conditions.

Material Rate per Delivery
S.No Material Code Quantity Amount Remarks
Description Unit Date

Packing &
Freight
Taxes
Total Amount

Delivery: Goods to be delivered at
Delivery date:
Payment Terms:
Authorised signatory

Cost Accounting
Receipt & Inspection of Materials:

Goods Received cum Inspection Note:
The stores department will receive the material after the gate entry. It will compare the quantities
received with the PO Quantity. It is a valuable document as it forms the basis of accounting entry in
the stores ledger and stock records. It is the document basis for quality control department to carry
inspection of the material in warded.
It also forms the basis of payments to be made to the supplier in respect of the materials supplied by
him. Suppliers invoices are checked with goods received notes which such for actual receipt of the
goods supplied by the supplier. One copy of such note is also sent to Inspection Department who after
inspection of materials approves the note for Stores Department to receive the materials. Outstanding
Goods Received Notes which are not linked with supplier’s bills enable the Accounts Department to
estimate at the year end the liability for goods purchased for which supplier’s bills not received.
The specimen copy of the Goods Received cum Inspection Note as below:
New India Ltd

Goods Received cum Inspection Note

Received from : GRN No:
GR Date:
Received at : PO Ref No:
Gate Entry
No:

S.No Material Material Quantity Quantity Qty Rejected Reason for Remarks
code Description Received Accepted Rejection

Prepared by Inspected by

Received by Storekeeper

Purchase Quantity:
Important requirement for an efficient system of purchase control is to ensure that only the correct
quantity of materials is purchased. The basic factors to be considered while fixing the ordering quantity
are as follows :-
(a) There should be no overstocking.
(b) Materials should always be available in sufficient quantity to meet the requirements of production
and to avoid plant shut down.
(c) Purchases should be made in economic lots.
Other factors to be considered are quantity already ordered, availability of funds, business cycle... etc.

Purchase department in manufacturing concerns is usually faced with the problem of deciding the
quantity of various items, which they should purchase basing on the above factors. If purchases of
material are made in bulk then inventory cost will be high. On the other hand if the order size is small
each time then the ordering cost will be very high. In order to minimise ordering and carrying costs it is
necessary to determine the order quantity which minimises these two costs.
Economic Order Quantity: (EOQ)

The total costs of a material usually consist of Buying Cost + Total Ordering Cost + Total Carrying Cost.
Economic Order Quantity is ‘The size of the order for which both ordering and carrying cost are
minimum’.
Ordering Cost: The costs which are associated with the ordering of material. It includes cost of staff
posted for ordering of goods, expenses incurred on transportation, inspection expenses of incoming
material....etc
Carrying Cost: The costs for holding the inventories. It includes the cost of capital invested in inventories.
Cost of storage, Insurance.....etc
The assumptions underlying the Economic Ordering Quantity (EOQ): The calculation of economic
order of material to be purchased is subject to the following assumptions:-
(a) Ordering cost per order and carrying cost per unit per annum are known and they are fixed.
(b) Anticipated usage of material in units is known.
(c) Cost per unit of the material is constant and is known as well.
(d) The quantity of material ordered is received immediately i.e lead time is Zero.
The famous mathematician ‘WILSON’ derived the formula used for determining the size of order for
each purchases at minimum ordering and carrying costs, which is as below :-
Economic Ordering Quantity = 2AO

C
Where,
A = Annual demand /Consumption
O = Ordering Cost per order
C = Carrying Cost per unit per annum.
Graphical representation of EOQ:
Carrying Cost
EOQ
Cost
Ordering Cost
Quantity

Cost Accounting
Illustration 1
Calculate the Economic Order Quantity from the following information. Also state the number of orders
to be placed in a year.
Consumption of materials per annum : 10,000 kg
Order placing cost per order : ` 50
Cost per kg. of raw materials : `2
Storage costs : 8% on average inventory
Solution:
2×A×O
EOQ =
C
A = Units consumed during year = 10,000 Kg.
O = Order cost per order = `50
C = Inventory carrying cost per unit per annum 2 × 8% = ` 0.16
2 ×10,000 (units)× ` 50
EOQ =
` 0.16
EOQ = 2,500 kg.
Total consumptio n of materials per annum

No. of orders to be placed in a year =
EOQ
10,000 kg
=
2,500 kg
= 4 Orders per year
Illustration 2
The average annual consumption of a material is 18,250 units at a price of ` 36.50 per unit. The storage
cost is 20% on an average inventory and the cost of placing an order is ` 50. How much quantity is to
be purchased at a time?
Solution:
2 ×18,250 (units)× ` 50
EOQ =
20% of ` 36.50
18,25,000
=
7.3
= 500 Units

Material Storage & Control:

Once the material is received, it is the responsibility of the stores-in-charge, to ensure that material
movements in and out of stores are done only against the authorized documents. Stores-in-charge
is responsible for proper utilization of storage space & exercise better control over the material in
the stores to ensure that the material is well protected against all losses such as theft, pilferage, fire,
misappropriation ...etc.
Duties of store keeper:
The duties of store-keeper are as follows :-
(a) To exercise general control over all activities in stores department.
(b) To ensure safe storage of the materials.
(c) To maintain proper records.
(d) To initiate purchase requisitions for the replacement of stock of all regular materials, whenever the
stock level of any item in the store reaches the Minimum Level.
(e) To initiate the action for stoppage of further purchasing when the stock level approaches the
Maximum Level.
(f) To issue materials only in required quantities against authorized requisition documents.
(g) To check and receive purchased materials forwarded by the receiving department and to
arrange for storage in appropriate places.
Different classes of stores:-

Broadly speaking, there are three classes of stores
(a) Central Stores
(b) Decentralized stores
(c) Sub-Store (Imprest Store)
Centralized stores:
The usual practice in most of the concerns is to have a central store. Separate store to meet the
requirements of each production department are not popular because of the heavy expenditure
involved. In case of centralized stores materials are received by and issued from one stores department.
All materials are kept at one central store. The advantages and disadvantages of this type of store are
set out as follows:
Advantages of centralized stores:
(a) Better control can be exercised over stores because all stores are housed in one department. The
risk of obsolescence of stores can be minimised.
(b) The economy of staff-experts, or clerical, floor space, records and stationery are available.
(c) Better supervision is certainly possible.
(d) Obsolescence of the stores items can be kept under strict vigil and control.
(e) Centralized material handling system can be put into operation thus further economising on
space, personnel and equipments.
(f) Investment in stocks can be minimized.

Cost Accounting
Disadvantages of centralized stores:

(a) The transportation costs of the materials may increase because the movements of the stores may
be for a greater distance since the storing is centralized.
(b) If the user departments are far away from the stores there may be delay in receipt of the stores by
those departments.
(c) Breakdown of inter-departmental transport system may hold up the entire process, and similarly
labour problem in the centralized stores may bring the entire concern to standstill.
(d) There is greater chance of losses through fire, burglary or some other unhappy incidents.
(e) It may not be safe to have some hazardous elements bunched together in the centralized stores.
Decentralized stores:
Under this type of stores, independent stores are situated in various departments. Handling of stores is
undertaken by the store keeper in each department. The departments requiring stores can draw them
from their respective stores situated in their departments. The disadvantages of centralized stores can
be eliminated, if there are decentralized stores. But these types of stores are uncommon because of
heavy expenditure involved.
Central stores with sub-stores:
In large organizations, factories / workshops may be located at different places which are far from the
central stores. So in order to keep the transportation costs and handling charges to the minimum level,
sub-stores should be situated near to the factory. For each item of materials a quantity is determined
and this should be kept in the stock at the beginning of any period. At the end of a period, the store
keepers of each sub-store will requisition from the central stores the quantity of the materials consumed
to bring the stock up to the predetermined quantity. In short this type of stores operates in a similar way
to a petty cash system, so this system of stores is also known as the imprest system of stores control.
Advantages:
(a) It ensures the prompt issue of stores.
(b) It confines the advantages of centralized stores with sub-stores and at the same time it does not
sacrifice the centralized control.
(c) It reduces handling cost of materials.
(d) It avoids the maintenance of elaborate inventory records.
Control of the Stores:
Classification and Codification of Material:
In case of large organizations the number and types of materials used is considerable and unless each
item is distinguished and stored separately it would be impossible to find them out when they are
required for production or any other operation. It may happen that either one type of material is in
excess or another type may be altogether non-existent. It is therefore, essential that a proper system of
classification and codification.
Classified into different categories according to their nature or type, viz., mild steel, tool steel, brass,
bronze, copper, glass, timber, etc., and then again within such broad classification into rounds; bars,
strips; angles, etc. There are two steps in the classification and codification of materials - determination
of the number of items, their nature, other characteristics and classification of the items of comparable
nature or type into suitable groups or classes.

Various classes of coding are in practice and the common types are stated below:
(a) Alphabetical Scheme: Alphabetics are only used for codification. Like Mild Steel Sheets are coded
as MSS.
(b) Numeric Scheme : In this scheme numericals are used instead of alphabets, For example If steel
is given main code of 300 mild steel may be coded as 310 and mild steel sheet may be coded as
311, mild steel bar may be coded as 3112.
(c) Decimal Scheme: It is similar to the numeric scheme in which the groups are represented by
number and digits after the decimal indicate sub-groups of items. For example, where the steel is
coded as 3.00 mild steel may be coded as 3.10 and mild steel sheet can be coded as 3.11 and
mild sheet bar as 3.12 and so on.
(d) Block Scheme: In this case block of number are allotted for classification of specific groups such
as for material classification the block of number 1 to 999 may be reserved, for raw materials; 1000
to 1999 for stores and spares; 2000 to 2999 for finished goods.
(e) Combination Scheme : Here the code structure takes in account both alphabetic and numeric
schemes and strikes a balance between the two. Mild steel by coded as MS and the sheets, bars,
strips, rounds of mild steel may be coded as MS01, MS02, MS04 and so on. This code is most com-
monly used because this system has got the advantage of both the alphabetic and numeric
systems and is quite flexible in nature.
Advantages of Classification & Codification of materials:
(a) The procedure assists in the easy identification and location of the materials because of their
classification.
(b) It minimises the recording of the nature/ type of the materials with detailed description on every
document relating to the transaction of materials.
(c) Codification is a must in the case of mechanisation of the stores accounting.
(d) The method is simple to operate and definitely saves time and money in respect of both physical
location/ identification of materials as well as recording of the materials.
After the material classification and codification is done for all the materials, for each material code
we have to fix the Minimum Level, Maximum Level, Re-order Level and Re-order Quantity. It is the
storekeeper’s responsibility to ensure inventory of any material is maintained between the Minimum
Level and Maximum Level.
Maximum Level:
The Maximum Level indicates the maximum quantity of an item of material that can be held in stock
at any time. The stock in hand is regulated in such a manner that normally it does not exceed this level.
While fixing the level, the following factors are to be taken into consideration:
(a) Maximum requirement of the store for production purpose, at any point of time.
(b) Rate of consumption and lead time.
(c) Nature and properties of the Store: For instance, the maximum level is necessarily kept low for
materials that are liable to quick deterioration or obsolescence during storage.
(d) Storage facilities that can be conveniently spared for the item without determinant to the
requirements of other items of stores.
(e) Cost of storage and insurance.
(f) Economy in prices: For seasonal supplies purchased in bulk during the season, the maximum level
is generally high.

Cost Accounting
(g) Financial considerations: Availability of funds and the price of the stores are to be kept in view. For
costly items, the maximum level should be as low as possible. Another point to be considered is
the future market trend. If prices are likely to rise, the concern may like to stock-piling for keeping
large stock in reserve for long-term future uses and in such a case, the level is pushed up.
(h) Rules framed by the government for import or procurement. If due to these and other causes
materials are difficult to obtain and supplies are irregular the maximum level should be high.
(i) The maximum level is also dependent on the economic ordering quantity.
Maximum Level = Re-Order Level + Re-Order Qty – (Minimum Rate of Consumption X Minimum Re-
Order Period)
Minimum Level:
The Minimum Level indicates the lowest quantitative balance of an item of material which must be
maintained at all times so that there is no stoppage of production due to the material being not
available. In fixing the minimum level, the following factors are to be considered :-
(a) Nature of the item: For special material purchased against customer’s specific orders, no minimum
level is necessary. This applies to other levels also.
(b) The minimum time (normal re-order period) required replenishing supply: This is known as the Lead
Time and are defined as the anticipated time lag between the dates of issuing orders and the
receipt of materials. Longer the lead time, lower is minimum level, the re-order point remaining
constant.
(c) Rate of consumption (normal, minimum or maximum) of the material.
Minimum Level = Re-Order level – (Normal Rate of Consumption X Normal Re-Order Period)
Re-Order Level:
When the stock in hand reach the ordering or re-ordering level, store keeper has to initiate the action
for replenish the material. This level is fixed somewhere between the maximum and minimum levels
in such a manner that the difference of quantity of the material between the Re-ordering Level and
Minimum Level will be sufficient to meet the requirements of production up to the time the fresh supply
of material is received.
The basic factors which are taken into consideration in fixing a Re-ordering Level for a store item
include minimum quantity of item to be kept, rate of consumption and lead time which are applied
for computing of this level.
Re-Ordering level= Minimum Level + Consumption during lead time
= Minimum Level + (Normal Rate of Consumption × Normal Re-order Period)
Another formula for computing the Re-Order level is as below
Re-Order level = Maximum Rate of Consumption X Maximum Re-Order period (lead time)
Danger Level:
It is the level at which normal issue of raw materials are stopped and only emergency issues are only
made. This is a level fixed usually below the Minimum Level. When the stock reaches this level very
urgent action for purchases is indicated. This presupposed that the minimum level contains a cushion
to cover such contingencies. The normal lead time cannot be afforded at this stage. It is necessary to
resort to unorthodox hasty purchase procedure resulting in higher purchase cost.
The practice in some firms is to fix danger level below the Re-Ordering Level but above the Minimum
Level. In such case, if action for purchase of an item was taken when the stock reached the Re-Ordering
Level, the Danger Level is of no significance except that a check with the purchases department may
be made as soon as the Danger Level is reached to ensure that everything is all right and that delivery
will be made on the scheduled date.
Danger Level = Normal Rate of Consumption × Maximum Reorder Period for emergency purchases

Illustration 3
The components A and B are used as follows:
Normal usage .... 300 units per week each
Maximum usage .... 450 units per week each
Minimum usage .... 150 units per week each
Reorder Quantity .... A 2,400 units; B 3,600 units.
Reorder period .... A 4 to 6 weeks, B 2 to 4 weeks.
Calculate for each component:
(a) Re-order Level (b) Minimum Level (c) Maximum Level (d) Average Stock Level.
Solution:
Particulars A B
a) Reorder Level 2700 units 1800 units
[Max. Consumption × Max. Re-order (450 × 6) (450 × 4)
Period]
b) Minimum Level
[ROL – (Normal Consumption × Normal 1200 units 900 units
Re-order period)] [2700 – (300×5)] [1800 – (300×3)]
c) Maximum Level
[ROL + ROQ – (Min. Consumption × Min. 4500 units 5100 units
Re-order Period)] [2700 + 2400 – (150×4)] [1800 + 3600 – (150 × 2)]
d) Average Stock Level 2850 units 3000 units
[Min. Level + Max. Level] / 2 [4500 + 1200]/2 [5100 + 900]/2
OR (or) (or)
[Min. Level + ½ Re-order Quantity] 2400 units 2700 units
1200 + ½ (2400) 900 + ½ (3600)
Stores Records
The bin cards and the stores ledger are the two important stores records that are generally kept for
making a record of various items.
Bin Card:
Bin Card is a quantitative record of receipts, issues and closing balance of items of stores. Separate
bin cards are maintained for each item and are placed in shelves or bins. This card is debited with the
quantity of stores received, credited with the quantity of stores issued and the balance of quantity of
store is taken after every receipt or issue. The balance quantity of the item may be easily known at any
time. To have an up to date balance of stores, the principle of ‘before touching the item, bin card
should be touched’. For each item of stores, Material Code, Minimum Quantity, Maximum Quantity,
Ordering Quantity, Balance Quantities are stated on the bin card. Bin card is also known as ‘Bintag’ or
‘Stock card’.

Cost Accounting
BIN CARD OF APHME LTD
Material Code: Maximum Level:

Mat. Description: Minimum Level:
Location: Re-ordering level:
Unit of Measurement:
Verification with Stores

Date Doc No. Received from / Issued to Receipts Issue Balance
ledger Date & Verified By
Stores Ledger:
Stores Ledger is maintained by the costing department to make record of all receipts, issues of materials
with quantities, values (Sometimes unit rates also). Ledger resembles with bin cards except that receipts,
issues and balances are shown along with their money value. The ledger contains an account for every
item of stores in which receipts, issues and balances are recorded both in quantity and value.
Stores Ledger of Krishna Engineering Ltd.

Material code: Minimum Qty:
Bin No: Maximum Qty:
Material Description: Ordering Qty:
Location:

Receipts Issues Balance
Date
GR No Qty Rate Amount SR No Qty Rate Amount Qty Rate Amount

Difference between Bin Card and Stores Ledger:-
Bin Card Stores Ledger

(a) It is maintained by the store keeper. (a) It is maintained in the Costing department.
(b) It contains only quantitative details of (b) It contains information both in quantity and value.
materials received, issued and returned to
stores.
(c) Entries are made when transactions take (c) It is always posted after the transaction.
place.
(d) Each transaction is individually posted. (d) Transactions may be summarized and then
posted.
(e) Inter-department transfers do not appear (e) Material transfers from one job to another job are
in Bin-card. recorded for costing purpose.
Reconciliation of Stores ledger and Bin Card:
Normally there should not be any difference between the quantities shown in the Bin Card and the
Stores Ledger. However, in practice differences arise mainly due to the following reasons :-
(a) Arithmetical error in working out the balances.
(b) Non-posting of a document either in a bin card or in the stores ledger may be due to non receipt
of a document.
(c) Posting in the wrong bin card or in the wrong sheet (code) of the stores ledger.
(d) Posting of receipts under issue and vice-versa.
(e) Materials issued or received on loan or for approval are sometimes entered in bin card, but not in
stores ledger.
Any difference between the stores ledger and bin card defeats the purpose for which the two separate
sets are maintained and renders physical stocking ineffective as the correct book balance for the
purpose of comparison with physical balance is not available. So to control or reduce the mismatch
between the stores ledger and bin card and maintain the correct balance in the books of accounts
various methods are followed.
Perpetual Inventory System:
Perpetual Inventory System may be defined as ‘a system of records maintained by the controlling
department, which reflects the physical movements of stocks and their current balance’. Thus it is a
system of ascertaining balance after every receipt and issue of materials through stock records to
facilitate regular checking and to avoid closing down the firm for stock taking. To ensure the accuracy
of the perpetual inventory records (bin card and Stores ledger), physical verification of stores is made
by a programme of continuous stock taking.
The operation of the perpetual inventory system may be as follows :-
(a) The stock records are maintained and up to date posting of transactions are made there in so that
current balance may be known at any time.
(b) Different sections of the stores are taken up by rotation for physical checking. Every day some
items are checked so that every item may be checked for a number of times during the year.
(c) Stores received but awaiting quality inspection are not mixed up with the regular stores at the time
of physical verification, because entries relating to such stores have not yet been made in the
stock records.
(d) The physical stock available in the store, after counting, weighing, measuring or listing as the case
may be, is properly recorded in the bin cards / Inventory tags and stock verification sheets.

Cost Accounting
Perpetual inventory system should not be confused with continuous stock taking; Continuous stock
taking is an essential feature of perpetual inventory system. Perpetual inventory means the system of
stock records and continuous stock taking, where as continuous stock taking means only the physical
verification of the stock records with actual stocks.
In continuous stock taking, physical verification is spread throughout the year. Everyday 10 to 15 items
are taken at random by rotation and checked so that the surprise element in stock verification may
be maintained and each item may be checked for a number of times each year. On the other hand
the surprise element is missing in case of periodical checking, because checking is usually done at the
end of year.
Advantages of perpetual inventory system:
(a) The system obviates the need for the physical checking of all items of stock and stores at the end
of the year.
(b) It avoids the dislocation of the routine activities of the organisation including production and
despatch.
(c) A reliable and detailed check on the stores is maintained.
(d) Errors, irregularities and loss of stock through other methods are quickly detached and through
necessary action recurrence of such things in future is minimised.
(e) As the work is carried out systematically and without undue haste the figures are readily available.
(f) Actual stock can be compared with the authorised maximum and minimum levels, thus keeping
the stocks within the prescribed limits. The disadvantages of excess stocks are avoided and
capitalised up in stores materials cannot exceed the budget.
(g) The recorder level of various items of stores are readily available thus facilitating the work of
procurement of stores.
(h) For monthly or quarterly financial statements like Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet
the stock figures are readily available and it is not necessary to have physical verification of the
balances.
Periodical Stock Verification:
This system envisages physical stock verification at a fixed date/period during the year. Generally under
this system the activity takes place at the end of the accounting period or a date close to such date.
Usually the system is opened in the following manner :-
(a) A period of 5/7 days, depending on the magnitude of the work is chosen during which all the
items under stock are verified physically and such period is known as ‘cut-off’ period. During this
period there are no movements of stock items and neither ‘receipts’ nor are ‘issues permitted.
(b) The items are physically counted/measured depending on their nature and are noted down in
records which are signed by the auditors if they are present in stock verification.
(c) The bin cards balances are also checked and initiated. Generally the physical balances and
bin card balances of various items should be same unless shortage/excesses are there or the
recording/ balancing in the cards are incorrect.
(d) After the physical verification is completed work sheets are countersigned by the godown
supervisors and the stock verified.
(e) Thereafter reconciliation statement is prepared item wise where the physical balances and bin
card balances are different.
(f) Then the balance as per bin cards and as per stores ledger is also compared and necessary
adjustments are made to show the correct position of stock at the year end.
(g) Finally the shortages/excess statement is prepared by the concerned departments and are
placed before the higher management for their approval for adjustments.

ABC Analysis:
The “ABC Analysis” is an analytical method of stock control which aims at concentrating efforts on
those items where attention is needed most. It is based on the concept that a small number of the
items in inventory may typically represent the bulk money value of the total materials used in production
process, while a relatively large number of items may present a small portion of the money value of
stores used resulting in a small number of items be subjected to greater degree of continuous control.
Under this system, the materials stocked may be classified into a number of categories according to
their importance, i.e., their value and frequency of replenishment during a period. The first category
(we may call it group ‘A’ items) may consist of only a small percentage of total items handled but
combined value may be a large portion of the total stock value. The second category, naming it as
group ‘B’ items, may be relatively less important. In the third category, consisting of group ‘C’ items,
all the remaining items of stock may be included which are quite large in number but their value is not
high.
This concept may be clear by the following example:
Category No. of Items % of the Total Value % of the Total Average Value
No. of Items Amount (`) Value Item Amount (`)
A 75 6 70,000 70 933
B 375 30 20,000 20 53
C 800 64 10,000 10 12
1250 100 1,00,000 100 998
Category ‘A’ items represent 70% of the total investment but as little as only 6% of the number of items.
Maximum control must be exercised on these items. Category ‘B’ is of secondary importance and
normal control procedures may be followed. Category ‘C’ comprising of 64% in quantity but only 10%
in value, needs a simpler, less elaborate and economic system of control.
The advantages of ABC analysis are

(a) Closer and stricter control of those items which represent a major portion of total stock value is
maintained.
(b) Investment in inventory can be regulated and funds can be utilized in the best possible manner.
‘A’ class items are ordered as and when need arises, so that the working capital can be utilized in
a best possible way.
(c) With greater control over the inventories, savings in material cost will be realized.
(d) It helps in maintaining enough safety stock for ‘C’ category of items.
(e) Scientific and selective control helps in the maintenance of high stock turnover ratio.
VED Analysis:
VED stands for Vital, Essential and Desirable- analysis is used primarily for control of spare parts. The
spare parts can be classified in to three categories i.e Vital, Essential and Desirable- keeping in view
the criticality to production.
Vital: The spares, stock-out of which even for a short time will stop the production for quite some time,
and where in the stock-out cost is very high are known as Vital spares. For a car Assembly Company,
Engine is a vital part, without the engine the assembly activity will not be started.
Essential: The spares or material absence of which cannot be tolerated for more than few hours or a
day and the cost of lost production is high and which is essential for production to continue are known
as Essential items. For a car assembly company ‘Tyres’ is an essential item, without fixing the tyres the
assembly of car will not be completed.

Cost Accounting
Desirable: The Desirable spares are those parts which are needed, but their absence for even a week
or more also will not lead to stoppage of production. For example, CD player, for a car assembly
company.
Some spares though small in value, may be vital for production, requires constant attention. Such
spares may not pay attention if the organization adopts ABC analysis.
FSN Analysis:
FSN analysis is the process of classifying the materials based on their movement from inventory for a
specified period. All the items are classified in to F-Fast moving, S- Slow moving and N-Non-moving
Items based on consumption and average stay in the inventory. Higher the stay of item in the inventory,
the slower would be the movement of the material. This analysis helps the store keeper / purchase
department to keep the fast moving items always available & take necessary steps to dispose off the
non-moving inventory.
Just-in-Time:
Just in time (JIT) is a production strategy that strives to improve a business return on investment by
reducing in-process inventory and associated carrying costs. Inventory is seen as incurring costs, or
waste, instead of adding and storing value, contrary to traditional accounting. In short, the Just-in-Time
inventory system focuses on “the right material, at the right time, at the right place, and in the exact
amount” without the safety net of inventory.
The advantages of Just-in-Time system are as follows :-
(a) Increased emphasis on supplier relationships. A company without inventory does not want a
supply system problem that creates a part shortage. This makes supplier relationships extremely
important.
(b) Supplies come in at regular intervals throughout the production day. Supply is synchronized with
production demand and the optimal amount of inventory is on hand at any time. When parts
move directly from the truck to the point of assembly, the need for storage facilities is reduced.
(c) Reduces the working capital requirements, as very little inventory is maintained.
(d) Minimizes storage space.
(e) Reduces the chance of inventory obsolescence or damage.
Inventory Turnover Ratio: Inventory Turnover:
Inventory Turnover signifies a ratio of the value of materials consumed during a given period to the
average level of inventory held during that period. The ratio is worked out on the basis of the following
formula:
Value of material consumed during the period

Inventory Turnover Ratio =
Value of average stock held during the period
The purpose of the above ratio is to ascertain the speed of movement of a particular item. A high ratio
indicates that the item is moving fast with a minimum investment involved at any point of time. On the
other hand a low ratio indicates the slow moving item. Thus Inventory Turnover Ratio may indicate slow
moving dormant and obsolet stock highlighting the need for appropriate managerial actions.

Illustration 4
Compute the Inventory turnover ratio from the following:
Opening Stock - ` 10,000
Closing Stock - ` 16,000
Material Consumed - ` 78,000
Solution :
Value of material consumed during the period
Inventory Turnover Ratio =
Value of average stock held during the period
Opening Stock + Closing Stock

Average Stock =
2
10,000 + 16,000
= = 13,000
2
78,000
\ Inventory Turnover Ratio =
13,000
= 6. (times)
Valuation of Material Receipts:
Principles of valuation of receipt of materials as per CAS-6 (limited Revision 2017)are as follows:-
(a) The material receipt should be valued at purchase price including duties and taxes, freight inwards,
insurance and other expenditure directly attributable to procurement (net of trade discounts,
rebates, taxes and duties refundable) that can be quantified with reasonable accuracy at the
time of acquisition.
(b) Finance costs incurred in connection with the acquisition of materials shall not form part of the
material cost.
(c) Self manufactured item shall be valued including the direct material, direct labour, direct
expenses, factory overheads, share of administrative overheads relating to the production but
excluding share of other administrative overheads, finance cost and marketing overheads. In
case of captive consumption, valuation shall be in accordance with Cost Accounting Standard-4.
(d) Spares which are specific to an item of equipment shall not be taken into inventory, but shall be
capitalized with cost of specific equipment. Cost of Capital spares and / or insurance spares,
whether procured with the equipment or subsequently, shall be amortized over a period, not
exceeding the useful life of the equipment.
(e) Normal loss or spoilage of material prior to reaching the factory or at places where the services
are provided shall be absorbed in the cost of balance materials net of amounts recoverable from
suppliers, insurers, carriers or recoveries from disposal.
(f) Losses due to shrinkage or evaporation and gain due to elongation or absorption or moisture ...etc
before the material is received is absorbed in material cost to the extent they are normal, with
corresponding adjustment in quantity.
(g) The foreign exchange component of imported material cost is converted at the rate on the date
of transaction (material / service recording in books of accounts). Any subsequent change in the
exchange rate till payment or otherwise shall not form part of the material cost.
(h) Any demurrage or detention charges, or penalty levied by transport or other authorities shall not
form part of the cost of materials.
(i) Subsidy/grant/incentive and any such payment received / receivable with respect to any material
shall be reduced from cost for ascertainment of the cost of the cost object to which such amounts
are related.

Cost Accounting
Valuation of Material Issues:

Principles of valuation of issue of materials as per CAS-6 (Limited Revision, 2017) are as follows :-
(a) Issues shall be valued using appropriate assumptions on cost flow such as FIFO, LIFO, and Weighted
average rate. The method of valuation shall be followed on a consistent basis.
(b) Where materials are accounted at standard cost, the price variances related to materials shall be
treated as part of material cost.
(c) Any abnormal cost shall be excluded from the material cost.
(d) Wherever the material cost includes the transportation costs, determination of transportation cost
shall be based on CAS-5, i.e Equalized Transportation Costs.
(e) Material cost may include imputed costs not considered in Financial Accounts.
(f) Self manufactured components and sub-assemblies item shall be valued including the direct
material, direct labour, direct expenses, factory overheads, share of administrative overheads
relating to the production but excluding share of other administrative overheads, finance cost
and marketing overheads. In case of captive consumption, the valuation shall be in accordance
with Cost Accounting Standard-4.
(g) The material cost of normal scrap / defectives which are rejects shall be included in the material
cost of goods manufactured. The material cost of actual scrap / defectives, not exceeding the
normal shall be adjusted in the material cost of good production. Material cost of abnormal
scrap/ defectives should not be included in material cost but treated as loss after giving credit to
the realisable value of such scrap / defetives.
Materials issued from stores should be priced at the price at which they are carried in inventory.
Material may be purchased from different suppliers at different prices in different situations, where as
consumption may happen the entire inventory at a time or at different lots....etc. So issue of materials
should be valued after considering the following factors:-
(a) Nature of business and production process.
(b) Management policy relating to the closing stock valuation.
(c) Frequency of purchases and price fluctuations.
Several methods of pricing of material issues have been evolved; these may be classified into the
following:-
Cost Price Method
(a) First in First out
(b) Last-in-first out
(c) Base Stock Method
Specific price method
(a) Average Price Method
(b) Simple Average Price Method
(c) Weighted Average Price Method
(d) Moving Simple Average Method
(e) Moving Weighted Average Method
Market Price Methods
(a) Replacement Method
(b) Realisable Price Method

Notional Price Methods:

(a) Standard Price Method
(b) Inflated Price Method
We may now briefly discuss all the above methods
(1) First in – First Out Method:
It is a method of pricing the issue of materials in the order in which they are purchased. In other
words the materials are issued in the order in which they arrive in the store. This method is considered
suitable in times of falling price because the material cost charged to production will be high while the
replacement cost of materials will be low. In case of rising prices this method is not suitable.
Advantages of FIFO:-
(a) It is simple and easy to operate.
(b) In case of falling prices, this method gives better results.
(c) Closing stocks represents the market prices.
Disadvantages:-
(a) If the prices fluctuate frequently, this method may lead to clerical errors.
(b) In case of rising prices this method is not advisable.
(c) The material costs charged to same job are likely to show different rates.
(2) Last-in-First Out Method:
Under this method the prices of last received batch (lot) are used for pricing the issues, until it is
exhausted and so on. During the inflationary period or period of rising prices, the use of LIFO would
help to ensure the cost of production determined approximately on the above basis is approximately
the current one. Under LIFO stocks would be valued at old prices, but not represent the current prices.
Advantages:-
(a) The cost of materials issued will be either nearer to and/or will reflect the current market price.
(b) In case of falling prices profit tends to rise due to lower material cost
Disadvantages:
(a) The computations become complicated if too many receipts are there.
(b) Companies having JIT system will face this problem more.
(3) Base Stock Method:
A minimum quantity of stock under this method is always held at a fixed price as reserve in the stock, to
meet a state of emergency, if arises. This minimum stock is known as Base Stock and is valued at a price
at which the first lot of materials is received and remains unaffected by subsequent price fluctuations.
The quantity in excess of the base stock may be valued either on the LIFO basis or FIFO basis. This
method is not an independent method as it uses FIFO or LIFO. Its advantages and disadvantages
therefore will depend upon the use of the other method.
(4) Specific Price Method:
This method is useful, especially when the materials are purchased for a specific job or work order, and
as such these materials are issued subsequently to that specific job or work order at the price at which
they were purchased. The cost of materials issued for production purposes to specific jobs represent
actual and correct costs. This method is specific for non-standard products. This method is difficult to
operate, especially when purchases and issues are numerous.

Cost Accounting
(5) Simple Average Price Method:

Under this method materials issued are valued at average price, which is computed by dividing the
total of all units rate by the number of units.
Material Issue Price = Total of unit prices of each purchase / Total No of Units
This method is useful, when the materials are received in uniform lots of similar quantity and prices do
not fluctuate considerably.
(6) Weighted Average Price Method:
This method removes the limitation of Simple Average Method in that it also takes into account the
quantities which are used as weights in order to find the issue price. This method uses total cost of
material available for issue divided by the quantity available for issue.
Issue Price = Total Cost of Materials in stock / Total Quantity of Materials in stock
(7) Moving Simple Average Price Method:
Under this method the rate for material issue is determined by dividing the total of the periodic simple
average prices of a given number of periods by the number of periods. For determining the moving
simple average price, it is necessary to fix up first period to be taken for determining the average.
Suppose a three monthly period is decided upon and moving average rate for the month of April is to
be computed. Under such situation, we have to make a simple list of the simple average price from
January to March, add them up, and divide the total by three. To compute the moving average for
May, we have to omit simple average rate pertains to January and add the rate relating to the April
and divide the total by three.
(8) Moving Weighted Average Price Method:
Under this method, the issue, rate is computed by dividing the total of the periodic weighted average
price of a given number of periods by the number of periods.
(9) Replacement Method:
Replacement price is defined as the price at which it is possible to purchase an item, identical to that
which is being replaced or revalued. Under this method, materials issued are valued at replacement
cost of the items. Advantage of this method is issue cost reflects the current market price. But the
difficult involved under this method is determination of market price of material before each issue.
(10) Realisable Price method:
Realisable price means a price at which the material to be issued can be sold in the market. This price
may be more or less than the cost price, at which it was originally purchased.
(11) Standard Price Method:
Under this method, materials are priced at some predetermined rate of standard price irrespective of
the actual purchase cost of the materials. Standard cost is usually fixed after taking into consideration
the current price, anticipated market trends. This method facilitates the control of material cost and
task of judging the efficiency of purchase department. But it is very difficult to fix the standard price
when the prices fluctuates frequently.
(12) Inflated Price Method:
In case of materials that suffers loss in weight due to natural or climatic factors ex: evaporation...etc the
issue price of the materials is inflated to cover up the losses.

Illustration 5
Prepare a statement showing the pricing of issues, on the basis of
(a) Simple Average and
(b) Weighted Average methods from the following information pertaining to Material-D
2016 March 1 Purchased 100 units @ `10 each
2 Purchased 200 units @ ` 10.2 each.
5 Issued 250 units to Job X vide M.R.No.12
7 Purchased 200 units @ `10.50 each
10 Purchased 300 units @ `10.80 each
13 Issued 200 units to Job Y vide M.R.No.15
18 Issued 200 units to Job Z vide M.R.No.17
20 Purchased 100 units @ `11 each
25 Issued 150 units to Job K vide M.R.No.25
Solution:
(a) Simple Average Method:
Stores Ledger Account
Receipts Issue Balance
Qty. Price Value Qty. Price Value Qty. Value
Date
Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`)
2016
March 1 100 10 1000 -- -- -- 100 1000
March 2 200 10.2 2040 -- -- -- 300 3040
March 5 -- -- -- 250 10.10 (1) 2525 50 515
March 7 200 10.5 2100 -- -- -- 250 2615
March 10 300 10.8 3240 -- -- -- 550 5855
March 13 -- -- -- 200 10.50 (2) 2100 350 3755
March 18 -- -- -- 200 10.65 (3) 2130 150 1625
March 20 100 11 1100 -- -- -- 250 2725
March 25 -- -- -- 150 10.90 (4)
1635 100 1090
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of Price for Issue on March 5th

= (10 + 10.2) / 2 = `10.10
= (10.2 + 10.5 + 10.8) / 3 = `10.5
= (10.5 + 10.8) / 2 = `10.65
= (10.8 + 11) / 2 = `10.90

Cost Accounting
(b) Weighted Average Method:

Date
2016
March 1 100 10 1000 -- -- -- 100 1000
March 2 200 10.2 2040 -- -- -- 300 3040
March 5 -- -- -- 250 10.13 (1) 2533 50 507
March 7 200 10.5 2100 -- -- -- 250 2607
March 10 300 10.8 3240 -- -- -- 550 5847
March 13 -- -- -- 200 10.63 (2) 2126 350 3721
March 18 -- -- -- 200 10.63 (3) 2126 150 1595
March 20 100 11 1100 -- -- -- 250 2695
March 25 -- -- -- 150 10.78 (4) 1617 100 1078
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of price for Issue on March 5th
= 3040/300 = `10.13
= 5847/550 = `10.63
= 3721/350 = `10.63
= 2695/250 = `10.78
Illustration 6
The stock of material held on 1-4-2015 was 400 units @ 50 per unit. The following receipts and issues were
recorded. You are required to prepare the Stores Ledger Account, showing how the values of issues
would be calculated under Base Stock Method, both through FIFO AND LIFO base being 100 units.
2-4-2015 Purchased 100 units @`55 per unit
6-4-2015 Issued 400 units
10-4-2015 Purchased 600 units @ `55 per unit
20-4-2015 Purchased 500 units @ `65 per unit.
15-6-2015 Purchased 300 units @ ` 80 per unit

Solution:
Stores Ledger Account [under Base Stock through FIFO Method]

Qty. Price Value Qty. Price Value Qty. Price Value
Date Amount Amount Amount Amount (`) Amount Amount
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
1-4-2015 -- -- -- -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
300 50 15,000
2-4-2015 100 55 5,500 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
300 50 15,000
100 55 5,500
6-4-2015 -- -- -- 300 50 15,000
100 55 5,500 100 50 5,000
10-4-2015 600 55 33,000 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
600 55 33,000
13-4-2015 -- -- -- 400 55 22,000 100 50 5,000
200 55 11,000
20-4-2015 500 65 32,500 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
200 55 11,000
500 65 32,500
25-4-2015 -- -- -- 200 55 11,000 100 50 5,000
400 65 26,000 100 65 6,500
10-5-2015 800 70 56,000 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
100 65 6,500
800 70 56,000
12-5-2015 -- -- -- 100 65 6,500 100 50 5,000
400 70 28,000 400 70 28,000
13-5-2015 -- -- -- 200 70 14,000 100 50 5,000
200 70 14,000
15-5-2015 500 75 37,500 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
200 70 14,000
500 75 37,500
12-6-2015 -- -- -- 200 70 14,000 100 50 5,000
200 75 15,000 300 75 22,500
15-6-2015 300 80 24,000 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
300 75 22,500
300 80 24,000

Cost Accounting
Stores Ledger Account [under Base Stock through LIFO Method]

Date Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
1-4-2015 -- -- -- -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
300 50 15,000
2-4-2015 100 55 5,500 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
300 50 15,000
100 55 5,500
6-4-2015 -- -- -- 100 55 5,500
300 50 15,000 100 50 5,000
10-4-2015 600 55 33,000 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
600 55 33,000
13-4-2015 -- -- -- 400 55 22,000 100 50 5,000
200 55 11,000
20-4-2015 500 65 32,500 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
200 55 11,000
500 65 32,500
25-4-2015 -- -- -- 500 65 32,500 100 50 5,000
100 55 5,500 100 55 5,500
10-5-2015 800 70 56,000 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
100 55 5,500
800 70 56,000
12-5-2015 -- -- -- 500 70 35,000 100 50 5,000
100 55 5,500
300 70 21,000
13-5-2015 -- -- -- 200 70 14,000 100 50 5,000
100 55 5,500
100 70 7,000
15-5-2015 500 75 37,500 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
100 55 5,500
100 70 7,000
500 75 37,500
12-6-2015 -- -- -- 400 75 30,000 100 50 5,000
100 55 5,500
100 70 7,000
100 75 7,500
15-6-2015 300 80 24,000 -- -- -- 100 50 5,000
100 55 5,500
100 70 7,000
100 75 7,500
300 80 24,000

Other Important concepts under Materials

1. Valuation of Work-in-Progress:
Unlike closing stock of finished goods, which is valued at cost or market price, whichever is lower, work-
in-progress is always valued on the basis of cost. The problem arises whether overheads should be
included in the costs of work-in-progress.
There are three ways of valuing work-in-progress.
(a) At Prime Cost :
This is a conservative method of valuation. Overheads are not added to prime cost for valuing work-
in-progress. As a result of the exclusion of overheads, the cost of the subsequent period is understated
and the cost of production for the current period is inflated to that extent.
(b) Prime Cost plus Variable Overheads:
Under Marginal Costing method, work-in-progress is valued at prime cost plus variable overheads.
Fixed overheads are excluded on the basis that these are period costs and should be recovered from
revenue, i.e., sales, only.
(c) At Total Cost :
The valuation is done at full costs inclusive of both variable and fixed overheads. The logic behind
this method is that work-in-progress should carry the proportionate cost of the overheads and cost of
production of completed items should not be burdened. This method is most commonly used.
2. Abnormal and Normal Wastage of Materials
Wastage may be classified as normal or abnormal according to the circumstances.
Normal wastage denotes that part of the wastage which is generally bound to arise in a manufacturing
processing on account of evaporation, shrinkage of basic raw materials or on account of typical
manufacturing process being involved. Usually such wastage remains within certain normal ratio or
percentage of the input.
On the other hand, abnormal wastage is that loss which does not arise in the ordinary course of
manufacturing process but is the result of certain adverse circumstances such as power failure, major
breakdown of machinery non-availability of the basic raw materials, etc. It is generally not possible to
estimate the extent of such wastage before as they are much more than the normal ratio/percentage
of loss compared to the input of basic materials.
Since the normal wastage of the materials is an unavoidable and uncontrollable issue, it should be
recovered through good production. The cost of such normal wastages will be recovered as production
overhead and apportioned on the number of units produced. Necessary allowance should however
be made for any amount which the wastage should realize when it is disposed of. On the contrary, the
cost of abnormal wastage should be separately collected and charged off to the Costing Profit and
Loss Account so as not to vitiate the Production Cost of good units produced.
3. Material Requisition Note:
Material Requisition is a document issued by a department in charge requesting the Storekeeper to
issue certain materials to a job or standing order number. It is an important document as it authorises
issue of materials from stores and thereby should be authenticated by appropriate authority. It forms
the basis of crediting the Marginal Account in the stores ledger as the materials are taken out on the
strength of such documents. The corresponding debit to work-in-progress account or Job Account
for standing order number is also made on the basis of such documents. This document enables the
Accounts Department to value the issue of the materials to find out the cost of materials issued. The
storekeeper uses this department to check total item wise issues made by him during a certain period
by adding up the details of issue from this document.

Cost Accounting
4. Material Transfer Note:

Material Transfer Note is a document used for transferring the material from one department to other
department or one site to other site or one job to other job. The need for Material Transfer Note arises
under the following conditions:
(a) Great urgency for such materials as normal procedure for requisitioning the materials may result in
delay in completion of the job.
(b) Where two jobs are being executed side by side or very near to each other and stores department
is situated at a great distance, adoption of normal procedure for requisitioning the materials may
mean unnecessary expenditure in handling and transportation, especially in cases of heavy
materials (e.g. iron rails).
(c) Frequent shifting of materials (for returning to stores and for re-issue) may result in wastage or
breakage.
(d) If the goods are of perishable nature (e.g. Vegetable or Fruits) and refrigeration may not keep
them fresh for a long time.
Procedure to be followed to transfer the material is as follows:
(a) Transferring supervisor will prepare a Material Transfer Note giving all the details of the materials
transferred and will send this note to the supervisor of the job to which materials being transferred.
(b) Transferee supervisor will sign the note in token of receipt of the materials and send it back to the
transferring supervisor.
(c) This note will then be send to Cost Office where necessary entries will be passed and respective
job accounts debited and credited.
5. Bill of Material:
Bill of Material is a complete schedule of parts and materials required for a particular order prepared
by the Drawing Office and issued by it together with necessary blue prints of drawings. For standard
products, printed copies of Bill of Material are kept with blank spaces for any special details of
modification to be filled in for a particular job/order. The schedule details everything, even to bolts and
nuts, sizes and weights. The document solves a number of useful purposes, such as:
(a) It provides a quantitative estimate of budget of material required for a given job, process or
operation which might be used for control purposes.
(b) It substitutes material requisitions and expedite issue of materials.
(c) The store-keeper can draw up a programme of material purchases and issue for a given period.
(d) It provides the basis for charging material cost to the respective job/process.
6. Waste:
Definition : This is the residue such a smoke, dust, gases, slag, etc., which arises in course of manufacturing
process and practically no measurable sale or utility value. In certain types of processes and operations,
some material physically disappears on account of shrinkage, evaporation etc., with the result that the
quantity of the output is less than the input. Such wastage is termed invisible waste where the residual
instead of fetching any value, creates a problem for its dispose which entails further costs. Special
arrangements have to be made for disposal and refuse, effluent, obnoxious gases, etc.
Accounting: As waste has practically no value, its accounting is relatively simple. The effect of the
waste is to reduce the quantity of output; In order to arrive at the unit cost of the process, operation,
or job, the total cost of the process, etc., is distributed over the reduced output, i.e., the units of good
production only. The cost of abnormal waste, should, however, be excluded from the total cost and
charged to the Profit and Loss Account.
The actual waste is observed against standards and periodically reported to the management.

7. Scrap:
This is also in the form of incidental material residue coming out of certain types of manufacturing
processes but it is usually in small amounts and has low measurable utility or market value, recoverable
without further processing. Numerous examples of scrap may be given; scrap may arise in the form of
turnings, borings, trimmings, fillings, shavings etc., from metals on which machine operations are carried
out; saw dust and trimmings in the timber industry; dead heads and bottom ends in foundries; and
cuttings, pieces, and split in leather industries. Scrap should always be physically available unlike waste
which may or may not be present in the form of a residue.
Accounting treatment of scrap is as follows:
(a) Sales Credited to Revenue:
In this method, the scrap is not cost and its value does not, therefore, appear separately in the Cost
Accounts. Only a quantitative record of the scrap returned to storeroom from the shops is maintained
and the sale value realised from time to time is credited to the Profit and Loss Account as miscellaneous
revenue.
(b) Credit to Overhead:
In this method and in the following method the scrap is assigned a cost. The cost is usually the sale
value of the scrap less selling and distribution costs. If the scrap has no ready market but has only utility
or use value, and is taken as a credit to manufacturing overhead. The effect of this credit is to reduce
the overhead recovery rate. When predetermined overhead rates are in use, it is more expedient to
credit an estimated allowance for the scrap instead of the amount of actual scrap.
(c) Credit to Jobs:
The scrap is assigned a cost and is traced to the job which yielded the scrap. This affords a reasonable
amount of credit to the jobs and widely different.
(d) Transfer to Other Jobs:
Scrap arising in one job may be issued for utilization in another job. Such transfers of scrap from one job
to another should be affected through Material Transfer Notes. Alternatively, scrap may be returned to
store room and subsequently issued to another job for utilization. The latter method is more appropriate
when some further processing is required on the scrap before it can be utilized for other jobs.
Control of Scrap:
Scrap is also an unavoidable residue material arising in the process of manufacture. The basic difference
between scrap and waste is that while waste may not have any value, scrap must necessarily have
a value, though a comparatively small one. Scrap may be sold or re-used in some process. In some
industries, arising of scraps of various types in significant quantities is a regular feature and in such
cases, it would be worth while having a proper administrative set-up for control of scrap. A Scrap
Survey Committee may be constituted which would be responsible for such matters as (1) classifying
the various types of scrap; (2) Assessing the quantum of each; and (3) Deciding upon the manner of
their use or disposal.
Control of scrap should start from the designing stage of the products. At the designing stage, the
type, shape and form of materials which all result in the minimum of waste or the least quantity of scrap
in manufacturing process are decided. The quantity of scrap resulting from a process also depends
upon the manufacturing equipment used and the efficiency of the operative who performs the work.
In order to minimise scrap, production should be planned so that the best possible equipment is used
and properly trained personnel are employed on the job.
8. Spoilage :
Definition:
When production does not come up to the standard specifications or quality it has to be rejected
outright. The components or materials are so damaged in the manufacturing process that they cannot

Cost Accounting
be brought back to the normal specifications by repairs or reconditioning. Some spoiled work may be
sold as seconds but in most cases, the entire production is sold for small value in the form of scrap or
treated as waste if it has no market value. Spoilage involves not only loss of materials but also of labour
and manufacturing overhead incurred up to the stage when the spoilage incurred.
Accounting and Control of Spoilage:
Spoilage arises when the production output is damaged in such a manner and to such an extent that
it cannot be used for the original purpose for which it was designed but is to be disposed off in some
suitable manner without further processing. The distinction between scrap and spoiled work is that
while normal scrap arises mostly as a result of the processing of materials, spoilage occurs due to some
defect in operations or materials which may or may not be inherent in the manufacturing process or
operation. Further, scrap has always a relatively low but some definite value, but the value of spoilage
may range from low, if it is a waste, to comparatively high values if the spoilage is to be sold as seconds.
Spoilage involves not only the loss of material but also labour and manufacturing overheads.
9. Treatment of Packing Cost:
Packing materials is of two types - primary and secondary. Primary containers are essential to put the
goods in a saleable condition like ink in a bottle, jam in a jar, etc. Secondary containers are required
for delivery/transportation like crates, etc., they are returnable and reusable.
The cost of primary containers should be charged off as a production overhead and included in
production cost. On the other hand, the cost of secondary containers should charge as a selling and
distribution overhead. The cost of reusable container should be charged when they could not be used
any more due to damage, wear and tear, etc.
In some cases, the primary packing materials may be made decorative with a view to promote sales,
and in such a case a part of the primary packing materials should be apportioned as a selling cost.
10. Carriage and Cartage Expenses:
Carriage and Cartage Expenses are incurred in the course of movement of materials or goods. Materials
may mean direct materials or indirect materials. The treatment of the Carriage and Cartage Expenses
differ with the kind of materials/goods transported. The carriage and cartage expenses relating to raw
materials are treated as a part of direct materials cost and those relating to distribution of materials
or finished goods are treated as distribution overhead. In case where the carriage and cartage are
abnormal due to any reason the same is charged off to be costing Profit and Loss Account.
11. Treatment of Tools Cost:
Tools may be classified as (i) large tools and (ii) small tools, large tools are normally capitalised and
depreciation charged to Factory Overheads. For small tools the following treatment may apply:
(a) Capitalization Method: In line with large tools.
(b) Revaluation Method: At the end of the year revaluation for unused life of the tools is made and
the difference between original cost and revalued cost is charged as factory overheads.
(c) Write-off-Method: Whenever such small tools are issued the department is debited with the
cost. Alternatively cost of tools issued during a period is accumulated and distributed to various
departments on some suitable basis, e.g., hours worked.
12. Treatment of Discount Allowed by Suppliers for Bulk Purchases:
Discounts Allowed on purchases are of two types, viz., Cash Discount and Quantity and Trade Discount.
Cash Discount is usually allowed for prompt payment and the Quantity and Trade Discount for heavy
purchases. The amount of the latter discount is already credited in the invoice and the net landed cost
of the material exclusive of the discount is considered as the material cost.

13. Treatment of Variance Detected at Stock Taking:

If the variances are due to normal causes, i.e., due to normal dry age, shrinkage, evaporation, etc.,
these are valued at the ruling ledger rates of the items of material concerned and the amount is taken
as an item of stores overhead and recovered from production as a percentage of direct material cost
consumed. If the variances are due to abnormal causes, viz., theft, fraud, misappropriation etc., these
are valued by writing off to Costing Profit and Loss Account.
Illustration 7
Prepare a Stores Ledger Account from the following information adopting FIFO method of pricing of
issues of materials.
2016 March 1. Opening Balance 500 tonnes @ `200
3. Issue 70 tonnes
4. Issue 100 tonnes
5. Issue 80 tonnes
13. Received from suppliers 200 tonnes @ `190
14. Returned from Department A 15 tonnes.
16. Issued 180 tonnes
20. Received from supplier 240 tonnes @ `195
24. Issue 300 tonnes
26. Issue 115 tonnes
27. Returned from Department B 35 tonnes
Solution:
Stores Ledger Account [FIFO Method]

Date Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount (`)
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
2016
March 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 500 200 1,00,000
March 3 -- -- -- 70 200 14,000 430 200 86,000
March 4 -- -- -- 100 200 20,000 330 200 66,000
March 5 -- -- -- 80 200 16,000 250 200 50,000
March 13 200 190 38,000 -- -- -- 250 200 50,000
200 190 38,000
March 14 15 200 3,000 -- -- -- 250 200 50,000
200 190 38,000
15 200 3,000
March 16 -- -- -- 180 200 36,000 70 200 14,000
200 190 38,000
15 200 3,000

Cost Accounting
March 20 240 195 46,800 -- -- -- 70 200 14,000

200 190 38,000
15 200 3,000
240 195 46,800
March 24 -- -- -- 70 200 14,000 -- -- --
200 190 38,000 -- -- --
15 200 3,000 -- -- --
15 195 2,925 225 195 43,875
March 25 320 200 64,000 -- -- -- 225 195 43,875
320 200 64,000
March 26 -- -- -- 115 195 22,425 110 195 21,450
320 200 64,000
March 27 35 195 6,825 -- -- -- 110 195 21,450
320 200 64,000
35 195 6,825
March 28 100 200 20,000 -- -- -- 110 195 21,450
320 200 64,000
35 195 6,825
100 200 20,000
Illustration 8
From this information provided as under, you are required to prepare a statement showing how the
issues would be priced if LIFO method is followed.
2016 Feb: 1. Opening Balance 100 units at `10 each.
2. Received 200 units at `10.50 each.
4. Issued 400 units to Job A vide M.R.No.015.
6. Issued 120 to Job B vide M.R.No.020.
7. Received 400 units at `11 each.
8. Issued 200 units to Job B vide M.R.No.031
17. Issued 400 units to Job D vide M.R.No.040.

Solution:
Stores Ledger Account [LIFO Method]

Date Amount Amount Amount Amount (`) Amount Amount
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
2016
Feb 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 100 10.00 1,000
Feb 2 200 10.50 2,100 -- -- -- 100 10.00 1,000
200 10.50 2,100
Feb 3 300 10.60 3,180 -- -- -- 100 10.00 1,000
200 10.50 2,100
300 10.60 3,180
Feb 4 -- -- -- 300 10.6 3,180 100 10.00 1,000
100 10.50 1,050 100 10.5 1,050
Feb 6 -- -- -- 100 10.50 1050 -- -- --
20 10.00 200 80 10.00 800
Feb 7 400 11.00 4,400 -- -- -- 80 10.00 800
400 11.00 4,400
Feb 8 -- -- -- 200 11.00 2200 80 10.00 800
200 11.00 2,200
Feb 12 300 11.40 3,420 -- -- -- 80 10.00 800
200 11.00 2,200
300 11.40 3,420
Feb 13 200 11.50 2,300 -- -- -- 80 10.00 800
200 11.00 2,200
300 11.40 3,420
200 11.50 2,300
Feb 17 -- -- -- 200 11.50 2300 80 10.00 800
200 11.40 2280 200 11.00 2,200
100 11.40 1,140
Illustration 9
Prepare Stores Ledger Account showing pricing of material issues on Replacement Price basis from the
following particulars.
Opening balance 400 units at `4 each
10-3-2016 Received 100 units at `4.10 each
15-3-2016 Issued 300 units to Job XY vide M.R.No.14 17-3-2016 Received 200 units at `4.30 each
20-3-2016 Issued 250 units to Job AB vide M.R.No.20
25-3-2016 Received 400 units @ `4.50 each

Cost Accounting
26-3-2016 Issued 200 units to Job JK vide M.R.No.27 27-3-2016 Received 100 units @`4.60 each.
30-3-2016 Issued 300 units to Job PQ vide M.R.No.32.
Replacement Price on various dates : 15-3-2016 `4.20
20-3-2016 `4.40
26-3-2016 `4.60 &
30-3-2016 `4.80.
Solution:
Stores Ledger Account [Replacement Price Basis]
Date Receipts Issue Balance

Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount
(`) (`) (`) (`) (`) (`)
2016
Mar 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 4.00 1,600
10-3-2016 100 4.10 410 -- -- -- 500 4.02 2,010
15-3-2016 -- -- -- 300 4.20 1260 200 3.75 750
17-3-2016 200 4.30 860 -- -- -- 400 4.03 1,610
20-3-2016 -- -- -- 250 4.40 1,100 150 3.40 510
25-3-2016 400 4.50 1,800 -- -- -- 550 4.20 2,310
26-3-2016 -- -- -- 200 4.60 920 350 3.97 1,390
27-3-2016 100 4.60 460 -- -- -- 450 4.11 1,850
30-3-2016 -- -- -- 300 4.80 1,440 150 2.7310 410
Illustration 10
Stocks are issued at a standard price and the following transactions occurred for a specific material:
1st January Opening Stock 10 tonnes at `240 per ton

4th January Purchased 5 tonnes at `260 per ton
5th January Issued 3 tons
12th January Issued 4 tons
13thJanuary Purchased 3 tons at `250 per ton
19thJanuary Issued 4 tons
26thJanuary Issued 3 tons
30thJanuary Purchased 4 tons at `280 per ton
31stJanuary Issued 3 tons.
The debit balance of price variation on 1st January was `20. Show the stock account for the material
for the month of January, indicating how you would deal with the difference in material price variance,
when preparing the Profit and Loss Account for the month.

Solution:
(240 × 10) + 20
Standard Price =
10
= ` 242

Date Qty. Price Value Qty. Price Value Qty. Value
1st January -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 2,400
4th January 5 260 1,300 -- -- -- 15 3,700
5th January -- -- -- 3 242 726 12 2,974
12th January -- -- -- 4 242 968 8 2,006
13th January 3 250 750 -- -- -- 11 2,756
19th January -- -- -- 4 242 968 7 1,788
26th January -- -- -- 3 242 726 4 1,062
30th January 4 280 1,120 -- -- -- 8 2,182
31st January -- -- -- 3 242 726 5 1,456
Material price variance is ` 246 which is to be transferred to debit of costing P & L A/c.
Working :
Stock at standard price = 5 x 242 = 1,210

Material Price Variance = 1,210 – 1,456 = 246 (A)
Illustration 11
Receipts and issues of an item of stores are made as follows: There was no balance before 9th
January.
Receipts Issues
Quantity Price (`) Quantity
January 9th 10 17.0
19th 25 10.0
20th 10
29th 20
30th 15 8.0
February 13th 20 12.0
27th 10 16.9
28th 40
March 30th 20 20.0
31st 20
(i) What is the simple average of February receipts ?

Cost Accounting
(ii) What are the moving monthly simple average price for January -February and February-March?
(iii) If a weighted average is used for pricing issues how does the value of the balance in stock change
during January?
(iv) If a weighted average price is calculated at the end of each month and is then used for pricing
the issued of that month, what will be the value of the month-end balance?
Solution:
(i) Simple Average Price of February Receipts.

Simple Average Price of February Receipts = (12 + 16.9) / 2 = ` 14.45
(ii) Simple Average Price of January Receipts
Simple Average Price of January Receipts = (17 + 10 + 8) / 3 = ` 11.67
Moving monthly average for Jan-Feb = (11.67 + 14.45) / 2 = ` 13.06
Moving monthly average for Feb-March = (14.45 + 20) / 2 = ` 17.225
(iii) Stores Ledger Account (under weighted average method for January)

Date Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`)
Jan 9th 10 17 170 -- -- -- 10 170
Jan 19th 25 10 250 -- -- -- 35 420
Jan 20th -- -- -- 10 12 120 25 300
Jan 29th -- -- -- 20 12 240 5 60
Jan 30th 15 8 120 -- -- -- 20 180
(iv) Calculation of the Value of month-end balance
Date Quantity Value

Jan 9th 10 170
Jan 19th 25 250
Jan 30th 15 120
50 540
(-) Issues 30 (10.8) 324
Jan-Balance 20 216
Feb 13th 20 240
Feb 27th 10 169
Feb Balance 50 625
(-) Issues 40 (12.5) 500
10 125
March 30th 20 400
30 525
(-) Issues 20 (17.5) 350
Balance 10 175

Illustration 12
Two components A and B are used as follows:
Normal usage = 50 per week each
Re-order quantity = A- 300; B-500
Maximum usage = 75 per week each
Minimum usage = 25 per week each
Re-order period: A - 4 to 6 weeks; B - 2 to 4 weeks
Calculate for each component
(a) Re-order level; (b) Minimum level; (c) Maximum level; (d) Average stock level.
Solution:
Particulars A B
a) Reorder Level 450 units 300 units
[Max. Consumption × Max. Re-order Period] (75 x 6) (75 x 4)
b) Minimum Level
[ROL – (Normal Consumption x Normal Re-order 200 units 150 units
period)] [450 – (50x5)] [300 – (50x3)]
c) Maximum Level
[ROL + ROQ – (Min. Consumption x Min Re-order 650 units 750 units
period)] [450 + 300 – (25x4)] [300 + 500 – (25 x 2)]
d) Average Stock Level 425 units 450 units
[Min. Level + Max. Level] / 2 [200 + 650] / 2 (or) [150 + 750] / 2 (or)
or or or
[Min. Level + ½ × ROQ] 350 units 400 units
200 + ½ (300) 150 + ½ (500)
Illustration 13
Anil company buys its annual requirement of 36,000 units in six installments. Each unit costs `1 and the
ordering cost is `25. The inventory carrying cost is estimated at 20% of unit value. Find the total annual
cost of the existing inventory policy. How much money can be saved by using E.O.Q?
Solution:
2.A.O
EOQ =
C
2 × 36,000 × 25
=
1 × 20%
18,00,000
=
0.2
= 3,000 units

Cost Accounting
Statement Showing computation of comparative inventory cost of existing policy and proposed EOQ
policy:
Particulars Existing Policy EOQ

(i) Purchase Cost (36000 x 1) 36000 (36000 x 1) 36000
(ii) Ordering Cost [36000/6000 x 25] 150 [36000/3000 x 25] 300
(iii) Carrying Cost [1/2 x 6000 x 1 x 20%] 600 [1/2 x 3000 x 1 x 20%] 300
36,750 36,600
Saving by using EOQ = 36,750 – 36,600 = ` 150
Illustration 14
The annual demand for an item is 3,200 units. The units cost is `6 and inventory carrying charges is 25%
p.a. If the cost of one procurement is `150, determine:
(a) E.O.Q (b) No. of orders per year (c) Time between two consecutive orders.
Solution:
2.A.O
(a) EOQ =
C
2 × 3,200 × 150
=
6 × 25%
9,60,000
=
1.5
= 800 units
(b) No. of orders per year = A / EOQ = 3200 / 800 = 4 orders (A = Annual demand)
(c) Time between two consecutive orders = No. of months in years / No. of orders
= 12/4 = 3 Months
Illustration 15
A company manufactures a special product which requires a component ‘Alpha’. The following
particulars are collected for the year 2015.
1. Annual demand of Alpha 8,000 units

2. Cost of placing an order ` 200 per order
3. Cost per unit of Alpha ` 400
4. Carrying cost % p.a. 20%
The company has been offered a quantity discount of 4% on the purchase of ‘Alpha’ provided the
order size is 4,000 components at a time.
Required:
(a) Compute the economic order quantity.
(b) Advise whether the quantity discount offer can be accepted.

Solution:
(a) Calculation of Economic Order Quantity
2AO
EOQ =
C
2 × 8,000 × 200
EOQ =
400 × 20%
= 200 units
(b) Evaluation of Profitability of Different Options of Order Quantity

(i) When EOQ is ordered
Purchase Cost (8,000 units x ` 400) 32,00,000

Ordering Cost [(8,000 units / 200 units) x ` 200] 8,000
Carrying Cost (200 units x ` 400 x ½ x 20/100 8,000
Total Cost 32,16,000
(ii) When quantity discount is accepted
Purchase Cost (8,000 units x ` 384) 30,72,000

Ordering Cost [(8,000 units / 4000 units) x ` 200] 400
Carrying Cost (4000 units x ` 384 x ½ x 20/100 1,53,600
Advise:
The total cost of inventory is lower if EOQ is adopted. Hence, the company is advised not to accept
the quantity discount.
Illustration 16
From the following particulars with respect to a particular item of materials of a manufacturing
company, calculate the best quantity to order:
Ordering quantities Price per ton

(tonne) Amount (`)
Less than 250 6.00
250 but less than 800 5.90
800 but less than 2,000 5.80
2,000 but less than 4,000 5.70
4,000 and above 5.60
The annual demand for the material is 4,000 tonnes. Stock holding costs are 20% of material cost p.a.
The delivery cost per order is `6.00

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Statement showing computation of total inventory cost at different order sizes (Annual Demand = 4000
tonnes)
Ordering Quantities
Particulars 200 250 800 2000 4000
(i) Purchasing cost 24000 23600 23200 22800 22400
(4000×6) (4000×5.9) (4000×5.8) (4000×5.7) (4000×5.6)
(ii) No. of orders 20 16 5 2 1
(iii) Ordering Cost (` 6) 120 96 30 12 6
(iv) Average size of order 100 125 400 1000 2000
(v) Inventory Carrying cost per unit 1.2 1.18 1.16 1.14 1.12
(6x20%) (5.9x20%) (5.8x20%) (5.7x20%) (5.6x20%)
(vi) Inventory carrying cost (iv x v) 120 147.5 464 1140 2240
(vii) Total Inventory Cost (iii + i + vi) 24240 23843.5 23694 23952 24646
For the above computations the best quantity to order is 800 units.
Illustration 17
The particulars relating to 1,200 kgs. of a certain raw material purchased by a company during June,
were as follows:-
Lot prices quoted by supplier and accepted by the Company for placing the purchase order :
Lot upto 1,000 kgs. @ `22 per kg.
Between 1,000 - 1,500 kgs, @ `20 per kg.
Between 1500 -2000 kgs. @ `18 per kg.
Trade discount – 20%.
Additional charge for containers @ `10 per drum of 25 kgs.
Credit allowed on return of containers, @ `8 per drum.
Sales tax at 10% on raw material and 5% on drums.
Total fright paid by the purchaser `240/-
Insurance at 2.5% (on net invoice value) paid by the purchaser.
Stores overhead applied at 5% on total purchase cost of material.
The entire quantity was received and issued to production.
The containers are returned in due course. Draw up a suitable statement to show :-
(a) Total cost of material purchased and
(b) Unit cost of material issued to production.

Solution:
Statement showing computation of total cost of material purchased and unit cost of material issued for
production. Amount (`)
Particulars Unit Cost Total Cost (1,200 kgs)

Basic price of material 20.00 24,000.00
(-) Trade discount (20%) 4.00 4,800.00
16.00 19,200.00
(+) Drum charges (1,200/25 x 10) 0.40 480.00
(+) Sales tax 19,200 x 10% = 1920
480 x 5% = 24 1.62 1,944.00
= 1944
Net Invoice Value 18.02 21,624.00
(+) Insurance (21,624 x 2.5%) 0.4505 540.60
(+) Freight paid 0.2000 240.00
18.6705 22,404.60
(-) Credit for drums returned (1,200 / 25 x 8) 0.3200 384.00
Total Cost of Material Purchased 18.3505 22,020.60
(+) Stores overhead (22,020.6 x 5%) 0.9200 1,101.03
Material cost issued to production 19.2705 23,121.63
Illustration 18
From the following data for the year ended 31st Dec, 2016, calculate the inventory turnover ratio of the
two items, and put forward your comments on them.
Material A Material B
Amount (`) Amount (`)
Opening stock on 1-1-2016 10,000 9,000
Purchase during the year 2016 52,000 27,000
Closing on 31-12-2016 6,000 11,000
Solution:
Cost of Material used
Material Inventory Turnover Ratio = Av erage Stock
10,000 + 52,000 − 6,000
For A =
(10,000 + 6,000)/ 2
= 7 times
9,000 + 27,000 − 11,000

For B =
(9,000 + 11,000)/ 2
= 25,000 / 10,000
= 2.5 times

Cost Accounting
Material Inventory turnover ratio indicates the efficiency of the management with which they are able
to utilize their inventory. It indicates the existence or non-existence of non moving items, dormant items,
slow moving items etc. in inventory. If the ratio is high, the efficiency is said to be high and on the other
hand if the ratio is low, the efficiency is said to be low.
In view of above, in the instant case, we may say that Material A used better than Material B.
Illustration 19
From the details given below, calculate:
(i) Re-ordering level
(ii) Maximum level
(iii) Minimum level
(iv) Danger level
Re-ordering quantity is to be calculated on the basis of following information:

(a) Cost of placing a purchase order is ` 20
(b) Number of units to be purchased during the year is 5,000
(c) Purchase price per unit inclusive of transportation cost is ` 50
(d) Annual cost of storage per units is ` 5
(e) Details of lead time: Average 10 days, Maximum 15 days, Minimum 6 days.
For emergency purchases 4 days
(f) Rate of consumption: Average: 15 units per day,
Maximum: 20 units per day
Solution:
2 × 5,000 × 20
EOQ =
5
= 200 units
Min. Rate of Consumption = (15×2)–20

= 10 units per day
(i) Re-order Level = Maximum usage per period x Maximum Re-order Period
(ROL) = 20 units per day x 15 days = 300 units
(ii) Maximum level = ROL + ROQ – (Min. Rate of Consumption x Min. Re-order Period)
= 300 units + 200 units – (10 units per day x 6 days)
= 440 units
(iii) Minimum level = ROL – (Average Rate of Consumption x Average Re-order Period)
= 300 units – (15 units per day x 10 days)
= 150 units
(iv) Danger level = Average Consumption x Lead time for Emergency Purchases
= 15 units per day x 4 days = 60 units

Illustration 20
M/s Tubes Ltd. are the manufacturers of picture tubes for T.V. The following are the details of their
operation during the year 2015:
Average monthly market demand 2,000 Tubes

Ordering Cost `100 per order
Inventory carrying cost 20% per annum
Cost of tubes ` 500 per tube
Normal usage 100 tubes per week
Minimum usage 50 tubes per week
Maximum usage 200 tubes per week
Lead time to supply 6 – 8 weeks
Compute from the above:
(i) Economic order quantity. If the supplier is willing to supply quarterly 1,500 units at a discount of 5%
is it worth accepting?
(ii) Re-order level
(iii) Minimum level of stock
(iv) Maximum level of stock
Solution:
A = Annual usage of tubes = Normal usage per week x 52 weeks
= 100 tubes x 52 weeks = 5,200 tubes
O = Ordering cost per order = ` 100 per order
C = Inventory carrying cost per unit per annum
= 20% x ` 500 = ` 100 per unit, per annum
Economic Order Quantity:
2AO 2 × 5,200 × 100

E.O.Q = = = 102 tubes (approx.)
C 100
If the supplier is willing to supply 1,500 units at a discount of 5% is it worth accepting?

Total cost (when order size is 1,500 units) = Cost of 5,200 units + Ordering cost + Carrying cost.
 5,200 units 
5,200 units x ` 475 +  ×` 100  + (1,500 units × 20% ×` 475 ) ÷ 2
 1,500 units 
= ` 24,70,000 + ` 346.67 + ` 71,250
= ` 25,41,596.67
Total cost (when order size is 102 units)
 5,200 units 
= 5,200 units × ` 500 +  ×` 100  + (102 units × 20% ×` 500 ) ÷ 2
 102 units 
= ` 26,00,000 + ` 5,098.03 + ` 5,100 = ` 26,10,198.03

Cost Accounting
Since the total cost under quarterly supply of 1,500 units with 5% discount is lower than that when order
size is 102 units, the offer should be accepted. While accepting this offer capital blocked on order size
of 1,500 unit per quarter has been ignored.
Re-order Level:
= Maximum Consumption × Maximum Re-order Period
= 200 units × 8 weeks = 1,600 units.
Minimum level of Stock:

= Re-order Level - Normal Usage × Average Re-order Period
= 1,600 units -100 units × 7 weeks = 900 units.
Maximum level of Stock:

= Re-order Level + Re-order Quantity – Min. Usage x Min.-Re-order Period
= 1,600 units + 102 units – 50 units x 6 weeks
= 1,402 units.
1. What is the prime objective of material control? It is said that in any system of material control
there are always two counteracting or opposing factors. What are these and why do these factors
arise?
2. What are the principal forms generally required to be used in connection with purchasing and
receiving of stores? Briefly describe them and design any one of the forms that are used.
3. Explain the meaning and importance of material control and mention the main requisites of an
adequate system of material control.
4. What is a purchase order? To whom should the copies of a purchase order be sent and why? Give
a specimen form of purchase order, assuming the particulars to be filled in.
5. Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages of a centralized stores system.
6. What is Re-ordering Level? Explain its relationships with Maximum and Minimum Stock Levels.
What are the factors to be considered in fixing Re-ordering Level and Quantity? Under what
circumstances would you recommend revision of levels?
7. What is Bin Card? Give a specimen form of the Bin Card and discuss its utility.
8. “The Perpetual Inventory System is an Integral part of material control”. Discuss this statement by
bringing out briefly the salient features and the advantages of this system.
9. What is Economic Order Quantity? How is it calculated?
10. What are the main factors which you would consider before selecting a method of pricing material
issues?
11. What is meant by Bill of Materials? When will you recommend drawal of stores under Bill of Materials
as opposed to individual requisition?
12. What are the stores that normally come under “Packing Materials”? What are the major
classifications of packing expenses and how they are treated in cost?

13. How would you deal with the following in Cost Accounts?
(a) Packing cost
(b) Cost of Tools
14. Write short notes on the following:

(a) ABC analysis.
(b) VED analysis.
(c) Treatment of Scrap in costing.
(d) Valuation of work in progress.
(e) Moving Average Price Method of material issue valuation.
(f) Just in time
(g) Bin Card vs. Stores Ledger
(h) Principles of valuation of receipt of material as per CAS – 6.
15. Which of the following statements are true?

(a) Perpetual inventory system enables management to ascertain stock at any time without
physical inventory being taken.
(b) Continuous stock taking is not an essential feature to the perpetual inventory system.
(c) Bin card is a record of both quantities and value.
(d) VED analysis is used primarily for control of spare parts.
(e) ABC analysis is not based on the concept of selection inventory management.
(f) Stores ledger is maintained in the stores department.
(g) Purchase requisition is usually prepared by the storekeeper.
(h) In centralized purchasing all purchases are made by the purchasing department.
(i) Weighted average method of pricing issue of materials involves adding all the different prices
and dividing by the number of such prices.
(j) Material returned note is prepared to keep a record of return of surplus materials to stores.
(k) Under the average price method of valuing material issues, a new issue price is determined
after each purchase.
(Ans: [True: a, d, g, h, j and k]; [False : b, c, e, f, i]

Cost Accounting
PRACTICE PROBLEMS
16. Your factory buys and used a component for production at ` 10 per piece. Annual requirement
is 2,000 numbers. Carrying cost of inventory is 10% p.a. and ordering cost is ` 40 per order. The
purchase manager argues that as the ordering cost is very high, it is advantageous to place a single
order for the entire annual requirement. He also says that if we order 2,000 pieces at a time we can
get a 3% discount from the supplier. Evaluate this proposal and makes your recommendations.
Ans: Proposal of the purchase manager not acceptable because it increases cost by ` 10; buy 400
units (i.e., EOQ) at a time is not economical.
17. P Ltd. uses three types of materials A, B and C for production of ‘X’, the final product. The relevant
monthly date for the components are as given below:
A B C
Normal usage (in units) 200 150 180
Minimum usage (in units 100 100 90
Maximum usage (in units) 300 250 270
Re-order Quantity (in units) 750 900 720
Re-order period (in months) 2 to 3 3 to 4 2 to 3
Calculate for each component:

(a) Re-order Level
(b) Minimum Level
(c) Maximum Level
(d) Average Stock Level
Ans:
A 900 units 1,000 units 810 units

B 400 units 475 units 360 units
C 1,450 units 1,600 units 1,350 units
D 775 units 925 units its
The purchases and issues of material X in the month of January 2015, is as follows:
Jan. 3 Purchase 800 units @ ` 20 per unit

Jan. 9 Issue 600 units
The standard price per unit of material is ` 20 fixed for the year 2015. Show the Stores Ledger entries
and determine the price variance for the month of January.
(Ans: Value of Stock on January 31, 2015 ` 9,100; Price Variance ` 1,100 Un-favourable)

19. XYZ company buys in lots of 500 boxes which is a 3 month supply. The cost per box is `125 and the
ordering cost is `150. The inventory carrying cost is estimated at 20% of unit value.
What is the total annual cost of the existing inventory policy?
How much money could be saved by employing the economic order quantity? (Ans: Saving by
adopting EOQ = ` 2,977)
20. Following information in an inventory problem is available:

Annual demand 8,400 units
Unit price (`) 2.4
Ordering cost (`) 4.0
Storage cost (`) 2%
Interest rate 10% p.a.
Lead time 1/2 month
Calculate EOQ, Reorder level and total annual inventory cost. How much does the total inventory
cost vary if the unit price is changed to `5 ? (Ans: Variation in Inventory Cost = 42,201)
21. A cast iron foundry is importing forged steel moulds for making its castings. The moulds are of four
different sizes A,B,C and D and their CIF values are US $4,140; 4,160; 6,340, and 7,875 respectively.
Customs duty may be assumed at 45% and clearing charges 5% of CIF value. The number of
castings that can be made out of each mould it:
A - 1,000 B - 2,000, C - 1,800 and D - 1,500.
The weight of each casting out of A is 300 kg. B - 400 kg. C - 500 kg and D - 700 Kg. The casting
suffer a normal rejection of 10%. You are required to calculate the average cost of mould per
tonne of saleable casting.
(For conversion assume US $ 1 = ` 8)
(Ans: Cost per tonne of saleable castings = A = ` 184; B = ` 69.33; C = ` 93.93; D = ` 100
22. G Ltd. produces a product which has a monthly demand of 4,000 units. The product required a
component X which is purchased at ` 20. For every finished product, one unit of component is
required. The ordering cost is ` 120 per order and the holding cost is 10% p.a.
You are required to calculate: Economic order quantity.
If the minimum lot size to be supplied is 4,000 units. What is the extra cost, the company has to
incur?
What is the minimum carrying cost, the company has to incur?
(Ans: Minimum carrying cost = ` 2,400)

Cost Accounting
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. Which of the following is considered as normal loss of material?

A. Pilferage B. Loss due to accident C. Loss due to careless handling of material
D. None of these.
2. The most important element of cost is-

A. Material B. Labour C. Overheads D. All of these
3. Direct material is a –
A. Adiministration Cost B. Selling and Distribution cost C. All of these D. None of these
4. Continuous stock taking is a part of-

A. ABC analysis B. Annual stock taking C. Perpetual Inventory D. None of these
5. Which of the following is considered as accounting record?

A. Bin Card B. Bill of material C. Store Ledger D. None of these
[Ans: C, A, D, C, C]
1. Waste and Scrap of material have small realization value.
2. Slow moving materials have a high turnover ratio.
3. Bin card are not the part of accounting records.
4. ABC analysis is based on the principle of management by exception.
5. Store ledger is maintained inside the stores by store keeper.
[Ans: F, F, T,T, F]
Fill in the Blanks:
1. Store Ledger is kept and maintained in _______________.
2. Goods Received Note is prepared by the ______________________.
3. Transfer of surplus material from one job or work order is recorded in _______________.
4. _________________ is discount allowed to the bulk purchaser.
5. __________________ is a document which records the return of unused materials.
[Ans: Cost Office, Receiving department, Material Transfer
Note, Quantity Discount, Material return Note.]
Match the followings:
1 Production strategy A ABC Analysis

2 Analytical method of stock control B JIT
3 Process of classifying Material C Control of Scrap
4 Unavoidable residue material D Costing department
5 Store ledger E FSN Analysis
[Ans: (1) - (B); (2) - (A); (3) - (E); (4) - (C); (5) - (D).

2.2 EMPLOYEE COSTS (CAS - 7)
Labour is an important element of cost and for overall cost control and cost reduction, Labour Cost
is of paramount importance. Labour Cost is also called as Employee Cost. However, for control and
reduction of Labour Cost, it is essential to compute the Labour Cost in a scientific manner and hence
there should be proper systems and processes and documentation, which will help computation of
Labour Cost in a scientific manner. It should be remembered that Labour is not like material as there is
a human aspect involved in it. Therefore, there should be a comprehensive study of all related aspects
of Labour Cost and then only computation and control over the same will be possible. Attention should
also be paid to the productivity aspect. Low productivity results in higher Labour Cost per unit while
higher productivity will reduce the Labour Cost per unit. All these aspects of Labour Cost are discussed
in detail in this chapter. Study of Labour or Employee Cost can better be explained as follows:
Labour
HR Department Industrial Engg. Time Keeping &

Payroll
1. Recruitment 1. Time & motion study 1. Time booking

2. Induction 2. Work study 2. Payroll
3. Work measurement
4. Job evaluation
5. Merit rating
Control
1. Labour Turnover
2. Idle Time
3. Overtime
4. Payment by results
As per CAS-7, (limited Revision - 2017) Employee cost is the benefits paid or payable in all forms of
consideration given for the service rendered by employee (including temporary, part time and contract
employee) of an entity.
Various aspects of Labour Cost Control
In the modern competitive environment, it is essential to make efforts for controlling and reducing the
Labour Cost. Systematic efforts are required in order to achieve this target. The following steps will be
useful in controlling and reducing the Labour Cost.
A. Classification of Labour cost:
The first step in the direction of controlling and reducing the Labour Cost is proper classification of the
same. The Labour Cost is classified into Direct Cost and Indirect Cost. Direct Labour Cost is the cost that
can be identified with a product unit. It can also be described as cost of all Labour incurred for altering
the construction, composition or condition of the product. Indirect Labour Cost is the cost, which cannot
be identified with a product unit. It represents the amount of wages which is paid to the workers who

Cost Accounting
are not directly engaged on the production but it includes wages paid to the workers and assistants
working in departments like purchasing, store keeping, time office, maintenance, and other service and
production departments. In other words, indirect wages are the wages paid to the workers who facilitate
the production rather than actually engaged in production. The Direct Labour Cost can be charged
directly to the job or product units and is included in the prime cost. Indirect Labour Cost is included in
the overhead cost. Direct Labour Cost is variable in nature and can be controlled by strictly adhering to
the norms and standards set by the management. Indirect Labour Cost can be controlled by establishing
Labour budgets and comparing the actual Indirect Labour Cost with the budgeted Labour Cost. Any
difference between the two is analysed carefully and suitable corrective action is taken.
B. Production Planning:
Effective control over the Labour Cost Can be achieved through proper production planning. Production
planning includes activities like planning, scheduling, routing, machine loading, product and process
engineering, work study etc. With the help of work study, time and motion study can be conducted
which will help in fixation of standard time for a particular job. A comparison between the standard
time and actual time is constantly made to find out the difference between the two. Suitable corrective
action can be taken if it is noted that the actual time taken is constantly more than the standard time
allowed for the job.
C. Labour Budget:
Budget and budgetary control are effective tools for cost control and cost reduction. A Labour budget
can be prepared which will set the target for the Labour Cost which will again facilitate comparison
between the Budgeted Labour Cost and the Actual Labour Cost.
D. Labour Standards:
Standards can be set for Labour Cost against which the Actual Labour Cost can be compared.
Standard Labour Cost is the cost, which should have been incurred for producing a particular quantity
of production. While fixing the Standard Labour Cost, use of time and motion study is made to fix up the
standard time that should be taken for the actual production.
E. Labour Performance Report:
There should be a system of periodic Labour efficiency and utilisation reports. These reports will give an
idea about the efficiency and productivity of the Labour.
F. Incentive Schemes:
Improving the Labour productivity is one of the important ways to reduce the Labour Cost per unit.
Productivity can be improved by motivating the workers. Offering monetary and non monetary incentives
can help to improve the productivity substantially. However, there should be a periodic review of the
incentive schemes and therefore incentive schemes report should be prepared at periodic intervals.
G. Labour Cost Accounting:
There should be a proper cost accounting system, which will identify the Direct and Indirect Labour
Cost. Similarly the cost accounting department should be able to generate and maintain records for
time keeping, time booking, idle and overtime, impact of incentive schemes, per unit of Labour, cost
due to Labour Turnover and other relevant records.
Thus from the above mentioned points, it will be clear that there is a need to control the Labour Cost
and it can be done by the combined efforts of various departments.
Principles of measurement of Employee (CAS-7) (Limited Revision 2017):
The guide lines for ascertaining the Labour Cost / Employee Cost are as follows :-
(a) Employee Cost shall be ascertained taking into account the gross pay including all allowances
payable along with the cost to the employer of all the benefits.

(b) Bonus whether payable as a statutory minimum or on a sharing of surplus shall be treated as part
of Employee Cost. Ex-gratia payable in lieu of or in addition to bonus shall also be treated as part
of the Employee Cost.
(c) Remuneration payable to managerial personnel including executive directors on board and other
officers of a corporate body under a statute will be considered as part of the Employee Cost of the
year under reference, whether the whole or part of the remuneration is considered as a percentage
of profits.
Explanation: Remunaration paid to non executive directors shall not form part of employee cost
but shall form part of administrative overhead.
(d) Separation costs related to voluntary retirement, retrenchment, termination...etc shall be amortized
over the period of benefitting from such costs.
(e) Employee Cost shall not be included any Imputed Costs.
(f) Any subsidy, grant, incentive or any such received or receivable with respect to any employee
cost shall be reduced from ascertainment of Cost of the cost project to which such amounts are
related.
(g) Any abnormal cost where it is material and quantifiable shall not form part of the Employee Cost.
(h) Penalties, damages paid to statutory authorities or other third parties shall not form part of the
Employee Cost.
(i) The cost of free housing, free conveyance and any other similar benefits provided to an employee
shall be determined at the total cost of all resources consumed in providing such benefits.
(j) Any recovery from employees towards the facilities provided shall be reduced from the Employee
Cost.
(k) Cost of idle time is ascertained by the idle hours multiplied by the hourly rate applicable to idle
employee or a group of employee.
(l) Where Employee Cost is accounted at standard cost, variances due to normal reasons related
to employee cost shall be treated as part of Employee Cost. Variances due to abnormal reasons
shall be treated as part of abnormal cost.
(m) Any change in the cost accounting principles applied for the determination of the Employee Cost
should be made only if it is required by law or for compliance with Cost Accounting Standard or
change would result in a more appropriate way of presentation of Cost Statement.
Control of Labour Cost
Labour cost consists of the total amount of wages paid to the workers and other expenses related
thereto. It includes hourly or piece-rates payable to the workers. It may be excessive due to inefficiency
of labour force, high idle time and overtime payments, increase in spoilage, waste and defective
production due to lack of supervision and inspection, high labour turnover and other matters. Therefore
it is clearly seen that the control of labour cost is essential in every organization to cut down the cost of
production and to improve the labour productivity/efficiency. The following departments play a vital
role in Labour Cost Control :-
(a) Human Resources Department
This department is responsible for the execution of policies regarding appointment, discharge, transfer,
promotion, classification of labour, wage and incentive systems, etc, which have been formulated by
the board of directors or executive committee. It normally maintain detailed records of attendance,
leave records, overtime and shift records from which various calculations of wages, allowances,
overtime, incentives are made. Reports concerning labour turnover, recruitment, productivity, utilization,
absenteeism as well as reports on labour cost, idle time, various cost ratios etc., are prepared here for
submission to higher authorities for necessary action.

Cost Accounting
(b) Engineering, Industrial Engineering Department

This department helps to maintain control over working conditions, production methods, job performances
by preparing plans and specification for each job scheduled for production, maintaining safety and
efficient working conditions, initiating and supervising research and development activities, making
method study, motion study, and time study, setting piece-rates, making job evaluation, merit rating
and job analysis, measuring labour productivity and in general suggesting ways and means to improve
labour efficiency/productivity thereby cutting down the effective labour cost.
(c) Time Keeping Department
The function of this department is mainly to keep, maintain the time for which each and every worker
has worked including the check-in and check-out time. The records are kept separately for different
shift and irregular working periods like overtime period. The records are such kept that the departments
wise/product wise/process wise/ batch wise/job wise/operation wise allocation of labour cost is possible.
The entire correctness of calculation of payroll, overtime payments, incentive payments, overhead
allocation depend on the records maintained by this department and as such the importance of the
functions rendered by this department cannot be over emphasised.
(d) Payroll Department
This departments is responsible for preparation of payroll and also basically to maintain records of job
classification, department wage rates to prepare each man’s earnings, to allocate those earnings to
various cost centres to summarise various deductions and employers’ share of provident fund, state
insurance and other items, and also to summarise overtime payments and incentive payments wherever
applicable.
(e) Cost-Accounting Department
This department is responsible for the accumulation and compilation of all cost data relating to the
element Labour. It analyses the payroll cost to effectively render routine and special labour, cost reports
thereby disclosing the amount of normal, and abnormal idle time, direct labour, indirect labour, overtime
and departmental labour costs and variances between actual and standard labour costs. These reports
are used by the top management to effectively control the labour cost and also to improve the labour
productivity/efficiency.
Time Keeping:
Like Personnel Department, this department also plays an important role in labour cost control through
maintaining record of each worker’s time in and time out during regular working period and reporting
the time of each worker for each department, operation or production order. Thus this department is
responsible for recording the attendance time of each worker accurately. This will ensure punctuality
and discipline in the company and will have a positive impact on the morale of each worker. Time
keeping is a statutory requirement also and therefore accurate recording of time should be ensured. The
important role of time keeping from the point of view of labour costing and control can be summarized
as given below :
(a) It shows the total number of hours worked by each workman and so the calculation of his wage
becomes possible. This is applicable where the workers are paid wages as per the time rate.
(b) Time keeping promotes punctuality and discipline amongst the workers. In the absence of the time
keeping system, there will be not only indiscipline amongst them but the workers who are otherwise
punctual and disciplined will be frustrated.
(c) Certain benefits like pension, gratuity and leave with pay, provident fund, promotion, and salary
scale are linked with the continuity of service. Attendance records in this regard, can be helpful in
computation of these benefits.
(d) Computation of Labour hours becomes possible through time keeping records. This will be useful
in overhead apportionment and absorption, which may be made on the basis of Labour hours.
(e) Time keeping is a statutory requirement under Labour laws.

(f) The time keeping records can be used for further analysis like for fixation of standard time and
finding out idle time as well as the efficiency of Labour. It can be used by researchers as well as by
Government Authorities for various purposes.
Methods of Time Keeping
The above-mentioned points highlight the importance of the time keeping. The question that we have
to answer now is that what are the methods of time keeping? The answer to this is given in the following
paragraphs. The methods of time keeping are explained below.
(1) Time Recording Clocks or Clock Cards: This is mechanized method of time recording. Each worker
punches the card given to him when he comes in and goes out. The time and date is automatically
recorded in the card. Each week a new card is prepared and given to the worker so that weekly
calculation of wages will be possible. If wages are paid on monthly basis, a new card may be given in
each month. Due to advancement of technology, giving a new card each month is also not required
as the same card continued till the worker either leaves the service or retires from the service. The only
limitation of this method, [in fact it is the limitation of all the methods of time keeping] is that though
the time in and time out are recorded, the records do not show the productive time of the worker,
i.e. how he has spent the time in the factory. Thus if a worker comes in at 8 am and leaves at 5 pm,
he has spent 9 hours in the company, which can be ascertained from the time keeping records.
However, how he has spent time, is not be shown by these records. For showing the productive time,
separate records showing time booking are to be prepared. The time booking records can also be
combined with time keeping records so that there is no need to keep dual records.
(2) Disc Method: This is one of the older methods of recording time. A disc, which bears the identification
number of each worker, is given to each one. When the worker comes in, he picks up his disc from
the tray kept near the gate of the factory and drops in the box or hooks it on a board against his
number. Same procedure is followed at the time of leaving the factory. The box is removed at starting
time, and the time keeper becomes aware of late arrivals by requiring the workers concerned to
report him before starting. The time keeper will record in an Attendance Register any late arrivals
and workers leaving early. He will also enter about the absentees in the register on daily basis. The
main limitation of this method is that there is a possibility of marking the attendance of a worker by
his friend i.e. by a proxy. Secondly if the number of workers is large, there will be a delay in recording
time due to manual operation of this system.
(3) Attendance Records: This is the simplest and the oldest method of marking attendance of workers.
In this method, every worker signs in an attendance register against his name. Leaves taken by
workers as well as late reporting is marked on the attendance register itself. The main limitation of
this system is that in case there is large number of workers, there may be large queues for signing
the muster. Similarly there is little control over marking the attendance time and hence there may
be irregularities in time recording.
Time Booking:
In time keeping we have seen that the basic objective of time keeping is to mark the attendance time,
i.e. time in and time out. Time keeping aims at keeping a check on the number of hours spent by a
worker in the factory. However, it does not record the productive time of the workers. It means the time
keeping methods do not provide information about how the time is spent by the workers in the factory.
For example, the time keeping record will show that the worker has reported for duty at 8 am and left
at 6 pm, thus, he has spent 10 hours in the company. But the analysis of these 10 hours is not provided
by the time keeping. In view of this there is a need to have a system, which will tell about the productive
time spent by the workers in the factory. The method, which supplies this information, is known as ‘Time
Booking Methods’ and the recording the time spent by a worker in each job, process or operation is
known as ‘Time Booking’. The objects of time booking are as follows:-
(i) To determine the productive time spent by the worker on the job or operation. This helps in finding
out the idle time and controls the same.

Cost Accounting
(ii) To determine the quantity and value of work done.

(iii) To determine earnings like wages and bonus.
(iv) To determine the efficiency of workers.
Time Booking Methods
The following methods are used for time booking:-
(1) Daily Time Sheet: In this method, each worker records the time spent by him on the work during the
day, for which a sheet is provided to each worker. The time is recorded daily and hence accuracy
is maintained. However, the main limitation of this method is lot of paper work is involved as daily
sheets are maintained on daily basis by each worker.
(2) Weekly Time Sheets: The only difference between the daily time sheet and weekly time sheet is
that these time sheets are maintained on weekly basis. This means that each worker prepares these
sheets weekly rather than daily. This helps in reducing the paper work to a great extent.
The only care to be taken is that since the information is filled up on daily basis, there may be
inaccuracies and hence filling the information should be done on daily basis only.
(3) Job Ticket: Job tickets are given to all workers where time for commencing the job is recorded as
well as the time when the job is completed. The job tickets are given for each job and the recording
of the time as mentioned above helps to ascertain the time taken for each job. After completing
one job, the worker is given another job.
(4) Labour Cost Card: This card is meant for a job, which involves several operations or stages of
completion. Instead of giving one card to each worker, only one card is passed on to all workers
and time taken on the job is recorded by each one of them. This card shows the aggregate labour
cost of the job or the product.
(5) Time and Job Card: This card is a combined record, which shows both, the time taken for completion
of the job as well as the attendance time. Therefore there is no need to keep separate record of
both, time taken and attendance time.
Thus we may distinguish time keeping and time booking, that the time keeping is simply maintaining
attendance of the workers i.e the time of arrival and the time of departure and there by the time spent
by the worker in the organization is measured, where as time booking is not only maintaining the time
spent by the workers in the organization, but also the time spent on each & every job including the idle
time with reasons are recorded.
Work Study
In order to motivate workers, it is necessary to design a proper incentive system of payment of wages.
Money is the strongest motivating factor and hence monetary incentive system become essential. In
any incentive system, the bonus is paid by comparing the standard performance/production with the
actual performance, i.e. actual production. Bonus is paid if the actual performance is higher than the
standard one. However, for deciding the standard performance, standard time, i.e. time that is allowed
doing a particular job should be fixed against which the actual time taken should be compared. The
Work Study which includes, the Job Study, and the Method Study ensures the fixation of standard time to
do a particular job and thus has become extremely important in the designing of the incentive system.
Work Study components are discussed below.
Method Study
Method Study is done to improve the methods of production and to achieve the most efficient use of
the resources like, manpower, machines and materials. Method Study has the following stages:-
(a) Method Study is generally conducted for the jobs, which involve complex operations as well as
costly operations. Hence the first step is to select jobs, which are having complexity of operations.

(b) There should be a detailed study of related aspect of the selected job. Information about the job
like, purpose, location, sequence, relationship with other work, methods of working, operators,
requirement of skilled workers, facilities required etc. should be collected.
(c) The crucial step is that after studying the relevant aspects of the job, there should be development
of the improved method of doing the job. An improved method of job might change the location
and sequence of the work, methods of production and the layout for the job. The improved method
will result in more efficiency, more simplicity and effectiveness and job will be done in a better
manner.
(d) The developed method should be applied in doing the job.
(e) For any new method, a follow up is always required. For method study also a constant follow up is
necessary to ensure that the method selected is implemented properly. Thus method study ensures
efficient use of resources by reducing unnecessary work and helps to achieve highest production.
Work Measurement
The Work Measurement aims at determining the effective time required to perform a job. The ineffective,
wasteful or avoidable time is separated from required time to complete the work. The effective time so
established in work measurement can be used for the following purposes:-
(a) Incentive wage schemes which require data about the time allowed and time taken for a particular
job.
(b) Improving utilization of men, machines and materials.
(c) Assisting in production control.
(d) Assisting in setting labour standards.
(e) Cost control and reduction.
The following stages are involved in work measurement:-
(i) Selection of work.
(ii) Measuring the actual time taken in the work done.
(iii) Making comparison between the standard time and the actual time.
Job Evaluation
It is necessary for the management of any organization to establish proper wage and salary structure for
various jobs. For doing this in a scientific manner, it is necessary to determine the relative value of jobs
and hence a job evaluation is done. Job Evaluation is a technique of analysis and assessment of jobs
to determine their relative value within the firm. It aims at providing a rational and equitable basis for
differential salaries and wages for different classes of workers. Job Evaluation has the following objectives:-
(a) It helps in developing a systematic and rational wage structure as well as job structure.
(b) Job Evaluation aims at removing the controversies and disputes relating to salary between the
employers and employees. Thus the employees and also the employer remain satisfied.
(c) Another important objective of Job Evaluation is to bring fairness and stability in the wage and
salary structure so as to ensure full cooperation of workers in implementing various policies of the
employers.
(d) Job Evaluation discloses characteristics and conditions relating to different jobs. This is very useful at
the time of recruiting of workers as only suitable workers can be recruited. This avoids square pegs
in round holes.
Methods of Job Evaluation
Methods of job evaluation are as follows:-

Cost Accounting
(1) Point Ranking Method: In this method each job is analyzed in terms of various job factors or
characteristics. The characteristics are skills required, efforts involved, working conditions, hazards,
responsibility and so on. In other words the job factors are the requirements needed for performing the
job effectively. Each job factor is given weightage or points depending upon its value for the job. For
example, for certain jobs, maximum value is assigned to experience while for some jobs, education
may be the most crucial factor. Finally each job is ranked in the order of points or weights secured by
them. The wage structure can be suitably designed according to the points assigned to each job. The
method is quite sound in principle but difficulties may be faced assigning the weights to each job.
(2) Ranking Method: In this method, jobs are ranked in order of importance on the basis of skills required,
experience requirements, working conditions etc. Jobs are rearranged in an order, which can be either
from the lowest to the highest or in the reverse. Wage scales are determined in terms of ranks. Though
this method is quite simple to operate and less costly as well as easy for understanding, it is suitable when
the size of the organization is small and jobs are few and well defined. In a large organization, where
jobs are quite complex, this method is not beneficial.
(3) Grading Method: This method is an improvement over the ranking method. Under this method,
each job is analyzed in terms of a predetermined grade and then assigned a grade or class. Grades
are established after making an investigation of job factors, such as complexity in the job, supervision,
responsibility, education etc.
Merit Rating
Job Evaluation is the rating of the job in order to bring rationality in the wage and salary structure in the
organization. On the other hand Merit Rating is the comparative evaluation and analysis of individual
merits of the employees. The Merit Rating aims at evaluation and ranking the individual employees
in order to plan and implement rational promotional policies in the organization. Merit Rating has the
following objectives:-
(a) To evaluate the merit of an employee for the purpose of promotion, increment, reward and other
benefits.
(b) To establish and develop a wage system and incentive scheme.
(c) To determine the suitability of an employee for a particular job.
(d) To analyze the merits or limitations of a worker and help him to develop his capability and
competence for a job.
(e) To examine characteristics like cooperation, quality of work done, attendance and regularity,
education, skill, experience, character and integrity and initiative.
Thus it can be understood that Merit Rating is extremely useful for organizations for evaluating the
employees. However the main limitations are that the rating can be subjective which will give rise to
the disputes and there is a possibility that past performance of an employee may be given too much
importance.
Difference between Merit Rating and Job Evaluation
The difference between the Merit Rating and Job Evaluation are as follows:-
(a) Job Evaluation is the assessment of the relative worth of jobs within a business enterprise and Merit
Rating is the assessment of the employees with respect to a job.
(b) Job Evaluation helps in establishing a rational wage and salary structure. On the other hand, Merit
Rating helps in fixing fair wages for each worker in terms of his competence and performance.
(c) Job Evaluation brings uniformity in wages and salaries while Merit Rating aims at providing a fair
rate of pay for different workers on the basis of their performance.
Time And Motion Study
The study of time and motion is essential for designing an incentive system. Time Study determines

the time to be spent on the job. Standard time is the time that should be taken for completing a
particular job under standard or normal working conditions. For fixation of standard time, Motion Study
is necessary. Thus, the Motion Study precedes the Time Study. Motion Study means dividing the job into
fundamental elements or basic operations of the job or process and studying them in detail to eliminate
the unnecessary elements or motions. After investigation all movements in a job, process or operation,
the Motion Study aims at finding out the most scientific and systematic way of performing the job. After
eliminating unnecessary motions, the time that should be taken to perform these motions is decided
with the help of a stop-watch. In the time so fixed, some allowance is added in the same for normal idle
time, which is due to fatigue, change of job, change of tools, and preventive maintenance of machines
and so on. Thus standard time for a job or process is arrived at. The Time and Motion Study aims at :-
(a) Eliminating unnecessary motions, thereby reducing inefficiency.
(b) Improving methods, procedures, techniques, and processes relating to a job.
(c) Effective utilization of men, material, machines and time.
(d) Improving working environment, layout and design of plant and equipment.
The following are the benefits of Time and Motion Study:-
(a) Effective utilization of resources like men, material, machine and time.
(b) Helps in assessment of labour.
(c) Helps in designing incentive system as many of the incentive systems are based on standard time.
(d) Preparation of labour budget.
(e) Proper planning of production for preparation of production budget.
(f) Helps in improving labour productivity by designing best method for performing a job or process.
(g) Improvement of work methods.
Payroll Department
Roll of Payroll Department is of crucial importance in overall Labour Cost computation and control. The
main responsibilities of this department are preparation of payroll from clock cards, job or time tickets,
or time sheet. The payroll shows the amount of wages payable to each worker showing the gross wages
payable, the deductions and the net wages payable. For doing this calculation, they have to work in
collaboration with the time office, personnel department, Cost Accounting department and with the
concerned department in which the worker is working. The functions of this department are given below:-
(a) To compute the wages of the employees
(b) To prepare a detailed wages sheet showing the gross wages payable, various deductions and
other payroll liabilities.
(c) To maintain individual employee payroll records.
(d) To prepare department wise summaries of wages.
(e) Compilation of Labour statistics for management.
(f) To install and implement an effective internal check system for preventing frauds and irregularities
in payment of wages.
(g) To detect and prevent ghost workers.
Cost Accounting Department
The Cost Accounting department is responsible for analyzing the Labour Cost for the purpose of
computation and control of the same. It is responsible for the accumulation and classification of all
cost data of which Labour Cost is one of the important components. The Cost Accounting department
classifies the Labour Cost into direct and indirect, compares the actual Labour Cost with the budgeted
cost, compute unit Labour Cost and compiles the data for further analysis of the Labour Cost. The data
generated can be useful for the management in taking decisions.

Cost Accounting
Labour Turnover
Labour Turnover of an organisation is change in the labour force during a specified period measured
against a suitable index. The rate of Labour Turnover in an industry depends upon several factors such
as, nature of the industry, its size, location and composition of the labour force. A controlled level of
Labour Turnover is considered desirable because it helps the firm to adjust the size of its labour force in
response to needs such as for seasonal changes or changes in technology.
Causes of Labour Turnovers:

The causes giving rise to high labour turnover may be broadly classified under the following the heads:
(i) Personnel Causes: Workers may leave employment purely on personal grounds, e.g.,
(a) Dislike for the job, locality or environments.
(b) Domestic troubles and family responsibilities.
(c) Change of line for betterment.
(d) Retirement due to old age and ill health.
(e) Death.
In all such cases, personal factors count the most and employer can practically do nothing to help
the situation.
(ii) Unavoidable Causes : In certain circumstances it becomes obligatory on the part of the management
to ask some of the workers to leave. These circumstances are:
(a) Retrenchment due to seasonal trade, shortage of any material and other resources, slack
market for the product, etc.
(b) Discharge on disciplinary grounds.
(c) Discharge due to continued or long absence.
(iii) Avoidable Causes: Under this head, may be grouped the causes which need the attention of the
management most so that the turnover may be kept low by taking remedial measures. The main
reasons for which workers leave are:
(a) Unsuitability of job.
(b) Low pay and allowance.
(c) Unsatisfactory working conditions.
(d) Unhappy relations with co-workers and unsatisfactory behaviour of superiors.
(e) Dispute between rival trade unions.
(f) Lack of transport, accommodation, medical and other factors.
(g) Lack of amenities like recreational centres, schools, etc.
The above causes may also be classified in a different manner under three heads, viz., Financial Causes,
Social and Economic Causes and Psychological Causes relating to human relationship.
Measurement of Labour Turnover:
It is essential for any organisation to measure the Labour Turnover. This is necessary for having an idea
about the turnover in the organisation and also to compare the Labour Turnover of the previous period
with the current one. The following methods are available for measurement of the Labour Turnover:-

(a) Additions Method: Under this method, number of employees added during a particular period is
taken into consideration for computing the Labour Turnover. The method of computing is as follows.
Labour Turnover = (Number of additions/Average number of workers during the period) ×100
(b) Separation Method: In this method, instead of taking the number of employees added, number
of employees left during the period is taken into consideration. The method of computation is as
follows.
Labour Turnover = Number of separations/Average number of workers during the period)×100
(c) Replacement Method: In this method neither the additions nor the separations are taken into
consideration. The number of employees replaced is taken into consideration for computing the
Labour turnover.
Labour Turnover = (Number of replacements/Average number of workers during the period)×100
(d) Flux Method: Under this method Labour Turnover is computed by taking into consideration the
additions as well as separations. The turnover can also be computed by taking replacements and
separations also. Computation is done as per the following methods.
Labour Turnover = ½ [Number of additions + Number of separations] /Average number of workers
during the period ×100
Labour Turnover = ½ [Number of replacements + Number of separations] /Average number of
workers during the period × 100
Cost of Labour Turnover
Increasing Labour Turnover is a double edged malady. It reduces the productivity of labour and resulting
in high costs. The cost of Labour Turnover may be analyzed under two broad headings, Preventive Cost
and Replacement Costs. Preventive Costs refer to all those items of expenditure which are incurred in
order to keep the workers satisfied and thus to act as discouragement against leaving employment.
Replacement Costs are those costs which are incurred for the recruitment and training of new hands
and the resulting losses, wastages and lowering of productivity due to the inexperience and inefficiency
of the new labour force.
Preventive Costs may be further grouped under the following heads:
1. Personnel administration
Most concerns would have a Personnel Department which is entrusted with recruitment, training, and
other problems arising out of the employment of the labour force. Obviously, the entire expenditure of
the department cannot be treated as labour turnover costs but a portion of the costs which related
to the efforts of the Personnel Manager in maintaining good relationship between the management
and the staff should be treated as Preventive Labour Turnover Cost. The labour force remains satisfied
if properly looked after and if grievances are sympathetically considered.
2. Medical Service (Preventive and Curative)
Care for own health and that of family members gets prior consideration with the workers who prefer
those concerns where medical services are available. Further, a healthy worker is an asset of the firm
as he is able to make substantial contribution towards higher efficiency and productivity.
3. Welfare activities and Schemes:
These include facilities like subsidised canteens, co-operative store, laundry and washing services, sports,
housing schemes, transport, and educational facilities. These facilities are as good as higher wages
offering incentive to the worker to stay with the firm.
4. Miscellaneous Schemes such as Pension or Provident Fund Schemes, Bonus, High Wage and Other
Incentive Schemes
Greater the advantage these prerequisites offer, the lower will be the rate of Labour Turnover.

Cost Accounting
Replacement Costs consist of the following:

1. Loss of output due to delay in obtaining new workers
As suitable workers may not be available readily, there is a time gap before a new worker can replace
the old one. During this period, some output may be maintained by retaining surplus labour force to meet
such contingencies or by working overtime. All such extra cost should be taken as labour turnover cost.
2. Employment Department Expenses
With the increase in the tempo of recruitment, additional work is thrown on the Employment or Personnel
Department. Administrative expenditure is incurred for the selection, test and medical examination of
the new hands for writing initial document like service records, fund accounts, etc.
3. Induction Training for new workers
Unless skilled workers are recruited (more likely on higher rates of pay ) who can be at right way put
on jobs, the average worker has to be given some induction training before he is fit to be put on his
assigned work. For certain categories of skilled and highly skilled jobs, intensive training for some period
may be essential.
4. Inefficiency of new workers
The efficiency of new hands be generally low, productivity is reduced and cost increases.
5. Cost of tool and machine breakage:
While on training and the initial stages of work after completion of training, the worker is likely to break
tools more frequently on account of his inexperience.
6. Cost of Scrap and Defective Work:
A new worker is likely to spoil work and although in most cases responsibility can be fixed on him and
no wages paid for the scrapped work, the expenditure incurred on material and wages for the earlier
operations done on the job becomes waste.
7. Cost of Accidents:
On account of his inexperience, the new worker is apt to disregard safety rules and he is thus more prone
to accidents. It may be noted that the increases in labour costs due to high Labour Turnover contribute
to create an inflationary trend in the industry.
Measures to reduce Labour Turnover:
Labour Turnover may be reduced by removing its avoidable causes and taking preventive remedial
measures. The various measures may be summarised as follows:
(i) Efficient, sympathetic and impartial personal administration.
(ii) Effective communication system to keep the workers informed on matters that affect them.
(iii) Improving working conditions and placing the right man on the right jobs.
(iv) Job enrichment to reduce boredom and monotony and to provide job satisfaction.
(v) Introducing fair rates of pay and allowance and incentives, pensions, gratuity, etc.
(vi) Strengthening welfare measures.
(vii) Augmenting recreational activities and schemes.
Illustration 1
During October 2015, the following information is obtained from the Personnel Department of a
manufacturing company. Labour force at the beginning of the month 1900 and at the end of the month
2100. During the month, 25 people left while 40 persons were discharged. 280 workers were engaged
out of which only 30 were appointed in the vacancy created by the number of workers separated and
the rest on account of expansion scheme. Calculate the Labour Turnover by different methods.

Solution:
Computation of Labour Turnover
Additions Method:
Number of Additions/Number of average workers during the period = 280 / 2000 X 100 = 14%
Separation Method:
Number of Separations/Number of average workers during the period = (25+40)/2000 × 100 = 3.25%
Replacement Method:
Number of Replacements / Number of average workers during the period=30/2000 X 100 = 1.5%
Flux Method:
½ [Number of Additions + Number of Separations] / Number of average workers during the period
= [½(280 + 65) / 2000]×100 = 173/2000 X 100 = 8.63%
Note: Average number of workers in all the above methods is computed by taking Opening number of
workers + Closing number of workers / 2 = 1900 + 2100/2 =2000
Illustration 2
The management of XYZ Ltd. is worried about the increasing Labour Turnover in the factory and before
analyzing the causes and taking remedial steps; they want to have an idea of the profit foregone as a
result of Labour Turnover during the last year. Last year’s sales amounted to `83, 03,300 and the profit/
volume ratio was 20%. The total number of actual hours worked by the direct Labour force was 4.45
lakhs. As a result of the delays by the Personnel department in filling vacancies due to Labour Turnover,
1,00,000 potentially productive hours were lost. The Actual Direct Labour hours included 30, 000 hours
attributable to training new recruits, out of which, half of the hours were unproductive. The cost incurred
consequent on Labour turnover revealed, on analysis the following. Settlement cost due to leaving: `43,
820 & Recruitment costs: `26,740. Selection costs: `12,750, & Training costs: `30,490
Assuming that the potential production lost as a consequence of Labour Turnover could have been
sold at prevailing prices, find the profit foregone last year on account of Labour Turnover.
Solution:
We will have to calculate the profit foregone by calculating the amount of contribution lost and the
additional cost that was incurred as a result of the Labour Turnover. This is done in the following manner.
I. Actual productive hours: Actual hours worked – Unproductive training hours
= 4,45,000 – 15,000 [50% of 30, 000]
= 4,30,000 actual productive hours.
II. Total hours lost: 1,00,000 hrs

Sales lost [` 83,03,300 × 1,00,000]/4,30,000 = `19,31,000
Loss of contribution – 20% of `19,31,000 = `3,86,200
Statement Showing Profit Foregone
Amount (`)
Contribution lost: 3,86,200
Settlement cost due to leaving: 43,820
Recruitment cost: 26,740
Selection cost: 12,750
Training cost: 30,490
Profit foregone: 5,00,000

Cost Accounting
Overtime Wages / Overtime Premium

The Factories Act provides for payment of overtime wages at double usual rates of wages. Even where
the Act is not applicable, the practice is to pay for overtime work at higher rates usually in accordance
with a standing agreement between the employer and the workers. Hence, payment of overtime consists
of two elements, viz., the normal (i.e., usual) amount and the extra payment, i.e., the premium. As per
CAS-7, the overtime. Overtime premium is defined as ‘Overtime is the time spent beyond the normal
working hours which is usually paid at a higher rate than the normal time rate. The extra amount payable
beyond the normal wages & salaries for beyond the normal working hours is called Overtime Premium’.
Treatment of Overtime in Cost Records
As per CAS-7 (Limited Revision 2017), Overtime Premium shall be assigned directly to the cost object
or treated as overheads depending on the economic feasibility and specific circumstances requiring
such overtime.
When overtime is worked due to exigencies or urgencies of the work, the basic / normal payment is
treated as Direct Labour Cost and charged to Production or cost unit on which the worker is employed.
Whereas the amount of premium (extra amount) is treated as overhead.
If overtime is spent at the request of the customer, then the entire amount (including overtime premium)
is treated as direct wages and should be charged to the job.
When the overtime is worked due to lack of capacity as general policy of the company, then the total
amount paid is treated as direct wages which is computed at the estimated rate based on the figures
of the previous years.
Overtime worked on account of the abnormal conditions such as flood, earthquake, etc., should not
be charged to cost, but to costing Profit and Loss Account if integrated accounts are maintained.
It will thus be seen that overtime involves payment of increased wages and should be resorted to only
when extremely essential. The disadvantages attached to overtime working are as follows :
(a) It involves excess labour cost.
(b) There is decrease in productivity. Output is usually proportionate to the excess time worked as
efficiency during late hours is diminished.
(c) Work in the evenings increases lighting cost.
(d) Continuous work for long periods leads to fatigue and defective work.
(e) It fells upon the health of the workers.
(f) Overtime work if not properly distributed among the workers may lead to discontentment.
(g) There is an unusual strain on plant and machinery.
(h) Once overtime is resorted to for some time, the workers take the overtime wages as part of their
normal earnings and resist future attempts to discontinue overtime work.
(i) There is a tendency to keep the work pending to be done during overtime period or to intentionally
slow down in order to compel the management to sanction overtime.
It may, however, be said in favour of overtime work that it increases the productive capacity of the
concern as more work is done with the existing resources. Overtime work is particularly useful in pulling up
backlog in production arising due to shutdown, breakdown, power failure and such other contingencies.
Though overtime work cannot be completely eliminated, it is essential that proper control should be
exercised to keep it to the minimum. The following steps should be taken to control the Overtime:
(a) All overtime work should be duly authorised after investigating the necessity thereof.

(b) Overtime cost should be recorded separately and shown against the department incurring it. This
will enable proper investigation and planning of production in future.
(c) If overtime tends to be a permanent feature, the necessity of recruiting more men and shifting
working should be considered.
(d) If overtime is due to lack of plant or machinery or other resources, steps may be taken to install
more machines, or to give subcontracts alternatively, to restrict production so as to complete it
within the normal time.
Idle Time
Idle Time Cost represents the wages paid for the time lost during which the worker does not work, i.e
time for which wages are paid, but no work is done. As per CAS-7 (Limited Revision 2017), Idle Time is
‘The difference between the time for which the employees are paid/payable to employees and the
employees time booked against the cost object’. This happens because due to various causes for which
he is not responsible, the worker remains idle but full wages are paid to him. Even for workers who are
paid on the basis of output, idle time payment may be required to be made.
The causes leading to idle time may be broadly classified into four categories, viz. :-
(i) Normal, inherent or unavoidable idle time: Time lost between the gate and place of work, break
for tea, time interval between one job and another, time for tool setting, adjustment of machine,
etc.
(ii) Normal idle time such as waits for jobs, tools, materials or instructions, small power failures, small
breakdown of machines and tools, and atmospheric conditions.
(iii) Abnormal idle time such as those arising due to breakdown for considerable period, non-availability
of raw materials, slack supervision, strikes or lock-outs, fire flood, storm, etc.
(iv) Concealed idle time such as manipulation of job breaking, wastage of time due to under-
employment, i.e., unnecessary work like cleaning, grass cutting and gardening to employ idle men,
and employment of skilled workers on unskilled jobs.
Idle time should not be booked directly to jobs or production orders because such a practice not only
increases the cost of direct labour, but also vitiates comparison of idle time costs from time to time. In
booking of time, idle or waiting time should not normally record in the job card but on separate idle
time cards. Separate cards or registers may be provided for recording idle time according to the causes
which give rise to it.
Treatment of Idle Time
As per CAS-7 (Limited Revision 2017), Idle Time Cost shall be assigned direct to the cost object or treated
as overheads depending on the economic feasibility and specific circumstances causing such idle
time.
Treatment of different categories of Idle Time are as below:-
(a) Unavoidable idle time above would be for insignificant periods. In Cost Accounts, this is allowed
to remain merged in the Production Order or Standing Order Number on which the worker was
otherwise employed.
(b) Normal Idle Time is booked to factory or works overhead. For the purpose of effective control,
each type of idle time, i.e., idle time classified according to the causes is allocated to a separate
Standing Order Number.
(c) Abnormal Idle Time would usually be heavy in amount involves longer periods and would mostly be
beyond the control of the management. Payment for such idle time is not included in cost and is
adjusted through the Costing Profit and Loss Account or included in Profit and Loss Account, when
the accounts are integrated.

Cost Accounting
(d) Tendency to conceal Idle Time should be discouraged. It is a non-effective time and the resultant
loss of profit due to reduced production activity but also increases the cost per unit of production
as the fixed costs continue to be incurred, irrespective of the reduced quantum of production due
to loss of labour time. Idle Time should, therefore, be highlighted prominently so that action can
be taken to remove the causes thereof. Although for obvious reasons, it is not possible to record
minor details, vigilance is necessary for finding out long-term idleness among the workers.
Idle Time Preventive Measures

Idle Time may be eliminated or reduced to a large extent by taking suitable preventive measures such
as (a) proper planning of production in advance, thus reducing imbalances in production facilities, (b)
timely provisioning of materials, (c) regular maintenance of machines so as to avoid breakdown, and
(d) careful watch over the labour utilization statement. The remedial measure to be taken will, no doubt,
depend upon the particular factor or situation which caused the Idle Time.
General principles in designing the system of remuneration to Employee

Remuneration is the reward for labour under normal circumstances and is generally based on either time
spent or on the result produced. The former is called “time-related” remuneration and the latter is known
as “Piece-related” remuneration. The fixation of method of remuneration in a proper manner is vitally
important for any organisation because it deals with the most sensitive item of the input, i.e., Labour.
The general principles which should be considered in designing a proper method of labour remuneration
is summarized below:-
(a) The basis should be simple to understand and the various segments of the system, should clearly
mention in detail.
(b) The employees should be able to accept the method without any doubts or hesitation in their mind.
(c) The method should be flexible enough to adopt any changes or variation which may become
inevitable at a later stage.
(d) The method should be able to cut down/stabilize the labour turnover which is often causes due to
unsatisfactory or unacceptable method of remuneration.
(e) The method should assure fair wages to the employees so that both the employers and the
employees can gain by such methods, the former by way of higher productivity and the latter by
way of higher earnings.
(f) Incentive payments should be a part of the method of remuneration with a view to increase the
labour productivity.
(g) The method should be able to minimise the level of absentees so that avoidable wastages in labour
cost can be reduced.
(h) The method should ultimately result into higher production and improved quality of the output.
Methods of Wage Payment

One of the important components of Labour Cost Control is the wages system. A system of wage payment,
which takes care of both, i.e. providing guarantee of minimum wages as well as offering incentive to
efficient workers helps to motivate the workers to a great extent. It should also be remembered that high
wages do not necessarily mean high labour cost because it may be observed that due to high wages
the productivity of workers is also high and hence the per unit cost of production is actually decreased.
On the other hand, if low wages are paid, it may result in lower productivity and hence higher wages
do not necessarily mean high cost.

The following are the various methods of payment of wages.

A. Time Rate System
(a) At ordinary levels.
(b) At high wage levels and
(c) Graduated Time Rate.
B. Piece Rate
(a) Straight Piece Rate.
(b) Piece Rate with Guaranteed Day Rates and
(c) Differential Piece Rates.
C. Bonus Systems
(a) Individual Bonus for Direct Workers.
(b) Group Bonus for Direct Workers and
(c) Bonus for Indirect Workers.
D. Indirect Monetary Incentives

(a) Profit Sharing and
(b) Co-partnerships.
E. Non monetary incentives like job security, social and general welfare, sports, medical facilities etc.
These methods are discussed in the following paragraphs:-
A. Time Rate Method
Time Rate at Ordinary Levels

Under this method, rate of payment of wages per hour is fixed and payment is made accordingly on the
basis of time worked irrespective of the output produced. However, overtime is paid as per the statutory
provisions. The main benefit of this method for the workers is that they get guarantee of minimum income
irrespective of the output produced by them. If a worker is not able to work due to genuine reasons like
illness or physical disability, he will continue to get the wages on the basis of time taken for a particular
job. This method is used in the following situation:-
(a) Where the work requires high skill and quality is more important than the quantity.
(b) Where the output/services is not quantifiable, i.e. where the output/services cannot be measured.
(c) Where the work done by one person is dependent upon other person, in other words where a
individual worker has no control over the work.
(d) Where the speed of production is governed by time in process or speed of a machine.
(e) Where the workers are learners or inexperienced.
(f) Where continuous supervision is not possible.
The main advantage of this method is that the worker is assured of minimum income irrespective of the
output produced. He can focus on quality as there is no monetary incentive for producing more output.
However, the main limitation of this method is that it does not offer any incentive to the efficient workers.
Efficient and inefficient workers are paid at the same rate of wages and hence there is a possibility that
even an efficient worker may become inefficient due to lack of incentive.

Cost Accounting
Time Rate at High Wage Levels

This system is a variation of time rate at ordinary levels in the sense that in this system, workers are paid
at time rate but the rate is much higher than that is normally paid in the industry or area. In this method,
the workers are paid according to the time taken and overtime is not normally allowed. This method
offers a very strong incentive to workers and it can attract talented workers in the industry. However,
care should be taken that productivity also increases; otherwise the cost will go on increasing.
Graduated Time Rate
Under this method payment is made at time rate, which varies according to personal qualities of the
workers. The rate also changes with the official cost of living index.
Thus this method is suitable for both employer and employees.
B. Piece Rate Method
This method is also called as payment by results where the workers are paid as per the production
achieved by them. Thus if a worker produces higher output, he can earn higher wages.
Under the piece rate system of wage payment the workers receive a flat rate of wages either for time
worked or for units manufactured.
The advantages of such a system are summarised below:-
(a) As the workers are paid on the basis of the results, i.e., for each unit produced, job performed or
number of operations completed, there is a tendency on their part to increase their production so
that they may earn more wages.
(b) The increased production thus achieved results in the reduction of overhead expenses per unit of
production even through total overheads may increase. The increase in overheads will be relatively
small as compared to the increase in turnover.
(c) The wages being paid on the basis of production, the management know the labour cost per unit
or per job.
(d) The workers are rewarded for their efficiency because the inefficient workers will not get as much
as the efficient workers.
(e) The workers are very careful in handling their tools and machinery, etc., because on the proper
maintenance of these depends their higher efficiency and in turn, their higher wages.
(f) This method is very simple to operate.
The Disadvantages on the other hand are as follows:-

(a) It is not easy to determine the piece work rate on an equitable basis. When a rate has been fixed
and later on it is found to be too high, it is very difficult to reduce it as its reduction will cause
dissatisfaction and friction among the workers.
(b) As the labour cost per unit remains the same, the employees do not gain as a result of increase in
productivity except to some extent in the form of reduction in overheads. As such if the overhead
expenses per unit are relatively small, the advantage to the employer will not be significant.
(c) Sometimes quantity may increase at the cost of quality. For the reason, a strict inspection has to
be maintained in the form of quality control. This will result into additional expenditure.
(d) Materials may be used in excessive quantities and may be handed carelessly on account of the
workers’ efforts to achieve high output.
(e) This method may cause discontentment amongst those who are slow and those who are paid on
time basis.
(f) The workers may in an attempt to increase production, handle the machines carelessly causing
major damage or breakdown.

The following are the variations of this method.

Straight Piece Rate
In this method, rate per unit is fixed and the worker is paid according to this rate. For example, if the
rate per unit is fixed at `10, and the output produced is 300 units, the remuneration to the worker will be
`10 X 300 units = `3, 000. This method thus offers a very strong incentive to the workers and is particularly
suitable where the work is repetitive. The benefits of this method are as follows:-
(a) The method is simple and provides a very strong incentive to the workers by linking the monetary
reward directly to the results.
(b) Productivity can be increased substantially if the rate of pay includes a really adequate incentive.
(c) Higher productivity will result in lowering the cost per unit.
However, the main limitation of this method is that if a worker is not able to work efficiently due to reasons
beyond his control, he will be penalized in the form of lower wages.
Differential Piece Rates
Under these methods, the rate per standard hour of production is increased as the output level rises.
The increase in rates may be proportionate to the increase in output or proportionately more or less
than that as may be decided. In other words, a worker is paid higher wages for higher productivity as
an incentive. The rate per unit will be higher in this case as compared to the rate paid to a worker with
lower productivity. For deciding the efficiency, comparison is made between the standard production
and actual production of the worker. If the actual production is more, the worker qualifies for higher rate
of wages. The Differential Piece Rate methods will be useful when the production is of repetitive type,
methods of production are standardized and the output can be identified with individual workers. The
following are the major systems of differential piece rate system:-
(i) Taylor (ii) Merrick (iii) Gantt Task and Bonus
Taylor’s Differential Piece Rate System
Taylor is regarded as father of scientific management and he has recommended a system of Differential
Piece Rate. According to him, there are only two classes of workers, efficient and inefficient. He suggests
that while efficient workers should be encouraged to the maximum possible extent, the inefficient workers
should be penalized. In order to do this, he has suggested two rates for the two classes of workers. Thus
according to Taylor, if the workers are efficient, they should be paid @ 120% of the normal piece rate
and if they are inefficient, they should be paid @ 80% of the normal piece rate. For measuring efficiency,
each worker will be given a standard production quantity to be produced in the time allowed and
the actual production should be compared with the same. If a worker exceeds the standard, he will
be regarded as efficient while if he fails to do so, he will be regarded as inefficient. The positive and
negative points of this system are as follows:-
Merits:-
(a) There is a very strong incentive to the workers, which helps to achieve higher productivity.
(b) Due to the incentive, best workers are attracted to the company.
(c) This method is quite simple and hence easy to understand.
Limitations:
(a) Slow workers and beginners are penalized severely. Similarly workers get penalized for reasons
beyond their control, e.g. medical reasons, accidents etc. Therefore it is said that there is no human
element in this system.
(b) In an anxiety to produce more, quality may be neglected in order to achieve higher quantity of
production.

Cost Accounting
Illustration 3
From the following particulars, calculate the earnings of workers X and Y and also comment on the
labour cost.
Standard time allowed: 20 units per hour
Normal time rate: `30 per hour
Differential Rate to be applied:
80% of piece rate when below standard
120% of piece rate at or above standard
In a particular day of 8 hours, X produces 140 units while Y produces 165 units.
Solution:
Standard production per day is 20 units × 8 hours = 160 units
Worker ‘X’ produces 140 units which means he is below standard and will get wages @ 80% of the
normal piece rate.
X’s earnings:
Normal piece rate = `30 per hour/20 units = `1.5 per unit
80% of the normal piece rate = `1.20 per unit
Earnings = `1.20 × 140 units = `168
Labour cost per unit = `168/140 units = `1.20
Y’s Earnings:
Y has produced more than the standard production of 160 units and hence he will
get wages @ 120% of normal piece rate. His earnings will be as shown below.
Normal piece rate = `30 per hour/20 units = `1.50 per unit
120% of normal piece rate = `1.80 per unit
Earnings = `1.80 ×165 units = `297
Labour cost per unit = `2.97/165 units = `1.80
Comment: Labour cost increases from `1.20 per unit to `1.80 per unit. Taylor’s system is resisted on this
ground as well as on the ground that it is very harsh on the workers.
Merrick Differential Piece Rate System
Merrick’s system is modification of Taylor’s system and is comparatively less harsh on the workers. The
scale of remunerations is as follows:-
Production Rates of Payment
Up to 83% of production - Normal piece rate
83% to 100% of production - 110% of ordinary piece rate
Above 100% of production - 120% of ordinary piece rate
As mentioned earlier, this method is less harsh on the workers as compared to Taylor’s system. It is
particularly useful to beginners and also offers an incentive who have potential of higher productivity.

Gantt Task Bonus Plan

In this method, there is a combination of time rate, bonus and piece rate plan. The remuneration is
computed as shown below:
Production below standard - Guaranteed time rate
Production at standard - Bonus of 20% [normally] of time rate
Production above standard - High piece rate for the entire output
This method assures minimum wages for even too less efficient workers and hence is a preferred method
of payment of wages. It also offers reasonably good incentive to efficient workers. However, the main
limitation is that the method is complicated to understand by the workers and hence may create
confusion amongst them.
Illustration 4
X, Y and Z are three workers working in a manufacturing company and their output during a particular
40 hours week was 96, 111 and 126 units respectively. The guaranteed rate per hour is `10 per hour, low
piece rate is `4 per unit, and high piece rate is `6 per unit. High task is 100 units per week. Compute the
total earnings and labour cost per unit under Taylor, Merrick and Gantt Task Bonus Plan.
Solution:
(a) Taylor Plan:
High task is 100 units
Worker X = Actual output is 96 units, which is less than the standard. This means he is inefficient
and will get 80% of the normal piece rate i.e. @ `4.80 per unit. His wages will be = `4.80 ×96 units =
`460.80.
Worker Y = Actual output is 111 units which is more than the standard. This means he is efficient
and will get 120% of the normal piece rate i.e. `7.20 per unit. His wages will be = `7.20 × 111 units =
`799.20
Worker Z = Actual output is 126 units, more than the standard. This means his wages will be = `7.20
×126 units = `907.20.
(b) Merrick Plan:
Worker X = High task is 100 units, actual output is 96, this means that the efficiency level is 96%. As
per Merrick Plan, wages of X will be 110% of normal piece rate which is `6.60 per unit = `6.60 × 96
units = `633.6
Worker Y = High task is 100 units, actual output is 111 units, efficiency level is 111%. Y will be entitled
for wages @ 120% of normal piece rate i.e. @ `7.20 per unit. His wages will be, `7.20 × 111 units =
`799.2
Worker Z = High task is 100 units, actual output is 126 units, efficiency level is 126%. Z will get at higher
piece rate @ `7.20 per unit. His wages will be `7.20 × 126 units = `907.2
(c) Gantt Task and Bonus Plan:
Worker X = `10 × 40 hours = `400 [X will get guaranteed time rate as his output is below the high
task]
Worker Y = `6 × 111 units = `666 [High piece rate as output is above standard]
Worker Z = `6 × `126 units = `756 [High piece rate as output is above standard]
Individual Bonus Plans:
We have seen earlier that in the time rate system, the workers are paid according to the time taken while
in case of piece rate system, the output produced by the worker decides his wages as rate per unit is
fixed rather than rate per hour. In the premium bonus plan, the gain arising out of increased productivity
is shared by both, the employer and employee.

Cost Accounting
The bonus to be paid to the workers is computed on the basis of savings in the hours, i.e. the difference
between the time allowed and time taken. The time allowed is the standard time, which is fixed by
conducting a time and motion study by the work-study engineers. While fixing the standard time, due
allowance is given for physical and mental fatigue as well as for normal idle time. The actual time taken
is compared with this standard time and bonus is payable to the worker if the time taken is less than
the standard time.
The individual bonus schemes commonly used are as follows.
(a) Halsey Premium Plan
(b) Halsey-Weir Premium Plan
(c) Rowan Plan
(d) Barth Variable Sharing Plan
These methods are discussed below:-
(a) Halsey Premium Plan

This plan was introduced by F.A. Halsey, an American engineer. In this plan, bonus is paid on the basis of
time saved. Standard time is fixed for a job and if the actual time taken is less than the same, the worker
becomes eligible for bonus. However bonus is paid equal to wages of 50% of the time saved. A worker
is assured of time wages if he takes longer time than the allowed time. The formula for computing the
total wages is as follows.
Total Earnings = H X R + 50% [S – H] R
Where, H = Hours worked, R = Rate per hour, S = Standard time
Illustration 5
Time allowed for a job is 48 hours; a worker takes 40 hours to complete the job. Time rate per hour is `15.
Compute the total earnings of the worker.
Solution:
Total Earnings = H X R + 50% [S – H] R
Total Earnings = 40 X `15 + 50% [48 – 40] `15
Total Earnings = `600 + `60 = `660
(b) Halsey – Weir Plan

Under this method, there is only one difference as compared to the Halsey Plan and that is instead of
50% bonus for the time saved, it is 33 31 rd % of the time saved. Accordingly the formula for this method
is modified as follows.
Total Earnings = H × R + 33 31 [S-H]R
H = Hours worked. R = Rate per hour, S = Standard time
(c) Rowan Plan

This premium bonus plan was introduced by Mr. James Rowan. It is similar to that of Halsey Plan in
respect of time saved, but bonus hours are calculated as the proportion of the time taken which the
time saved bears to the time allowed and they are paid for at time rate. The formula for computation
of total earnings is as follows:-
Total Earnings = H × R + [S – H]/S × H × R
Where H = Hours worked, R = Rate per hour, S = Standard time,

(d) Barth Variable Sharing Plan:

In this system, the total earnings are calculated as follows:
Total Earnings = R × S × H
H = Hours worked, R = Rate per hour, S = Standard time.
Group Bonus Plan:
The plans described above are all individual bonus plans. Many times output of individuals cannot be
measured. Similarly, the output of individual is dependent on the performance of the group. In such
cases, rather than implementing individual bonus systems, group bonus system is implemented. The
total amount of bonus, which is determined according to productivity, can then be shared equally or in
agreed proportion between the group members. The main objects of group bonus system are as follows:-
(a) Creation of team spirit.
(b) Elimination of excessive waste of materials and time.
(c) Recognition of group efforts.
(d) Improving productivity.
Different Group Bonus Schemes in use are as follows:-
(i) Budgeted Expenses Bonus: Under this system, bonus is based on the savings in actual total
expenditure compared with the budgeted expenditure.
(ii) Cost Efficiency Bonus: In this method, standards are set for expenses like material, labour and
overheads. The actual expenditure against these standards is measured and if there is a savings in
actual expenditure as compared to the standards, a portion of such savings is distributed as bonus
amongst the workers.
(iii) Pristman System: In this method, production standards are set in units or points and actual production
is compared with the standards. If the actual production exceeds the standard, the workers are
paid additional wages equal to the percentage of output over standard. Obviously no bonus is
payable if actual production does not exceed the standard production. This method is mainly used
in foundries.
(iv) Towne Profit Sharing Plan: In this method standards are set for costs [mainly labour cost] and the
actual cost is compared with the standards. If there is a saving in the costs, the saving is shared by
workers and supervisory staff in agreed proportion. The principle behind this method is that if there
is a saving in the cost, not only the workers but the supervisory staff should also get the reward
because the cost reduction is the joint efforts of both the types of staff. Hence both, workers and
supervisors share it.
(v) Waste Reduction Bonus: This system of bonus is based on savings in the material cost. If there is
a saving in the material cost, the workers share the same in the agreed proportion. This system is
generally used in industries where cost of material is very high.
(vi) Rucker Plan: The amount of bonus is linked with ‘value added’ in this system. The ‘value added’
is obtained by deducting the cost of material and services from sales value. In other words, value
added is the total of labour, overheads and profits. Under this plan, employees receive a constant
proportion of value added. For example, if the target ratio of labour cost to value added is 70%, and
the actual ratio comes to 68%, 2% of the actual value added is distributed as group bonus, so that
the ratio of direct labour cost to value added is maintained at 70%. Normally instead of distributing
the entire bonus, some proportion is distributed and the remaining is transferred to reserve fund.
(vii) Scanlon Plan: This method is similar to the Rucker plan as discussed above except that the ratio
of labour cost to the sales is taken instead of direct labour cost to added value. Normally bonus is
paid based on average of last three years ratios. A part of the bonus may be transferred to bonus
equalization fund for future use when the workers do not get bonus under this scheme.

Cost Accounting
Bonus System for Indirect Workers:

Indirect workers do not take part in the production process directly but they play important role in the
production process. It is difficult to chalk out a bonus system for indirect workers, as there is a difficulty
in measuring their output. However it is advisable to plan a bonus system for indirect workers in order
to motivate them for better productivity. Bonus to indirect workers is paid on the basis of output of the
department, saving in time or expenditure against the budgeted, product quality, reduction of waste
and scrap and reduction of labour turnover.
Indirect Monetary Incentives:
These methods aim at giving additional remuneration based on the prosperity of the concern. The
following schemes fall in this category:-
(a) Profit Sharing: In this system, the profits of the organization are shared by workers in agreed proportion.
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965 in India makes it mandatory to pay minimum bonus of 8.33% of
salary and maximum bonus of 20% of salary to the workers.
(b) Co-partnership: In this system, the workers get an opportunity to participate in the ownership of
the organization and to receive the part of share of profits. The employees are given assistance to
purchase shares of the company. Thus the employees get dividend and bonus also. These schemes
help to boost the morale of workers to a great extent.
Non-Monetary Incentives
These incentives are given in addition to monetary incentives for further boosting the moral of the
employees. Though these benefits do not result in additional remuneration, they help to improve
productivity by boosting the morale of the employees.
Some of the non-monetary incentives are as follows:-
(a) Free education and training.
(b) Medical benefits.
(c) Subsidized canteens.
(d) Superannuation benefits like pensions, gratuity, life assurance schemes etc.
(e) Sports and recreation facilities, housing facilities, long service awards.
(f) Job security, promotion schemes.
(g) Benevolent funds and welfare fund.
Treatment of some of the Employee Cost items in Costing:
(a) Supervisors salary / Foreman’s Salary
The foreman is mainly concerned with the supervision of man and machines in the workshop and
so his salary is ‘works indirect expenses’ and must be charged to Works Expenses Account and
included in works overhead. It is apportioned on the basis of degree of supervision required on
such machine or men.
If he devotes equal time for all the machines his salary should be equally charged off against all of
them. In case he devoted more time to a particular machine or to a particular batch of workers,
proportionately higher share of his salary should be borne by that particular machine or batch of
workers.
(b) Bonus Under Payment of Bonus Act, 1965
The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 provides that to the eligible employees a minimum bonus @ 8-1/3%
of gross annual earning will have to be paid irrespective of profits made or losses incurred. If there
is adequate profit a higher bonus is paid but upto the maximum limit of 20% of gross earnings.

Therefore it is clear that the minimum bonus is a definite charge against profit because even in case
of loss this bonus is payable and according to the classification of labour-direct or indirect- should
be included in direct labour cost or production overhead. The portion of bonus over and above
the minimum is based on profit and should be charged off to Costing Profit and Loss Account and
not taken into the cost at all. However, some accountants argued that this portion of bonus should
also be taken into the cost in appropriate heads of Direct Labour or Production Overhead. But the
former treatment should be taken as more sensible.
(c) Leave Travel Assistance
Leave Travel Assistance is paid to practically all the employees presently and therefore can be
considered as a regular element of labour or staff cost as the case may be. This expenditure is of
a fixed nature and can be easily predetermined. Depending whether the assistance is payable
to direct labour, indirect labour or staff the expenditure should be treated as Direct Labour Cost,
Production Overhead Cost or Administrative Selling Overhead Cost and should be appropriately
charged.
(d) Night Shift Allowance
It is customary practice that the persons working in night shifts are paid some extra and such an
allowance is known as night shift allowance. Such additional expenditure caused by general
pressure of work in excess of normal capacity are charged to general production overhead
because otherwise job performed during days will be cheaper than the jobs completed during
night which by no means a fair proposition. If the additional expenditure is incurred extremely as
a result of pressing demands from customers such expenditure should directly be charged to the
job concerned. On the other hand if the night shifts are run for a fault of the particular department
the night shift allowance should be charged as the departmental overhead applicable to the
concerned department.
(e) Fringe Benefits
Fringe benefits are those expenses which are spent by an employer against the individual employees
for their welfare. Normally such expenses do not form a part of their pay packet, e.g., ESI contri
bution made by an employer. Such expenses may be recovered separately as a percentage on
labour cost or at an hourly rate. Alternatively, those may be treated as overheads and apportioned
to cost centres on the basis of wages/salary cost.
(f) Work on Holidays and Weekly off Days
Usually work on such days is to be paid at a higher rate than the normal days’ grace. The extra
payment involved is treated in the same manner as in the cases of overtime premium as stated
before (refer treatment of overtime). Normal wages are charged direct to the work orders/ job/
process handled during the period.
(g) Attendance Bonus
This is paid to workers based on satisfactory attendance over a stated period and is a fringe benefit.
The cost is to be collected under a standing order number and charged as a departmental overhead
as the expenses cannot be allocated to cost units directly.
In case the cost is disproportionate from months to months, a proportionate amount may be
charged in each period to avoid variation in cost.
When the cost is of a regular nature it may be booked as direct wages and charged by an inflated
rate over the Direct Labour Cost. But this is however, not a sound policy.
(h) Employer’s contribution to Employees’ Provident Fund
This is an obligatory charge under the Employees Provident Fund Act of 1952 and the scheme
framed there under. This should be treated as part of direct wages of workers. The direct wages

Cost Accounting
paid should be inflated for the cost involved and the products of jobs charged at an inflated rate.
An alternative treatment can be made as such that the contribution for the indirect workers is an
item of overhead.
(i) Lost time due to a major overhauling of a machine as result of severe breakdowns
Manufacturing concerns having a number of machines in the factory usually follow a maintenance
schedule whereby the entire factory is overhauled once a year. The related cost of such period
consisting mainly of fixed cost is estimated and apportioned as a manufacturing/factory overhead
over the annual production. But a sudden and severer breakdown may upset the production plan
and call for major overhaul of machine. Such an occurrence is certainly abnormal and all costs
related to the breakdown and overhaul should be collected through a separate standing order
number and transferred to the costing Profit and Loss Account thereby into distorting the normal
cost of production
Illustration 6
Calculate the total earnings and effective rate of earnings per hour of three operators under Rowan
System and Halsey System from the following particulars.
The standard time fixed for producing 1 dozen articles is 50 hours. The rate of wages is `1/- per hour.
The actual time taken by three are as follows:-
A 45 hours
B 40 hours
C 30 hours.
Solution:
Computation of Total Earnings of workers under Halsey Plan
Earnings under Halsey Plan = Hours worked × Rate per hour + (50% × Time saved × Rate per hour)
Worker Earnings Effective Rate
A E = (45 x 1) + 50/100 (50-45) x 1 Effective Rate = 47.5/45
= 47.5 = 1.06
B E = (40 x 1) + 50/100 (50-40) x 1 Effective Rate = 45/40
= 45 = 1.125
C E = (30 x 1) + 50/100 (50-30) x 1 Effective Rate = 40/30
= 40 = 1.33
Computation of Total Earnings of workers under Rowan Plan
Earnings under Rowan Plan =
Time saved
Hours worked × Rate per hour + ( × Hours worked × Rate per hour)
Time allowed
Earnings Effective Rate
A E = (45 x 1) + [50-45 / 50] 45 x 1 Effective Rate = 49.5/45
= 45 + 4.5 = 1.1
= 49.5
B E = (40 x 1) + [50-40 / 50] 40 x 1 Effective Rate = 48/40
= 40 + 8 = 1.2
= 48
C E = (30 x 1) + [50-30 / 50] 30 x 1 Effective Rate = 42/30
= 30 + 12 = 1.4
= 42

Illustration 7
A workman takes 9 hours to complete a job on daily wages and 6 hours on a scheme of payment by
results. His hourly rate is 25 p. The Material cost of the product is `4 and factory overheads are recovered
at 150% of the total direct wages. Calculate the factory cost of the product under following methods:-
(a) Time rate system (b) Halsey Plan (c) Rowan Plan.
Solution:
Computation of factory cost under three systems: Amount (`)
Time Rate System Halsey Plan Rowan Plan

Material 4.00 4.00 4.00
Labour (working notes) 2.25 1.88 2.00
Overheads (150% of total direct wages) 3.38 2.82 3.00
Factory Cost 9.63 8.70 9.00
Working Notes: Amount (`)
Time Rate System Halsey Plan Rowan Plan

Labour 9 x 0.25 6 x 0.25 + 1/2 (9-6) x 0.25 6 x 0.25 + (9-6 / 9) x 6 x 0.25
2.25 1.88 2.00
Illustration 8
A worker under the Halsey method of remuneration has a day rate of `12 per week of 48 hours, plus
a cost of living bonus of 10 p. per hour worked. He is given 8 hours task to perform, which he performs
in 6 hours, he is allowed 30% of the time saved as premium bonus. What would be his earnings under
Halsey Plan and Rowan Plan.
Solution:
Computation of earnings of worker under Halsey Plan:
Earnings under Halsey Plan = Hours worked × Rate per hour + (30% × Time Saved × Rate per hour)
= (6 x 0.25) + 30/100 (8-6) x 0.25 = 1.65
(+) Cost of Living Bonus (6 x 0.1) = 0.60
Earnings under Halsey Plan = `2.25
Computation of earnings of worker under Rowan Plan:

Earnings under Rowan Plan =
Time saved
Hours worked × Rate per hour + ( × Hours worked × Rate per hour)
Time allowed
= (6 × 0.25) + (8-6 / 8) × 6 × 0.25 = 1.88
(+) Cost of Living Bonus (6 × 0.1) = 0.60
= `2.48
Earnings under Halsey Plan = ` 2.25
Earnings under Rowan Plan = ` 2.48

Cost Accounting
Illustration 9
In a factory guaranteed wages at the rate of ` 1.80 per hour are paid in a 48 hour week. By time and
motion study it is estimated that to manufacture one unit of a particular product 20 minutes are taken,
the time allowed is increased by 25% . During the week A produced 180 units of the product. Calculate
his wages under the following methods:
(a) Time Rate.
(b) Piece Rate with a guaranteed weekly wage.
(c) Halsey premium Bonus.
(d) Rowan Premium Bonus.
Solution:
(a) Calculation of wages under Time Rate System
Earnings under time wages = TR
= 48 × 1.8 = ` 86.4
(b) Calculation of wages under Piece Rate with a Guaranteed Wage Rate
Normal Time for one unit = 20 minutes
(+) Relaxation allowance @ 25% = 5 minutes
Standard Time = 25 minutes
No. of pieces per hour = 60/25 pieces.
Piece Rate = Hourly Rate / No. of pieces per hour
= 1.8 ÷ (60/25)
= 0.75
Earnings under Piece Rate = 180 x 0.75 = ` 135
(c) Calculation of wages under Halsey Premium Bonus
Standard time for actual production = 180 x 25 / 60 = 75 hours
Earnings under Halsey Plan =
= (48 x 1.8) + 50/100 (75-48) x 1.8
= 86.4 + 24.3 = ` 110.70
(d) Calculation of wages under Rowan Premium Bonus
Standard time for actual production = 180 x 25 / 60 = 75 hours
Earnings under Rowan Plan = (48 x 1.8) + (75-48 / 75) x (48 x 1.8)
= 86.4 + 31.104 = ` 117.50
Illustration 10
Calculate the earnings of workers A and B under Straight Piece Rate system and Taylor’s Differential
Piece Rate system from the following particulars:-
Normal rate per hour - `1.80
Standard time per unit 20 seconds
Differentials to be applies are:
80% of the piece rate below the standard;
120% of the piece rate at or above standard.
A produced 1,300 units per day of 8 hours & B -1,500 units per day of 8 hours.

Solution:
Pieces per minute = 60/20 = 3 units
Units per hour = 60 x 3 = 180 units
Normal piece rate = 1.8 /180 = ` 0.01
Standard production in actual time = 8 x 180 = 1440 units
Earnings under Straight Piece Rate:
Earnings of A = 1300 x 0.01 = ` 13.00
Earnings of B = 1500 x 0.01 = ` 15.00
Earnings under Taylor’s Differential Piece Rate:
A’s efficiency = 1300 / 1440 x 100 = 90.28%
= < 100%
A’s Earnings = 1300 x 0.01 x 80%
= ` 10.42
B’s efficiency = 1500 / 1440 x 100 = 104.17%
= > 100 %
B’s Earnings = 1500 x 0.01 x 120%
= ` 18
Illustration 11
The following particulars apply to a particular job:
Standard production per hour - 6 units
Normal rate per hour - ` 1.20
Mohan produced 32 units
Ram produces 42 units
Prasad produces 50 units
Calculate the wages of these workers under Merrick Differential Piece Rate System.
Solution:
Calculation of wages of workers under Merrick Differential Piece Rate System
Normal Piece rate = 1.2 / 6 = 0.20
Standard Production = 6 x 8 (assumed hrs) = 48 units
Mohan’s efficiency = 32/48 x 100 = 66.67% (< 83%)
Mohan’s Earnings = 32 x 0.2 = ` 6.4
Ram’s efficiency = 42/48 x 100 = 87.5% (> 83 but < 100%)
Ram’s Earnings = 42 x 0.2 x 110/100 = ` 9.24
Prasad’s efficiency = 50/48 x 100 = 104.17 (> 100%)
Prasad’s Earnings = 50 x 0.20 x 120/100 = ` 12

Cost Accounting
Illustration 12
In a manufacturing concern the daily wage rate is `2.50. The standard output in a 6 day week is 200 units
representing 100% efficiency. The daily wage rate is paid without bonus to those workers who show up to
66 2/3% of the efficiency standard. Beyond this there is a bonus payable on a graded scale as below:-
82% efficiency - 5% bonus
90% Efficiency - 9% bonus
100% efficiency - 20% bonus
Further increase of 1% for every 1% further rise in efficiency. In a 6 day week A produced 180 units; B 164
units; C 200 units; D 208 units and E 130 units.
Calculate the earnings of these workers.
Solution:
A’s efficiency = (180 / 200) x 100 = 90%
A’s Earnings = (6 x 2.5) + 9% of (6 x 2.5) = ` 16.35
B’s efficiency = (164 / 200) x 100 = 82%
B’s Earnings = (6 x 2.5) + 5% of (6 x 2.5) = ` 15.75
C’s efficiency = (200 / 200) x 100 = 100%
C’s Earnings = (6 x 2.5) + 20% of (6 x 2.5) = ` 18.00
D’s efficiency = (208 / 200) x 100 = 104%
D’s Earnings = (6 x 2.5) + 24% of (6 x 2.5) = ` 18.60
E’s efficiency = (130 / 200) ×100 = 65%
E’s Earnings = 6 x 2.5 = ` 15.00
Illustration 13
Workmen of a particular grade working on 8 hour shift duty are guarantees a wage of ` 32. An
incentive scheme is in operation according to which production bonus is earned directly proportional
to performance but only after 100% performance is reached. Four workmen A,B,C and D produce 48,
60, 75 and 90 units respectively in 6 hours working on a job which has standard time of 6 minutes per
unit as measured work content. Remaining 2 hours of the shift are spent in doing unmeasured work for
which no incentive bonus can be paid. Find for each workman:
(a) The production performance level achieved;
(b) Total earnings for the day.
Solution:
Statement showing computation of performance achieved and total earnings of 4 workers:
Particulars A B C D
I Standard output (6 x 60 / 6) 60 60 60 60
II Actual output 48 60 75 90
III Performance level 80% 100% 125% 150%
IV Wages for measured work (6 x 4) 24 24 24 24
V Bonus [C = 24 x 25%] [D = 24 x 50%] -- -- 6 12
VI Wages for unmeasured work (2 x 4) 8 8 8 8
VII Total earnings (IV + V + VI) 32 32 38 44

Illustration 14
The following particulars for the first week of September, 2015 relate to X and Y two workers employed
in a factory:
X Y
a) Job Completed — units 3,600 4,200
b) Out of above output rejected and unsalable 540 420
c) Time allowed 12 Mts/dozen 3 Hrs./200 units
d) Basic wage rate per hour `5 `6
e) Hours worked 45 50
The normal working hours per week are fixed at 42 hours. Bonus is paid @ 2/3 of the basic wage rate
for gross time worked and gross output produced without deduction for rejected output. The rate of
overtime for first 4 hours is paid at time plus 1/3 and for next 4 hours is paid at time plus 1/2.
From the above data calculate for each employed
a) Number of bonus hours and amount of bonus earned;
b) Total wages earned including basic wages overtime premium and bonus;
c) Direct wages cost per 100 saleable units.
Solution:
Particulars X Y
1. No. of units completed 3,600 4,200
2. Rejected units 540 420
3. Saleable units 3,060 3,780
4. Standard time 60 hrs 63 hrs
5. Actual time worked 45 hrs 50 hrs
6. Bonus hours 15 hrs 13 hrs
7. Amount of bonus 50 52
(15 x 5 x 2/3) (13 x 6 x 2/3)
8. Overtime wages 20 68
(3 x 5 x 4/3) [(4 x 6 x 4/3) + (4 x 6x 3/2)]
9. Basic wages 210 252
(42 x 5) (42 x 6)
10. Total wages (7 + 8 + 9) 280 372
11. Direct wage cost of 100 saleable units. 9.15 9.84
(280 / 3060) x 100 (372 / 3780) x 100
Illustration 15
From the following particulars work out the earnings for the week of a worker under
(a) Straight Piece Rate
(b) Differential Piece Rate
(c) Halsey Premium System
(d) Rowan System
Number of working hours per week — 48
Wages per hour — ` 3.75

Cost Accounting
Normal time per piece — 20 Min

Normal output per week — 120 pieces
Actual output for the week — 150 pieces
Differential piece rate — 80% of the piece rate when output is below standard and
120% above standard.
Solution:
Computation of earnings for the week of a worker
(a) Piece rate = (48 x 3.75) / 120 = ` 1.5
Earnings under Straight Piece Rate = 150 x 1.5 = ` 225
(b) Efficiency = (150 / 120) x 100 = 125% (> 100%)
Earnings under Differential Piece Rate = 150 x 1.5 x 120/100
= ` 270
(c) Standard time for actual production = 48 x (150 / 120) = 60 hrs
Earnings under Halsey Plan = (48 x 3.75) + 50/100(60 – 48) x 3.75
= 180 + 22.5 = ` 202.5
(d) Earnings under Rowan Plan = (48 x 3.75) + [(60-48 / 60) x (3.75 x 48)]
= 180 + 36 = ` 216
Illustration 16
Ten men work as a group. When the weekly production of the group exceeds standard (200 pieces
per hour) each man in the group is paid a bonus for the excess production in addition to his wages at
hourly rates. The bonus is computed thus:
The percentage of production in excess of the standard amount is found and one-half of this percentage
is considered as the men’s share. Each man in the group is paid as bonus this percentage of a wage
rate of ` 3.20 per hour. There is no relationship between the individual workman’s hourly rate and the
bonus rate. The following is the week’s records.

Hours Worked Production
Monday 90 22,100
Tuesday 88 22,600
Wednesday 90 24,200
Thursday 84 20,100
Friday 88 20,400
Saturday 40 10,200
480 1,19,600
(a) Compute the rate and amount of bonus for the week;
(b) Compute the total pay of Jones who worked 41 ½ hours and was paid `2 per hour basic and of
Smith who worked 44 ½ hours and was paid ` 2.50 per hour basic.

Solution:
Standard production in actual time = 480 x 200 = 96,000
Excess of actual production over standard = 1,19,600 – 96,000 = 23,600.
% of excess over standard = (23,600 / 96,000) x 100 = 24.58%
% of bonus = 1/2 x 24.58 = 12.29%
Bonus rate per hour = 3.2 x 12.29% = 0.393
Total bonus for week = 480 x 0.393 = ` 188.64
Computation of Total Earnings of Jones & Smith:
Particulars Jones Smith

Basic wages 41.5 x 2 83.00 44.5 x 2.5 111.25
Bonus 41.5 x 0.393 16.31 44.5 x 0.393 17.49
Total Earnings 99.31 128.74
Illustration 17
A manufacturer introduces a new machinery into his factory with the result that production per worker
is increased. The workers are paid by results and it is agreed for every 2% increases in average individual
output, an increase of 1% on the rate of wages will be paid.
At the time the machinery is installed the selling price of the products falls by 8-1/3%. Show the net saving
in production costs which would be required to offset the losses expected from the turnover and bonus
paid to workers.
Ist period IInd period
No.of workers 175 125
Number of articles produced 16,800 14,000
Wages paid 33,600
Total Sales 75,600
Solution:
No. of units per worker in period I — = 16,800 / 175 = 96
No. of units per worker in period II — = 14,000 / 125 = 112
Increase in production per worker — = 16 units
% of increase in output = 16/96 x 100 — = 16 2/3 %
Wages in Period I = 33,600
Wages in Period II = 33,600 x (125 / 175) = 24,000
Increase in wages = 24,000 x 8.33% [16.67 x ½ = 8.33] = 2,000
Sales in Period I = 75,600
Sales in Period II = 75,600 x (14,000 / 16,800) = 63,000
Decrease in Sales = 63,000 x 8 1/3 % = 5,250
Total loss due to increase in wages & reduction in sales = 5,250 + 2,000
= 7,250
To offset the loss, the saving in other must be ` 7,250

Cost Accounting
Illustration 18
A work measurement study was carried out in a firm for 10 hours and the following information was
generated.
Units produced : 350
Idle time : 15%
Performance rating : 120%
Allowance time : 10% of standard time.
What is the standard time for task?
Solution:
Calculation of standard time for task
Total time = 10 x 60 = 600 minutes
(-) Down time or Idle time @ 15% = 90 minutes
Actual time = 510 minutes
Normal Time = 510 x 120% = 612 minutes
(+) Relaxation allowance
(10% or 1/10 on standard time
i.e. 1/9 on normal time) = 68 minutes
Standard time for job = 680 minutes
Standard time for each unit = 680/350 = 1.943 minutes
Illustration 19
The extracts from the payroll of M/s. Maheswari Bros. is as follows:-
Number of employees at the beginning of 2015 150
“ “ “ “ “ “ end of 2015 200
“ “ resigned 20
“ “ discharged 5
“ replaced due to resignation and discharges 20
Calculate the Labour Turnover Rate for the factory by different methods.
Solution:
1) Separation Method = 25 ÷ (150 + 200 / 2) x 100
= 0.1429 x 100
= 14.29 %
2) Replacement Method = (20 / 175) x 100
= 11.43%
3) Flux Method = (25 + 20) ÷ 175 x 100
= 25.71%

Illustration 20
In a factory bonus to workman is paid according to Rowan Plan. Time allotted for a job is 40 hours and
the normal rate of wages is ` 1.25 per hour. The factory overhead charges are 50 paise per hour for the
hours taken.
The factory cost of a work order, executed by a worker is ` 161.875. The cost of material in each case
is `100.
Calculate the hours of time taken by the workman to complete the work order.
Solution:
Let ‘T’ be the time taken by worker.
Earnings = 1.25 T + [(40-T) / 40] x [1.25 T]
= 1.25 T + [(50T – 1.25 T2) / 40]
= [50T + 50 T – 1.25T2] / 40
= [100 T – 1.25T2] / 40
Materials + Wages + Factory Overheads = Factory Cost
⇒ 100 + [100 T – 1.25T2] / 40 + 0.5 T = 161.875
⇒ 4000 + 100 T – 1.25T2 + 20T = 6475
⇒ 1.25T2 – 120 T + 2475 = 0
⇒ 5T2 – 480 T + 9900 = 0
⇒ T2 – 96T + 1980 = 0
96 ± 9216 − 7920
T=
2
96 ± 36
T=
2
T = 66 (or) 30
T = 30 hours (because actual time should not be more than standard time).
Illustration 21
Two fitters, a labourer and a boy undertake a job on piece rate basis for `1,290. The time spent by each
of them is 220 ordinary working hours. The rates of pay on time rate basis, are `1.50 per hour for each
of the two fitters, `1 per hour for the labourer and `0.50 per hour for the boy.
The amount of piece-work premium and the share of each worker, when the piece -work premium is
divided proportionately to the wages paid.
Compute the selling price of the above job on the basis of the following additional data:-
Cost of the direct material `2,010; works overhead at 20% of prime cost; selling overhead at 10% of works
cost and profit at 25% on cost of sales.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Statement showing computation of earnings of each person Amount (`)
Particulars F1 F2 Labourer Boy Total
Basic wages 330 (220x1.5) 330 220 (220x1) 110 (220x0.5) 990
Bonus 100 100 67 33 300
430 430 287 143 1290
Computation of Selling Price of Job
Particulars Amount (`)

Materials 2,010
Labour 1,290
Prime Cost 3,300
(+) Works Overhead @ 20% 660
Works cost 3,960
(+) S & D overheads @ 10% 396
Cost of sales (or) Total Cost 4,356
(+) Profit @ 25% 1,089
Selling Price 5,445
Illustration 22
Two workmen, Vishnu and Shiva, produce the same product using the same material. Their normal wage
rate is also the same. Vishnu is paid bonus according to the Rowan System, while Shiva is paid bonus
according to Halsey System. The time allowed to make the product is 100 hours. Vishnu takes 60 hours
while Shiva takes 80 hours to complete the product. The factory overhead rate is `10 per man-hour
actually worked. The factory cost for the product for Vishnu is `7,280 and for Shiva it is ` 7,600.
You are required:-
(a) to find the normal rate of wages;
(b) to find the cost of materials;
(c) to prepare a statement comparing the factory cost of the products as made by the two works
men.
Solution:
Let ‘R’ be the wage rate and ‘M’ be the material cost.
Earnings of Vishnu = 60 R + [(100-60) / 100] x [60R]
= 60R + 24R = 84R
Material + Wages + Factory Overheads = Factory Cost.
M + 84R + 600 = 7,280
⇒ M + 84 R = 6,680 → (1)
Earnings of Shiva = 80 R + 50% of (100-80) x R
= 80 R + 10 R
= 90 R

Material + Wages + Factory Overheads = Factory Cost.

M + 90R + 800 = 7,600
⇒ M + 90 R = 6,800 → (2)
Solving Equation (1) & (2), we get
M + 84 R = 6,680
M + 90 R = 6,800
- 6R = -120
R = 20
Substitute the value of ‘R’ in Equation (2), we get
M + 90 R = 6,800
⇒ M + 90 (20) = 6,800
⇒ M + 1800 = 6,800
⇒ M = 5,000
Wages of Vishnu = (60 x 20) + [(100-60) / 100] x [60 x 20]
= 1200 + 480 = ` 1680
Wages of Shiva = (80 x 20) + 50% (100 – 80) x 20
= 1600 + 200 = ` 1800
(a) Normal Rate of wages = ` 20
(b) Material Cost = ` 5,000
(c) Statement comparing the factory cost of the products as made by the two worksmen.
Particulars Vishnu Shiva
Material 5,000 5,000
Labour 1,680 1,800
Overheads 600 800
Factory Cost 7,280 7,600
COST ACCOUNTING STANDARD-7 (Limited Revision 2017): EMPLOYEE COST
Employee cost: The aggregate of all kinds of consideration paid, payable and provisions made for future
payments for the services rendered by employees of an enterprise (including temporary, part time and
contract employees). Consideration includes wages, salary, contractual payments and benefits, as
applicable or any payment made on behalf of employee. This is also known as Labour Cost.
Employee Cost
Direct Employee Cost Indirect Employee Cost
The employees cost which The employee cost

can be attributed to a Cost which cannot be
Object in an economically directly attributed to a
feasible way particular cost object

Cost Accounting
Principles of Measurement of Employee Cost: The principles to be followed for measurement of employee
cost are:
Principles of Measurement of Employee Cost
Direct Cost Indirect Cost
Employee costs which

Time Basis Cost Centre Basis
cannot be directly
traceable either to a cost
If directly traceable to a cost If directly object or a cost centre
object - classification on the identifiable with a
basis of time consumed for cost centre
the cost object
Measurement of Employee Cost: Inclusions and Exclusions:

The following items are to be ‘included’ for the purpose of measuring employee cost:
(i) Any payment made to an employee either in cash or kind
(ii) Gross payments including all allowances payable and includes all benefits
(iii) Bonus, ex-gratia, sharing of surplus, remuneration payable to Managerial personnel including
Executive Directors and other officers
(iv) Any amount of amortization arising out of voluntary retirement, retrenchment, termination, etc
(v) Variance in employee payments/costs, due to normal reasons (if standard costing system is followed)
(vi) Any perquisites provided to an employee by the employer
The following items are to be ‘excluded’ for the purpose of measuring employee cost:
(i) Remuneration paid to Non-Executive Director
(ii) Cost of idle time [ = Hours spent as idle time x hourly rate]
(iii) Variance in employee payments/costs, due to abnormal reasons ( if standard costing system is
followed)
(iv) Any abnormal payment to an employee – which are material and quantifiable
(v) Penalties, damages paid to statutory authorities or third parties
(vi) Recoveries from employees towards benefits provided – this should be adjusted/reduced from the
employee cost
(vii) Cost related to labour turnover – recruitment cost, training cost and etc
(viii) Unamortized amount related to discontinued operations.
Illustration 23
Measurement of Employee Cost
Basic pay `5,00,000; Lease rent paid for accommodation provided to an employee `2,00,000, amount
recovered from employee `40,000, Employer’s Contribution to P.F. `75,000, Employee’s Contribution to
P.F. `75,000; Reimbursement of Medical expenses `67,000, Hospitalisation expenses of employee’s family
member borne by the employer `19,000, Festival Bonus Rs.20,000, Festival Advance `30,000. Compute
the Employee cost.

Solution:
Computation of Employee Cost

Basic Pay 5,00,000
Add Net cost to employer towards lease rent paid for accommodation 1,60,000
provided to an employee
[ = lease rent paid less amount recovered from employee]
= [2,00,000 (-) 40,000]

Add Employer’s Contribution to PF 75,000
Add Reimbursement of Medical Expenses 67,000
Add Hospitalisation expenses of employee’s family member paid by the 19,000
employer
Add Festival Bonus 20,000
Employee Cost 8,41,000
Note:
(i) Festival advance is a recoverable amount, hence not included in employee cost.
(ii) Employee’s contribution to PF is not a cost to the employer, hence not considered.
Illustration 24
Measurement of Employee Cost (with special items)
Gross pay `10,30,000 (including cost of idle time hours paid to employee `25,000); Accommodation
provided to employee free of cost [this accommodation is owned by employer, depreciation of
accommodation `1,00,000, maintenance charges of the accommodation `90,000, municipal tax paid
for this accommodation `3,000], Employer’s Contribution to P.F. `1,00,000 (including a penalty of `2,000
for violation of PF rules), Employee’s Contribution to P.F. `75,000. Compute the Employee cost.
Solution:
Gross Pay ( net of cost of idle time) =[10,30,000 (-) 25,000] 10,05,000
Add Cost of accommodation provided by employer 1,93,000
= Depreciation (+) Municipal Tax paid (+) maintenance charges = 1,00,000 +

90,000 + 3,000 = 1,93,000
Add Employer’s Contribution to PF excluding penalty paid to PF authorities [ = 98,000
1,00,000 (-) 2,000]
Note:
(i) Assumed that the entire accommodation is exclusively used by the employee. Hence, cost of
accommodation provided includes all related expenses/costs, since these are identifiable/traceable
to the cost centre.
(ii) Cost of idle time hours is assumed as abnomal. Since it is already included in the gross pay, hence
excluded.

Cost Accounting
(iii) Penalty paid to PF authorities is not a normal cost. Since, it is included in the amount of contribution,
it is excluded.
Illustration 25
Measurement of Employee Cost (with special items)
Trial Balance as on 31.3.2017 (relevant extracts only)
Particulars Amount (`) Particulars Amount (`)

Materials consumed 25,00,000
Salaries 15,00,000 Special Subsidy received from 2,75,000
Government towards Employee
salary
Employee Training Cost 2,00,000 Recoverable amount from Employee 35,000
out of perquisites extended
Perquisites to Employees 4,50,000
Contribution to Gratuity Fund 4,00,000
Lease rent for accommodation 3,00,000
provided to employees
Festival Bonus 50,000
Unamortised amount of Employee cost 90,000
related to a discontinued operation
Solution:

Salaries 15,00,000
Add Net Cost of Perquisites to Employees 4,15,000
= Cost of Perquisites (-) amount recoverable from employee
= 4,50,000 (-) 35,000

Add Lease rent paid for accommodation provided to employee 3,00,000
Add Festival Bonus 50,000
Add Contribution to Gratuity Fund 4,00,000
Less Special subsidy received from Government towards employee salary (2,75,000)
Note:
(i) Recoverable amount from employee is excluded from the cost of perquisites.
(ii) Employee training cost is not an employee cost. It is to be treated as an Overhead, hence, not
included.
(iii) Special subsidy received is to be excluded, as it reduces the cost of the employer.
(iv) Unamortized amount of employee cost related to a discontinued operation is not an includible
item of cost.

Employee cost reporting and measurement of efficiency

Employee cost reporting:
1. Direct Employee costs shall be presented as a separate cost head in the cost statement: Direct
employees are those who work on a product directly, either manually or by using machines. They
are directly involved in the production of a finished product, that can be easily traced to the
product Examples are assembly-line workers in an automobile factory or employee working on
spindle / loom in textile industry. Direct Employee cost is to be presented as a separate item in the
cost statement.
2. Indirect Employee costs shall be presented in cost statements as a part of overheads relating
to respective functions e.g. manufacturing, administration, marketing etc: Indirect employee
cost is not directly traceable to a cost object / product and forms part of overheads. The word
‘overheads’ is used for a type of cost that cannot be directly allocated to a cost object or product,
but can be assigned to cost objects.
Employees whose services are indirectly related to production include product designers, job
supervisors, foreman, product inspectors, and the like. Employee cost of such employees is
considered part of Production overheads. Salaries of employees working on administrative
activities such as administration, personnel, accounts, and the like are classified as part of
administrative overheads. Similarly, salaries of employees engaged in marketing / selling activities
and distribution activities are part of Selling and Distribution Overheads.
3. The cost statement shall furnish the resources consumed on account of Employee cost, category
wise such as wages salaries to permanent, temporary, part time and contract employees piece
rate payments, overtime payments, Employee benefits (category wise) etc wherever such items
form a material part of the total Employee cost: Direct employee cost is to be exhibited as a
separate item in the cost statement as per CAS 7 (Limited Revision 2017).
Measurement of efficiency:
For many businesses, including most small businesses, the most significant cost is labour. Salaries and
wages comprise the major line-item expense for most retail and small-scale manufacturing companies,
but labour also tends to be responsive to productivity improvements. To reduce labour costs,
entrepreneurs should consider measuring employee efficiency and setting aggressive performance
targets to get most of their Employee Costs.
Measuring Productivity
Productivity is simply the amount of units of a product or service that an employee handles in a defined
time frame. An employee who makes mechanical device might make 20 mechanical devices per hour,
or an employee at a coffee shop might service 15 customers per hour. Simple productivity is neither
good nor bad, and in service industries, it might vary according to factors beyond the employee’s
control, like the number of customers who present for service. Productivity is the basic measure of
employee work output.
Determining Unit of Service (UOS)
Productivity and efficiency require a defined unit of service. UOS analysis is usually job-specific, and
is most relevant to employees who have jobs that are repetitive. For example, a spot welder might
have “welds completed” or “parts completed” as his UOS, whereas a housekeeper in a hotel might
have “rooms cleaned per shift” as her UOS. Some jobs, particularly professional jobs that have variable
output, defy reasonable UOS measurements.
Measuring Efficiency
Efficiency is a ratio of an employee’s actual time to perform each UOS against the theoretical time
needed to complete it. For example, an employee who packages DVDs might put together 80

Cost Accounting
DVDs in one hour. If the best-practice target is 100 DVDs in an hour--measured by a time study--then
the employee is 80 percent effective and has the capacity to produce 20 more units per hour. It is
usually helpful to report separately the percentage of an employee’s paid time that is actually spent
performing direct work. For example, an employee who is paid for working 8.0 hours but because of
meetings and lunch breaks only works 6.0 hours only spends 75 percent of her time being “productive”
in terms of UOS analysis. Only the six hours spent working should be factored into efficiency scoring.
Benchmarks and Targets
Some industries have basic benchmarks already established. For example, telephone call centers
have service levels that identify the ideal amount of time that common transactions should take, that
are consistent across industries. However, most companies will have to establish for themselves how
long basic tasks should take, and set performance targets accordingly. The task of baseline measuring
should be done with a time study, which averages the amount of time that multiple transactions take
or assesses the amount of time an average employee performs the task. It may not be ideal to require
employees to be 100 percent efficient, particularly when the employees lack control over their own
productivity--like in customer-service jobs when employees wait for customers to call or stop by. If an
employee can never hit 100 percent, then morale may suffer.
Longitudinal Reporting
The real benefit to measuring employee efficiency is in longitudinal reporting. Calculating efficiency
over a period of time can identify opportunities to reorganize staffing, or add or remove employees
based on the company’s volume of business, and an individual employee’s long-term productivity
can factor into merit increases and bonuses. Efficiency scoring can also help with predictive modeling.
If it takes 90 seconds to produce a mechanical device, and employees are operating at 75 percent
efficiency, then instead of producing 40 widgets per hour, only 30 will be produced.

1. What is Labour Turnover and what are the costs associated with it?
2. What are the causes of Labour Turnover? Suggest remedial measures to reduce the Labour Turnover?
3. How do you measure Labour Turnover?
4. What are the various methods of Time Keeping and Time Booking? Also distinguish Time Keeping
and Time Booking.
5. How do you treat idle time in Cost Accounts as per CAS – 7?
6. How do you treat overtime in Cost Accounts?
7. What are the various wage payment methods?
8. What are the essentials of good remuneration system?
9. What are the advantages and disadvantages of Piece Rate System?
10. How do you treat the following in Cost Accounts:
(a) Supervisor’s salary
(b) Night shift allowance
(c) Last time due to major overhauling
11. Write short notes on:
(a) Time and Motion Study
(b) Works study and Work Measurement.
(c) Job Evaluation
(d) Merit Rating
(e) Straight Piece Rate vs. Differential Piece Rate

(f) Halsey Plan

(g) Rowan Plan
(h) Guide lines for ascertaining the Labour Cost as per CAS – 7
12. State whether the following statements are true or false?

(a) Time recording clocks can be successfully used for recording time of workers in large
undertakings.
(b) Outworkers are those who are sent to sites or customer’s premises for performing work.
(c) Idle time arises only when workers are paid on time basis.
(d) Personnel department is concerned with proper recruitment, placement and training of workers.
(e) Wages paid for abnormal idle time are added to wages for calculating prime cost.
(f) In India, if a worker works for more than 8 hours on any day or for more than 40 hours in a week,
he is treated to be engaged in overtime.
(g) The two principal systems of wage payment are payment on the basis of time and payment
on the basis of work done.
(h) The piece rate system of wage payment cannot be successfully applied where quantity of
output can be measured.
(i) A good system of wage payment should not ensure equal pay for equal work.
[Ans: (True : a; b; c; d; g) (False : e; f; h; i)]
13. How to report the employee cost in the Cost Statement?
14. Discuss the means to measure Employee efficiency?
15. “High wages do not necessarily mean high Labour Cost”. Comment.
16. Explain in detail “Work Study”.
17. Write a short note on Job Evaluation and Merit rating.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:
18. What will be the earnings of a worker at 60 paise per hour when he takes 100 hours to do a volume
of work for which the standard time is 160 hours the plan of payment for bonus is on a sliding scale
as under:
Within the first 10% saving in the Standard time, the Bonus is : 40% of the Time Saved.
Within the second 10% saving in the Standard Time, the bonus is : 50% of the Time Saved.
Within the third 10% saving in the Standard Time, the bonus is : 60% of the Time Saved.
Within the Fourth 10% saving in the Standard Time, the Bonus is : 70% of the Time Saved.
For the rest of the time saved : 75% of the Time Saved.
[Ans: Total earnings ` 79.44]
19. Using Taylor’s differential piece rate system find out the earnings of X and Y from the f o l l o w i n g
particulars:
Standard time per piece - 20 minutes
Normal rate per hour - 90 paise
In a 9 hour day : X produced - 25 units
Y produced - 30 units
[Ans: X : ` 6.23; Y : ` 15.75]

Cost Accounting
20. The following are particulars applicable to a work process.

Time rate - `5 per hour.
High task - 40 units per week.
Piece rate above high task - `6.50 per unit.
In a 40 hour week, the production of the workers:
A - 35 units B - 40 Units C - 41 units D - 52 units
Calculate the wages of the workers under Gantt Task Bonus.
Ans: A : ` 200; B : ` 240; C : ` 266.5; D : ` 338]
21. In a unit, 10 men work as a group. When the production of the group exceeds the Standard output
of 200 pieces per hour, each man is paid an incentive for the excess production in addition to
his wages at hourly rates. The incentive is at half the percentage, the excess production over the
standard hours bears to the standard production. Each man is paid an incentive at the rate of this
percentage of a wage rate of `2 per hour. There is no relation between the individual work man’s
hourly rate and the bonus rate.
In a week, the hours worked are 500 hours and total production is 1,20,000 units.
a) Compute the total amount of bonus for the week.
b) Calculate the total earnings of two workers A and B of the group:
A worked 44 hours and his basic rate per hour was ` 2.20
B worked 48 hours and his basic rate per hour was ` 1.90
[Ans: a) Total Bonus for the week is ` 100
b) Earnings of A : ` 105.6; B : ` 100.8]
22. In a factory bonus system, bonus hours are credited to the employee in the proportion of time taken
which time saved based to time allowed. Jobs are carried forward from one week to another. No
overtime is worked and payment is made in full for all units worked, and including those subsequently
rejected.
From the following information you are required to Calculate for each employee
(a) The bonus hours and amount of bonus earned;
(b) The total wages cost; and
(c) The wages cost of each good unit produced.
A (`) B (`) C (`)
Basic wage rate/hour 0.25 0.40 0.30
Units produced 2,500 2,200 3,600
Time allowed/100 units 2 hr.36 min 3 hrs. 1 hrs.30 min.
Time taken 52 hrs. 75 hrs. 48 hrs.
Rejects 100 units 40 units 400 units.
[Ans: A : 13 hrs; B : Nil; C : 6 hrs
Amount of bonus A : ` 2.6; B : Nil; C : ` 1.6
Total wages cost A : ` 15.6; B : ` 30; C : ` 16
Cost of good units produced A : ` 0.0065; B : ` 0.0139; C : ` 0.005]
23. In a factory bonus to workman is paid according to using the Rowan plan. Time allotted for a job
is 40 hours and the normal rate of wages is ` 1.25 per hour. The factory overhead charges are 50
paise per hour for the hours taken.
The factory cost of a work order executed by a worker is ` 155.468. The cost of material is `100.
Calculate the hours of time taken by the workman to complete the work order.
[Ans: Actual hrs 25]

Multiple Choice Questions

1. In which of the following incentive plan of payment, wages on time basis are not Guaranteed?
A. Halsey plan
B. Rowan plan
C. Taylor’s differential piece rate system
D. Gantt’s task and bonus system
2. Under the high wage plan, a worker is paid
A. At a time rate higher than the usual rate
B. According to his efficiency
C. At a double rate for overtime
D. Normal wages plus bonus
3. Cost of idle time arising due to non availability of raw material is
A. Charged to costing profit and loss A/c
B. Charged to factory overheads
C. Recovered by inflating the wage rate
D. Ignored
4. When overtime is required for meeting urgent orders, overtime premium should be
A. Charged to costing profit and loss A/c
B. Charged to overhead costs
C. Charged to respective jobs
D. Ignored
5. Wages sheet is prepared by
A. Time –keeping department
B. Personnel department
C. Payroll department
D. Engineering department
6. Time and motion study is conducted by the
A. Time –keeping department
B. Personnel department
C. Payroll department
D. Engineering department
7. Labour turnover is measured by
A. Number of workers replaced average number of workers
B. Number of workers left / number in the beginning plus number at the end
C. Number of workers joining / number in the beginning of the period
D. All of these
8. Idle time is
A. Time spent by workers in factory
B. Time spent by workers in office
C. Time spent by workers off their work
D. Time spent by workers on their job
9. Over time is
A. Actual hours being more than normal time
B. Actual hours being more than standard time
C. Standard hours being more than actual hours
D. Actual hours being less than standard time

Cost Accounting
10. Time keeping refers to

A. Time spent by workers on their job
B. Time spent by workers in factory
C. Time spent by workers without work
D. Time spent by workers on their job
[Ans: C,A,A,B,C,D,A,C,A,B]
State whether the following statements are True (or) False:
1. Direct employee cost shall be presented as a seperate cost head in the financial statement.
2. As per the Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 the maximum limit of bonus is 20% of gross earning.
3. Flux method is means for measurement of labour turnover.
4. Is overtime premium is directly assigned to cost object?
5. Idle time represents the wages paid for the time cost during which the workkers not work.
[Ans.: 1. False; 2. True; 3. True; 4. True; 5. True.]
Fill in the Blanks:
1. In a company there were 1200 employee on the rolls at the beginning of a year and 1180 at
the end. During the year 120 persons left services and 96 replacements were made. The labour
turnover to flux method is _________ %.
2. In ___________ systems, two piece rates are set for each job.
3. In ___________ Systems, basic of wages payment is the quantity of work.
4. The formula for computing wages under time rate is _______________.
5. In Halsey plan, a worker gets bonus equal to ________________ of the time saved.
6. Under Grantt Task and Bonus Plan, no bonus is payable to a worker, if his efficiency is less than
______________.
7. Wages sheet is prepared by ______________ department.
8. Cost of normal idea time is charged to _______________.
9. Ideal time arises only when workers are paid on ______________ basis.
10. Normal idle time costs shuld be change to _________ which that due to abnormal reasons should
be change to _______________.
[Ans: 9.08, Gaylor’s differential piece rate, Piece rate, Hour worked × rate per hour, 50%, 100%,
Pay Roll Department, Factory Overhead, Time, Production overhead + Costing P/L A/c]
1 Labour turnvoer A 8.33% of Salary
2 Barth variable sharing plan B Work beyond normal working hours
3 Minimum bonus C Merit rating
4 Overtime Premium D Replacement method
5 Assessment of employee with respect to a job E Total Earnings = R× S×H
[Ans.: 1. D; 2. E; 3. A; 4. B; 5. C.
2.3 DIRECT EXPENSES (CAS – 10)
Direct expense or chargeable expense is that which can be allocated to a cost centre or cost unit
and indirect expense is that which needs to be apportioned. There may be items of expense direct
in relation to some cost centre. Thus rent and rates, heating & lighting, depreciation & insurance are

often allocated or charged directly to the appropriate service cost centre, the totals of service
department cost are however, apportioned to other cost centres before being absorbed by cost units
as overheads. These costs are direct costs of the first cost centre, but indirect costs of other production
cost centres, as well as being indirect cost of cost units.
Direct expenses as defined in CAS-10 (Limited Revision 2017), ‘Expenses relating to manufacture of a
product or rendering a service, which can be identified or linked with the cost object other than direct
material cost and direct employee cost’.
The more a factory is departmentalized, the greater will be the proportion of expenses which can
be classified as direct. Thus cost of medicines, first aid, and other expenses in connection with the
medical service are direct expenses of medical service department, but if there is no medical service
department, the expenses would have been distributed to all the cost centres at the very beginning.
The following expenses may be treated as direct expenses:-
(a) Cost of patents, royalty payment;
(b) Hire charges in respect of special machinery or plant;
(c) Cost of special patterns, cores, designs or tools;
(d) Experimental costs and expenditure in connection with models and pilot schemes;
(e) Architects, surveyors and other consultants fee;
(f) Travelling expenses to sites;
(g) Inward charges and freight charges on special material.
A direct expense in relation to a product forms part of the Prime Cost. Indirect expenses are treated as
Overheads. In relation to products, direct material is a material that becomes a part of it and can be
physically traced in some form in the finished products, where as the direct expenses are cost providing
services or other kinds of special charges, but no trace of them can be obtained in the finished product
like raw material. Both the direct material and direct expenses forms part of the Prime Cost.
General principles of measurement of Direct Expenses as per CAS-10:

(a) Identification of direct expenses shall be based on traceability in an economically feasible manner.
(b) Direct expenses incurred for bought out resources shall be determined at invoice price including
all taxes and duties and any other expenditure directly attributable there to net of trade discounts,
taxes and duties refundable or to be credited.
(c) Direct expenses paid/incurred in lump-sum or which are in the nature of one time payment shall
be amortized on the basis of estimated output or benefit to be derived from such expenses.
(d) Finance cost incurred in connection with self generated or procured resources shall not form part
of the direct expenses.
(e) Any subsidy or grant or incentive or any amount received or receivable with respect to any direct
expenses shall be reduced for ascertainment of the cost of the cost object.
(f) Penalties / damages paid to statutory authorities or other third parties shall not be form part of the
direct expenses.
(g) Any change in the cost accounting principles applied for measurement of the direct expenses
should be made only if it is required by law or for compliance with the requirements of a Cost
Accounting Standard or a change would result in a more appropriate preparation or presentation
of Cost Statement of the organization.
(h) Credit / recoveries relating to direct expenses, material and quantifiable shall be deducted to
arive at the net direct expenses.
(i) Any abnormal portion of direct expenses where is material and quantifiable shall not form part of
the direct expenses.

Cost Accounting
The Cost Statement shall disclose the following items of Direct Expenses as per CAS-10 (Limited Revision
2017):
(a) The basis of distribution of direct expenses to cost objects / cost units.
(b) Quantity and rates of items of direct expenses as applicable.
(c) Where direct expenses are accounted at standard cost the price and usage variance.
(d) Direct expenses representing procurement of resources and expenses incurred in connection with
resources generated.
(e) Direct expenses paid or payable to related parties.
(f) Direct expenses incurred in foreign currency.
(g) Any subsidy / incentive and any such payment received from direct expenses.
(h) Credits or recoveries relating to the direct expenses.
(i) Any abnormal portion of direct expenses.
(j) Penalties and damages excluded from the direct expenses.
(k) Disclosure shall be made only when material, significant and quantifiable. Disclosures shall be
made in the body of the Cost Statement or as a foot note or as a separate schedule.
Cost Accounting Standard-10 (Limited Revision 2017) : Direct Expenses

Direct Expenses: Expenses relating to manufacture of a product or rendering a service, which can be
identified or linked with the cost object other than direct material cost and direct employee cost.
Examples of Direct Expenses are royalties charged on production, job charges, hire charges for use of
specific equipment for a specific job, cost of special designs or drawings for a job, software services
specifically required for a job, travelling Expenses for a specific job.
Measurement of Direct Expenses: Inclusions and Exclusions:

The following items are to be ‘included’ for the purpose of measuring employee cost:
(i) Costs which are directly traceable/identifiable with the cost object
(ii) Expenses incurred for the use of bought in resources
(iii) Price variance if such expenses are accounted for at standard cost
The following items are to be ‘excluded’ for the purpose of measuring employee cost:
(i) If not traceable/identifiable should be considered as overheads
(ii) Finance cost is not a direct expense
(iii) Imputed cost (example, if the owner of a company engages himself for facilitating the production
or gets actively engaged in production or rendering of services, this would be an imputed cost)
(iv) Recoveries, credits, subsidy, grant, incentive or any other which reduces the cost
(v) Penalty, damages paid to statutory authorities
Illustration 1: Measurement of Direct Expenses

Royalty paid on sales `30,000; Royalty paid on units produced `20,000, hire charges of equipment used
for production `2,000, Design charges `15,000, Software development charges related to production
`22,000. Compute the Direct Expenses.

Solution:
Computation of Direct Expenses
Royalty paid on Sales 30,000
Add Royalty paid on units produced 20,000
Add Hire charges of equipment used for production 2,000
Add Design Charges 15,000
Add Software development charges related to production 22,000
Direct Expenses 89,000
Note:
(i) Expenses are related to either manufacturing of the product or rendering of service
(ii) These costs are directly identifiable and can be linked with the cost object and are not related to
direct material cost or direct employee cost. Hence, these are considered as Direct Expenses.
Illustration 2: Measurement of Direct Expenses – allocation to cost object products (in a multi-product
situation)
A manufacturing unit produces two products X and Y. The following information is furnished:
Particulars Product X Product Y

Units produced ( Qty) 20,000 15,000
Units Sold (Qty) 15,000 12,000
Machine Hours utilised 10,000 5,000
Design charges 15,000 18,000
Software development charges 24,000 36,000
Royalty paid on sales `54,000 [@ `2 per unit sold, for both the products]; Royalty paid on units
produced `35,000 [@ `1 per unit purchased, for both the products], Hire charges of equipment used in
manufacturing process of Product X only `5,000, Compute the Direct Expenses.
Solution:
Computation of Direct Expenses
Particulars Product X Product Y

Royalty paid on Sales (15000*2) (12000*2) 30,000 24,000
Add Royalty paid on units produced (20000*1) (15000*1) 20,000 15,000
Add Hire charges of equipment used in manufacturing process of 5,000 —
Product X only
Add Design Charges 15,000 18,000
Add Software development charges related to production 24,000 36,000
Direct Expenses 94,000 93,000
Note:
(i) Royalty on production and royalty on sales are allocated on the basis of units produced and units
sold respectively. These are directly identifiable and traceable to the number of units produced
and units sold. Hence, this is not an apportionment.
(ii) No adjustments are made related to units held, i.e. closing stock.

Cost Accounting

1. Write a short note on Direct Expenses.
2. What are the disclosure requirements as per CAS-10 (Limited Revision 2017)?
3. List down the principle of measurement of Direct Expenses.
4. Compute the value of Direct Expenses based on the following data Royalty paid on units produced
` 50,000, Software development charges relating to production ` 36,000, Design charges ` 17,500,
Hire charges of equipment used for production ` 5,500. [Ans: ` 1,09,000]

1. Royalty paid on sales ` 89,000 and Software development charges related to product is ` 22,000.
Calculate Direct Expenses.
A.1,11,100 B. 1,11,000 C. 111,110 D. 1,10,000
2. Direct Expenses ———— includes imputed cost.
A. Shall B. Shall not C. None of these
3. Direct Expenses does not meet the test of materiality can be ———— part of part of overhead.
A. Treated B. Not treated C. All of the these D. None of these
4. Example of Direct Expenses.
A. Rent B. Royalty charged on production C. Bonus to employee D. None of these
5. A manufacturing Industry produces product P, Royalty paid on sales is ` 23,500 and design charges
paid for the product is 1,500. Compute the Direct Expenses.
A. 25,000 B. 22,000 C. 26,500 D None of these [Ans: B ,B, A, B, A ]
1. If an expense can be identified with a specific cost unit, it is treated as direct expense.
2. Travelling expenses to site is a direct expense.
3. Identification of direct expenses shall be based on traceability in an economically feasible manner.
4. CAS 9 is for Direct Expenses as issued by the Cost Accounting Standards Board (CASB) of the
Institute of Cost Accountants of India.
5. Finance Cost shall form part of Direct Expense.
[Ans: T , T, T, F, F ]
Fill in the Blanks:
1. Direct Expenses relating to _________________ or ______________.
2. Penalties/ damages paid to statutory authorities’ ____________be form part of Direct Expenses.
3. A Direct Expenses related to a _________ form part of the Prime Cost.
4. Direct Expenses incurred for brought out resources shall be determined at ______________.
5. Direct Expenses incurred lump-sum shall be ___________________.
[Ans: Manufacture of a product or rendering of service, Shall Not, Product, Invoice Price, Amortized.]

2.4 OVERHEADS (CAS - 3)
An overhead is the amount which is not identified with any product. The name overhead might have
come due to the reason of over and above the normal heads of expenditure. It is the aggregate of
indirect material, indirect labour and indirect expenditure. The generic term used to denote indirect
material, indirect labour and indirect expenses. Thus overheads forms a class of cost that cannot be
allocated or absorbed but can only be apportioned to cost units.
In earlier days, overheads were not given much importance, because the prime cost constitutes 50-80%
of the total cost. However, with the modern trend towards the mechanisation, automation, and mass
production, overhead costs have grown considerably in size and in many undertakings the proportion
of overhead costs to the total costs of products is appreciably high. High overheads do not indicate
inefficiency if the increase in overheads is due to the following likely causes:
(a) Improved methods of managerial control like Accountancy, Production Control, Work Study, Cost
and Management Accountancy...etc. In the process of reducing costs of other elements, viz. direct
material and direct labour, overhead costs are likely to increase.
(b) Large scale production or mass production.
(c) Use of costly machines and equipments increases the amounts of depreciation, maintenance
expenditure and similar other items of overhead costs.
(d) Less human efforts are necessary with automatic machines. A major portion of the cost is allocated
direct to machines, thus increasing the machine overhead costs.
(e) Increased efficiency and productivity of labour has the effect of pushing up the overhead to direct
labour ratio.
According to CIMA, overhead costs are defined as, ‘the total cost of indirect materials, indirect labour
and indirect expenses’. Thus all indirect costs like indirect materials, indirect labour, and indirect expenses
are called as ‘overheads’. Examples of overhead expenses are rent, taxes, depreciation, maintenance,
repairs, supervision, selling and distribution expenses, marketing expenses, factory lighting, printing
stationery etc. As per CAS-3, overheads are defined as follows ‘Overheads comprise costs of indirect
materials, indirect employees and indirect expenses which are not directly identifiable or allocable to
a cost object in an economically feasible manner’
Overhead Accounting
The ultimate aim of Overhead Accounting is to absorb them in the product units produced by the firm.
Absorption of overhead means charging each unit of a product with an equitable share of overhead
expenses. In other words, as overheads are all indirect costs, it becomes difficult to charge them to
the product units. In view of this, it becomes necessary to charge them to the product units on some
equitably basis which is called as ‘Absorption’ of overheads. The important steps involved in Overhead
Accounting are as follows:-
(a) Collection, Classification and Codification of Overheads.
(b) Allocation, Apportionment and Reapportionment of overheads.
(c) Absorption of Overheads.
As mentioned above, the ultimate of Overhead Accounting is ‘Absorption’ in the product units. This
is extremely important as accurate absorption will help in arriving at accurate cost of production.
Overheads are indirect costs and hence there are numerous difficulties in charging the overheads to
the product units.

Cost Accounting
Study of Overheads can be better understood from the following diagram:
Overheads
Collection Apportionment Absorption (or)

& Allocation Recovery
1. Methods
2. Causes of under (or) over
absorption
Primary Secondary 3. Methods of disposal of
under (or) over
Classification
1. Repetitive distribution
2. Simultaneous equation
3. Trail & Error
By Nature By Function By Element By Behaviour
1. Rent 1. Manufacturing 1. Material 1. Fixed

2. Depreciation 2. Office & 2. Labour 2. Variable
Administration.
3. Such other or 3. Selling & 3. Expenses 3. Semi-variable (or)
similar nature Distribution Semi fixed
(a) Collection, Classification and Codification of Overheads: -

These concepts are discussed below:-
Collection of Overheads:
Document Overhead Costs Nature

Stores Issue note, purchase Indirect material Consumables, lubricants etc.
voucher
Payroll sheets, time sheets Indirect labour Wages, salaries, contribution
to statutory benefits, bonus,
incentives, idele time
Cash books Indirect material, Indirect labour & All type of costs
indirect expenses
Subsidiary records – journal Indirect material, Indirect labour & For provisions of costs that are not
indirect expenses actually paid for
Other reports Indirect expenses Depreciation, scrap, wastage
etc.
Overheads collection is the process of recording each item of cost in the records maintained for the
purpose of ascertainment of cost of each cost centre or unit.

The following are the source documents for collection of overheads:-

(i) Stores Requisition
(ii) Wages Sheet
(iii) Cash Book
(iv) Purchase Orders and Invoices
(v) Journal Entries
(vi) Other Registers and Records
Source document and the nature of overheads are enumerated as below.
For the purpose of overhead accounting, collection of overheads is very important. It is necessary to
identify the indirect expenses and the above mentioned source documents are used for this. Proper
collection of overhead expenses will help to understand accurately the total overhead expenses.
Classification of Overheads
Classification is defined by CIMA as, ‘the arrangement of items in logical groups having regard to
their nature (subjective classification) or the purpose to be fulfilled (Objective classification). In other
words, classification is the process of arranging items into groups according to their degree of similarity.
Accurate classification of all items is actually a prerequisite to any form of cost analysis and control
system. Classification is made according to the following basis:
Based on Elements: Indirect Materials, Indirect labour and Indirect expenses.
Based on Functions of the organisation: Manufacturing overheads, Administrative overheads, Selling
and Distribution overheads, Research & Development overheads.
Based on the Behaviour: Fixed Overheads, Variable Overheads & Semi variable overheads.
Classification according to Elements
According to this classification overheads are divided according to their elements. The classification is
done as per the following details:-
Indirect Materials
Materials which cannot be identified with the given product unit of cost centre is called as indirect
materials. As per CAS-3 indirect material cost is defined as ‘Materials, the cost of which cannot be
directly attributed to a particular cost object’. For example, lubricants used in a machine is an indirect
material, similarly thread used to stitch clothes is also indirect material. Small nuts and bolts are also
examples of indirect materials.
Indirect Labour
As per CAS-3, indirect employee cost is the employee cost, which cannot be directly attributed to a
particular cost object. Wages and salaries paid to indirect workers, i.e. workers who are not directly
engaged on the production are examples of indirect wages.
Indirect Expenses
As per CAS-3, Indirect Expenses are expenses, which cannot be directly attributed to a particular cost
object. Expenses such as rent and taxes, printing and stationery, power, insurance, electricity, marketing
and selling expenses etc. are the examples of indirect expenses.
Functional Classification
Overheads can also be classified according to their functions.
This classification is done as given below:-

Cost Accounting
Manufacturing Overheads
As per CAS-3, Indirect Cost involved in the production process or in rendering service. Manufacturing
overheads has different names such as Production Overheads, Works Overheads, Factory Overheads.
Indirect expenses incurred for manufacturing are called as Manufacturing Overheads. For example,
factory power, works manager’s salary, factory insurance, depreciation of factory machinery and
other fixed assets, indirect materials used in production etc. It should be noted that such expenditure is
incurred for manufacturing but cannot be identified with the product units.
Manufacturing is a separate function like administration, selling and distribution. The term manufacturing
stands for activities, which begin with receipt of order and end with completion of finished product.
Manufacturing Overhead represents all manufacturing costs other than direct materials and direct labour.
These costs cannot be identified specifically with or traced to cost object in an economically feasible
way. In other words, manufacturing overhead are indirect manufacturing costs. The term overhead is
peculiar and therefore, there is a growing tendency to prefer the term indirect manufacturing cost to
overhead. Following synonyms have been used for Manufacturing Overhead:-
(i) Factory overhead;
(ii) Manufacturing overhead;
(iii) Factory on cost;
(iv) Works on cost;
(v) Factory burden and;
(vi) Manufacturing expenses.
Given below are a few examples of different items included in different groups of manufacturing
overhead:
Indirect Material Cost: Glue, thread, nails, rivets, lubricants, cotton waste, etc.
Indirect Labour Cost: Salaries and wages of foremen and supervisors, inspectors, maintenance, labour,
general labour; idle time etc.
Indirect Services Costs: Factory Rent, factory insurance, depreciation, repair and maintenance of plant
and machinery, first aid, rewards for suggestions for welfare, repair and maintenance of transport system
and apportioned administrative expenses etc.
Manufacturing Overhead further explains in apportionment, allocation and absorption.
Administrative Overheads
Indirect expenses incurred for running the administration are known as Administrative Overheads. As per
CAS-3, Administrative Overheads are defined as Cost of all activities relating to general management
and administration of an organisation.
As per the functional classification, Administration Overheads comprise of those indirect costs which
are related to the general administrative function in the company. Such functions are related to policy
formulation, directing the organisation and controlling the operations of the company. Administration
overheads are incurred for the benefit of organisation as a whole. Controlling them is difficult for they
do not vary with most of the variables viz. production or sales. Examples of such overheads are, office
salaries, printing and stationery, office telephone, office rent, electricity used in the office, salaries of
administrative staff etc. The size as well as control over these overheads depends largely on decisions of
management. Organisations growing very fast face the problem of controlling Administrative Overheads.
Multi-location set up leads to duplication of many administrative costs.
Collection and Absorption of Administration Overheads
The collection of overheads is done firstly by nature of the expenses through the chart of accounts.
Administrative departments in an organisation could be Corporate Office, Finance and Accounts,

Company Secretary, Human resources, Legal, General Administration. The overheads that are common
to all these departments are apportioned on some suitable basis e.g. in the following manner:
(a) For Office rent, rates & taxes - Floor space as the basis,
(b) For Depreciation on office building - Floor space as the basis
(c) For Legal fees - No of cases handled as the basis
(d) For Salaries of common staff - Ratio of salaries of departments as the basis
(e) For Typist pool - No of documents typed as the basis
Absorption of the Administrative Overheads into cost units is very difficult. Many times it is advised that
these overheads may not be absorbed into product units because of the difficulty and non-relevance
of them with production activity. Normally, the Administrative Overheads are totalled together and
then using a suitable basis, a rate of recovery is arrived at to absorb the same. It could be mostly a
percentage of Works cost or factory cost. Based on the principle of ‘charging what the traffic can bear’,
the absorption could be on the basis of a percentage of gross profit. Whatever method selected, it will
be arbitrary and could lead to erroneous conclusions. A Cost Accountant has to use all the experience
and history of the organisation before he selects a particular method to adopt.
Treatment of Administration Overheads

There are three different ways of treating the administration overheads as follows:-
1) Apportion between Production and Selling & Distribution functions:
This treatment is based on the logic that the administrative functions are for the entire company
and these functions facilitate both production as well as selling. In other words, the absorption of
Administration Overheads would happen through Production and Selling Overheads. This means
these overheads lose their identity. The problem is of course, selection of basis to divide these
overheads over the two principal functions of production and selling.
2) Transfer to P & L Account
This method agrees that administrative costs are all time based costs and as such bear no relation
what is produced or what is sold. These are mainly of fixed nature. Hence there is no point in dividing
them further to be included in the cost of production or cost of selling. They should be simply charged
to the P & L Account. However, this may lead to undervaluation of stocks.
3) Treating as a separate addition to cost of production & sales
In this method, administration is treated as a separate function and is added as a separate line in
the cost computation sheet for a job or an order. Here again, the basis for inclusion as a part of
cost of a job is a difficult choice. Generally, a percentage of factory cost is taken as a basis. A care
needs to be taken to ensure that the Administration Overheads are charged equitably to Cost of
Sales, FG stock and WIP as well.
Controlling Administration Overheads

Given the nature of these expenses, they cannot be controlled at the lower level of management.
They can be better controlled by top management as they pertain to formulating policy and
directing the organisation. The first step in the control mechanism is proper classification of expenses
& departmentalisation. The actual expenses are collected for each department and then compared
with a bench mark. Deviation are analysed and causes for increase are mitigated by fixing responsibility
on the departmental head.

Cost Accounting
The control benchmarking can be done with respect to:

(i) Figures of the previous year. Expenses could be compared with the figures of previous year and
increase or decrease are analysed. However, comparison with previous year may not help as the
condition may have totally changed from one year to the other.
(ii) Use of budgets. Budgets are estimates for the current year, and they take into account the changed
conditions. They also built in the year’s complete plan which would factor all changes in the cost
structure. It is advisable to compare budgeted overheads with actual for control purpose.
(iii) Use of standards. Although very scientific, this method is difficult to operate. Administrative activities
(being very subjective) cannot be standardised. On a certain level it can be applied e.g. the time
taken to process a voucher by accountant can be standardised, or time taken for processing a
payment could be standardised.
Selling and Distribution Overheads

As per CAS-3, Selling Overheads, also known as Selling Costs, are the expenses related to sale of products
and include all Indirect Expenses in sales management for the organization. Overheads incurred for
getting orders from consumers are called as Selling Overheads. On the other hand, overheads incurred
for execution of order are called as Distribution Overheads. As per CAS-3, Distribution Overheads, also
known as Distribution Cost, are the cost incurred in handling a product from the time it is ready for
dispatch until it reaches the ultimate consumer. Examples of Selling Overheads are sales promotion
expenses, marketing expenses, salesmen’s salaries and commission, advertising expenses etc. Examples
of Distribution Overheads are warehouse charges, transportation of outgoing goods, packing, commission
of middlemen etc.
The magnitude of S & D Overheads in the total cost would depend on many factors such as nature of
the product, type of customers, spread of market, statutory restrictions etc. A consumer product needs
heavy expense on advertising. A sale to institutions rather than individual customers needs a different
selling effort. Distribution Costs will increase if the spread of the market is large. Some activities cannot
be advertised at all such as a Doctor, a Cost Accountant. The total magnitude of S & D Costs and the
proportion of selling and distribution efforts will decide the treatment thereof and control mechanisms
to be used. For some of selling expenses there may not be a direct relationship with the product. If a
company incurs expense on advertising, it may be difficult to relate to a specific product unless it’s a
product advertisement. But further, there may be a substantial time lag between the expense and the
benefit arising out of that. In case of Distribution Costs many of them may be possibly linked to the product.
Collection and Absorption of S&D Overheads

While classifying the S & D Costs are properly bifurcated and coded accordingly. This could be done by
having separate account codes for Selling Overheads such as: advertising, sale commission, travelling
expense, communication, exhibition, market survey, free samples, credit & collection costs, bad debts,
and Distribution expenses such as: transportation vehicle related expenses, warehousing and storage
at different places, depreciation. Depending upon the size of the organization, there may be proper
departmentalization of S&D activities. The departments could be:
- Sales head office
- Sales regional offices
- Depots
- Direct selling department
- Dealers management
- Credit and collection (commercial)

The costs are collected through various source documents under the above heads and for the above
departments. For absorption, the basis to be used will have practical difficulties, as one will have to look
for a relationship between the expenses and the cost unit. Some expenses like sales commission, shipping
costs, and direct selling expenses can be absorbed directly. The other expenses can be absorbed on
the basis of either sales value, cost of goods sold, gross profit or number of units sold. Out of these the
sales value method is the most commonly used.
Control over S & D Expenses
The S & D Expenses are related to sales and distribution activity which is externally focused. The extent of
these expenses depend mainly on external factors like consumer profile, changing habits, technology
improvements etc. Controlling these expenses does not mean capping them. It aims at increasing the
effectiveness of these expenses e.g. getting maximum sales per rupee of S & D Expenses. For control
purpose, a great care should be taken to ensure correct classification and collection of S & D Overheads.
The collected expenses must be analysed to assess the effect of them on sales. Such analysis could be
done as follows:
(a) Analysis of sales and S & D Expenses by geographical locations – This could be regions, zones,
domestic and international etc.
(b) Analysis by type of customers - This could be done as institutional, government, retail etc.
(c) Analysis by products or services – This may be done as range of products, the application of products,
brands etc.
(d) Analysis by salesmen.
(e) Analysis by channel of distribution – This analysis pertains to wholesalers, retailers, commission agents
etc.
The analysis of sales, profits and S & D expenses on the basis of above factors will give a good insight into
the performance as well as control over expenses. All these three parameters may be compared with
l Previous year;
l Budget for the current year or
l Standards for the current year
Research and Development Overheads
Research Cost is defined as the cost of searching for new or improved products, new applications of
material, or new or improved methods, process, systems or services. In the modern days, firms spend
heavily on Research and Development. Expenses incurred on research and development is known as
Research and Development Overheads. Research may be of the following types:
(i) Pure or basic research to gain general know-how regarding the production or market, not directed
towards any particular product.
(ii) Applied research which applies the basic knowledge in practice. i.e improvement of existing
products, new process, exploring of new products, improved measures of safety, etc.
Development cost is the cost of the process which begins with the implementation of the decision to
use scientific or technical knowledge to produce a new or improved product or to employ a new or
improved method, process, system, etc. and ends with the commencement of formal production of
that product by that method. Development starts where the research ends. Development cost is the
expenditure incurred for putting the results of research on a practical commercial basis.
Special features of Research & Development Costs
The features are as follows:-
(a) Expenditure is incurred ahead of the actual production and may not be charged to current
production.

Cost Accounting
(b) The amount of expenditure may often substantial.

(c) The expenditure may at times be entirely in fructuous, yielding no tangible results.
(d) Benefit of the expenditure may be realized over a number of years.
(e) Difficulty in fixation of standards for control.
Collection of R&D Overheads
Accumulation of Research and Development Overheads is essential for the following reasons:-
(a) For review cost to date.
(b) For planning the activities subsequent to research.
(c) For evaluation of performance with relation to past performance or for inter-firm comparison.
The collection of R&D Overheads is made through the following documents. Material requisitions, labour
time cards, invoices, vouchers (royalty, patent, license. etc). Research & Development expenditure
may be identified by its nature i.e basic or applied research or development by the elements of cost,
by business sector, by project. Each Research & Development project is allotted a project work order
number. Separate series of work orders or codes should be used to distinguish from regular work orders.
R & D overheads can be accumulated as follows:-
(a) All expenditure under the direct elements (direct material, labour and expenses)must be charged
to the work orders.
(b) Expenses like supervisor salary, material handling charges, maintenance of equipments can be
directly allocated to particular research work order.
(c) Items of general overheads like depreciation of building, depreciation of maintenance equipment,
share of purchase department expenses may be suitably apportioned to the research work order.
Accounting of R&D Overheads
Accounting of Research & Development Cost arise due to the following causes:-
(a) The expenditure is in the nature of pre-production costs and there is a considerable time lag between
the incidence and expenditure and realization of benefit.
(b) There is no immediate production, or the production is so small that it becomes difficult to charge
such costs to products.
It is because of these difficulties that the accounting of Research and Development Costs has been a
subject of some controversy. Three methods are available for charging Research and Development
Costs as:
(a) Charging off to the current year Profit & Loss Account.
(b) Capitalization so that cost may be amortized on a long term basis.
(c) Deferment and charge-off to costs of the next two or three years-a short/medium term amortization.
Research and Development may be regarded as a function of production and the Research &
Development Costs may be charged to costs to be recovered through the general overhead rates.
There are many arguments for and against charging the Research & Development Costs in current
revenue. The arguments in support of this method are as follows:-
(a) All research & development expenses may not result in new processes or saleable products.
(b) Some of the research & development projects may result in failures.
(c) These expenses may be incurred simply to maintain the present competitive position of the concern.

(d) It is difficult to assess the period over which the know-how or knowledge acquired may be spread
over.
(e) It may be more advantageous to recover a substantial portion of the cost immediately, as the life
of the new products are uncertain.
(f) In certain cases, the effect of these research costs on future revenues may be doubtful.
The classification used for cost collection is mostly combination of elemental and functional. The
behavioural classification cannot be used for booking of costs; it is used only for analysis and decision
making.
Elements Material Labour Expense

Factory or Nuts & bolts, Salaries & wages to Factory lighting &
production or consumables, foremen, supervisors, heating, factory rent,
manufacturing or lubricants, welding inspectors, maintenance power & electricity,
works overheads electrodes, cleaning labour, idle time factory insurance,
materials, nails, depreciation on
threads, ropes etc. machinery, repairs
Administrative Printing & stationery, Salary of office staff, General office rent,
Overheads office supplies managers, directors, insurance,
and other telephones, fax,
administrative travel, legal fees,
departments as IT, depreciation on
audit, credit, taxation office assets
Selling Price lists, catalogues, Salaries of sales staff & Sales office expenses,
Overheads mailings, advertising managers, commission travelling,
material such as on sales, bonus on subscription to sales
leaflets, danglers, schemes magazines, bad
samples, free gifts, debts, rent &
exhibition material insurance of
showrooms, cash
discount, brokerage,
market research
Distribution Secondary packing, Salaries of delivery staff Carriage outwards,
overheads material items used in such as drivers, forwarding
delivery vans dispatch clerk, logistic expenses, rent &
manager insurance of
warehouses &
depots, insurance,
running expenses &
depreciation of
delivery vans
Classification based on behaviour

Fixed Overheads
The amount of overhead tends to remain fixed for all volumes of production within a certain range.
Examples of Fixed Overheads are Audit fee, Interest on capital, Depreciation of plant & machinery,
Insurance, Rent of buildings, etc. A fixed overhead represents constant expenditure incurred during
a period without regarding to the volume of production during that period. Even when production
completely ceases in a particular period, this constant amount of expenditure will continue to be incurred
partially, if not wholly. Therefore the Fixed Overheads are also known as Period Costs. Sometimes these
costs are also termed as Shutdown or Stand-by Costs.

Cost Accounting
Features of Fixed Costs

Fixed Costs are stated to be by and large uncontrollable, in the sense they are not influenced by the
action of a specified member of an undertaking. For example, the supervisor has practically no control
over the fixed costs like depreciation of plant & machinery. The production supervisor can only see that
the maximum possible utilization of the assets is made.
The fixed overhead amount is constant per period; the cost per unit of production varies with the volume.
This variation is inverse since with increase in production, cost per unit decreases as the same amount
of fixed overheads is spread over larger units of production.
Factors affecting the Fixed Overheads
When a plant or a department is completely idle and there is no production, several items of Fixed
Overheads disappear. Fixed Overheads are thus, of two types, viz. a lower standing fixed cost when
production is nil and a higher running fixed cost when the plant is running. For instance, maintenance
expenditure incurred at plant shutdown has to be increased to a higher level when production starts.
Any long term change in the productive capacity of an undertaking also affects the basic characteristic
of fixed overhead. Fixed costs are constant for short term periods only, within a limited range of capacity.
Another factor that affects the fixed nature of fixed overhead is the change in basic price level.
Graphical representation of Fixed Costs is depicted as below:
Total Fixed Overhead

Cost (`)
Overhead (`)
Fixed Overhead per unit
X
O Volume of Production
Fixed Costs may be broadly classified into three basic types:-

(i) Fixed costs that have no casual relationship with the volume of output and are incurred mainly as
results of policy decisions of the management. Research, development, design, employee training,
advertisement and marketing expenses are examples of this expenditure. Accountants term such
costs as discretionary fixed costs (also known as programmed costs or managed costs).
(ii) Fixed costs that do not change significantly in the short term such as depreciation, rent, etc.
(iii) Fixed costs that are fixed for short period for a particular capacity, but change considerably when
there is a long-term change in the volume or capacity.
Variable Overheads
Variable Costs are those which vary in total direct proportion to the volume of output. These costs per
unit remain relatively constant with changes in production. Thus Variable Costs fluctuate in total amount
but tend to remain constant per unit as production activity changes. Examples are indirect material,
indirect labour, lubricants, cost of utilities, etc.
The variable overhead costs seldom reveal the characteristics of perfect variability. i.e an expenditure
which varies directly with variation in the volume of output. They simply tend to vary rather than vary

directly in direct proportion of output. We come across three types of variable overhead expenses in
actual practice as explained below:-
(i) 100% variable expenses. For all production the variable expenditure remains constant.
(ii) The expense per unit of production is low at lower ranges of output but gradually increases as
production goes up.
(iii) The expenses per unit of production are more at lower ranges of output but gradually decrease
with the decrease with the increase in production.
Nature of variable expenses is shown as below:-
Overhead (`) Y
Total variable overhead
Per unit variable overhead

X
O Output or volume in units
The relationship of fixed and variable overheads with the volume of output is exhibited in the following
table. The range of output is considered as 5000-10000 units. Variable overheads are taken at `2 per
unit and fixed overheads are assumed to be at the level of `25000. Can you check for yourself how the
graph will look like for the following figures?
Output Fixed Variable Total Overheads per unit

units Overheads Overheads Overheads
Fixed Variable Total
5000 25000 10000 35000 5.00 2.00 7.00
6000 25000 12000 37000 4.17 2.00 6.17
7500 25000 15000 40000 3.33 2.00 5.33
8000 25000 16000 41000 3.13 2.00 5.13
9000 25000 18000 43000 2.78 2.00 4.78
10000 25000 20000 45000 2.50 2.00 4.50
Semi-Variable Overheads:
These are a sort of mixed or hybrid costs, partly fixed and partly variable costs. For example Telephone
expenses, include a fixed portion of annual charge plus variable charge according to the calls. Thus
total telephone expenses are semi-variable.
Semi-variable overheads are of two types:-
(i) The expenses which change with the change in volume of output, but the variation cost is less than
proportionate to change in output. Examples are power & fuel, lighting, repairs and maintenance
of buildings, etc.

Cost Accounting
(ii) The costs tend to remain constant within certain range of output, then jump up and remain constant
for another range and so on.
Y
Semi-variable overheads
Overhead (`)
X
Output or Volume in units
Semi variable cost need to be classifed into fixed and variable due to the following reasons:
(a) Effective Cost Control: Fixed costs are in the nature of policy costs or discretionary costs and as
such can be controlled by the management. However variable costs can be controlled at lower
levels. Separation of two elements facilitate the fixation of responsibility, preparation of overhead
budget and exercise effective control.
(b) Decision Making: The classification is very useful in management decisions relating to utilization of
capacity. If cost information is to be of use in such problems, it is essential that fixed and variable
costs which behave differently with changes in volume should be segregated.
(c) Preparation of Break-even Charts: Separation of fixed and variable cost is essential for the study of
cost volume profit relationship and for the preparation of breakeven charts and profit charts.
(d) Marginal Costing: The basic requirement of the technique of Marginal Costing is the separation
of fixed and variable costs. While the latter are taken into consideration for the determination of
Marginal Cost and contribution, the fixed costs are treated separately.
(e) Method of Absorption Costing: Separate method may be adopted for determination of rates for
fixed and variable costs for absorption in production. Further a separate fixed overhead rate also
serves as a measure of utilization of the facilities of the undertaking; any under recovery or under
absorption denotes the idle or surplus capacity or production efficiency.
(f) Flexible Budget: In a Flexible Budget, the budgeted amounts vary with the levels of activity & fixed
cost remains constant. It is the variable cost that varies. Breakup of overhead cost into fixed and
variable is therefore necessary for establishment of budget and for the purpose of variance analysis.
Methods of classification of semi variable cost in fixed and variable
(a) Graphical Method – The costs at number of levels are plotted on a graph, x-axis represents the
volume and y-axis represents the amount of expenditure. A straight line known as regression line or
line of best fit is drawn between the points, plotted in such a manner that there are equal number
of points on both the sides of a line and as far as practicable, pairs of points on either side are in
equal distance from the line. Points falling far beyond the line are erratic and are not considered.
If the regression line is drawn carefully so that most of the plotted points are on the line or not far
from it, the scatter chart provides a fairly accurate method for the separation of fixed and variable.
(b) Simultaneous Equations – This uses the straight line equation of y = m x + c where y represents total
cost, m is variable cost per unit, x is the level of output and c is fixed costs. The total costs at two
different volumes are put into these equations which are solved for the values of m and c.
(d) High and Low Method – The highest and lowest levels of output and costs are taken and the
differential is found. This difference arises only due to variable costs. The remaining portion will be

fixed costs. Under this method the variable cost per unit will be computed first and then the fixed
cost will be derived. Variable cost per unit is computed by dividing the difference in cost at highest
level and lowest level with the difference in volume between highest and lowest level.
(d) Least Square Method – This statistical tool uses straight line equation and finds the line of best fit to
solve the equations. Also known as Simple Regression Method. Under this method first the mean
of volume and mean of costs are computed. The deviations in volume (x) from the mean and
deviation in cost (y) from mean are computed.
Codification of Overheads
It is always advisable to codify the overhead expenses. Codification helps in easy identification of
different items of overheads. There are numerous items of overheads and a code number to each one
will facilitate identification of these items easily. Codification can be done by allotting numerical codes or
alphabetical codes or a combination of both. Whatever system is followed, it should be remembered that
the system is simple for understanding and easy to implement without any unnecessary complications.
Cost Centre codes Department name

1100 Turning department
1200 Grinding Department
1300 Components manufacturing
1400 Assembly
2100 Maintenance
2200 Quality control
2300 Stores
3100 HR & Administration
3200 Accounts
You may observe the logic in giving the codes. All codes starting with 1 are production departments,
all codes starting with 2 are factory related services and all codes starting with 3 are general services.
This coding helps collection of costs on functional basis and also to identify an item of expense directly
to a department or cost centre.
Allocation, Apportionment and Reapportionment of Overheads
After the collection, classification and codification of overheads, the next step is allocation and
apportionment of overheads into the product units. The following steps are required to complete this
process.
Departmentalization
Before the allocation and apportionment process starts, the first step in this direction is ‘Departmentalization’
of overhead expenses. Departmentalization means creating departments in the firm so that the overhead
expenses can be conveniently allocated or apportioned to these departments. For efficient working and
to facilitate the process of allocation, apportionment and reapportionment process, an organization is
divided into number of departments like, machining, personnel, fabrication, assembling, maintenance,
power, tool room, stores, accounts, costing etc and the overheads are collected, allocated or
apportioned to these departments. This process is known as ‘departmentalization’ of overheads which
will help in ascertainment of cost of each department and control of expenses.
Allocation
CIMA defines Cost Allocation as, ‘the charging of discrete, identifiable items of cost to cost centres
or cost units’. In simple words complete distribution of an item of overhead to the departments or

Cost Accounting
products on logical or equitable basis is called allocation. Where a cost can be clearly identified with
a cost centre or cost unit, then it can be allocated to that particular cost centre or unit. In other words,
allocation is the process by which cost items are charged directly to a cost unit or cost centre. For
example, electricity charges can be allocated to various departments if separate meters are installed,
depreciation of machinery can be allocated to various departments as the machines can be identified,
salary of stores clerk can be allocated to stores department, cost of coal used in boiler can be directly
allocated to boiler house division. Thus allocation is a direct process of identifying overheads to cost
units or cost centres. So the term allocation means allotment of whole item of cost to a particular cost
centre or cost object without any division.
Apportionment
Cost Apportionment is the allotment of proportions of items to cost centers. Wherever possible, the
overheads are to be allocated. However, if it is not possible to charge the overheads to a particular
cost centre or cost unit, they are to be apportioned to various departments on some suitable basis. This
process is called as ‘Apportionment’ of overheads. The basis for apportionment is normally predetermined
and is decided after a careful study of relationships between the base and the other variables within
the organisation. The Cost Accountant must ensure that the selected basis is the most logical. A lot of
quantitative information has to be collected and constantly updated for the purpose of apportionment.
The basis selected should be applied consistently to avoid vitiations. However, there should be a periodical
review of the same to revise the basis if needed.
In simple words, distribution of various items of overheads in portions to the departments or products on
logical or equitable basis is called apportionment.
A general example of various bases that may be used for the purpose of apportionment is shown below:
Overhead item Basis

Rent and building Floor space occupied by each department
General Lighting No. of light points in each department
Telephones No. of extensions in a department
Depreciation of factory building Floor space
Material handling No. of material requisitions or Value of material issued
The above list is not exhaustive and depending upon peculiarities of the organisation, it could be
extended. This allocation and/or apportionment is called as primary distribution of overheads.
Distinction between Allocation & Apportionment
Although the purpose of both allocation and apportionment is identical, i.e to identify or allot the costs
to the cost centres or cost unit, both are not the same.
Allocation deals with the whole items of cost and apportionment deals with proportion of items of cost.
Allocation is direct process of departmentalization of overheads, where as apportionment needs a
suitable basis for sub-division of the cost.
Whether a particular item of expense can be allocated or apportioned does not depends on the nature
of expense, but depends on the relation with the cost centre or cost unit to which it is to be charged.
Principles of Apportionment of Overhead Cost
(i) Services Rendered
The principle followed in this method is quite simple. A production department which receives
maximum services from service departments should be charged with the largest share of the
overheads. Accordingly, the overheads of service departments are charged to the production
departments.

(ii) Ability to Pay

This method suggests that a large share of service department’s overhead costs should be assigned
to those producing departments whose product contributes the most to the income of the business
firm. However the practical difficulty in this method is that, it is difficult to decide the most paying
department and hence difficult to operate.
(iii) Survey or Analysis Method
This method is used where a suitable base is difficult to find or it would be too costly to select a
method which is considered suitable. For example, the postage cost could be apportioned on a
survey of postage used during a year.
(iv) Efficiency Method
Under this method, the apportionment of expenses is made on the basis of production targets. If the
target is exceeded, the unit cost reduces indicating a more than average efficiency. If the target
is not achieved, the unit cost goes up, disclosing there by, the inefficiency of the department.
Illustration 1
A factory has 3 production departments (P1, P2, P3) and 2 service departments (S1 & S2). The following
overheads & other information are extracted from the books for the month of January 2016.
Expense Amount (`)

Rent 6,000
Repair 3,600
Depreciation 2,700
Lighting 600
Supervision 9,000
Fire Insurance for stock 3,000
ESI contribution 900
Power 5,400
Particulars P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
Area sq ft 400 300 270 150 80
No. of workers 54 48 36 24 18
Wages 18,000 15,000 12,000 9,000 6,000
Value of plant 72,000 54,000 48,000 6,000
Stock Value 45,000 27,000 18,000
Horse power of plant 600 400 300 150 50
Allocate or apportion the overheads among the various departments on suitable basis.
Solution:
The primary distribution of overheads is as follows:- Amount (`)
Expense Total Basis P1 P2 P3 S1 S2

Rent 6,000 Area sq ft 2,000 1,500 1,350 750 400
Repair 3,600 Plant value 1,440 1,080 960 120 -
Depreciation 2,700 Plant value 1,080 810 720 90 -

Cost Accounting
Lighting 600 Area sq ft 200 150 135 75 40

Supervision 9,000 No of workers 2,700 2,400 1,800 1,200 900
Fire Insurance for stock 3,000 Stock value 1,500 900 600 - -
ESI contribution 900 Wages 270 225 180 135 90
Power 5,400 Horse power 2,160 1,440 1,080 540 180
Total 31,200 11,350 8,505 6,825 2,910 1,610
Secondary Distribution of Production Overheads

After the primary distribution as shown above is over, the next step is to re-distribute the service department
costs over the production departments. This also needs to be done on some suitable basis, as there
may not be a direct linkage between services and production activity. The products actually do not
pass through the service departments. So does it mean that the service cost is not a part of cost of
production? It very much is the part of production cost! Hence the loading of service costs onto the
production departments is necessary. This process is called secondary distribution of overheads.
The basis for secondary distribution is dependent on:-
(i) The nature of service given e.g. it may be maintenance department or stores.
(ii) Measurement of service based on surveys or analysis.
(iii) General use indices
In the above Illustration No. 1, the costs of S1 (`2910) and that of S2 (`1610) will have to be loaded on
to the totals of P1, P2 and P3.
Some examples of the bases that can be used to distribute cost of different service departments:
Service department Basis

Quality No of inspection done
Maintenance No of maintenance calls or
Material usage for maintenance or
Time spent on maintenance
Stores Indirect material cost or
No of issue slips or
Quantity of material issued or
Value of stock handled
Canteen, welfare No workers
Internal transport No. of trucks or trolleys used or
Tonne-miles consumed
Payroll office No. of labour hours
Purchase office No of purchase orders or
Value of material purchased
Again this is not an exhaustive list and could differ from company to company. Many times percentage
estimation is also done for such distribution if the service cannot be measured on the basis of any of the
above bases. It may be decided that the cost of S1 is to be distributed as P1-40%, P2-25% and P3-35%.
Such arbitrary method should be avoided as far as possible.

Methods of Secondary Distribution

(a) Direct Distribution Method
This method is based on the assumption that one service department does not give service to other
service department/s. Thus between service departments there is no reciprocal service exchange.
Hence under this method, service costs are directly loaded on to the production departments. This is
simple, but the assumption may not be correct. Can we say that the canteen service is not available
to other service departments like labour office or stores or maintenance department? This is incorrect
and thus the method should not be used as far as possible.
In the above example consider that if the S1 and S2 costs are to be distributed on assumption of services
rendered as S1 to P1- 40%, P2-30% and P2-10% and the S2 costs are on the basis of 5:3:2, then the table for
redistribution of S1 and S2 costs over the production departments P1, P2 and P3 will be as given below.
Department Total Basic P1 P2 P3

Overheads as per primary distribution 26,680 11,350 8,505 6,825
Distribution of S1 2,910 40%;30%;30% 1,164 873 873
Distribution of S2 1,610 5:3:2 805 488 322
Total 31,200 13,319 9,861 8,020
(b) Step Distribution Method
This method does away with the assumption made under above method, but only partly. It recognises
that a service department may render service to the other service department, but does not receive
service from it. In above example, S1 may render services to S2 but not vice versa, i.e. S2 may not render
service to S1. In such situation, cost of that service department will be distributed first which render services
to maximum number of other service departments. After this, the cost of service department serving
the next large number of departments is distributed. This process is continued till all service departments
are over. Because it is done in steps, it is called as Step Method of Distribution.
Illustration 2
A manufacturing company has two production departments Fabrication and Assembly and 3 service
departments as Stores, Time Office and Maintenance. The departmental overheads summary for the
month of March 2016 is given below:
Fabrication - `24000
Assembly - `16000
Stores - `5000
Time office - `4000
Maintenance - `3000
Other information relating to the department was:
Production departments Service departments

Particulars
Fabrication Assembly Stores Time office Maintenance
No of employees 40 30 20 16 10
No of stores requisition slips 24 20 6
Machine Hours 2400 1600

Apportion the costs of service departments to the production departments.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
We will have to determine the sequence in which the service departments should be selected for
distribution and the bases on which each of them will be distributed. The following logical bases are
decided based on the additional information given:
Time office - No of employees
Stores - No of stores requisitions
Maintenance - Machine hours
Also, it can be easily noticed that the time office serves maximum departments (i.e. both production
departments, stores & maintenance departments). Stores serve the next larger number of departments
(i.e. both production departments and maintenance department).
Maintenance department serves only production departments. Hence the sequence for distribution
will be time office, stores and maintenance. This is shown in the following table:
Amount (`)
Particulars Total Basis Fabrication Assembly Time Stores Maintenance
office
As per primary 52,000 as given 24,000 16,000 4,000 5,000 3,000
distribution
Time office 4,000 no of 1,600 1,200 (4,000) 800 400
employees
Stores 5,800 no of req. 2,784 2,320 (5,800) 696
slips
Maintenance 4,096 Machine 2,458 1,638 (4,096)
hours
Total 30,842 21,158
Please notice when we distribute the time office costs first, the charge to stores department is `800.
This makes the total cost of stores to be distributed as `5800 (5000+800).Same is the logic for `4096 of
Maintenance department.
(c) Reciprocal Service Method: This method takes cognizance of the fact that service departments may
actually give as well as receive services from and to the other service departments on reciprocal basis.
Such inter-departmental exchange of service is given due weight in the distribution of the overheads.
There are two methods used for distribution under this logic. One is called Repeated Distribution Method
and the other Simultaneous Equation Method.
(d) Repeated Distribution Method: This is a continuous distribution of overhead costs over all departments.
The decided ratios are used to distribute the costs of service departments to the production and other
service departments. This is continued till the figures of service departments become ‘nil’ or ‘negligible’.
Illustration 3
The summary as per primary distribution is as follows:
Production departments A- `2400; B- `2100 & C- `1500
Service departments X – `700; Y- `900
Expenses of service departments are distributed in the ratios of:
X dept. : A- 20%, B- 40%, C- 30% and Y- 10%
Y dept. : A- 40%, B- 20%, C- 20% and X- 20%
Show the distribution of service costs among A, B and C under repeated distribution method.

Solution:
Amount (`)
Production departments Service departments
Particulars
A B C X Y
As per primary distribution 2400 2100 1500 700 900
Service dept X 140 280 210 (700) 70
Service dept Y 388 194 194 194 (970)
Service dept X 38.8 77.6 58.2 (194) 19.4
Service dept Y 7.76 3.88 3.88 3.88 (19.4)
Service dept X 0.776 1.552 1.164 (3.88) 0.388
Total 2975.336 2657.032 1967.244 0 0.388
It can be noticed that the undistributed balance in service department is very negligible and thus can
be ignored for further distribution
(e) Simultaneous Equations Method: Under this method, simultaneous equations are formed using the
service departments’ share with each other. Solving the two equations will give the total cost of service
departments after loading the inter- departmental exchange of services. These costs are then distributed
among production departments in the given ratios.
In the above Illustration No. 3, service dept X gives 10% of its service to Y and receives 20% of Y’s service.
Let ‘x’ be the total expenses of dept X (its own + share of Y) and
‘y’ be the total expenses of dept Y (its own + share of X)
This can be expressed as:
‘x’ = 700 + 20% of ‘y’ and
‘y’ = 900 + 10% of ‘x’
i.e. x = 700 + 0.2y and
y = 900 + 0.1x
Multiplying both equations by 10, we get
10x = 7000 + 2y i.e. 10x –2y = 7000 and
10y = 9000 + x i.e. -x+10y = 9000
Now multiplying 2nd equation by 10, and then adding the two equations we get,
98y = 97000
Thus y = 990 and x = 898
Based on this we distribute the service department costs over production departments.
Redistribution Statement
Department
A B C X Y
Primary Distribution 2400 2100 1500 700 900
X 180 359 269 (898) 90
Y 396 198 198 198 (990)
Total 2976 2657 1967 — —

Cost Accounting
(f) Trial and Error method

This method is to be followed when the question of distribution of costs of service cost centres which
are interlocked among them arises. In the first stage, gross costs of services of service cost centres are
determined. In the second stage cost of service centres are apportioned to production cost centres.
Limitations of Apportionment
Whichever method we may use, it still depends on a suitable basis used. The basis will always lead to
approximations. If an approximate data is used for analysis, control and decision-making, it may cause
erroneous results. Thus one has to be careful in relating the cost data to cost centre or cost unit. The
natural relation of most of the indirect costs i.e. overheads is to a time period. In other words, almost
all overheads are period costs and hence an attempt to link it to cost unit will always be arbitrary. As
such, the traditional methods of allocation and apportionment are often challenged by many in the
industry. The techniques like Marginal Costing owe their origin to such limitations of Traditional Costing.
Capacity of Overhead Rate
Influence of activity level on overhead rate
In determination of overhead rate, a good deal depends upon the activity level, which is assumed. In
other words, capacity consideration influence overhead rate. Overhead rate will be different at different
capacity levels. Efficient utilization of capacity is desirable both for society and management. Following
capacity concepts merit consideration for overhead rate determination:-
Theoretical or Maximum Plant Capacity
Maximum Capacity or the Ideal Capacity is the capacity for which plant is designed to operate. It is
only Theoretical Capacity. It does not give allowance for waiting, delays and shut-down. The capacity
is significant for designing the plant mechanically. For cost considerations, this capacity is not important.
Ideal Capacity is never used to determine overhead rates for its disregard to even necessary interruptions
in production process.
Practical Capacity
When this capacity is determined, allowance is given for unavoidable interruptions like time lost for
repairs, inefficiencies, breakdown, delay in delivery of raw material and supplies, labour shortages and
absence, Sunday, holidays, vacation, inventory taking, etc. Thus, Practical Capacity is the maximum
Theoretical Capacity with minor unavoidable interruptions. These unavoidable interruptions are based
mostly on internal influences and do not consider main external causes like lack of customers orders.
The Practical Capacity is determined with reference to nature of industry and circumstances in which a
particular factory is situated. Normal unavoidable interruptions account for 15% to 25% of the maximum
capacity. The Practical Capacity, thus, ranges between 75% and 85% of maximum capacity after giving
allowance for normal unavoidable interruptions.
Normal Capacity
Idle capacity due to long-term sales trend only is reduced from Practical Capacity to get Normal
Capacity. Calculation of Normal Capacity of a plant presents considerable problems. Normal Capacity
is determined for the business as a whole. Then, it is broken down by plants and departments. For Normal
Capacity determination, prime considerations are physical capacity and average sales expectancy. It
should be noted that average sales expectancy to be considered for this purpose takes into account
a period enough to level out cyclical fluctuations. The determination of Normal Capacity helps in: i) the
preparation of flexible budgets and computation of predetermined factory overhead rates. Ii) the use
of Standard Costing, iii) estimating sales price etc., iv) scheduling production, v) inventory valuation, vi)
determination of breakeven point, vii) controlling costs.
Importance of determining Normal Capacity
The Normal Capacity considerations are important for:
(a) budget preparation;

(b) determination of overhead rate;

(c) determination of standard cost, and
(d) preparation of operation of operational plans.
For determining the Normal Capacity, machinery purchased for future use and outmoded machinery
should be excluded for consideration.
Capacity based on Sales Expectancy
Capacity may be based on sales expectancy for the year. The distinction between Normal Capacity and
capacity based on sales expectancy should be properly understood. While Normal Capacity considers
the long-term trend analysis of sales, which is based on sales of a cycle of years, the capacity based
on sales expectancy is based on sales for the year only. When long-term sales trends are determined,
cycle of years long enough to even out cyclical fluctuations is considered. Capacity based on sales
expectancy is influenced more by general economic conditions and forecast of industry than long
term sales trends. The main advantages of determining overhead rate based on sales expectancy are
i) Overhead rate is linked with actual sales expectancy, ii) Overhead costs are adequately spread over
the production and iii) Overhead rate determined for this purpose is very useful for making decisions
like price fixation, etc.
Idle Capacity and Excess Capacity
Practical Capacity is determined after giving allowance to unavoidable interruptions like time lost
for repairs, inefficiencies, breakdown and labour shortage, etc., Even this Practical Capacity is not
normally fully achieved. Some losses due to idleness of workers and plant facilities to occur even in
most carefully administered companies. These losses are not taken into account for determining the
Practical Capacity, because for the purpose of determining Practical Capacity only unavoidable
interruptions are considered. Thus, the difference between Practical Capacity and Normal Capacity,
i.e., the capacity based on long-term sales expectancy is the Idle Capacity. However, if Actual Capacity
happens to be different from capacity based on sales expectancy, the idle capacity will represent
difference between Practical Capacity and Actual Capacity. Idle Capacity is that part of Practical
Capacity which is not utilized due to factors like temporary lack of orders, bottlenecks and machine
breakdown, etc. Idle Capacity represents unused productive potential, which fails to be realized due
to interruptions that are not unavoidable. Idle capacity is that part of Practical Capacity which is not
utilized due to irregular interruptions.
Idle Capacity is different from Excess Capacity. Idle Capacity refers to temporary idleness of available
resources due to irregular interruptions. Excess Capacity results either from managerial decision to
retain larger production capacity or from unbalanced equipment or machinery within departments.
Excess Capacity refers to that portion of Practical Capacity which is available, but no attempt is made
for its utilization for strategic or other reasons. If the Excess Capacity results from purchase of assets not
required, it will be a prudent policy for company to dispose of the assets which cause Excess Capacity.
Alternatively, action should be taken for utilization of resources in the form of Excess Capacity. Excess
Capacity also results from imbalance or bottlenecks in certain departments. This situation can be
remedied by attempting synchronization in the working of various departments, working overtime,
running double shift and temporary off-loading to departments having spare capacity. While overhead
rate includes cost of Idle Capacity, Excess Capacity is excluded from overhead rate consideration.
Idle time is distinguished from Idle Capacity and its cost is separated in the accounts. Idle time represents
lost time of men and machines arising from lack of business or of material, a breakdown of equipment,
faulty supervision or other similar causes whether avoidable on not. Idle Capacity is the difference
between Practical Capacity and Actual Capacity and represents the unused production potential.
Idle Capacity costs are represented mostly by the fixed charges of owing and maintaining plant and
equipment and of employing services, which are not used to their maximum potential. The principal
causes of idle capacity are:

Cost Accounting
Production Causes
These causes primarily result from poor organization of operational plan. Following production causes
often lead to Idle Capacity:-
(a) Repetitive machine adjustment - i) Setup and change-over. ii) Repairs and adjustment.
(b) Lack of materials or tools – i) Internal ii) External
(c) Lack of supervision, inspection and instruction.
(d) Lack of power – i) Internally produced. ii) Externally produced
Administrative Causes:
Sometimes various administrative decisions taken at various level of management result in Idle Capacity.
Major administrative causes that lead to Idle Capacity are: a) Excess plant for anticipated expansion,
b) Special machines prepared for particular jobs, and c) Strikes / Lockouts.
Economic Causes
Sometimes demand for the goods is seasonal as in case of wool, ice cream and furs and production
cannot be evenly distributed. This is especially true, when there exists danger of deterioration of the
product or where carrying charges for stock are too large. Thus, seasonal, cyclical and industrial causes
also lead to Idle Capacity.
Various practices are followed in different companies for disposing of Idle Capacity cost. It is often
agreed in principle that normal production losses should be absorbed in product costs. Abnormal losses
should be treated as non-operating expenses in product costs. Abnormal losses should be treated
as non-operating expenses by direct debit to Profit and Loss Account. Certain companies follow the
practice of computing idle time costs on their leading products by use of statistical techniques. Cost
Accountants should particularly analyse the reasons for idle plant and equipment not used during the
period for non-con-controllable causes. The review of practices of different companies reveals that
Idle Capacity is a somewhat flexible concept. It is an individual problem which should be considered
after taking into account the special situations. For the growth and survival of the organisation, the
management is keenly interested to know the idleness, its causes, its cost and its available remedies.
Normally different companies follow a bit varying restricted accounting concept of Idle Capacity. In
many cases unabsorbed fixed overhead represents losses due to managerial decisions and it becomes
a subjective matter to refer it as idle capacity cost. Overhead rates of different capacity levels will be
different due to influence of fixed overhead.
Absorption of Overheads
Once the steps of primary and secondary distribution are carried out, what we get is total indirect costs
of production departments. The next step is to assign these totals to the individual product units. A job
or a product passes through all or many production departments before it is formed into a finished
saleable product. It is necessary to know the cost of each department it passes through per unit. The
absorption of overhead enables a Cost Accountant to recover the overhead cost spent on each product
department through each unit produced. Overhead absorption is also known as levy or recovery of
overheads. How is this done? Suppose in turning department a total of 1200 tubes are turned and the
cost of turning department overheads (after secondary distribution) are `72000, then can we say the
cost of turning per tube is `6/-? Most probably yes. This `6 per unit is called as Overhead Absorption Rate.
Absorption means ‘recording of overheads in Cost Accounts on an estimated basis with the help of a
predetermined overhead rate, which is computed at normal or average or maximum capacity’
In general, the formula for overhead absorption rate is give as:-
Overhead Rate = Amount of Overhead / No of units of the base
Overhead Absorption Rates: For the purpose of absorption of overhead in costs of jobs, processes,
or products overhead rates related to suitable factors or bases to be determined. There are several
methods in use for determining the overhead rates i.e Actual or Predetermined Overhead Rate, Blanket
or Multiple Rates.

Actual Overhead Rate

Actual Overhead Rate is obtained by dividing the overhead expenses incurred during the accounting
period by actual quantum on the base selected. Assuming that the rates are worked out on a monthly
basis the formula is:-
Overhead Rate = Actual overhead during the month ÷ Value/Quantity of the base during the month
Absorption of overheads based on actual rates may not be adopted due to the following reasons:-
(a) Actual overhead rate can be computed only after the accounting period is over.
(b) The incidence of some of the items of expenses like repairs, overhauling, etc is not uniformly spread
over all the accounting periods.
(c) Actual overhead rates do not provide any basis for cost control.
Pre-determined Overhead Rate
Predetermined Rate is computed by dividing the budgeted overhead expenses for the accounting
period by the budgeted base (quantity, hours, etc)
Overhead Rate= Budgeted overhead expenses for the period / Budgeted Base for the period
Advantages of Predetermined Overhead Rate
(a) Enables prompt preparation of cost estimates, quotations and fixation of selling prices.
(b) Cost data is available to management along with financial data.
(c) In case of Cost –plus contracts prompt billing is possible through pre-determined recovery rates.
(d) In concerns having budgetary control system, no extra clerical efforts are required in computing
the pre-determined overhead rate.
Blanket (Single) Overhead Rate
A single overhead rate for the entire factory may be computed for the entire factory. So this is known
as factory wide or Blanket Overhead Rate Method.
Blanket Rate = Overhead Cost for the factory / Total Quantum of the base.
Blanket Rate of overheads may be applied suitable in a small size concerns. Blanket Rates are easy to
compute. The use of Blanket Rate of overheads gives erroneous and misleading results, where several
products passing through number of different departments. With Blanket Rate of overhead, satisfactory
level of managerial control is not possible.
Multiple Rates:
This method is most commonly used to determine the multiple overhead rates, i.e separate rates:
(a) For each producing department;
(b) For each service department;
(c) For each Cost Centre; and
(d) For each product line.
The multiple rates are worked out according to the below formula:
Overhead Rate = Overhead cost allocated & apportioned to each product, dept / Corresponding Base
The number of overhead rates a firm may compute would be fixed taking into consideration of two
opposing factors viz clerical costs involved and the degree of accuracy level desired.

Cost Accounting
Production Unit Method

Simply put the concept here is to average out the total overheads on total units produced. In a tube
manufacturing unit the total overheads are `72000 and total tubes processed are 12000. The overhead
absorption rate is: 72000/12000 i.e. `6 per tube. If this rate is based on the budgeted costs and number of
units, and if the factory now gets an order for 2500 tube processing, the amount of production overheads
to be charged to that order will be (2500 * 6) i.e. `15000/-
Percentage of Direct Wages
Under this method, overhead for a job is recovered on the basis of a predetermined percentage of
direct wages. This method is used when the component of direct wages is higher. If the overhead to
be absorbed is `120000 and the direct wages are estimated at `800000, the predetermined rate will be
calculated as (120000/800000) i.e. 15%. If a job is received where direct wages are estimated at `9000/-
then the production overheads to be absorbed will be 15% of `9000 i.e. `1350 This method is useful if
the direct labour hours can be standardised and the labour rates do not fluctuate too much. However,
this method ignores the contribution made by other resources like machinery. The method also ignores
the fact that there may be different types or grades of workers and each may cost differently. It also
sidelines the fact that most of the production overheads are time-related.
Percentage of Direct Material Cost
Here the absorption rate is expressed as a percentage of direct material cost. This method is useful when
the proportion of material cost is very high and that of labour cost is comparatively negligible. It is useful
if material grades and rates do not fluctuate too much. If production overhead to be absorbed is `2000
and the material cost is expected to be `4000, then the absorption rate will be (2000/4000) i.e. Thus 50%
of direct material cost. Thus for a job requiring direct material of `200, the production overheads to be
absorbed will be `100 i.e. 50% of `200. However, many overhead items bear no relationship with material
cost, and also the fact of time dimension of overheads is not taken into account by this method.
Percentage of Prime Cost
This method combines the benefits of direct wages and direct material cost methods as we know prime
cost means direct material plus direct wages plus direct expenses. This method could be used when
prime cost constitutes a major proportion of the cost and the rates of material & labour are stable. It
is needed that the product made is standard product. If the prime cost is expected to be `50000 and
the production over heads are estimated at `2500, then the absorption rate will be 5% of prime cost. If
a job has a prime cost of `800, then overhead absorbed on that job will be `40/-
Direct Labour Hour
Under this method, the absorption rate is calculated by dividing the overhead amount by the actual
or predetermined direct labour hours. This is extremely useful when the production is labour intensive.
This method is superior to the earlier ones, because it takes cognizance of the time factor. If the direct
labour hours for a month amount to 10000 and the overheads to be absorbed are `5000, then the
absorption rate is `0.50 per hour (i.e. 5000/10000). If a job is going to require a labour time of 250 hours,
the production overheads to be loaded on the job will be `125 (i.e. 250 * 0.50). The data related to
labour hours has to be properly collected or estimated. The labour hour rate may be calculated as a
single rate or different for different group of workers.
Machine Hour Rate
In the days of mechanised production processes, the most relevant rate to be applied is the machine
hour rate. This is the rate calculated by dividing the actual or budgeted overhead cost related to a
machine or a group of machines by the appropriate number of machine hours. These hours could be
actual hours or budgeted hours. When budgeted hours are used they are taken at average capacity at
which a factory normally operates. You cannot take full capacity hours as the factory may not operate
at that level and then the absorption rate may be unnecessarily fixed at a lower level. The overheads

in a highly mechanised factory are mostly related to the number of hours a machine runs. Hence this is
supposed to be the best method for absorbing overhead costs into the cost unit. If a machine normally
runs for 2000 hours in a month and monthly overheads to be absorbed are `15000, then the machine
hour rate will be calculated as (15000/2000) i.e. `7.50 per machine hour. If a job take 75 hours on that
machine, then `562.50 (75 * 7.5) will have to be loaded as cost of using the machine for that job.
A machine hour rate may be calculated using only those overheads which are directly related to the
machine e.g. power, fuel, repairs, maintenance, depreciation etc. These expenses are totalled and
then divided by the hours to compute the rate. This is called as Ordinary Machine Hour Rate. Whereas,
if costs not related to machine are also included (e.g. supervision, rent, lighting, heating etc.) for the
rate calculation, such rate is called as Composite Machine Hour Rate. While calculating machine hour
rate, the wages paid to machine operators may be added to the total costs. This is because these
operators directly wok on the machines & thus related to machine operation. At times a factory may
have more than one similar machines simultaneously working. In such case, a group machine hour rate
may be calculated.
Factors influencing the selection of Overhead Recovery Rate
The particular method or methods selected for application in a company would depend upon the factors
mentioned below. Selection of the most equitable method is of paramount importance since a method
that is not suitable will distort costs and thus make them useless for control and decision making purpose.
Selection of Overhead Recovery Rates depends on the following factors:-
(a) Nature of the product and process of manufacture.
(b) Nature of overhead expenses.
(c) Organisational set-up of the undertaking into departments and or cost centers.
(d) Individual requirements with regard to the circumstances prevailing.
(e) Policy of the management.
(f) Accuracy vis-a-vis cost of operating the method. Some of the methods are comparatively more
accurate and provide equitable bases for overhead absorption.
The main features of a satisfactory overhead rate are as follows:-
(a) Simple, easy to operate, practical and accurate;
(b) Economic in application;
(c) Fairly stable so that cost from period to period does not vary;
(d) Related to time factor as far as practical;
(e) Departmental rates are preferable to blanket rates;
(f) Area of activity selected for computation of the rate should be homogeneous cost unit;
(g) Base for the rate should lay stress on the main production element of the concern.
Under-absorption and Over-absorption of Overhead
The amount of overhead absorbed in costs is the sum total of the overhead costs allotted to individual
cost units by application of the overhead rate. When a predetermined rate worked out on the basis
of anticipated or budgeted overhead and base is applied to the actual base, the amount absorbed
may not be identical with the amount of overhead expenses incurred if either the actual base or the
actual expenses or both deviate from the estimates or the budget.
If the amount absorbed is less than the amount incurred , which may due to actual expenses exceeding
the estimate and / or the output or the hours worked may be less than the estimate, the difference
denotes under-absorption.

Cost Accounting
On the other hand if the amount absorbed is more than the expenditure incurred, which may be due
to the expense being less than estimate and / or the output or hours worked may be exceeding the
estimate, this would indicate over-absorption, which goes to inflate the costs.
Under or over absorption of overhead may arise due to one or the other of the causes given below:-
(a) Error in estimating overhead expenses.
(b) Error in estimating the level of production, i.e the base.
(c) Major unanticipated changes in the methods of production.
(d) Unforeseen changes in the production capacity.
(e) Seasonal fluctuations in the overhead expenses from period to period.
(f) Overhead rate may be applied to the Normal Capacity which may be less than the full operating
capacity of the undertaking.
How does one deal with the situation of over or under absorption. There are three ways to handle it:
(a) Write-off (in case of under absorption) or write back (in case of over-absorption) to the P & L
Account. This treatment is valid if most of the overhead items are related to time.
(b) Carry forward to the next period through a reserve account. This method is not recommended on
the logic that it is inconsistent with Accounting Standards.
(c) Use of supplementary rates to adjust the effect to the cost of sales, finished stocks and Work in
Process stocks. This sounds logical as it does not carry forward the unabsorbed or over absorbed
overheads to the next accounting period entirely. It aims at splitting the total effect between the
cost of sale (which is charged to current year’s profits) and stocks (which get carried forward to
the next year).
Illustration 4
Overhead incurred ` 1,50,000
Overhead recovered ` 1,00,000
Cost of sales ` 10,00,000
Finished goods ` 8,00,000
Work in process ` 7,00,000
Solution:
Here, the overheads under-absorbed are (1,50,000-1,00,000) `50,000.
Total of Cost of sales, FG stock & WIP is `25,00,000
The supplementary rate will be 50,000/25,00,000 i.e. `0.020
This will be distributed as:
`20,000 to cost of sales (i.e. 10,00,000 x 0.020)
`16,000 to FG stock (i.e. 8,00,000 x 0.020) and
`14,000 to WIP (i.e. 7,00,000 x 0.020)

Reporting of overhead costs:

Presentation:
l Overheads shall be presented as separate cost heads like production, administration and marketing.
l Element wise and behavior wise details of the overheads shall be presented, if material.
l Any under-absorption or over-absorption of overheads shall be presented in the reconciliation
statement.
Disclosure:
l The basis of assignment of overheads to the cost objects.
l Overheads incurred in foreign exchange.
l Overheads relating to resources received from or supplied to related parties
l Any Subsidy / Grant / Incentive or any amount of similar nature received / receivable reduced from
overheads.
l Credits / recoveries relating to the overheads.
l Any abnormal cost not forming part of the overheads.
l Any unabsorbed overheads.
Illustration 5
In an Engineering Factory, the following particulars have been extracted for the quarter ended 31st
December, 2015. Compute the departmental overhead rate for each of the production departments,
assuming that overheads are recovered as a percentage of direct wages.
Production Depts. Service Depts.

A B C X Y
Direct Wages (`) 30,000 45,000 60,000 15,000 30,000
Direct Material 15,000 30,000 30,000 22,500 22,500
No. of workers 1,500 2,250 2,250 750 750
Electricity KWH 6,000 4,500 3,000 1,500 1,500
Assets Value 60,000 40,000 30,000 10,000 10,000
No. of Light points 10 16 4 6 4
Area Sq. Yards 150 250 50 50 50
The expenses for the period were:
Amount (`)
Power 1,100
Lighting 200
Stores Overhead 800
Welfare of Staff 3,000
Depreciation 30,000
Repairs 6,000
General Overheads 12,000
Rent and Taxes 550
Apportion the expenses of Service Dept. Y according to direct wages and those of Service Department
X in the ratio of 5: 3 : 2 to the production departments.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Statement showing apportionment of overheads and computation of OH rates: Amount (`)
Particulars Basis Total A B C X Y
Material Actual 45,000 — — — 22,500 22,500
Wages Actual 45,000 — — — 15,000 30,000
Power KWH 1,100 400 300 200 100 100
(4:3:2:1:1)
Lighting Light Points
(5:8:2:3:2) 200 50 80 20 30 20
Stores overhead Materials
(2:4:4:3:3) 800 100 200 200 150 150
Welfare of staff No. of workers
(2:3:3:1:1) 3,000 600 900 900 300 300
Depreciation Assets Value
(6:4:3:1:1) 30,000 12,000 8,000 6,000 2,000 2,000
Repair Assets Value
(6:4:3:1:1) 6,000 2,400 1,600 1,200 400 400
General Over- Direct Wages
heads (2:3:4:1:2) 12,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 1,000 2,000
Rent & Taxes Area
(3:5:1:1:1) 550 150 250 50 50 50
1,43,650 17,700 14,330 12,570 41,530 57,520
Costs of ‘X’ 5:3:2 20,765 12,459 8,306 (41,530) —
Costs of ‘Y’ 2:3:4 12,782 19,173 25,565 — (57,520)
51,247 45,962 46,441 — —
Overhead Rate as % on direct wages
A = [51,247/30,000] x 100 = 170.82%
B = [45,962/45,000] x 100 = 102.14%
C = [46,441/60,000] x 100 = 77.40%
Illustration 6
The New Enterprises Ltd. has three producing departments A,B and C two service Departments D and
E. The following figures are extracted from the records of the Co.
`
Rent and Rates 5,000
General Lighting 600
Indirect Wages 1,500
Power 1,500
Depreciation on Machinery 10,000
Sundries 10,000
The following further details are available:

A B C D E
Floor Space (Sq.Mts.) 2,000 2,500 3,000 2,000 500
Light Points 10 15 20 10 5
Direct Wages 3,000 2,000 3,000 1,500 500
H.P. of machines 60 30 50 10 --
Working hours 6,226 4,028 4,066 -- --
Value of Material 60,000 80,000 1,00,000 -- --
Value of Assets 1,20,000 1,60,000 2,00,000 10,000 10,000
The expenses of D and E are allocated as follows:
A B C D E
D 20% 30% 40% -- 10%
E 40% 20% 30% 10% --
What is the factory cost of an article if its raw material cost is `50, labour cost `30 and it passes through
Departments A, B and C. For 4, 5 & 3 hours respectively.
Solution:
Statement showing apportionment of overheads to departments Amount (`)
Particulars Basis Total A B C D E
Rent & Rates Space
(4:5:6:4:1) 5,000 1,000 1,250 1,500 1,000 250
Lighting Light Points
(2:3:4:2:1) 600 100 150 200 100 50
Indirect wages Direct wages
(6:4:6:3:1) 1,500 450 300 450 225 75
Power Horse Power
(6:3:5:1) 1,500 600 300 500 100 --
Depreciation Value of Asset
(12:16:20:1:1) 10,000 2,400 3,200 4,000 200 200
Sundries Direct wages
(6:4:6:3:1) 10,000 3,000 2,000 3,000 1,500 500
Wages Actual 2,000 -- -- -- 1,500 500
30,600 7,550 7,200 9,650 4,625 1,575
Repetitive Distribution Method Amount (`)
Particulars A B C D E
Totals 7,550 7,200 9,650 4,625 1,575
Cost of D (2:3:4:1) 925 1,387 1,850 (4,625) 463
8,475 8,587 11,500 -- 2,038
Cost of E (4:2:3:1) 815 408 611 204 (2,038)
9,290 8,995 12,111 204 --
Cost of D (2:3:4:1) 41 61 82 (204) 20
9,331 9,056 12,193 -- 20
Cost of E (4:2:3:1) 8 4 6 2 (20)
9,339 9,060 12,199 2 --
Cost of D (2:3:4:1) -- 1 1 (2) --
9,339 9,061 12,200 -- --
Working Hours 6,226 4,028 4,066
Rate per hour 1.5 2.25 3.00

Cost Accounting
Computation of Factory Cost of the Article

Material 50.00
Labour 30.00
Overheads
Dept A (4 x 1.5) 6.00
Dept B (5 x 2.25) 11.25
Dept C (3 x 3) 9.00
Factory Cost 106.25
Simultaneous Equation Method
Let total cost of Service Department D be ` ‘d’.
Let total cost of Service Department E be ` ‘e’.
d = 4625 + 10/100 e
e = 1575 + 10/100 d
⇒ 100 d = 462500 + 10 e
⇒ 100 d – 10e = 462500 → (1)
⇒ 100 e = 157500 + 10 d
⇒ -10 d + 100 e = 157500 → (2)
Equ. (1) 100 d – 10e = 462500
Equ. (2) x 10 - 100 d + 1000e = 1575000
990e = 2037500
e = 2037500 / 990
= 2,058
Substituting the value of ‘e’ in Equation (1), we get
⇒ 100 d – 10 (2058) = 462500

⇒ d = 483080 / 100
⇒ d = 4831
Particulars A B C D E
Totals 7,550 7,200 9,650 4,625 1,575
Costs of D (2:3:4:1) (4831) 966 1,450 1,932 (4,831) 483
Costs of E (4:2:3:1) (2,058) 823 412 617 206 (2058)
9,339 9,062 12,199 -- --

Illustration 7
The following information relates to the activities of a production department of factory for a certain
period.
Amount (`)
Material used 36,000
Direct Wages 30,000
Labour hours 12,000
Hours of Machinery-operation 20,000
Overhead Chargeable to the Dept 25,000
On one order carried out in the department during the period the relevant data were:-
Material used (`) 6,000
Direct Wages (`) 4,950
Labour hours worked 1,650 Hrs.
Machine Hours 1,200
Calculate the overheads chargeable to the job by four commonly used methods.
Solution:
The four commonly used methods of absorbing or recovering overheads are as follows:
1. % of overheads on material = (25,000 / 36,000) x 100 = 69.44%
2. % of overheads on direct wages = (25,000 / 30,000) x 100 = 83.33%
3. Overhead rate per labour hour = 25,000 / 12,000 = 2.083
4. Machine hour rate method = 25,000 / 20,000 = 1.25
The overheads chargeable to job under the above methods is as follows:
1. Material = 6,000 x 69.44% = 4,166.40
2. Wages = 4,950 x 83.33% = 4,125
3. Labour hour rate = 1650 x 2.083 = ` 3,437
4. Machine hour rate = 1,200 x 1.25 = ` 1,500
Illustration 8
In a machine department of a factory there are five identical machines. From the particulars given
below; prepare the machine hour rate for one of the machines.
Space of the department 10,000 sq.mts.
Space occupied by the machine 2,000 sq.mts.
Cost of the machine (`) 20,000
Scrap value of the machine (`) 300
Estimated life of the machine 13 years
Depreciation charged at 7½ % p.a
Normal running of the machine 2,000 hours
Power consumed by the machine as shown by the meter 3,000 p.a

Cost Accounting
Estimated repairs and maintenance throughout the working life of the machine (`) 5,200 Sundry
supplies including oil, waste etc. charged direct to the machine amount to ` 600 p.a.
Other expenses of the department are : Amount (`)
Rent and Rates 9,000
Lighting (to be apportioned according to workers employed) 400
Supervision 1,250
Other charges 5,000
It is ascertained that the degree of supervision required by the machine is 2/5th and 3/5th being devoted
to other machines.
There are 16 workers in the department of whom 4 attended to the machine and the remaining to the
other machines.
Solution:
Computation of Machine Hour Rate Amount (`)
Particulars Rate per hr.

Standing Charges
Rent & Rates 9000 x (2000 / 10000) = 1800
Lighting 400 x (4 /16) = 100
Supervision 1250 x (2/5) = 500
Other Charges 5000 x (1/5) = 1000

= 3400
Standing charges per hour 3,400/ 2,000 = 1.70
Machine Expenses
Depreciation (20000 x 7.5%) ÷ 2,000 = 0.750 2.75
Power (3,000 / 2,000) = 1.500
Repairs & Maintenance (5200 / 13) ÷ 2,000 = 0.200
Sundry Supplies (600 / 2,000) = 0.300
Machine Hour Rate = 4.45
Illustration 9
From the following particulars given below compute Machine hour rate for a machine.
a. Cost ` 24,000
b. Scrap value ` 4,000
c. Estimated Working life 40,000 hours
d. Estimated cost of repairs and maintenance during the whole life `2,000
e. Standard charges of the shop for 4 weekly period ` 3,000
f. Working hours in 4 weekly period 100 hours
g. No.of machines in the shop each of which is liable for equal charge are 30 machines.
h. Power used per hour 4 units @ 10p. per unit.

Solution:

Standing Charges
Standing Charges [3,000 / (100 x 30) 1.00
Machine Expenses
Depreciation [(24,000 – 4,000) / 40,000] = 0.50
Repairs [2,000 / 40,000] = 0.05
Power [4 x 0.1] = 0.40 0.95
Illustration 10
The following particulars relate to a processing machine treating a typical material. You are required
to calculate the machine hour rate.
The cost of the machine ` 10,000
Estimated life 10 years
Scrap value `1,000
Working time (50 weeks of 44 hrs. each) 2,200 hrs.
Machine maintenance per annum 200 hrs
Setting up time estimated @ 5% of total productive time
Electricity is 16 units per hour @ 10 paise per unit.
Chemicals required weekly `20
Maintenance cost per year `1,200
Two attendants control the operations of the machine together with 6 other machines, their combined
weekly wages are ` 140. Departmental overhead allocated to this machine per annum ` 2,000.
Solution:
Annual Working hours: 50 weeks X 44 hrs. 2,200
Less : Maintenance time 200
Productive hours 2,000
Less : 5% Setting up time 100
Effective hours 1,900
Standing Charges
Chemical Solution (50 x 20) = 1,000
Attendants wages (140 x 50 x 1/7) = 1,000
Departmental overheads = 2,000
= 4,000
Rate per hour 4,000 / 2,200 1.82

Cost Accounting
Machine Expenses
Depreciation [(10,000 – 1,000)/10]÷ 1900 = 0.47
Maintenance (1,200 / 1,900) = 0.63
Power (16 x 0.1) = 1.60 2.70
Illustration 11
Your company uses a historical cost system and applies overheads on the basis of “Predetermined”
rates. The following are the figures from the Trial Balance as at 30-9-2015:
Dr. (`) Cr. (`)
Manufacturing overheads 4,26,544 ---
Manufacturing overheads-applied --- 3,65,904
Work-in-progress 1,41,480 ---
Finished Goods Stock 2,30,732 ---
Cost of Goods Sold 8,40,588 ---
Give two methods for the disposal of the under absorbed overheads and show the profit implications
of the method.
Solution:
`
Overheads incurred = 4,26,544
Overheads absorbed = 3,65,904
Under absorption = 60,640
The following are the 3 methods for disposing off this under absorbed overheads:
1. Transferring to the costing P & L A/c under this method, the profit will decrease by ` 60,640.
2. The amount may be disposed off by carrying forward to the next year. In this case, there will be no
effect on profit.
3. Applying Supplementary Overhead Rate and further absorbing, which may be shown as follows.
Under this method also, the profit will decrease by ` 60,640.
Supplementary OH Rate = [60,640 / 12,12,800] x 100
=
5%
Amount (`)
Suppl. OH (5%) Total
Work in Progress 1,41,480 7,074 1,48,554
Finished Goods 2,30,732 11,537 2,42,269
Cost of goods sold 8,40,588 42,029 8,82,617
12,12,800 60,640 12,73,440

Illustration 12
In a factory the expenses of factory are charged on a fixed percentage basis on wages and office
overhead expenses are calculated on the basis of percentage of works cost.
I Order (`) II Order (`)
Material 12,500 18,000
Wages 10,000 14,000
Selling price 44,850 61,880
Percentage of profit on cost 15% 12%
Find the rate of Factory OH and Office OH.
Solution:
Let ‘X’ and ‘Y’ be the % of Works Overhead on wages and Office Overhead on works cost respectively.
Particulars Order I Order II
Material 12,500 18,000
Wages 10,000 14,000
Prime Cost 22,500 32,000
(+) Factory OH’s (10,000 x X/100) = 100X (14,000 x X/100) = 140X
Works Cost 22,500 + 100X 32,000 + 140X
(+) Office Overheads
[(100 X + 22,500) x Y/100] XY + 225Y 1.4XY + 320Y
[(140 X + 32,000) x Y/100]
Total Cost 100X + XY + 225Y + 22,500 140X + 1.4XY + 320Y + 32,000
Cost 44,850 x (100/115) = 39,000 61,880 x (100/112) = 55,250
100X + XY + 225Y + 22,500 = 39,000
⇒ 100X + XY + 225Y = 16,500 → Equ. (1)
140X + 1.4XY + 320Y + 32,000 = 55,250
⇒ 140X + 1.4XY + 320Y = 23,250 → Equ. (2)
Equ. (1) x 1.4 ⇒ 140X + 1.4XY + 315Y = 23,100
Equ. (2) ⇒ 140X + 1.4XY + 320Y = 23,250
(–) (–) (–) (–)
5Y = 150
Therefore, Y = 150/50 = 30
Substituting the value of Y in Equ. (1), we get X
100X + 30X + 225 x 30= 16,500 → Equ. (1)
130X + 6750 = 16,500
130X = 9,750
X = 9,750/130 = 75
% of Factory OH on wages = 75%
% of Office OH on works cost = 30%

Cost Accounting
Illustration 13
Self-help Ltd. has gensets and produced its own power Data for power costs are as follows :-
Production Depts. Service Depts.

A B X Y
Horse Power Hours 10,000 20,000 12,000 8,000
Needed at capacity production used during the month of May 8,000 13,000 7,000 6,000
During the month of May costs for generating power amounted to ` 9,300, of this ` 2,500 was considered
to be fixed. Dept x renders service to other Depts. in the ratio of 13:6:1, while Y renders service at A & B
in the ratio of 31:3. Given that the direct labour hours in Depts. A and B are 1,650 hours and 2,175 hours
respectively, find the power cost per labour hour in each of these two departments.
Solution:
Statement Showing apportionment of power cost and computation of cost per hour Amount (`)
Particulars Basis Total A B X Y

Fixed Cost (5:10:6:4) 2,500 500 1,000 600 400
Variable Cost (9,300 – 2,500) (8:13:7:6) 6,800 1,600 2,600 1,400 1,200
9,300 2,100 3,600 2,000 1,600
Costs of X [(as it renders to more
depts. (3)]
(13:6:1) 1,300 600 (2,000) 100
3,400 4,200 -- 1,700
Costs of Y (31:3) 1,550 150 -- (1,700)
4,950 4,350 -- --
Labour Hours 1,650 2,175
Cost of power per labour hour 3 2
Illustration 14
At Ltd engineering Co. having 25 different types of automatic machines, furnishes you the following
data for 2016-17 in respect of machine B:
1. Cost of the machine ` 50,000
Life - 10 years Scrap value is nil
2. Overhead expenses are:
Factory Rent ` 50,000 p.a.
Heating and Lighting ` 40,000
Supervision ` 1,50,000 p.a
Reserve equipment of machine B ` 5,000 p.a.
Area of the factory 80,000 sq.ft.
Area occupied by machine B 3,000 sq.ft.
3. Wages of operator is `24 per day of 8 hours including all fringe benefits. He attends to one machine
when it is under set up and two machines while under operation.

4. Estimated production hours 3,600 p.a.

Estimated set up time 400 hrs. p.a.
Power 0.5 per hour
Prepare a schedule of comprehensive machine hour rate and find the cost of the following jobs:
JOB 1102 JOB 1308
Set up time (Hrs.) 80 40
Operation time (Hrs.) 130 160
Solution:
Computation of machine hour rate when machine is in operation

Standing Charges:
Rent 50,000 x 3/80 = 1875
Heating & Lighting 40,000 x 3/80 = 1500
Supervision 1,50,000 x 1/25 = 6000
Reserve equipment = 5000
= 14375
Cost per hour 14375/4000 3.59
Machine Expenses:
Depreciation [50,000 ÷ (10 x 3600)] = 1.39 3.39
Wages [24/8 x 1/2] = 1.50
Power = 0.50
Machine Hour Rate 6.98
Computation of machine hour rate when machine is under setup

Standing Charges:
Rent 50,000 x 3/80 = 1875
Heating & Lighting 40,000 x 3/80 = 1500
Supervision 1,50,000 x 1/25 = 6000
Reserve equipment
= 5000
= 14375
Cost per hour 14375/4000 3.59
Machine Expenses:
Depreciation [50,000 x (10 x 3600)] = 1.39 4.39
Wages [24/8] = 3.00
Power = ----
Machine Hour Rate 7.98

Cost Accounting
Computation of cost of the jobs

Particulars Job 1102 Job 1308
Setup cost
Job 1102 : 80 x 7.98 638.40
Job 1308 : 40 x 7.98 319.20
Operation Cost
Job 1102 : 130 x 6.98 907.40
Job 1308 : 160 x 6.98 1,116.80
Total Cost of the Job 1,545.80 1,436.00
Illustration 15
Ganges Printing Co. has three operating departments:
1. Printing and Binding
2. Lithographing and
3. Engraving.
The company has a job order cost system using a single predetermined expense rate. The management
has been made aware of the deficiencies of using such a rate and is now interested in departmentalising
factory overhead. A study reveals that:
Department 1 has 3 similar machines representing a large investment and calling for high repairs and
depreciation charges.
Department 2 has the workers perform similar tasks and are therefore paid the same hourly wage.
Department 3 however has several classes of workers, each group being paid the same hourly wage.
The estimated factory overhead and production data costs are as follows
Printing & Litho- Engraving
Binding Graphing
Factory overhead (`) 40,000 68,750 1,20,000
Direct labour hours 10,000 20,000 40,000
Direct labour cost (`) 25,000 55,000 80,000
Machine hours 20,000 NIL NIL
Required:
1) An analysis to advice the management regarding the types of rates to be used in these departments.
2) A computation of the rates recommenced.
Solution:
1. It is appropriate to use machine hour rate method of absorbing overheads in Dept 1 because there
is large investment in machine and therefore they are predominant.
OH rate per machine hour = 40,000 / 20,000 = ` 2 per hour.
2. In Dept 2, it is better and appropriate to use labour hour rate of overheads because all the workers
are paid at uniform wage rate.
OH rate per labour hour = 68,750 / 20,000 = ` 3.4375 per hour.
3. In Dept 3, it is better and appropriate to use overhead rate based on certain % of wages because
workers are paid at different rates.
OH % on wages = (1,20,000 / 80,000) x 100 = 150%

Illustration 16
For a department the standard overhead rate is `2.50 per hour and the overhead allowances are as
follows:
Activity Level (Hours) Budget overhead Allowance (`)
3,000 10,000
7,000 18,000
11,000 26,000
Calculate:
a) Fixed cost
b) The standard activity level on the basis of which the standard overhead rate has been worked out.
Solution:
(a) Fixed Cost
Variable OH per hour = High level cost – Low level cost.
High level hours – Low level hours
= [(26,000-10,000) / (11,000-3,000)]
= ` 2 per hour
Fixed Cost = 10,000 – (3,000 x 2) = ` 4,000
(b) Standard activity level at which the rate has been determined
Standard activity level at which the rate has been determined
= Fixed Cost / Fixed OH per hour
= 4,000 / (2.5 – 2) = 8,000 hours
Illustration 17
In a certain factory three products are made from different materials by similar process. For a typical
period production costs are as under: Amount (`)
Product A Product B Product C
Material used 1,600 2,000 800
Direct labour cost 1,200 1,000 400
Overhead (actual) 800 650 350
Overhead is charged to cost of each product at the rate of 25% on prime cost.
Do you see anything wrong in principle in this method of charging overheads? If so, suggest a preferable
method.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Since, different materials are used for producing products, it is advisable, preferable and appropriate
to use the method of absorbing overheads based on % of materials instead of % on prime cost which
is shown as follows:
Amount (`)
A B C
Materials 1,600 2,000 800
Labour 1,200 1,000 400
Prime Cost 2,800 3,000 1,200
OH @ 25% on prime cost 700 750 300
% of OH on Material Cost:
A = [700/1600 x 100] = 43.75%
B = [750/2000 x 100] = 37.5%
C = [300/800 x 100] = 37.5%
Illustration 18
A company produced a simple product in three sizes A, B and C. Prepare a statement showing the
selling and distribution expenses apportioned over these three sizes applying the appropriate basis for
such apportionment in each case from the particulars indicated:
Express the total of the costs so apportioned to each size as:
a) Cost per unit sold (nearest paise)
b) A percentage of sales turnover (nearest to two places for decimal).
The Expenses are:

Expenses Amount Basis of apportionment
Sales salaries 10,000 Direct charge
Sales commission 6,000 Sales turnover
Sales office expenses 2,096 Number of orders
Advt. General 5,000 Sales turnover
Advt. specific 22,000 Direct charge
Packing 3,000 Total volume cu.ft. product sold
Delivery expenditure 4,000 --- do ---
Warehouse expenses 1,000 --- do ---
Expenses credit collection 1,296 Number of orders

Data available relating to the three sizes are as follows :

TOTAL SIZE A SIZE B SIZE C
1. No. of salesmen, all
paid same salary 10 4 5 1
2. Units sold 10,400 3,400 4,000 3,000
3. No. of orders 1,600 700 800 100
4. % of specific advt. 100% 30% 40% 30%
5. Sales turnover 2,00,000 58,000 80,000 62,000
6. Volume of cu.ft. per unit
of finished products -- 5 8 17
Solution:
Statement Showing apportionment of selling expenses over the sizes and computation of cost per unit
and % on sales:
Amount (`)
Particulars Basis Total A B C
Sales Salaries (4:5:1) 10,000 4,000 5,000 1,000
Sales Commission (29:40:31) 6,000 1,740 2,400 1,860
Sales Office expenses (7:8:1) 2,096 917 1,048 131
Advt. General (29:40:31) 5,000 1,450 2,000 1,550
Advt. Specific (3:4:3) 22,000 6,600 8,800 6,600
Packing (17:32:51) 3,000 510 960 1,530
Delivery (17:32:51) 4,000 680 1,280 2,040
Warehouse (17:32:51) 1,000 170 320 510
Credit collection (7:8:1) 1,296 567 648 81
54,392 16,634 22,456 15,302
Particulars A B C
a) Cost per unit sold (16,634/3,400) x 100 (22,456/4,000) x 100 (15,302/3,000) x 100
= 4.89 = 5.614 = 5.10
b) % on sales (16,634/58,000) x 100 (22,456/80,000) x 100 (15,302/62,000) x 100
= 28.67% = 28.07 = 24.68
Working :
A B C
Volume of cu. ft. per unit of finished products 5 8 17
Units sold 3,400 4,000 3,000
Total volume of cu. ft. 17,000 32,000 51,000

Cost Accounting
Illustration 19
For a production department of a manufacturing company you are required to :
(a) Prepare a fixed budget of overhead;
(b) Prepare a flexible budget of overhead, at 70% and 110% of budget volume;
(c) Calculate a departmental hourly rate of overhead absorption as per (a) and (b) above.
The budgeted level of activity of the department is 5,000 hours per period and the study of the various
items of expenditure reveals the following :
Amount (`) ` per hour
Indirect wages 0.40
Repairs upto 2,000 hours 100
for each additional 500 hours
upto a total of 4,000 hours 35
Additional from 4,001 to 5,000 hours 60
Additional above 5,000 hours 70
Rent and Rates 350
Power Upto 3,600 hours 0.25
for hours above 3,600 0.20
Consumable supplies 0.24
Supervision Upto 2,500 hours 400
Additional for each extra 600 hours
above 2,500 and upto 4,900 hours 100
Additional above 4,900 hours 150
Depreciation upto 5,000 hours 650
above 5,000 hours and upto 6,500 hours 820
Cleaning upto 4,000 hours 60
above 4,000 hours 80
Heat and from 2,100 hours to 3,500 hours 120
lighting from 3,500 hours to 5,000 hours 150
above 5,000 hours 175
Solution:
Fixed and Flexible Budget showing overhead cost per hour: Amount (`)
Particulars (3,500) (5,000) (5,500)

70% 100% 110%
Indirect wages (0.4 / hrs.) 1,400 2,000 2,200
Repairs 205 300 370
Rent & Rates 350 350 350
Power 875 1,180 1,280

Consumable Supplies 840 1,200 1,320

Supervision 600 950 950
Depreciation 650 650 820
Cleaning 60 80 80
Heating & Lighting 120 150 175
5,100 6,860 7,545
OH rate per hour [5,100/3,500] [6,860/5,000] [7,545/5,500]
= 1.457 = 1.372 = 1.372
1. If under absorbed OH is 10% or more of actual OH incurred – Supplementary OH rate is applied.
(or)
2. If the amount is considerable, supplementary OH rate applied otherwise we may follow, transferring
to P & L A/c or carry forward to next year.
Working Notes:
Amount (`)
Repairs 100 + (3x35) 100 + (4x35) + 60 100 + (4x35) + 60 + 70
= 205 = 300 = 370
Power (3500 x 0.25) (900 + 280) 900 + 280 + 100
= 875 = 1,180 = 1,280
Supervision 400 + (2 x 100) 400 + (4 x 100) + 150 400 + (4x100) + 150
= 600 = 950 = 950
Illustration 20
In a manufacturing unit, overhead was recovered at a predetermined rate of `25 per man-day. The total
factory overhead incurred and the man-days actually worked were ` 41,50,000 and 1,50,000 respectively.
Out of the 40,000 units produced during a period 30,000 units were sold. There were also 30,000
uncompleted units which may be reckoned at 66.67% complete.
On analysing the reasons, it was found that 40% of the unabsorbed overheads were due to defective
planning and the rest were attributable to increase overhead costs.
How would unabsorbed overhead be treated in Cost Accounts?
Solution:
Amount (`)
Overheads incurred = 41,50,000
Overheads absorbed (1,50,000 x 25) = 37,50,000
Under absorption = 4,00,000
The under absorption of ` 4,00,000 being considerable whether due to defective planning or due to
increase in prices, would be disposed off by applying supplementary OH rate in the following manner:
4,00,000
Supplementary OH rate =
30,000 + 10,000 + (30,000 × 23 )
= 4,00,000 / 60,000 = 20/3

To be absorbed on cost of goods sold = 30,000 x 20/3 = 2,00,000
To be absorbed on closing stock = 10,000 x 20/3 = 66,667
To be absorbed on Work in progress = 30,000 x 2/3 x 20/3 = 1,33,333
= 4,00,000

Cost Accounting

1. What is meant by classification of overheads and why it should be attempted?
2. What do you understand by Semi-Variable Overheads? Explain the various methods of
segregating Fixed and Variable Overhead Costs.
3. What are the main sources of overhead expenses? State with examples the procedure for such
collection from these sources.
4. Define Cost Allocation and Cost Apportionment. Explain fully the distinction between Cost Allocation
and Cost Apportionment.
5. Explain the various basis of apportionment of overheads to departments with illustrations as to the
items of expenses.
6. Briefly describe two ways of dealing with the problem of apportioning service department costs
among service departments which, in addition to do work for the main operational departments,
also serve one another.
7. How are the following items treated in Cost Accounts?
a. Defectives due to bad workmanship and bad materials.
b. Major repairs of a plant to prolong its useful life.
c. Labour amenities.
d. ESI contribution
e. Fringe benefits to workers.
f. After sales service cost
g. Losses due to obsolescence.
h. Lay off wages paid to workers.
8. As a Cost Accountant explain with reasons how would you treat the following items in Cost Accounts:
a. Bonus payable under the Payment of Bonus Act, 1965.
b. Bad Debts
c. Leave Travel Assistance.
d. Night Shift Allowance.
9. Explain the terms “Practical Capacity”, “Normal Capacity”, “Idle Capacity”, and “Imbalanced
Capacity”. With reference to any industry with which you are familiar, how will you measure the
effect of Idle Capacity?
10. What is Absorption? What are the various methods of absorbing overheads in Cost Accounts?
11. What is Under or Over Absorption? What are the causes for Under or Over Absorption?
12. What are the various methods of disposing off under or over absorbed overheads?
13. Write a note on Supplementary Overhead Rate.
14. How to report overhead cost in the cost statement?
15. Explain the nature of administration overheads. How they are apportioned?
16. On what basis would you analyse selling overheads for the purpose of judging the effectiveness of
these expenses?

17. “While manufacturing overheads are part of costs, selling overheads are result of policy”.
Comment.
18. “Management’s interest in overheads is not in the method of their absorption but in their behaviour
under various conditions of production” As a CMA please throw light on the above statement.
PRACTICE PROBLEMS
19. The ‘Prabhat Ltd.’ is divided into two production cost centers A and B, and two service cost centers
X and Y. The following is the summary of overhead costs for a particular period. Works Manager’s
Salary `4,000; Power `21,000; Contribution to PF `9,000; Rent `6,000; Plant Maintenance `4,000.
Canteen expenditure `12,,000; Depreciation of Plant and Machinery ` 20,000.
The following information is made available from the various departments.
DEPT.A DEPT. B DEPT. X DEPT. Y
No. of Employees 16 8 4 4
Area Sq. Ft. 2,000 3,000 500 500
Value of Plant (`) 75,000 1,00,000 25,000 —
Wages (`) 40,000 20,000 10,000 5,000
Horse Power 3 3 1 —
Apportion the costs to the various departments on the most equitable basis.
[Ans: A : ` 32,800; B : ` 30,400; X : ` 9,700; Y : ` 3,100]
20. In a factory there 5 machines, you are required to calculate Machine hour rate from the following
data.
Space of the Departments 8,000 Sq.ft.
Cost of machine (`) 20,000
Space occupied by each machine 1,600 Sq.ft.
Power consumed as indicated by meter is `3,000 p.a. for this machine.
Depreciation 7 ½ % p.a
Estimated life 10 years (working hours 2,000 p.a)
Estimated Repairs p.a. for this machine ` 520
Rent & Rates 9,000+
Lighting 750+ for all machines
Supervision 1,500
Other charges 4,000+
2/5 of the supervision is for this machine. There are three mechanics drawing ` 50, `60, `70 p.m
respectively.
[Ans: Machine hour rate ` 4.401]
21. You are required to calculate the machine hour rate from the following particulars.
a. Cost of the machine `10,000/- its estimated working life is 10 years and the estimated scrap
value at the end of its life is ` 1,000. The estimated working time per year (50 weeks of 40 hours
each) is 2,000 hours.

Cost Accounting
b. Electricity used by the machine is 16 units per hour at the cost of `0.10 per unit.
c. The machine requires a chemical solution which is replaced at the end of each week at cost
of `20/- each time.
d. The estimated cost of maintenance per year is `1,200.
e. Two attendants control the operation of the machine together with five other identical machines
their combined week wages amount to `120.
f. Departmental and General works overheads allocated to the machine for the year were
`2,000.
[Ans: Machine hour rate : ` 4.65]
22. XYZ manufactures household pumps which pass through three departments viz. Foundry, Machine
Shop and Assembling.
The manufacturing expenses are as follows:
Foundry Machine Assembling Total
` ` ` `
Direct wages 10,000 50,000 10,000 70,000
Works Overhead 5,000 90,000 10,000 1,05,000
The factory cost of manufacturing a type of ‘C’ pump was prepared by the company as follows:
`
Material 16
Wages: Foundry 2
Machine Shop 4
Assembling 2
8
Works Overhead:
150% of Direct Wages 12
36
It seems that there is some fallacy. Try to correct it.
[Ans: Correct Factory cost ` 34.20]
23. The following are the maintenance costs incurred in a machine shop for six months with corresponding
machine hours.
MONTH MACHINE HOURS MAINTENANCE COSTS (`)
January 2,000 300
February 2,200 320
March 1,700 270
April 2,400 340
May 1,800 280
June 1,900 290
12,000 1,800
Analyse the Machine cost which is semi variable into fixed and variable element.
[Ans: Variable cost per machine hour = ` 0.10; Fixed cost ` 100]

24. From the following data segregate fixed cost and variable costs.
Level of Activity
Capacity (%) 80 100
Labour Hours 400 500
Maintenance expenses of a plant (`) 2,600 2,750
[Ans: Variable Cost per hour ` 1.5; Fixed Cost ` 2,000]
25. In a factory, there are two service departments P and Q and three production departments A,
B and C. In April 2015, the departmental expenses were:
Departments A B C P Q
` 6,50,000 6,00,000 5,00,000 1,20,000 1,00,000
The service department expenses are allotted on a percentage basis as follows:
Service Departments Production Departs. Service Departs.
A B C P Q
P 30 40 15 - 15
Q 40 30 25 5 -
Prepare a statement showing the distribution of the two service departments’ expenses to the three
departments by a) Simultaneous Equation Method b) Repeated Distribution Method.
[Ans: Total Cost: A – ` 7,35,340; B – ` 6,86,045 and C – ` 5,48,615]
26. The monthly budget of a department is as under:
Amount (`)
Direct material 45,000
Direct wages 60,000
Overheads 90,000
Direct labour hours 15,000
Machine hours 30,000
Find out the overhead recovery rate based on at least five different possible methods of absorption
of overheads.
[Ans: Direct Material Cost method 200%; Direct Labour Cost Method 150%; Prime Cost Method
85.71%; Direct Labour Hour Rate Method ` 6; Machine Hour Rate Method ` 3]
27. The following particulars were extracted from the records of Epsilon Ltd. on 31st December:
Dept. A Dept. B Dept. C

` ` `
Overhead incurred 2,000 1,500 2,500
Overhead absorbed 2,200 1,400 2,250
The departmental loads during the three months to 31st December averaged:
Dept. A 100% of Normal Capacity

Dept. B 75% of Normal Capacity
Dept. C 50% of Normal Capacity
How would you deal with the balances under or over-absorbed? What preliminaries enquiries would
you make?
[Ans: Dept. A Over-absorbed ` 200
Dept. B under-absorbed ` 100
Dept. C Under-absorbed ` 250]

Cost Accounting
28. The overhead expenses of a factory are allowed on the machine hour method. You are required
to calculate the hourly rate for a certain machine from the following information:
Cost ` 58,000
Estimated scrap value ` 3,000
Estimated working life 20,000 hours
Estimated cost of maintenance during working life of machine ` 12,000
Power used for machine ` 1 per hour
Rent, rates etc. per month (10% to be charged for this machine) ` 1,500
Normal machine running hours during a month 180 hours
Standing charges other than rent, rates etc. per month ` 200
[Ans: ` 6.30]
1. The allotment of whole items of cost of centres or cost unit is called

A. Cost allocation
B. Cost apportionment
C. Overhead absorption
D. None of the above
2. Packing cost is a
A. Production of cost
B. Selling cost
C. Distribution cost
D. It may be any or the above
3. Directors remuneration and expenses form a part of
A. Production overhead
B. Administration overhead
C. Selling overhead
D. Distribution overhead
4. Charging to a cost center those overheads that result solely for the existence of that cost Center
is known as
A. Allocation
B. Apportionment
C. Absorption
D. Allotment
5. Absorption means
A. Charging or overheads to cost centers
B. Charging or overheads to cost units
C. Charging or overheads to cost centers or cost units

6. Which method of absorption of factory overheads do you suggest in a concern which Produces
only one uniform time of product
A. Percentage of direct wages basis
B. Direct labour rate
C. Machine hour rate
D. A rate per units of output
7. When the amount of under-or-over-absorption is significant, it should be disposed of by
A. Transferring to costing profit and loss A/c
B. The use of supplementary rates
C. Carrying over as a deferred charge to the next accounting year
D. None of above
8. When the amount of overhead absorbed is less than the amount of overhead incurred, It is called
A. Under- absorption of overhead
B. Over-absorption of overhead
C. Proper absorption of overhead
9. Warehouse expense is an example of
A. Production overhead
B. Selling overhead
C. Distribution overhead
D. None of above
10. Selling and Distribution overhead are absorbed on the basis of
A. Rate per unit
B. Percentage on works cost
C. Percentage on selling price of each unit
D. Any of these
[Ans: A, D, B, A , B, D, B, A, C, D]
State the statement is true or false:

1. Departments that assist producing Department indirectly are called service departments.
2. Factory overhead cost applied to a job is usually based on a per-determined rate.
3. Variable overhead very with time.
4. When actual overhead are more than absorbed overheads, it is known as over-absorption.
5. Cash discounts are generally excluded completely from the costs.
6. Cost of indirect materials is apportioned to various departments.
7. A blanket overhead rate is a single overhead rate computed for the entire factory.
8. Under-absorption of overhead means that actual overhead are more than absorbed overhead.

Cost Accounting
9. The principal based used for applying factory overhead are: units of production, material cost,
direct wages, direct labour hours and machine hours.
10. Allocation, for overhead implies the identification of overhead cost centres to which they relate.
[Ans: True: 1,2,5,10 False: 3,4,6,7,8,9]
Fill in the Blanks:

1. Overheads are an aggregate of _________ and_____ and _______________.
2. Example of after sales services are _____________ and _______________.
3. Administration overheads are usually absorbed as a percentage of ___________________.
4. The difference between actual and absorbed factory overhead is called ___________________.
5. The term used for charging of overheads to cost units is known as _______________.
6. The difference between practical capacity and the capacity based on sales expectancy is
known as ________________.
7. The __________ rate is computed by dividing the overheads by the aggregate of the productive
hours of direct workers.
8. Under or over absorption of overheads arises only when overheads are absorbed by
____________________.
9. Overhead incurred ` 16,000 and overhead absorbed ` 15,300. There is under absorption of
`___________.
10. In Absorption Costing ________________ cost is added to inventory.
[Ans: Indirect material Indirect Labour and Indirect Expenses, Repair and Maintenance and replacement
of Components, Works Cost, under or over absorbed overheads, absorptions, idle capacity, direct
labour hour, predetermined overheads rates, ` 700, Fixed cost]
Column “A” Column “B”

1. Advertisement A Value of goods in transit
2. Credit and collection B Floor area occupied
3. Warehouse rent C A percentage of cash collection
4. Royalties D No. of orders
5. Bad debts E Sales value
6. Transit insurance F Direct allocation
[Ans: E, D, B, F, C,A]

Cost Accounting Standards
Study Note - 3
COST ACCOUNTING STANDARDS
3.1 Preface to Cost Accounting Standards (CASs)

3.2 Objectives and Functions of Cost Accounting Standards Board
3.3 CAS 1-24 as issued by The Institute of Cost Accountants of India
3.1 PREFACE TO COST ACCOUNTING STANDARDS (CASs)
The council of the Institute of Cost Accountants of India, has constituted ‘Cost Accounting Standards
Board’ (CASB) with the objective of formulating Cost Accounting Standards, after recognizing the
need for structured approach to the measurement of cost so as to provide guidance to the user
organizations, government bodies, regulators, research agencies, academic institutions and others to
achieve uniformity and consistency in classification, measurement and assignment of costs.
The composition of the CASB will be broad based and ensure participation of all interest groups in the
standard setting process. The chairman of the CASB will be nominated by the council of the Institute.
Apart from six members of the council nominated on the CASB the following will be represented on
the CASB :-
(a) A nominee of the Central Government representing Ministry of Corporate Affairs.
(b) Adviser (Cost), Cost Audit Branch, Ministry of Corporate Affairs, Government of India.
(c) A nominee of the Central Government representing the Central Board of Excise and Customs,
Government of India.
(d) A nominee of the Central Government representing the Central Board of Direct Taxes.
(e) Two members of the institute representing leading companies.
(f) Four nominees from regulators i.e. CAG, RBI, SEBI, IRDA,TRAI...etc.
(g) Two nominees from professional institutions i.e. ICAI and ICSI.
(h) Three nominees of industry associations viz ASSOCHAM, CII, FICCI....etc.
(i) Two nominees from academic institutions like IIM, MDI, Universities...etc.
(j) Four eminent practicing members of the institute.
(k) President is authorized to include a maximum of two eminent persons having knowledge and
expertise in the Cost and Management Accounting / Accounting Standards not falling under the
categories as defined in the constitution.

Cost Accounting
3.2 OBJECTIVES AND FUCNTIONS OF THE COST ACCOUNTING STANDARDS BOARD
The objectives of the CASB are to develop high quality Cost Accounting Standards to enable the
management to take informed decisions and to enable regulators to function more effectively by
integrating, harmonizing and standardizing Cost Accounting Principles and Practices.
The following will be the functions of the CASB :-
(a) To issue the framework for the Cost Accounting Standards.
(b) To equip the Cost & Management Accounting professionals with better guide lines on cost
Accounting Principles.
(c) To assists the members in preparation of uniform cost statements under various statutes.
(d) To provide from time to time interpretations on Cost Accounting Standards.
(e) To issue application guidance relating to particular standard.
(f) To propagate the Cost Accounting Standards and to persuade the users to adopt them in the
preparation and presentation of general purpose Cost Statement.
(g) To persuade the government and appropriate authorities to enforce Cost Accounting Standards,
to facilitate the adoption thereof, by industry and corporate entities in order to achieve the desired
objectives of standardization of Cost Accounting Practices.
(h) To educate the users about the utility and the need for compliance of Cost Accounting
Standards.
Overview of Cost Accounting Standards issued till date are as follows:
CAS No Title Objective

CAS 1 Classification of Cost For preparation of Cost Statements.
CAS 2 Capacity Determination To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determination of capacity with reasonable
accuracy.
CAS 3 Production and To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and methods
Operation Overheads of determining the Production or Operation Overheads with
reasonable accuracy.
CAS 4 Cost of Production for To determine the assessable value of excisable goods used for
Captive consumption captive consumption.
CAS 5 Average (Equalized) To determine averaged / equalized transportation cost.
Cost of Transportation
CAS 6 Material Cost To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determining the Material Cost with reasonable
accuracy in an economically feasible manner.
CAS 7 Employee Cost To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determining the Employee Cost with reasonable
accuracy.
CAS 8 Cost of Utilities To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determining the Cost of Utilities with reasonable
accuracy.
CAS 9 Packing Material Cost To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determining the Packing Material Cost with

CAS 10 Direct Expenses To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determining the Direct Expenses with reasonable
accuracy.
CAS 11 Administrative Overheads To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determining the Administrative Overheads with
CAS 12 Repairs and Maintenance To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
Cost methods of determining the Repairs and Maintenance Cost
with reasonable accuracy.
CAS 13 Cost of Service Cost To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
Centre methods of determining the Cost of Service Cost Centre with
CAS 14 Pollution Control Cost To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determining the Pollution Control Costs with
CAS 15 Selling and Distribution To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
overheads methods of determining the selling and Distribution overheads
with reasonable accuracy
CAS 16 Depreciation and To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
Amortisation methods of determining the Depreciation and Amortisation
CAS 17 Interest and Financing To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles, methods of
Charges. determining and assigning the Interest and Financing Charges
CAS 18 Research and To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
Development Costs methods of determining the Research, and Development Costs
with reasonable accuracy and presentation of the same.
CAS 19 Joint Costs To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
methods of determining the Joint Costs.
CAS 20 Cost Accounting To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and
Standard on Royalty and methods of determining the amount of Royalty and Technical
Technical Know- How Fee Know-how Fee with reasonable accuracy.
CAS 21 Cost Accounting To bring uniformity, consistency in the principles, methods of
Standard on Quality determining and assigning Quality Control cost with reasonable
Control accuracy.
Standard on methods of determining the Manufacturing Cost of excisable
Manufacturing Cost goods
Standard on Overburden methods of determining and assigning Overburden Removal
Removal Cost Cost including those requiring attestation.
Standard on Treatment methods for treatment of revenue in cost statements with
of Revenue in Cost reasonable accuracy.
Statements
*Limited Revision 2017 [CAS 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 20, 21, 22, 23 & 24]
Each of the Cost Accounting standards has been explained in brief as follows

Cost Accounting
3.3 CAS 1-24 as issued by The Institute of Cost Accountants of India
CAS – 1 COST ACCOUNTING STANDARD ON “CLASSIFICATION OF COST”

This standard deals with the principles of Classification of Cost for determining the cost of a product or
service.
Objective
The objective of this standard is to bring uniformity and consistency in the principles of Classification of
Cost for disclosure and presentation in the cost statements of a product or service.
Scope
This standard shall be applied to cost statements, which require classification, presentation and
disclosure of cost including those requiring attestation.
Principles of Classification of Costs

Costs shall be classified by the process of grouping the components of cost under a common
designation on the basis of similarities of nature, attributes or relations. Items grouped together under
common heads shall be further classified according to their fundamental differences.
Scheme of classification shall be such that every item of cost is classified.
Classification of Costs
(a) By Nature of expenses
(b) By nature of traceability to a cost object
(c) By function
(d) By nature of behaviour
(e) By nature of production or operation process
CAS – 2 COST ACCOUNTING STANDARD ON CAPACITY DETERMINATION

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the capacity of a facility for
producing goods or providing services by an entity. This standard deals with the principles and methods
of classification and determination of capacity of an entity for ascertainment of the cost of product or
service, and the presentation and disclosure in cost statements.
Objective
The objective of this standard is to bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and methods of
determination of capacity with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
This standard shall be applied to the cost statements, including those requiring attestation, which
require determination of capacity for assignment of overheads.
Determination of Capacity: Capacity shall be determined in terms of units of production or services or
equivalent machine or man hours.

Installed capacity:
Installed capacity is usually determined based on:
(i) Technical specifications of facility.
(ii) Technical evaluation.
(iii) Capacities of individual or interrelated production or operation Centres.
(iv) Operational constraints or capacity of critical machines or equipment.
(v) Number of shifts or machine hours or man hours.
Normal Capacity:
Normal capacity is determined after suitable adjustments to the Installed Capacity.
The adjustments may be of the following nature:
(i) Time lost due to scheduled preventive or planned maintenance
(ii) Number of shifts or machine hours or man hours.
(iii) Holidays, normal shut down days, normal idle time,
(iv) Normal time lost in batch change over
CAS-3: COST ACCOUNTING STANDARD ON “PRODUCTION AND OPERATION OVERHEADS”

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Production or Operation
Overheads. This standard deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and
assignment of Production or Operation Overheads, for determination of the cost of goods produced
or services provided and for the presentation and disclosure in cost statements.
Objectives
determining the Production or Operation Overheads with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
This standard shall be applied to cost statements, which require classification, measurement, assignment,
presentation and disclosure of Production or Operation Overheads including those requiring attestation.
Disclosures
The cost statements shall disclose the following:
1. The basis of assignment of Production or Operation Overheads to the cost objects.
2. Production or Operation Overheads incurred in foreign exchange.
3. Production or Operation Overheads relating to resources received from or supplied to related
parties.
4. Any Subsidy, Grant, Incentive or any amount of similar nature received or receivable reduced from
Production or Operation Overheads.
5. Credits or recoveries relating to the Production or Operation Overheads.
6. Any abnormal cost not forming part of the Production or Operation Overheads.
7. Any unabsorbed Production or Operation Overheads.

Cost Accounting
CAS-4: Cost Accounting Standard on Cost of Production for Captive Consumption
The Cost Accounting Principle for determination of cost of production is well established. Similarly, rules for
levy of excise duty on goods used for captive consumption are also well defined. Captive Consumption
means the consumption of goods manufactured by one division and consumed by another division(s)
of the same organization or related undertaking for manufacturing another product(s). Liability of
excise duty arises as soon as the goods covered under excise duty are manufactured but excise duty
is collected at the time of removal or clearance from the place of manufacture even if such removal
does not amount to sale. Assessable value of goods used for captive consumption is based on cost
of production. According to the Central Excise Valuation (Determination of Price of Excisable Goods)
Rules 2000, the assessable value of goods used for captive consumption is 115% (110% w.e.f. 05-08-
2003) of cost of production of such goods, and as may be prescribed by the Government from time
to time.
Objective
(a) The purpose of this standard is to bring uniformity in the principles and methods used for determining
the cost of production of excisable goods used for captive consumption.
(b) The cost statement prepared based on standard will be used for determination of assessable
value of excisable goods used for captive consumption.
(c) The standard and its disclosure requirement will provide better transparency in the valuation of
excisable goods used for captive consumption.
Scope
The standard is to be followed for determining the cost of production to arrive at an assessable value
of excisable goods used for captive consumption.
Cost of production will include various cost components. They are already defined in Cost Accounting
Standard-1 (‘Classification of Cost’ – CAS-1). Thus, this standard has to be read in conjunction with
standard 1.
CAS-5: Cost Accounting Standard on Determination of Average Cost of Transportation
The Cost Accounting Principles for tracing/identifying an element of cost, its allocation/apportionment
to a product or service are well established. Transportation Cost is an important element of cost
for procurement of materials for production and for distribution of product for sale. Therefore, Cost
Accounting Records should present transportation cost separately from the other cost of inward
materials or cost of sales of finished goods. The Finance Act 2003 also specifies the certification
requirement of Transportation Cost for claiming deduction while arriving at the assessable value of
excisable goods cleared for home consumption/ export. There is a need to standardize the record
keeping of expenses relating to transportation and computation of Transportation Cost.
Objective
(a) To bring uniformity in the application of principles and methods used in the determination of
averaged/equalized Transportation Cost.
(b) To prescribe the system to be followed for maintenance of records for collection of cost of
transportation, its allocation/apportionment to cost centres, locations or products.
(c) To provide transparency in the determination of cost of transportation.

Scope
This standard should be applied for calculation of cost of transportation required under any statute or
regulations or for any other purpose. For example, this standard can be used for :
(a) Determination of average transportation cost for claiming the deduction for arriving at the
assessable value of excisable goods.
(b) Insurance claim valuation.
(c) Working out claim for freight subsidy under Fertilizer Industry Coordination Committee.
(d) Administered price mechanism of freight cost element.
(e) Determination of inward freight costs included or to be included in the cost of purchases
attributable to the acquisition.
(f) Computation of freight included in the value of inventory for accounting on inventory or valuation
of stock hypothecated with Banks / Financial Institution ...etc.
CAS-6: Cost Accounting Standard on Material Cost [Limited Revision 2017]

This standard deals with principles and methods of determining the Material Cost. Material for the
purpose of this standard includes raw materials, process materials, additives, manufactured / bought
out components, sub-assemblies, accessories, semi finished goods, consumable stores, spares and
other indirect materials. This standard does not deal with Packing Materials as a separate standard is
being issued on the subject.
This standard deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and assignment of
Material Cost, for determination of the Cost of product or service, and the presentation and disclosure
in cost statements.
Objective
determining the Material Cost with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
This standard should be applied to Cost Statements which require classification, measurement,
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Material Costs including those requiring attestation.
CAS-7: Cost Accounting Standard on Employee Cost [Limited Revision 2017]

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Employee Cost. This standard
deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and assignment of Employee
Cost, for determination of the cost of product or service and the presentation and disclosure in Cost
Statements.
Objective
determining the Employee Cost with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
This standard should be applied to cost statements which require classification, measurement,
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Employee Cost including those requiring attestation.
CAS-8: Cost Accounting Standard on Cost of Utilities [Limited Revision 2017]

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Cost of Utilities. This standard

Cost Accounting
deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and assignment of Cost of
Utilities, for determination of the cost of product or service and the presentation and disclosure in Cost
Statements.
Objective
determining the Cost of Utilities with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
This standard shall be applied to cost statements which require classification, measurement, assignment,
presentation and disclosure of Cost of Utilities including those requiring attestation.
For determining the cost of production to arrive at an assessable value of excisable utilities used for
captive consumption, Cost Accounting Standard 4 on Cost of Production for Captive Consumption
(CAS 4) shall apply. This standard shall not be applicable to the organizations primarily engaged in
generation and sale of utilities. This standard does not cover issues related to the ascertainment and
treatment of carbon credits, which shall be dealt with in a separate standard.
CAS-9: Cost Accounting Standard on Packing Material Cost [Limited Revision 2017]
This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Packing Material Cost. This
standard deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and assignment of
Packing Material Cost, for determination of the cost of product, and the presentation and disclosure
in Cost Statements. Packing Materials for the purpose of this standard are classified into primary and
secondary packing materials.
Objective
determining the packing material cost with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
This standard should be applied to cost statements, which require classification, measurement,
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Packing Material Cost including those requiring attestation.
CAS-10: Cost Accounting Standard on Direct Expenses [Limited Revision 2017]

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Direct Expenses. This standard
deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and assignment of Direct
Expenses, for determination of the cost of product or service, and the presentation and disclosure in
Cost Statements.
Objectives
determining the Direct Expenses with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
This standard should be applied to Cost Statements, which require classification, measurement,
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Direct Expenses including those requiring attestation.
CAS-11: Cost Accounting Standard on Administrative overheads [Limited Revision 2017]

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Administrative Overheads.
Administrative Overheads, for determination of the cost of product or service, and the presentation
and disclosure in Cost Statements.
Objective
determining the Administrative Overheads with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
The standard should be applied to Cost Statements, which require classification, measurement,
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Administrative Overheads including those requiring
attestation.
CAS-12: Cost Accounting Standard on Repairs and Maintenance [Limited Revision 2017]
This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Repairs and Maintenance Cost.
Repairs and Maintenance Cost, for determination of the cost of product or service, and the presentation
and disclosure in Cost Statements.
Objective
determining the Repairs and Maintenance Cost with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Repairs and Maintenance Cost including those requiring
attestation.
CAS-13: Cost Accounting Standard on Cost of Service Cost Centre [Limited Revision 2017]
This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining Cost of Service Cost Centres.
This standard covers the service cost centre and excludes utilities and repair & maintenance costs
dealt with in CAS - 8 & CAS 12 respectively. This standard deals with the principles and methods of
classification, measurement and assignment of Cost of Service Cost Centre, for determination of the
cost of product or service, and the presentation and disclosure in Cost Statements.
Objective
determining the Cost of Service Cost Centre with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
The standard should be applied to the preparation & presentation Cost Statements, which require
classification, measurement and assignment, of Cost of Service Cost Centres including those requiring
attestation.
CAS-14: Cost Accounting Standard on Pollution Control Cost [Limited Revision 2017]
This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining Pollution Control Cost. This standard
deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and assignment of Pollution
Control Costs, for determination of the cost of product or service, and the presentation and disclosure
in Cost Statements.
Objective
determining the Pollution Control Costs with reasonable accuracy.

Cost Accounting
Scope
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Pollution Control Costs including those requiring attestation.
CAS-15: Cost Accounting Standard on Selling and Distribution Overheads

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Selling and Distribution
Overheads.
Selling and Distribution Overheads, for determination of the cost of sales of product or service, and the
presentation and disclosure in cost statements.
Objective:
determining the Selling and Distribution Overheads with reasonable accuracy.
Scope:
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Selling and Distribution Overheads including those requiring
attestation.
CAS -16 : Cost Accounting Standard on Depreciation and Amortisation [Limited Revision 2017]
This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining Depreciation and Amortisation
Cost.
This standard deals with the principles and methods of measurement and assignment of Depreciation
and Amortisation for determination of the cost of product or service, and the presentation and
disclosure in cost statements.
Objective :
determining the Depreciation and Amortisation with reasonable accuracy.
Scope :
This standard shall be applied to cost statements which require measurement, assignment, presentation
and disclosure of Depreciation and Amortisation, including those requiring attestation.
CAS-17 : Cost Accounting Standard on Interest and Financing Charges [Limited Revision 2017]
This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining Interest and Financing Charges.
Interest and Financing Charges.
Objective
The objective of this standard is to bring uniformity and consistency in the principles ,methods of
determining and assigning the Interest and Financing Charges with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Interest and Financing Charges including those requiring
attestation. This standard does not deal with costs relating to risk management through derivatives.

CAS -18 : Cost Accounting Standard on Research and Development Costs

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining Research and Development Cost.
This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Research, and Development
Costs and their classification, measurement and assignment for determination of the cost of product
or service, and the presentation and disclosure in cost statements.
Objective
determining the Research, and Development Costs with reasonable accuracy and presentation of
the same.
Scope
This standard should be applied to cost statements that require classification, measurement, assignment,
presentation and disclosure of Research, and Development Costs including those requiring attestation.
CAS-19 : Cost Accounting Standard on Joint Costs

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining Joint Cost.
The standard deals with the principles and methods of measurement and assignment of Joint Costs
and the presentation and disclosure in cost statement.
Objective
The objective of this standard is to bring uniformity, consistency in the principles, methods of determining
and assigning Joint Costs with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
The standard shall be applied to cost statements which require classification, measurement, assignment,
presentation and disclosure of Joint Costs including those requiring attestation.
CAS-20 : Cost Accounting Standard on Royalty And Technical Know-How Fee [Limited Revision 2017]
This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the amount of Royalty and Technical
Know-how Fee.
This standard deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and assignment
of the amount of Royalty and Technical Know-how Fee, for determination of the cost of product or
service, and their presentation and disclosure in cost statements.
Objective
determining the amount of Royalty and Technical Know-how Fee with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
assignment, presentation and disclosure of the amount of Royalty and Technical Know-how Fee
including those requiring attestation.
CAS-21 : Cost Accounting Standard on Quality Control [Limited Revision 2017]

The standard deals with the principles and methods of measurement and assignment of Quality Control
cost and the presentation and disclosure in cost statement.
Objective
and assigning Quality Control cost with reasonable accuracy.

Cost Accounting
Scope
The standards shall be applied to cost statements which require classification, measurement,
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Quality Control cost including those requiring attestation.
CAS – 22 : Cost Accounting Standard on Manufacturing Cost [Limited Revision 2017]

This standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the Manufacturing Cost of excisable
goods.
This standard deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement and assignment for
determination of the Manufacturing Cost of excisable goods and the presentation and disclosure in
cost statements.
Objective
determining the Manufacturing Cost of excisable goods.
Scope
assignment, presentation and disclosure of Manufacturing Cost of excisable goods.
CAS 23 Cost Accounting Standard on Overburden Removal Cost [Limited Revision 2017]
The standard deals with the principles and methods of measurement and assignment of Overburden
Removal Cost and the presentation and disclosure in cost statements.
Objective:
and assigning Overburden Removal Cost with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
The standard shall be applied to cost statements which require classification, measurement, assignment,
presentation and disclosure of Overburden Removal Cost including those requiring attestation.
CAS 24 Cost Accounting Standard on Treatment of Revenue in Cost Statements [Limited Revision 2017]
This standard deals with the principles and methods of classification, measurement, treatment and
assignment of revenue and its presentation and disclosure in cost statements.
Objective
The objective of this standard is to bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and methods for
treatment of revenue in cost statements with reasonable accuracy.
Scope
This standard shall be applied to cost statements which require classification, measurement, treatment,
assignment, presentation and disclosure of revenue including those requiring attestation.


1. What is the basic for cost classification as per CAS-1?
2. List the objective of CAS-4.
3. List the scope of CAS-2
4. Name 3 factors that should be disclosed in the cost statements as per CAS-3.
5. Explain the objective of Cost Accounting Standard Board.
6. Write a short note on Cost Accounting Standards.
7. List the objective of CAS-24
8. List the scope of CAS-23
1. CAS 21 stands for

A. Capacity Determination B. Joint Cost C. Direct Expenses D. None of these.
2. CAS 13 stands for

A. Joint Cost B. Interest and financing charges C. Employee Cost D. Cost of Service cost centre
3. Standard deals with the principles and methods of determining the manufacturing Cost of
excisable goods-
A. CAS 12 B. CAS 15 C. CAS 22 D. CAS 2
4. Standards deals with determination of averages/ equalized transportation cost-

5. Standards deals with the principles and methods of determining depreciation and amortization
cost-
[Ans: 1. (D), 2. (D), 3. (C), 4. (D), 5. (D)]
State whether the following statements are true or false:

1. CAS 19 stands for Joint Cost.
2. Cost Accounting Standard Board Should have minimum three eminant practicing members of
the Insititute of Cost Accounts of India.
3. Is issue the fromwork for The Cost Accounting Standard is the function of CASB.
4. CAS 2 stands for classification of cost.
5. The objective of CAS 10 is to bring uniformity and consistency in the period and methods of
determining the direct expenses with reasonable accuracy.
[Ans: 1. (True), 2. (False), 3. (True), 4. (False), 5. (True)]

Cost Accounting
Fill in the blanks:

1. CAS 9 stands for ______________________.
2. The ______________________ of the CASB will be nominated by the council of The Institute of Cost
Accountants of India.
3. __________________ nominee from the regulate like CAG, RBI to the CASB Board.
4. CAS __________ stands for cost of service cost centre.
5. The function of CASB is to assists the members in preparations of uniform ______________ under various
statue.
[Ans: 1. (packing material cost), 2. (chairman) 3. (four), 4. (13), 5. (cost statement)]
Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’

1. Pollution Control Cost A. CAS 18
2. Joint Cost B. CAS 2
3. Capacity Determination C. CAS 10
4. Direct Expenses D. CAS 14
5. Research and Development Cost E. CAS 19
[Ans: 1. (D), 2. (E) 3. (B), 4. (C), 5. (A)]

Cost Book Keeping
Study Note - 4
COST BOOK KEEPING
4.1 Cost Accounting Records, Ledgers and Cost Statements

4.2 Items excluded from Cost and Normal and Abnormal Items/Cost
4.3 Integral Accounts
4.4 Reconciliaton of Cost Accounting Records with Financial Accounts
4.5 Infrastructure, Educational, Healthcare and Port Services
4.1 COST ACCOUNTING RECORDS, LEDGERS AND COST STATEMENTS
COST STATEMENT
In the preceding sections, we have dealt with the basic concepts of costs and the various elements of
costs. We have also seen the different steps followed in determination of cost of a product or rendering
a service. Treatment of various costs has been discussed at length. You are by now very well aware
that the term cost has wide connotations and would not mean anything in isolation. Costs must be
understood if they are to be controlled. Measurement of costs is the first step in the process of control
simply because you cannot control unless you measure. Measurement of cost would mean different
when applied to different industries.
The cost has to be measured with respect to the cost centers first and then at a broader level with
respect to the cost unit. The journey towards the aim of determining cost of a product or service may
take various routes. But the logic is same i.e. collect all relevant costs in the process of converting raw
material into finished product and accumulate the total costs.
To put in simple words, to generate any product or service, resources are needed called as inputs.
Theses inputs are used in a process of conversion. The end result is the output which could either be a
product or a service. The resources consume costs. While determining total cost of resources, the costs
of all resources used (directly or indirectly) in the process are accumulated. This requires establishing
the relationship between the resource and the product or service.
Process - One or many

Input/resources operations - independent Output - Finished
or sequential
Basic law Labour, staff, facilities, utilities
The process of accumulating costs will differ according to the nature of business and the activities carried
out. The common way to accumulate costs is to prepare cost sheets.

Cost Accounting
Cost Accumulation
The logic of Cost Accumulation is to track costs in the same sequence as the resources get used. See
the following flow of activities:
(a) Raw material & other material are purchased and stored
(b) The material is used up in process of conversion
(c) People or machines work upon the material while in the process
(d) The process results into some products that are finished
The cost data needs to be collected along this whole chain that ends when a final product is produced.
The cost accumulation is done based on the source documents which are used in booking the costs.
Depending upon the type of business, a cost unit is determined for which costs must be accumulated.
The departmentalisation of the business organisation is done to suit the production process. For example,
in a fruit processing industry, the costs would be accumulated as per different process involved i.e.
cutting, pulp formation, blending, purifying and final packing. As the physical flow of material happens
from one process to the other, costs are also passed on from one process to the next in line.
As we know all the direct element of cost together make Prime Cost. Sequentially, production overheads
are added to get Factory Cost or Works Cost. Then Administration overheads are added to the Factory
Cost to get Cost of Production. Once the product is ready for sale, the selling and distribution overheads
are added to get Cost of Sales or Cost of Goods Sold. When this is deducted from Sales revenue we
get profit or loss.
Process of accumulation of cost comprises of:
l Identification of costs to the cost centers or departments.
l Apportionment of service costs to production costs.
l Absorption of costs into cost units.
Cost Collection
Cost Collection is the process of booking costs against a particular Cost Account code under a particular
cost center or directly under a cost unit, as the case may be. Source documents are used to generate
the record of the costs incurred or to be incurred. These source documents are properly authorised and
numbered. They act as the primary source of entry. In additions to these documents there could be
other documents and reports such as allocation sheets, labour utilisation reports, idle time & overtime
analysis, scrap reports etc which help in identifying costs. Let us see how the costs are collected.
Material costs
These costs are identified with cost unit with the help of ‘stores issue summary’. In case of job costing,
there will be job-wise summary prepared on the basis of ‘material issue notes’. In case of contracts,
the summary will be made contract-wise. At times instead of procuring & storing material, it may be
procured and directly used on contract site. ‘Purchase Invoice’ may be the basis to capture such direct
material costs. In case of process industry, the material is issued to different processes. Here, the costs
input to a process may be collected based on the cost of materials processed in the previous process. A
process-wise summary of material issues is maintained. Some material may get added to a process but
may not become part of final product. The cost of such material is apportioned on the output of that
process. The indirect material costs may be gathered on the basis of consumable issues, scrap reports,
standard parts list etc. Care should be taken to account for material losses. Normal material losses are

Cost Book Keeping
to be apportioned to the good units produced, whereas, abnormal losses should be excluded from
computation of cost of good units and should be directly taken to P & L Account.
Labour Cost
Salaries and wages summary prepared after the monthly payroll run is the main basis for labour cost
collection. The summary shows department-wise break up, so that the Direct Labour Cost of production
department is separately known and that for the other indirect departments is also available to be
charged as overheads. In case of contracting business, labour force is usually dedicated to various
sites. The cost of labour used on different contracts can be found based on wages sheet maintained
for each contract site. In addition, the idle time reports, overtime reports are used for booking of the
costs of idle time & overtime. In case labourers are common to various jobs or contracts or processes, an
estimate of the time that they spend on each of them is made and the costs are allocated accordingly.
Expenses
Accounting entries in cash book or journal proper help to collect the expenses. Direct expenses which
are job or contract or process specific may be collected on the basis of vouchers. The indirect expenses
are collected and then apportioned in a summarised form using apportionment sheets.
Collection of Budgeted costs

The cost calculation for the selected cost unit could be either of actual cost or budgeted cost. While
actual costs are collected on the basis of documents explained above, the budgeted costs are
computed using the standard bill of material, and predetermined overhead rates. For budgeted direct
material, a bill of material is prepared for each product (including sub-assemblies). This is a quantitative
estimate. Based on the estimates a budgeted material price is considered to value the material cost.
Estimated labour hours are costed using estimated Labour Hour Rates. Pre-determined overheads are
also computed considering the base selected for absorption. Thus an estimate of total cost with full
composition may be made.
Cost Accountant & Cost Data collection

The Cost Accountant must play a pivotal role in ensuring that the process of cost data collection is
very strong. The cost analysis and reporting will not be useful for managerial decision-making if the
data collection process is wrong. Presence of a strong and robust Costing System is needed to ensure
comprehensive data collection process. The Costs Account may carry out periodical checks to evaluate
the system and also may do the Internal Audit. He can use all his expertise in the process of establishing
cost estimates which will help in decision making.
Cost data collected must be reported in proper format to make it more informative and meaningful. As
can be understood, the report must serve the purpose for which it was sought. A complete cost sheet
may not be always necessary. The production manager may require the cost of production only. The
cost report should be able to give this figure separately broken up into all its elements. The sales and
marketing cost may be given for each channel of distribution, customers, regions etc in addition to the
product-wise break up.
The cost data should be collected in a manner that will make available cost information to all those
who are responsible for the costs. A cost sheet should give the figures of each element of cost broken
up into direct and indirect and also according to functions like production, administration and selling
& distribution. It is therefore logical that the format of the Cost Sheet is derived from the requirements
for which it is to be used. Apart from exhibiting the total cost deducted logically, it should highlight
other cost also, so that comparison with budget can be made, variances analysed and cost could be
controlled to increase profits.

Cost Accounting
Cost Sheet Formats & Preparation

The cost concept itself being subjective, there is no standard format in which the collected costs can
be presented. It has to suit the type of business, need of the details, and management’s requirement
of control over costs. Yet a simple way to show the Total Cost of any cost unit is shown below:
Specimen Cost Sheet
Period From …………………… Cost Units

To ……………………………………… …………
Cost Items Amount (`) Amount (`)
Direct Material
Opening Stock xxxxx
Add: Purchases xxxxx
Add: Incidental charges xxxxx
Less: Closing Stock xxxxx xxxxx
Direct Labour xxxxx
Direct Expenses xxxxx
PRIME COST xxxxx
Add: Production Overheads xxxxx
Add: Opening work in process xxxxx
Less: Closing work in process xxxxx xxxxx
FACTORY COST OR WORKS COST xxxxx
Add: Administrative Overheads xxxxx
COST OF GOODS MANUFACTURED xxxxx
Add: Opening Finished goods stock xxxxx
Less: Closing Finished goods stock xxxxx xxxxx
COST OF FINISHED GOODS SOLD xxxxx
Add: Selling & Distribution overheads xxxxx
COST OF GOODS SOLD xxxxx
You can observe the logical way in which the cost flow has been shown in the above chart. The focus
in this specimen is on elements and functions split further into direct and indirect costs with respect to
the cost units. Although the formats could be different, the contents of a cost sheet must be understood
and interpreted correctly so that one can analyse it for control and decision making. For example if it
has to be prepared for a process industry, the format would reflect the portion up to factory cost for
each process separately. Then the administration costs will be added together. The cost per unit will be
computed for every process separately. The stock for processes subsequent to process one will mean
stocks transferred from earlier processes and stocks transferred to the next processes. The objective here
is to compute the cost per process. The cost sheet format here could be:

Cost Book Keeping
Specimen Cost Sheet
Period From ………………… To ………………………………… Cost Units …………

Cost Items Amount (`) Amount (`)
Direct Material
Opening Stock xxxxx
Add: Purchases xxxxx
Add: Incidental charges xxxxx
Less: Closing Stock xxxxx xxxxx
Direct Labour xxxxx
Direct Expenses xxxxx
PRIME COST xxxxx
Add: Production overheads xxxxx
Add: Opening work in process xxxxx
Less: Closing work in process xxxxx xxxxx
FACTORY COST OR WORKS COST xxxxx
Add: Administrative Overheads xxxxx
COST OF GOODS MANUFACTURED xxxxx
Add: Opening Finished goods stock xxxxx
Less: Closing Finished goods stock xxxxx xxxxx
COST OF FINISHED GOODS SOLD xxxxx
Add: Selling & Distribution overheads xxxxx
COST OF GOODS SOLD xxxxx
Depending on number of processes, the working will be shown up to factory cost. Subsequently, the
administration, selling & distribution overheads are added like that shown in the first format. Some process
companies may prepare a different cost sheet for each process. When it is available process wise, control
of process costs and process losses could be better controlled by the concerned process managers.
Important Components of Cost Sheet
(a) Cost sheet has reference to the job or contract or a batch or production or a service undertaken
to be rendered. If the completion of the job at hand relates to more than one accounting period,
it is better that separate columns are provided to mention figures for those period. The job or batch
reference should also be mentioned on the header.
(b) If there is an estimate made for the costs, a separate column must be provided for estimated costs
against which the actual costs should be plotted to get ready comparison. This will make cost sheets
more user-friendly and meaningful.
(c) In certain cases, material may not form any significant portion of the total cost and as such may
be treated as an overhead item. In such cases, the Prime Cost will mainly constitute as labour and
other expenses.
(d) Treatment of raw material stocks should be carefully understood. As the costs are to be linked to
the units produced, the material consumption, completion of earlier period’s semifinished goods
and the finished goods sold needs to be properly computed.
Raw Material Consumed: Opening Stock + Purchases – Closing Stock
One has to go into the depth of this arithmetical formula. Where do we get the figure of purchases
from? It is from the suppliers invoices for purchase of stockable material. It also should include all charges
incidental to purchase of goods like carriage, insurance, customs duty etc. which is directly associated
with the incoming material.

Cost Accounting
As we know that the stocks are always valued at cost or market price whichever is less. This norm has
to be applied to the rates of all the items of material in stock, and then the total valuation of stock is
done. The stock ledger records all receipts and issues of the quantity and rate of material items. The
valuation of material issues has to be properly done based on correctly chosen method of issue pricing.
This summary figure as per the issue column should exactly match with the raw material consumed figure
as included in the cost sheet.
The normal losses on account of material shortages must be included in the cost of raw material
consumed. Care should be taken to remove the abnormal losses there from.
(e) Treatment of work in process is another important step. If the format is carefully seen, it will be noticed
that the cost of WIP stocks is adjusted specifically after adding Factory Overheads! Why adjusted?
And why at that stage only? Please note that Cost Sheet is prepared for a period of time for a cost
unit. At the beginning of that period, if the job has been carried forward from the previous period,
there may be some partly finished work that is carried forward. At the same time there may be
partly finished production at the end of current period. These stocks must be adjusted to reflect
the cost consumed during the current period. Further, the work in process is normally valued at
Factory Cost. It does not include Administration Overheads as the production of goods is not yet
fully complete. Administration costs are absorbed at the stage of finished production. Hence the
adjustment of WIP stocks is to be done before adding the Administration Overheads.
(f) Similarly, the adjustment for the opening and closing stocks of finished goods should be done. This
has to be done after the stage of cost of production.
(g) One could have separate columns for total costs and per unit costs side by side. This will help have
a quick glance at the per unit figures. Management at operating level will find this very helpful.
Illustration 1
Following data is available from the cost records of a company for the month of March 2017:
(1) Opening stock of job as on 1st March 2017
Job no. A 99: Direct Material `80, Direct Wages `150 and Factory Overheads `200
Job no. A 77: Direct Material `420, Direct Wages `450 and Factory Overheads `400
(2) Direct material issued during the month of February 2017 was:
Job no A 99 `120
Job no A 77 `280
Job no A 66 `225
Job no A 55 `300
(3) Direct labour details for March 2017 were:
Job no Hours Amount (`)
A 99 400 600
A 77 200 450
A 66 300 675
A 55 100 225
(4) Factory Overheads are applied to jobs on production according to direct labour hour rate which
is `2 per hour.
(5) Factory Overhead incurred in March 2017 were `2100.

Cost Book Keeping
(6) Job numbers A 99 & A 77 were completed during the month. They were billed to the customers at
a price which included 15% of the price of the job for Selling & Distribution expenses and another
10% of the price for Profit.
Prepare:
(a) Job cost sheet for job number A 77 and A 99.
(b) Determine the selling price for the jobs.
(c) Calculate the value of work in process.
Solution:
Remarks :
(1) The Factory Overheads actually incurred are ` 2100. This amount to be apportioned on the basis
of labour hours. So the rate to be considered as ` 2.1per unit = (2100/1000) and not `2 per unit. If
we consider the above mentioned point the calculations for Job Sheets & for the work in progress
will change accordingly.
(2) Work in progress is to be calculated for the incomplete jobs hence job no. A 66 and A 55 should
only be included in the calculations of work in progress.
Job Cost Sheets for the month of March 2017 Amount (`)
Cost Items Job A 77 Job A 99

Direct Material issued 280 120
Direct labour spent 450 600
Prime Cost 730 720
Factory Overheads @ ` 2.1 per hour (200×2.1) 420 (400×2.1) 840
Add: Opening WIP (Material + Labour + Overheads) 1,270 430
Factory Cost 2,420 1,990
Add: Selling & Distribution Overheads (Note 1) 484 398
Cost of Sales 2,904 2,388
Profit (Note 1) 323 265
Billing price for the job 3,227 2,653
Note 1
S&D and profit are given in indirect way. 480 300
Assume Selling price as 100 320 200
Less: S & D @ 15% (15)
Less: Profit @ 10% (10)
Balance has to be the Factory Cost 75
S & D price will be 15/75 of Factory Costs
Profit will be 10/75 of Factory Cost

Cost Accounting
Computation of Work in Process for March 2017 Amount (`)
Items
Opening balance as on 1 March
st
Job A 99 430
Job A 77 1,270 1,700
Material issued during the month of March Job A 99 120
Job A 77 280
Job A 66 225
Job A 55 300 925
Direct Labour Job A 99 600
Job A 77 450
Job A 66 675
Job A 55 225 1,950
Factory Overheads on 1000 hours @ ` 2.1 2,100
Factory Cost 6,675
Less: Factory Cost of completed jobs Job A 77 2,420
Job A 99 1,990 4,410
Closing work in process as on 28 March 2017
th
2,265
Another way to calculate WIP is

Job A 66 and A 55 are in progress & WIP includes only incomplete Jobs.
Direct Material (225+300) 525
Direct Labour (675+225) 900
Factory Overheads [2.1 *(300+100)] 840
Total WIP 2,265
Illustration 2
Prepare Cost Sheet for an engineering company which produces standard components in batches of
1000 pieces each. A batch passes through three processes viz. Foundry, Machining & Assembly.
The materials used for a batch number 001 were: Foundry 1300 tonnes @ `50 per tonne of which 50
tonnes were sent back to stores.
Other details
Process Direct Labour Overheads

Foundry 200 Hrs @ ` 10 ` 15 per Labour Hour
Machining 100 Hrs @ ` 5 ` 20 per Labour Hour
Assembly 100 Hrs @ ` 15 ` 10 per Labour Hour
A comparison of actual costs with estimated cost discloses that material and overheads have exceeded
the estimates by 20% whereas the estimated labour cost is 10% more than the actual. Show the variances
with respect to the estimates

Cost Book Keeping
Solution:
Cost sheets for the Batch number 001
Standard batch size 1000 pieces
Actual Estimated Variance F/A

Direct material issued (1250 x 50) 62,500 52,083 (10,417) A
Direct labour spent
Foundry - 200 x 10 2,000 2,200 200 F
Machining - 100 x 5 500 550 50 F
Assembly - 100 x 15 1,500 1,650 150 F
Prime Cost 66,500 56,483 (10,017) A
Factory Overheads applied
Foundry - 200 x 15 3,000 2,500 (500) A
Machining - 100 x 20 2,000 1,667 (333) A
Assembly - 100 x 10 1,000 833 (167) A
Factory Cost 72,500 61,483 (11,017) A
Cost per unit (Factory Cost/1000) 72.5 61.48 11.02
Illustration 3
An advertising agency has received an enquiry for which you are supposed to submit the quotation.
Bill of material prepared by the production department for the job states the following requirement of
material:
Paper 10 reams @ `1800 per ream
Ink and other printing material `5000
Binding material & other consumables `3000
Some photography is required for the job. The agency does not have a photographer as an employee.
It decides to hire one by paying `10000 to him. Estimated job card prepared by production department
specifies that service of following employees will be required for this job:
Artist (`12000 per month) 80 hours
Copywriter (`10000 per month) 75 hours
Client servicing (`9000 per month) 30 hours
The primary packing material will be required to the tune of `4000. Production Overheads 40% of direct
cost, while the S & D Overheads are likely to be 25% on Production Cost. The agency expects a profit
of 20% on the quoted price. The agency works 25 days in a month and 6 hours a day.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Quotation for a Printing Job
Items Amount (`) Amount (`)

Direct material required:
Paper 10 x 1800 18,000
Ink & other printing material 5,000
Binding material & consumables 3,000
Primary packing material 4,000 30,000
Direct labour spent
Artist [12,000/(25 x 6)] x 80 6,400
Copy writer [10,000 / (25 x 6)] x 75 5,000
Client Servicing [9,000 / (25 x 6)] x 30 1,800 13,200
Photographer’s charges 10,000
Prime Cost 53,200
Factory Overheads applied @ 40% on Direct Cost 21,280
Production Cost 74,480
S & D overheads applied @ 25% on Production Cost 18,620
Total Cost 93,100
Profit (20% on price i.e. 25% on cost) 23,275
Price to be quoted 1,16,375
Illustration 4
The following figures were extracted from the Trial Balance of a company as on 31st December 2016.
Particulars Debit Credit

Inventories
Raw Material 1,40,000
WIP 2,00,000
FG 80,000
Office Appliances 17,400
Plant and Machinery 4,60,500
Buildings 2,00,000
Sales 7,68,000
Sales Returns 14,000
Material purchased 3,20,000
Freight on materials 16,000
Purchase returns 4,800

Cost Book Keeping
Direct labour 1,60,000

Indirect labour 18,000
Factory supervision 10,000
Factory repairs & upkeep 14,000
Heat, light & power 65,000
Rates & taxes 6,300
Misc factory expenses 18,700
Sales commission 33,600
Sales travelling 11,000
Sales Promotion 22,500
Distribution department salaries & wages 18,000
Office salaries 8,600
Interest on borrowed funds 2,000
Further details are given as follows:

Closing inventories are Material `180000, WIP `192000 & FG `115000.
Accrued expenses are Direct Labour `8000, Indirect Labour `1200 & interest `2000.
Depreciation should be provided as 5% on Office Appliances, 10% on Machinery and 4% on Buildings.
Heat, light and power are to be distributed in the ratio of 8:1:1 among factory, office and distribution
respectively.
Rates & taxes apply as 2/3rd to the factory and 1/3rd to office.
Depreciation on building to be distributed in the ratio of 8:1:1 among factory, office and distribution
respectively
Prepare a Cost Sheet showing all important components and also a condensed P & L Account for the
year.
Solution:
Particulars Amount (`) Amount (`)

Direct Materials
Opening stock 1,40,000
Add: Purchases 3,20,000
Add: Freight 16,000
Less: Returns (4,800)
Less: Closing Stock (1,80,000) 2,91,200
Direct Labour 1,60,000
Add: Accrued 8,000 1,68,000
Prime Cost 4,59,200

Cost Accounting
Factory Overheads:
Accrued indirect labour 1,200
Factory supervision 10,000
Repairs & upkeep 14,000
Heat, Light & power 52,000
Rates & taxes 4,200
Misc. Factory expenses 18,700
Depreciation on plant & machinery 46,050
Depreciation on buildings 6,400
1,70,550
Add: Opening WIP 2,00,000
Less: Closing WIP (1,92,000) 1,78,550
Factory Cost 6,37,750
Administration Overheads
Heat Light & power 6,500
Rates & taxes 2,100
Depreciation on buildings 800
Depreciation on office appliances 870
Office salaries 8,600
18,870
Add: Opening FG stock 80,000
Less: Closing FG Stock (1,15,000) (16,130)
Cost of Production of saleable units 6,21,620
Selling & Distribution overheads
Heat & light 6,500
Depreciation on buildings 800
Sales commission 33,600
Sales travelling 11,000
Sales promotion 22,500
Distribution department expenses 18,000 92,400
Cost of Sales 7,14,020
Condensed P & L Account for the year ended 31-12-2016

Sales Income 7,68,000
Less: Returns (14,000) 7,54,000
Cost of Sales as above 7,14,020
Interest on borrowings (2,000 + 2,000) 4,000
Net Profit 35,980

Cost Book Keeping
Illustration 5
PR Ltd. manufactures and sells a typical brand of Tiffin Boxes under its on brand name. The installed
capacity of the plant is 1,20,000 units per year distributable evenly over each month of calendar year.
The Cost Accountant of the company has informed the following cost structure of the product, which
is as follows:
Raw Material ` 20 per unit.
Direct Labour ` 12 per unit
Direct Expenses ` 2 per unit
Variable Overheads ` 16 per unit.
Fixed Overhead ` 3,00,000.
Semi-variable Overheads are as follows:
` 7,500 per month upto 50% capacity & Additional ` 2,500 per month for every additional 25% capacity
utilization or part thereof.
The plant was operating at 50% capacity during the first seven months of the calendar year 2016, at
100% capacity in the remaining months of the year.
The selling price for the period from 1st Jan, 2016 to 31st July, 2016 was fixed at ` 69 per unit. The firm
has been monitoring the profitability and revising the selling price to meet its annual profit target of
` 8,00,000. You are required to suggest the selling price per unit for the period from 1st August 2016 to
31st December 2016.
Prepare Cost Sheet clearly showing the total and per unit cost and also profit for the period.
1. from 1st Jan. to 31st July, 2016
2. from 1st Aug. to 31st Dec, 2016.
Solution:
Cost Sheet for the period Amount (`)
Particulars 50% capacity utilization (10000 100% capacity utilization –

units P.M) – 35000 units, seven 50000 units, Five months
months 1st Jan to 31st July, 2016 1st Aug to 31st Dec, 2016
Raw Materials 7,00,000 10,00,000
Direct Labour 4,20,000 6,00,000
Direct Expenses 70,000 1,00,000
Variable overheads 5,60,000 8,00,000
Fixed Overheads 1,75,000 1,25,000
Semi-Variable Overheads 52,500 62,500
Total Costs 19,77,500 26,87,500
Profit 4,37,500 3,62,500
Sales 24,15,000 30,50,000
Selling Price Per Unit 69.00 61.00
Cost Per Unit 56.50 53.75

Cost Accounting
Illustration 6
X Ltd. Provides you the following figures for the year 2015-16:

Direct Material 3,20,000
Direct Wages 8,00,000
Production Overheads (25% variable) 4,80,000
Administration Overheads (75% Fixed) 1,60,000
Selling and Distribution Overheads (2/3rd Fixed) 2,40,000
Sales @ ` 125 per unit 25,00,000
For the year 2016-17, it is estimated that:
1. Output and sales quantity will increase by 20% by incurring additional Advertisement Expenses of
` 45,200.
2. Material prices will go up 10%.
3. Wage Rate will go up by 5% along with, increase in overall direct labour efficiency by 12%.
4. Variable Overheads will increase by 5%.
5. Fixed Production Overheads will increase by 33 1/3 %
Required:
(a) Calculate the Cost of Sales for the year 2015-2016 and 2016-2017.
(b) Find out the new selling price for the year 2016-2017.
(i) If the same amount of profit is to be earned as in 2015-2016.
(ii) If the same percentage of profit to sales is to be earned as in 2015-2016.
(iii) If the existing percentage of profit to sales is to be increased by 25%.
(iv) If Profit per unit ` 10 is to be earned.
Solution:
(a) Statement showing the Cost of Sales Amount (`)
Particulars For 20000 units For 24000 units

A. Direct Materials 3,20,000 4,22,400
[`3,20,000 x 110% x 120%]
B. Direct wages 8,00,000 9,00,000
[` 8,00,000 x (105/100) x (100/112) x 120%]
C. Prime Cost 11,20,000 13,22,400
D. Add: Production Overheads
Variable Production Overheads 1,20,000 1,51,200
[` 4,80,000 x 25%] [`1,20,000 x 105% x 120%]
Fixed Production Overheads 3,60,000 4,80,000
[` 4,80,000 x 75%] [` 3,60,000 x 133%]
E. Works Cost (C + D) 16,00,000 19,53,600

Cost Book Keeping
F. Add: Administration Overheads

Variable Admn. Overheads 40,000 50,400 [` 40,000 x 105% x 120%]
Fixed Admn. Overheads 1,20,000 1,20,000
G. Cost of Goods Produced 17,60,000 21,24,000
H. Add: Selling and Distribution
Overheads
80,000 1,00,800 [` 80,000 x 105% x 120%]
Variable Selling & Distribution OHs
Fixed Selling & Distribution OHs 1,60,000 1,60,000
Additional Advertisement Exp. 45,200
I. Cost of Sales [G + H] 20,00,000 24,30,000
(b)
(i) New Selling Price = (` 24,30,000 + ` 5,00,000)/24,000 units = ` 122.08
(ii) New Selling Price = (` 24,30,000 + 25% or ` 24,30,000)/24,000 units = ` 126.5625
(iii) New Selling Price = (` 24,30,000 + 1/3rd or ` 24,30,000)/24,000 units = ` 135
(iv) New Selling Price = (` 24,30,000 + (24,000 x ` 10) / 24,000 units = ` 111.25
Illustration 7
The following are the costing records for the year 2017 of a manufacturer:
Production 10,000 units; Cost of Raw Materials ` 2,00,000; Labour Cost ` 1,20,000; Factory Overheads
` 80,000; Office Overheads ` 40,000; Selling Expenses ` 10,000, Rate of Profit 25% on the Selling Price.
The manufacturer decided to produce 15,000 units in 2017. It is estimated that the cost of raw materials
will increase by 20%, the labour cost will increase by 10%, 50% of the overhead charges are fixed and
the other 50% are variable. The selling expenses per unit will be reduced by 20%. The rate of profit will
remain the same.
Prepare a Cost Statement for the year 2017 showing the total profit and selling price per unit.
Solution:
Statement of Cost & Profit (Cost Sheet)
(Output 10,000 units) Amount (`)
Particulars Cost per unit Total Cost
Raw Materials 20 2,00,000
Labour 12 1,20,000
PRIME COST 32 3,20,000
Add: Factory Overhead 8 80,000
WORKS COST 40 4,00,000
Add: Office Overhead 4 40,000
COST OF PRODUCTION 44 4,40,000
Add: Selling Expenses 1 10,000
COST OF SALES 45 4,50,000
Add: Profit (25% on Selling Price or 33.33% on Cost of Sales) 15 1,50,000
SELLING PRICE 60 6,00,000

Cost Accounting
Statement of Cost & Profit (Cost Sheet)
(Output 15,000 units) Amount (`)
Particulars Cost per unit Total Cost

Raw Materials (` 20 x 120% x 15,000) 24.00 3,60,000
Labour (` 12 x 110% x 15,000) 13.20 1,98,000
PRIME COST 37.20 5,58,000
Add: Factory Overhead (` 80,000 x 50% + ` 4 x 15,000) 6.67 1,00,000
WORKS COST 43.87 6,58,000
Add: Office Overhead (` 40,000 x 50% + ` 2 x 15,000) 3.33 50,000
COST OF PRODUCTION 47.20 7,08,000
Add: Selling Expenses (` 1 x 80% x 15,000) 0.80 12,000
COST OF SALES 48.00 7,20,000
Add: Profit (25% on Selling Price or 33.33% on Cost of Sales) 16.00 2,40,000
SELLING PRICE 64.00 9,60,000
4.2 ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM COST AND NORMAL AND ABNORMAL ITEMS/COST
Items Excluded from Cost Accounts

There are certain items which are included in financial accounts of a manufacturing concern but shall
not to be included in cost accounts since they are not related to cost of production. These items fall
into three categories:-
Appropriation of profits:
(i) Appropriation to sinking funds.
(ii) Dividends paid
(iii) Taxes on income and profits
(iv) Transfers to general reserves
(v) Excess provision for depreciation of buildings, plant etc. and for bad debts
(vi) Amount written off – goodwill, preliminary expenses, underwriting commission, discount on
debentures issued; expenses of capital issue etc.
(vii) Capital expenditures specifically charged to revenue
(viii) Charitable donation
Matters of pure finance

(a) Purely financial charges:-
(i) Losses on sale of investments, buildings, etc.
(ii) Expenses on transfer of company’s office
(iii) Interest on bank loan, debentures, mortgages, etc.
(iv) Damages payable

Cost Book Keeping
(v) Penalties and fines

(vi) Losses due to scrapping of machinery
(vii) Remuneration paid to the proprietor in excess of a fair reward for services rendered.
(b) Purely financial incomes:-

(i) Interest received on bank deposits
(ii) Profits made on the sale of investments, fixed assets, etc.
(iii) Transfer fees received
(iv) Rent receivable
(v) Interest, dividends, etc. received on investments.
(vi) Brokerage received
(vii) Discount, commission received
Abnormal gains and losses:-

(i) Losses or gains on sale of fixed assets.
(ii) Loss to business property on account of theft, fire or other natural calamities.
In addition to above abnormal items (gain and losses) may also be excluded from cost accounts.
Alternatively, these may be taken to costing profit and loss account.
4.3 INTEGRAL ACCOUNTS
Integrated accounting system is the name given to a system of accounting, where by cost and financial
accounts are kept in the same set of books. Obviously, then there will be no separate set of books for
costing and financial records. Integral accounts provide or meet the information required by costing
and financial accounts.
Features of Integrated Accounting System:

(a) Complete analysis of costs and sales are kept.
(b) Complete details of all payments in cash are kept.
(c) Complete details of all assets and liabilities are kept and this system does not use a notional accounts
to represent all impersonal accounts.
(d) Under this system, general ledger adjustment is not at all maintained and detailed accounts of
assets and liabilities are maintained.
Advantages of integrated accounting system:

The main advantages of integrated accounts are as follows
(a) No need for Reconciliation: The question of reconciling costing profit and financial profit does not
arise, as there is one figure of profit only
(b) Significant saving in the clerical efforts, as only one set of books is maintained.
(c) Retrieving of information is easy & quick
(d) It is economical also as it is based in the concept of centralization of accounting function

Cost Accounting
Essential pre-requisites for integrated accounts:

The essential pre-requisites for integrated accounts include the following steps
(a) The managements decision about the extent of integration of the two sets of books, some concerns
find it useful to integrate upto the stage of primary cost or factory cost, while others prefer full
integration of the entire accounting records.
(b) A suitable coding system must be made available so as to serve the accounting purposes of
financial and cost accounts.
(c) An agreed routine, with regard to the treatment of provision for accruals, prepaid expenses, other
adjustment necessary for preparation of interim accounts.
(d) Perfect coordination should exist between the staff responsible for the financial and cost aspects
of the accounts and an efficient processing of accounting documents should be ensured.
The following table shows the comparative journal entries in financial accounts, cost accounts and
integral accounts:
Sl. Transaction Financial Accounts Cost Accounts Integral Accounts

No.
(i) Credit purchase of Purchases A/c Dr Material Control A/c Dr Material Control A/c Dr
Material To, Creditors A/c To, General Ledger A/c To, Creditors
(ii) Cash purchase of Purchases A/c Dr Material Control A/c Dr Material Control A/c Dr
materials To, Bank / Cash. A/c To, General Ledger A/c To, Cash
(iii) Purchase of special Purchases A/c Dr WIP Control A/c Dr WIP Contrtol A/c Dr
material for direct use To, Cash / Creditors. A/c To, General Ledger Adj A/c To, Cash or Creditors A/c
in job
(iv) Purchase of materials for Purchases A/c Dr Factory OH control A/c Dr Factory OH control A/c Dr
repairs To, Cash/Creditors. A/c To, General Ledger Adj A/c To, Cash / Creditors A/c
(v) Materials returned to Creditors A/c Dr General Ledger Control A/c. Dr Creditors A/c Dr
suppliers To, Purchases A/c To Material control A/c To, Material Control A/c
(vi) Payments to creditors for Creditors A/c Dr No Entry Creditors A/c Dr
supplies made To, Cash A/c To, Cash A/c
(vii) Issue of direct materials No Entry WIP Control A/c Dr WIP Control A/c Dr
to production shops To, Materials Control A/c To, Materials Control A/c
(viii) Issue of indirect materials No Entry Factory OH Control A/c Dr Factory OH control A/c Dr
to production shops To, Material Control A/c To, Material Control A/c
(ix) Return of direct materials No Entry Material Control A/c Dr Material Control A/c Dr
to stores To, WIP Control A/c To, WIP Control A/c
(x) Return of indirect No Entry Material Control A/c Dr Material Control A/c Dr
materials to stores To, Factory Overheads A/c To, Factory Overheads A/c
(xi) Materials transferred No Entry No Entry No Entry
from one Job to another
(xii) Adjustment of normal No Entry Factory Overheads Control A/c Dr Factory Overheads Control A/c Dr
depreciation in material To, Material Control A/c To, Material Control A/c
stocks

Cost Book Keeping
Sl. Transaction Financial Accounts Cost Accounts Integral Accounts

No.
(xiii) Adjustment of normal No Entry Material Control a/c Dr Material Control A/c Dr
surplus in material stocks To, Factory OH Control A/c To, Factory OH Control A/c
(xiv) Payment of wages & Wages & Salaries A/c Dr Wages Control A/c Dr Wages & Salaries A/c Dr
Salaries To Cash / Bank A/c To, General Ledger A/c To, Cash / Bank A/c
(xv) Analysis of distribution of No Entry WIP Control A/c Dr WIP Control A/c Dr
wages POH Control A/c Dr POH Control A/c Dr
Admin OH Control A/c Dr Admin OH Control A/c Dr
Sellings Dis OH Control A/c Dr Sellings Dis OH Control A/c Dr
To, Wages Control A/c. To, Wages Control A/c.
(xvi) Payment of Expenses Expenses A/c Dr POH Control A/c Dr POH Control A/c Dr
To, Cash A/c Admin OH Control A/c Dr Admin OH Control A/c Dr
Selling & Dis OH Control A/c Dr Selling & Dis OH Control A/c Dr
To, General Ledger Adj A/c To, Cash A/c
(xvii) Recording of Depreciation A/c Dr POH Control A/c Dr POH Control A/c Dr
Depreciation To, Asset A/c Admin OH Control A/c Dr Admin OH Control A/c Dr
Selling & Dis OH Control A/c Dr Selling & Dis OH Control A/c Dr
To, General Ledger Adj A/c To, Asset A/c
(xviii) Absorption of Factory No Entry WIP Control A/c Dr WIP Control A/c Dr
Overheads To, Factory Overheads A/c To, Factory Overheads A/c
(xix) Spoiled / Defective Work No Entry Costing Profit & Loss A/c Dr Costing Profit & Loss A/c Dr
To, WIP Control A/c To, WIP Control A/c
(xx) Recording of Cost of No Entry Finished Goods Control A/c Dr Finished Goods Control A/c Dr
Jobs completed To, WIP Control A/c To, WIP Control A/c
(xxi) Recording of Cost of No Entry Cost of Sales A/c Dr Cost of Sales A/c Dr
goods sold To, Finished goods A/c To, Finished goods Control A/c
(xxii) Recording of sales Cash/ Debtor A/c Dr General Ledger Control A/c Dr Cash / Debors A/c Dr
To, Sales A/c To, Costing P&L A/c To, P&L A/c
(xxiii) Absorption of No Entry Finished Goods Control A/c Dr Finished Goods Control A/c Dr
Administration To, Admin OH Control A/c To, Admin OH control A/c
Overheads
(xxiv) Absorption of Selling No Entry Cost of Sales A/c Dr Cost of Sales A/c Dr
Overheads To, Selling & Dis. Overheads To, Selling & Dis. OH Control A/c
Control A/c
(xxv) Under absorption of No Entry Costing Profit & Loss A/c Dr Profit & Loss A/c Dr
overheads To, OH Control A/c To, OH control A/c
(xxvi) Over absorption of No Entry OH Control A/c Dr OH Control A/c Dr
overheads To, Costing P&L A/c To, Costing P&L A/c

Cost Accounting
Illustration 1 :
Journalise the following transactions assuming that cost and financial accounts are integrated:

Raw material purchased 40,000
Direct materials issued to production 30,000
Wages paid (30% indirect) 24,000
Wages charged to production 16,800
Manufacturing expenses incurred 19,000
Manufacturing overhead charged to Production 18,000
Selling and distribution cost 4,000
Finished products (at cost) 40,000
Sales 58,000
Closing stock Nil
Receipts from debtors 13,800
payments to creditors 12,000
Solution:
Journals
Dr. Cr.
Material Control A/c Dr 40,000
To, Creditors A/c 40,000
Work In Progress Control A/c Dr 30,000
To, Material Control A/c 30,000
Wages Control A/c Dr 24,000
To, Cash A/c 24,000
Factory Overheads Control A/c Dr 7,200
To, Wages Control A/c 7,200
Work-in-Progress Control A/c Dr 16,800
Factory Overhead Control A/c Dr 19,000
To, Cash A/c 19,000
Work-in-Progress Control A/c Dr 18,000
To, Factory overhead Control A/c 18,000
S & D O.H. Control A/c Dr 4,000
To, Cash A/c 4,000
Cost of Sales A/c Dr 4,000
To, Selling & Distribution Overhead Control A/c 4,000
Finished Goods Control A/c Dr 40,000
To, Work-in-progress control A/c 40,000
Debtors A/c Dr 58,000
To, Profit & Loss A/c 58,000
Cash A/c Dr 13,800
To, Debtors A/c 13,800
Creditors A/c Dr 12,000
To, Cash A/c 12,000

Cost Book Keeping
Illustration 2 :
Pass the journal entries for the following transactions in a double entry cost accounting system:

a) Issue of material : Direct 5,50,000
Indirect 1,50,000
b) Allocation of wages and salaries : Direct 2,00,000
Indirect 40,000
c) Overheads absorbed in jobs : Factory 1,50,000
Administration 50,000
Selling 30,000
d) Under/over absorbed overheads : Factory (Over) 20,000
Admn . (Under) 10,000
Solution:
Journals
Dr. Cr.
Work In Progress Control A/c Dr 5,50,000
Factory Overheads Control A/c Dr 1,50,000
To Material Control A/c 7,00,000
Factory Overheads Control A/c Dr 40,000
To Wages Control A/c 2,40,000
Finished goods Control A/c Dr 50,000
Cost of Sales A/c Dr 30,000
To Factory Overhead Control A/c 1,50,000
To Administrative Overhead Control A/c 50,000
To Selling Overhead Control A/c 30,000
Costing Profit & Loss A/c Dr 10,000
To Administrative Overhead Control A/c 10,000
Factory Overhead Control A/c Dr 20,000
To Costing Profit & Loss A/c 20,000
Illustration 3 :
Messsrs Essbee Ltd. maintains Integrated Accounts of Cost and Financial Accounts. From the following
details write up Control Accounts of a factory and prepare a Trial Balance.

Share Capital 3,00,000
Reserve 2,00,000
Sundry Creditors 5,00,000
Plant and Machinery 5,75,000
Sundry Debtors 2,00,000
Closing Stock 1,50,000
Bank & Cash Balance 75,000

Cost Accounting
TRANSACTIONS DURING THE YEAR WERE AS FOLLOWS:

Stores purchased 10,00,000
stores issued to production 10,50,000
Stores in hand 95,000
Direct wages incurred 6,50,000
Direct wages charged to production 6,00,000
Manufacturing expenses incurred 3,00,000
Manufacturing expenses charged to production 2,75,000
Selling and distribution expenses 1,00,000
Finished stock production (at cost) 18,00,000
Sales at selling price 22,00,000
Closing stock 95,000
Payments to creditors 11,00,000
Receipts from debtors 21,00,000
Solution:
Dr. Creditors Account Cr.
To, Cash A/c 11,00,000 By, Balance b/d 5,00,000
To, Balance c/d 4,00,000 By, Material Control A/c 10,00,000
15,00,000 15,00,000
By, Balance b/d 4,00,000
Dr. Debtors Account Cr.
To, Balance b/d 2,00,000 By, Cash A/c 21,00,000
To, P & L A/c 22,00,000 By, Balance c/d 3,00,000
24,00,000 24,00,000
To, Balance b/d 3,00,000
Dr. Material Control A/c (or) Stores Ledger Control Account Cr.
To, Balance b/d 1,50,000 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 10,50,000
To, Creditors A/c 10,00,000 By, Manufacturing Overhead 5,000
Control A/c
By, Balance c/d 95,000
11,50,000 11,50,000
To, Balance b/d 95,000
Dr. Cash & Bank Account Cr.
To, Balance b/d 75,000 By, Wages Control A/c 6,50,000
To, Debtors A/c 21,00,000 By, Manufacturing Overhead Control 3,00,000
A/c
By, Selling and Distribution O.H. 1,00,000
Control A/c
By, Creditors A/c 11,00,000
21,75,000 21,75,000

Cost Book Keeping
Dr. Work-in-Progress Control Account Cr.

To, Material Control A/c 10,50,000 By, Fixed Goods Control A/c 18,00,000
To, Wages Control A/c 6,00,000 By, Balance c/d 1,25,000
To, Manufacturing Overhead 2,75,000
Control A/c
19,25,000 19,25,000
To, Balance b/d 1,25,000
Dr. Wages Control Account Cr.

To Cash & Bank A/c 6,50,000 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 6,00,000
By, Manufactures Overhead Control 50,000
A/c
6,50,000 6,50,000
Dr. (Factory) Manufacturing Overhead Control Account Cr.

To, Cash 3,00,000 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 2,75,000
To, Material Control A/c 5,000 By, Profit & Loss A/c 80,000
3,55,000 3,55,000
Dr. Selling & Distribution Overhead Control Account Cr.

To, Cash A/c 1,00,000 By, Cost of Sales A/c 1,00,000
1,00,000 1,00,000
Dr. Finished goods Control Account Cr.

To, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 18,00,000 By, Cost of Sales 17,05,000
18,00,000 18,00,000
Dr. Profit & Loss Account Cr.

To, Factory Overheads Control A/c 80,000 By, Debtors A/c (Sale) 22,00,000
To, Cost of Sales 18,05,000
To, Reserve A/c (Profit) 3,15,000
22,00,000 22,00,000
Dr. Cost of Sales Account Cr.

To, Selling & Distribution Control A/c 1,00,000 By, Profit & Loss A/c 18,05,000
To, Finished Goods Control A/c 17,05,000
18,05,000 18,05,000

Cost Accounting
Trial Balance Amount (`)

Share Capital 3,00,000
Reserves
(2,00,000 + 3,15,000) 5,15,000
Creditors 4,00,000
Plant & Machinery 5,75,000
Debtors 3,00,000
Closing Stock:
Material 95,000
Work-in-progress 1,25,000
Finished goods 95,000
Cash & bank 25,000
12,15,000 12,15,000
Illustration 4 :
The following balances are shown in the Cost Ledger of Vinak Ltd. as on 1st October, 2016:
Particulars Dr. (`) Cr.(`)

Work in progress Account 7,056
Factory overheads suspense Account 360
Finished stock Account 5,274
Stores Ledger Control Account 9,450
Administration Overheads Suspense A/C 180
General Ledger Adjustment Account 22,320
Transactions for the year ended 30th september, 2017
Stores issued to production 45,370
Stores purchased 52,400
Material purchased for direct issued to production 1,135
Wages paid (including indirect labour ` 2,520) 57,600
Finished goods sold 1,18,800
Administration expenses 5,400
Selling expenses 6,000
Factory overheads 15,600
Store issued for Capital work-in-Progress 1,500
Finished goods transferred to warehouse 1,08,000
Store issued for factory repairs 2,000
Factory overheads recovered to production 16,830
Administration overheads charged to production 4,580
Factory overheads applicable unfinished work 3,080
selling overheads allocated to sales 5,500
Stores lost due to fire in store (not insured) 150
Administration expenses on unfinished work 850
Finished goods stock on 30.9.2016 14,274
You are required to record the entries in the cost ledger for the year ended 30th September, 2017 and
prepare a Trial Balance as on that date.

Cost Book Keeping
Solution:
Dr. Work-in-Progress Control Account Cr.

To, Balance b/d 7,056 By, Finished Goods Control A/c 1,08,000
To, Material Control A/c 45,370 By, Balance c/d
To, General Ledger Adjustment A/c 1,135 Factory Overhead 3,080
To, Wages control A/c 55,080 Admn. O.H. 850
To, Factory overhead control A/c 16,830 Material & Wages 22,051 25,981
To, Administrative Overhead Control A/c 4,580
To, Factory Overhead Control A/c 3080
To, Administrative Overhead Control A/c 850
1,33,981 1,33,981
To Balance b/d 25,981
Dr. Factory Overhead Suspense Account Cr.

To, Balance b/d 360 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 3,080
To, Wages Control A/c 2,520 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 16,830
To, General Ledger Adjustment A/c 15,600 By, Balance c/d 570
To, Material Control A/c 2,000
20,480 20,480
To, Balance b/d 570
Dr. Finished Goods Control Account Cr.

To, Balance b/d 5,274 By, Cost of Sales A/c 99,000
To, Work-in-progress Control A/c 1,08,000 By, Balance c/d 14,274
1,13,274 1,13,274
Dr. Material Control Account Cr.

To, Balance b/d 9,450 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 45,370
To, General Ledger Adjustment A/c 52,400 By, Capital Work-in-Progress Control A/c 1,500
By, Factory Overhead Suspense A/c 2,000
By, Costing Profit & Loss A/c 150
61,850 61,850
Dr. Administrative Overhead Control Account Cr.

To, Balance c/d 180 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 4,580
To, General Ledger Adjustment A/c 5,400 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 850
By, Balance c/d 150
5,580 5,580
To, balance b/d 150

Cost Accounting
General Ledger Adjustment (GLA) Account

Dr. (or) Cost Ledger Control (CLC) Account Cr.

To, Costing Profit & Loss A/c 1,18,800 By, Balance b/d 22,320
To, Balance c/d 55,805 By, Material Control A/c 52,400
By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 1,135
By, Wages Control A/c 57,600
By, Administrative Overhead Control A/c 5,400
By, Factory Overhead Control A/c 15,600
By, Selling and Distribution Overhead 6,000
Control A/c
By, Costing Profit & Loss A/c 14,150
1,74,605 1,74,605
By Balance b/d 55,805
Dr. Wages Control Account Cr.

To, General Ledger Adjustment A/c 57,600 By, Work-in-Progress Control A/c 55,080
By, Factory Overhead Control A/c 2,520
57,600 57,600
Dr. Costing Profit & Loss Account Cr.

To, Material Control A/c 150 By, General Ledger Adjustment
Control A/c (Sales)
1,18,800
To, Cost of Sales 1,04,500
To, General Ledger Adjustment
Control A/c (profit)
14,150
1,18,800 1,18,800
Dr. Selling and Distribution Overhead Control Account Cr.
To, General Ledger Adjustment A/c 6,000 By, Cost of Sales A/c 5,500
By, Balance c/d 500
6,000 6,000
To Balance b/d 500
Dr. Capital Work-in-progress Account Cr.
To, Material Control A/c 1,500 By, Balance c/d 1,500
1,500 1,500
To, balance b/d 1,500
Dr. Cost of Sales Account Cr.
To, Selling & Distribution Control A/c 5,500 By, Costing Profit & Loss A/c 1,04,500
To, Finished Goods Control A/c 99,000
1,04,500 1,04,500

Cost Book Keeping
Trial Balance Amount (`)

Work-in-Progress Control 25,981
Factory overhead Suspense 570
Finished Goods Control 14,274
Material Control 12,830
Administrative Overhead Control 150
General Ledger Adjustment 55,805
Selling and Distribution Overhead Control 500
Capital Work-in-Progress 1,500
55,805 55,805
4.4 RECONCILIATION OF COST ACCOUNTING RECORDS WITH FINANCIAL ACCOUNTS
Where no separate accounts are maintained for costing and finance, the question of reconciliation
does not arise. But where the cost and financial accounts are maintained independently of each other,
it is indispensable to reconcile them. Though both the sets of accounts are same as far as the basic
transactions are concerned but there are differences in the profits of two sets of books.
Reasons for difference in profits of cost and financial accounts:

(i) Items shown in Financial Accounts:
There are a number of items which are included in financial accounts but do not find place in cost
accounts. They may be items of income or expenses, the former increases the profit and latter
reduces the profit.
A. Purely Financial Charges
(a) Loss arising from the sale of fixed assets.
(b) Loss on sale of investments, discount on debentures, etc.
(c) Interest on bank loan, mortgage and debentures.
(d) Expenses of companies ‘Share Transfer Office’.
B. Appropriation of Profits
(a) Donations and Charities
(b) Income Tax
(c) Dividend Paid
(d) Transfer to Reserves
C. Writing off Intangible and Fictitious Assets
(a) Goodwill
(b) Patents & Copyrights
(c) Advertisement
(d) Preliminary Expenses

Cost Accounting
D. Pure Financial Incomes

(a) Rent received or Profit on Sale of Fixed Assets
(b) Share transfer fee received
(c) Interest received on Bank Deposits
(d) Dividend received etc.
(ii) Items shown only in Cost Accounts:
There are certain items which are included in cost accounts and not in financial accounts. Such
items are very few.
E.g. Interest on capital employed, rent for own premises etc.
(iii) Over or Under Absorption of Overheads.
Overheads are absorbed in Cost Accounts on a certain predetermined estimated basis and in
Financial Accounts, actual amounts incurred are recorded. If there is any over or under absorption
it leads to difference in the profits of both sets of books.
(iv) Differences due to different basis of stock valuation and depreciation methods.
Objects of Reconciliation:
(a) To assure the mathematical accuracy and reliability of cost accounts.
(b) To have proper cost control and ascertainment.
(c) To find out the reasons for the profit or loss shown by the financial accounts.
(d) To ensure correct profit or loss in financial accounts.
(e) To ensure true and fair view of balance sheet of the business concern.
Procedure for reconciliation
Take Profits as per Financial Accounts.
Add :
(a) Items of income included in Cost Accounts but not in Financial Accounts.
(b) Items of expenditure included in Financial and not in Cost Accounts.
(c) Amounts by which items of income have been shown in excess in Cost Accounts over the
corresponding entries in Financial Accounts.
(d) Amounts by which items of expenditure have been shown in excess in Financial Accounts over the
corresponding entries in Cost Accounts.
(e) Under absorption of overheads in Cost Accounts.
(f) The amount by which closing stock of inventory is overvalued in Cost Accounts.
(g) The amount by which opening stock of inventory is undervalued in Cost Accounts.
Less :
(a) Items of income included in Financial Accounts but not in Cost Accounts.
(b) Items of expenditure (as interest on Capital, Rent on owned premises etc.) included in Cost Accounts
but not in Financial Accounts.
(c) Amounts by which items of expenditure have been shown in excess in Cost Accounts as compared
to the corresponding entries in Financial Accounts.

Cost Book Keeping
(d) Amounts by which items of incomes have been shown in excess in Financial Accounts as compared
to the corresponding entries in Cost Accounts.
(e) Over absorption of overheads in Cost Accounts.
(f) The amount by which closing stock of inventory is undervalued in Cost Accounts.
(g) The amount by which opening stock of inventory is overvalued in Cost Accounts.
Illustration 5 :
The net profits of a manufacturing company appeared at ` 64,500 as per financial records for the year
ended 31st December, 2016. The cost books however, showed a net profit of ` 86,460 for the same
period. A careful scrutiny of the figures from both the sets of accounts revealed the following facts.
`
(i) Income-tax provided in financial books 20,000
(ii) Bank Interest (Cr) in financial books 250
(iii) Work overhead under recovered 1,550
(iv) Depreciation charged in financial records 5,600
(v) Depreciation recovered in cost 6,000
(vi) Administrative overheads over-recovered 850
(vii) Loss due to obsolescence charged in financial accounts 2,800
(viii) Interest on Investments not included in cost accounts 4,000
(ix) Stores adjustments (Credit in financial books) 240
(x) Loss due to depreciation in stock value 3,350
Prepare Reconciliation Statement.
Solution:
Statement showing reconciliation of profit shown by cost and financial accounts as on 31-12-2016:

Profit as per Financial Accounts 64,500
Add: Income tax provided in financial books only. 20,000
Works overhead under recovered 1,550
Loss to obsolescence considered. Financial A/c only. 2,800
Loss due to depreciation in stock 3,350 27,700
92,200
Less: Bank interest credited in financial books. 250
Over recovery of depreciation 400
Administration OH’s over recovered 850
Interest on investment not included in cost books 4,000
Stores adjustment 240 5,740
Profit as per Cost Accounts 86,460

Cost Accounting
Illustration 6 :
The net profits shown by financial accounts of a company amounted to ` 18,550 whilst the profits
disclosed by company’s cost account for that period were ` 28,660. On reconciling the figures, the
following difference were noted.
Amount (`)
(i) Director’s fee not charged in cost accounts 650
(ii) A provision for bad and doubtful debts 570
(iii) Bank interest (cr.) 30
(iv) Income-tax 8,300
(v) Overheads in the cost accounts were estimated at ` 8,500. The charges shown by the financial
books was ` 8,320.
(vi) Work was started during the year on a new factory and expenditure `16,000 was incurred.
Depreciation of 5% was provided in financial accounts.
Prepare a Statement Reconciling the figures shown by the cost and financial accounts.
Solution:
Statement showing reconciliation of profit shown by cost and financial accounts

Add: Directors fee 650
Provision for bad debts 570
Income tax 8,300
Depreciation in financial books only 800 10,320
28,870
Less: Bank interest 30
Over recovery of overheads 180 210
Illustration 7:
M/s Mysore Petro Ltd. showed a net loss of ` 2,08,000 as per their financial accounts for the year ended
31st March, 2017. The cost accounts, however, disclosed a net loss of `1,64,000 for the same period.
The following information was revealed as a result of the scrutiny of the figures of both the sets of books.
Amount (`)
(i) Factory overhead under recovered 3,000
(ii) Administration overhead over recovered 2,000
(iii) Depreciation charged in financial books 60,000
(iv) Depreciation recovered in costs 65,000
(v) Interest on investment not included in costs 10,000
(vi) Income-tax provided 60,000
(vii) Transfer fee ( in financial Books) 1,000
(viii) Stores adjustment (credit in financial books) 1,000
Prepare Reconciliation Statement.

Cost Book Keeping
Solution:
Statement Showing Reconciliation of Profit Shown by Cost and Financial Accounts

Profit as per Financial Accounts (2,08,000)
Add: Under recovery of factory overheads 3,000
Income tax 60,000 63,000
(1,45,000)
Less: Over recovery of Administration OH 2,000
Over recovery of depreciation 5,000
Interest on investments considered in Financial A/c 10,000
Transfer fee 1,000
Stores adjustment 1,000 19,000
Loss as per Cost Accounts (1,64,000)
Illustration 8 :
During a particular year, the auditors certified the financial accounts, showing profit of `1,68,000 whereas
the same, as per costing books was coming out to be ` 2,40,000. Given the following information you
are asked to prepare a Reconciliation Statement showing the reasons for the gap.
Dr. Trading and Profit and Loss Account Cr.

To, Opening stock A/c 8,25,000 By, Sales 34,65,000
To, Purchases A/c 24,72,000 By, Closing stock A/c 7,50,000
To, Direct wages A/c 2,30,000
To, Factory overhead A/c 2,10,000
To, G.P. C/d 4,83,000
42,15,000 42,15,000
To, Admn.Expenses A/c 95,000 By, G.P. b/d 4,83,000
To, Selling Expenses A/c 2,25,000 By, Sundry Income A/c 5,000
To, Net profit 1,68,000
4,88,000 4,88,000
The costing records show:

(i) Book value of closing stock `7,80,000
(ii) Factory overheads have been absorbed to the extent of `1,89,800
(iii) Sundry income is not considered
(iv) Total absorption of direct wages `2,46,000
(v) Administrative expenses are covered at 3% of selling price.
(vi) Selling prices include 5% for selling expenses.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Statement Showing Reconciliation of Profit Shown by Cost and Financial Accounts

Profit as per Financial Accounts 1,68,000
Add: Over valuation of Closing stock in Cost Accounts (7,80,000 - 7,50,000) 30,000
Under recovery of works overhead (2,10,000 - 1,89,800) 20,200
Under recovery of selling expenses in Cost Accounts. (2,25,000 – 1,73,250*) 51,750 1,01,950
2,69,950
Less: Sundry income not considered in Cost Accounts 5,000
Over recovery of wages (2,46,000 - 2,30,000) 16,000
Over recovery Administration expenses (1,03,950** - 95,000) 8,950 29,950
Profit as per Cost Accounts 2,40,000
* 5% of 34,65,000 = 1,73,250
** 3% of 34,65,000 = 1,03,950
Illustration 9 :
A transistor manufacturer, who commenced his business on 1st June, 2017 supplies you with the following
information and asks you to prepare a statement showing the profit per transistor sold. Wages and
materials are to be charged at actual cost, works overhead at 75% of wages and office overhead at
30% of works cost. Number of transistors manufactured and sold during the year was 540.
Other particulars:
Materials per set ` 240
Wages per set ` 80
Selling price per set ` 600
If the actual works expenses were `32,160 and office expenses were `61,800, prepare a Reconciliation
Statement.
Solution:
Cost Sheet (or) Statement of Cost and Profit Amount (`)
Particulars Unit Total

Material 240 1,29,600
Wages 80 43,200
Prime cost 320 1,72,800
(+) Works overhead (75% of wages) 60 32,400
Works cost 380 2,05,200
(+) Office overheads (30% of work cost) 114 61,560
Total cost 494 2,66,760
(+) Profit 106 57,240
Sales 600 3,24,000

Cost Book Keeping
Dr. Trading and Profit & Loss Account Cr.

To, Materials A/c 1,29,600 By, Sales A/c 3,24,000
To, Wages A/c 43,200
To, Works Overheads A/c 32,160
To, Gross Profit 1,19,040
3,24,000 3,24,000
To, Office Expenses 61,800 By, Gross Profit b/d 1,19,040
To, Net Profit 57,240
1,19,040 1,19,040
Statement of Reconciliation

(-) Over recovery of works overheads (32,160 - 32,400) (240)
(+) Under recovery of office expenses (61,800 - 61,560) 240
Illustration 10 :
Given below is the Trading and Profit and Loss Account of Vikas Electronics for the accounting year
ended 31st March, 2017.

To, Direct Materials consumed 3,00,000 By, Sales A/c (2,50,000 units @ ` 3) 7,50,000
To, Direct Wages A/c 2,00,000
To, Factory expenses A/c 1,20,000
To, Office Expenses A/c 40,000
To, Selling & Distribution Exp. A/c 80,000
To, Net profit 10,000
7,50,000 7,50,000
Normal output of the factory is 2,00,000 units. Factory overheads are fixed upto `60,000 and office
expenses are fixed for all practical purposes, selling and distribution expenses are fixed to the extent of
`50,000 the rest are variable. Prepare a Statement of Reconciliation of Profit as per Cost Accounts and
Financial Accounts.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Cost Sheet (or) Statement of Cost and Profit

Material consumed 3,00,000
Direct wages 2,00,000
Prime cost 5,00,000
(+) Works/Factory expenses
Fixed (60,000 x 2,50,000/2,00,000) 75,000
Variable (1,20,000 - 60,000) 60,000 1,35,000
Works cost 6,35,000
(+) Office expenses (40,000 x 2,50,000/2,00,000) 50,000
Cost of production 6,85,000
(+) Selling & Distribution expenses
Fixed (50,000 x 2,50,000/2,00,000) 62,500
Variable (1,20,000 - 60,000) 30,000 92,500
Cost of sales/Total cost 7,77,500
(-) Loss (27,500)
Sales 7,50,000

Add:
Less: Over recovery of factory overheads (1,35,000 - 1,20,000) 15,000
Over recovery of office expenses (50,000 - 40,000) 10,000
Over recovery of Selling & Distribution overheads (92,500 - 80,000) 12,500 37,500
Loss as per Cost Accounts 27,500
Illustration 11 :
The following is the Trading and Profit and Loss account of M/s. Time and Trading limited for the year
ended 31.12.2016.
Dr. Trading and profit & Loss Account Cr.

To, Materials consumed 7,08,000 By, Sales A/c (30,000 units) 15,00,000
To, Direct Wages A/c 3,71,000 By, Finished stock A/c (1,000 units) 40,000
To, Works overheads A/c 2,13,000 By, Work-in-progress:
To, Admn. overheads A/c 95,500 Materials 17,000
To, Selling and Distribution overheads A/c 1,13,500 Wages 8,000
To, Net profit 69,000 Works OH 5,000
15,70,000 15,70,000

Cost Book Keeping
Manufacturing a standard unit, the company’s cost records show that:

(i) Works overheads have been charged to work-in-progress at 20% on prime cost.
(ii) Administration overheads have been recovered at `3 per finished unit.
(iii) Selling and distribution overheads have been recovered at `4 per unit sold.
(iv) The unabsorbed or over absorbed overheads have not been adjusted into costing profit and loss
account.
Prepare:
(a) A Costing Profit and Loss Account indicating Net Profit.
(b) A Statement Reconciling the Profit as disclosed by Cost Accounts and that shown in Financial
Accounts.
Solution:
Costing Profit & Loss Account

To, Materials 7,08,000 By, Sales 15,00,000
To, Direct wages 3,71,000
Prime Cost 10,79,000
To, Works OH (20%) 2,15,800
12,94,800
(-) Closing WIP 30,000
Works cost 12,64,800
To, Administration OH’s (31,000 x 3) 93,000
Cost of Production 13,57,800
(-) Closing stock (13,57,800 x 1,000/31,000) 43,800
Cost of goods sold 13,14,000
To, Selling expenses (30,000 x 4) 1,20,000
14,34,000
To Profit 66,000
15,00,000 15,00,000

Add: Under recovery of Admn. overheads (95,500 - 93,000) 2,500
Over valuation of closing stock in Cost A/c’s (43,800 - 40,000) 3,800 6,300
Less: Over recovery of Works overheads (2,15,800 - 2,13,800) 2,800
Over recovery of Selling & Distribution overheads (1,20,000 - 1,13,500) 6,500 9,300

Cost Accounting
Illustration 12 :
The financial profit and loss account of a manufacturing company for the year ended 31st March, 2017
is given below:
Particulars Amount (`) Amount (`) Particulars Amount (`)

To, Opening stock A/c By, Sales A/c 4,60,000
Raw Materials 25,000 By, Closing stock A/c
Finished Stock 40,000 Materials 30,000
W.I.P. 12,500 77,500 Finished stock 15,000
To, Purchases A/c 1,20,000 W.I.P. 20,700
To, Wages (Factory) A/c 30,000
To, Electric Power (Factory) A/c 65,000
To, Gross Profit c/d 1,82,200
5,25,700 5,25,700
To, Administration Expenses A/c 20,500 By, Gross Profit b/d 1,88,200
To, Selling Expenses A/c 46,500 By, Misc. Revenue A/c 26,800
To, Bad Debts A/c 15,600
To, Net Profit A/c 1,32,400
2,15,000 2,15,000
The cost accounts of the concern showed a net profit of ` 1,32,200. It is seen that the costing profit and
loss account is arrived at on the basis of figures furnished below:
Opening stock of raw materials, finished stock and work-in-progress ` 90,800
Closing stock of raw materials, finished stock and work-in-progress ` 69,500
You are required to prepare a Memorandum Reconciliation Account and reconcile the difference in
the profit and loss account.
Solution:
Dr. Memorandum Reconciliation Account Cr.

To, Over valuation of op. stock in 13,300 By, Profit as per financial A/c 1,32,400
Cost A/c By, Over valuation of closing Stock in cost 3,800
To, Miscellaneous revenue 26,800 A/c
To, Profit as per cost A/c 1,32,200 By, Bad debts not considered in cost
15,600
A/c.
By, Admn. expenses not considered in 20,500
cost A/c
1,72,300 1,72,300

Cost Book Keeping
Illustration 13 :
The following figures have been extracted from financial accounts of a manufacturing firm for the first
year of its operation.
Amount (`)
Direct material consumption 50,00,000
Factory OH 16,00,000
Administration OH 7,00,000
Selling and distribution OH 9,60,000
Bad debts 80,000
Preliminary expenses written off 40,000
Legal charges 10,000
Dividends received 1,00,000
Interest on deposit received 20,000
Sales (1,20,000 units) 1,20,00,000
Closing stock
Finished stock - 4,000 units 3,20,000
The cost accounts for the same period reveal that the direct material consumption was `56,00,000.
Factory OH recovered at 20% on prime cost; Administration OH is recovered @ `6 per unit of production;
Selling and Distribution OH are recovered at `8 per unit sold.
You are required to prepare Costing and Financial Profit and Loss Accounts and reconcile the difference
in the profit in the two sets of accounts.
Solution:
Dr. Costing P & L Accoount Cr.

To, Materials 56,00,000 By, Sales 1,20,00,000
To, Direct wages 30,00,000
To, Prime cost 86,00,000
To, Factory OH’s (20%) 17,20,000
1,03,20,000
(-) Closing WIP 2,40,000
Factory Cost 1,00,80,000
To, Admin. OH’s (1,24,000 x 6) 7,44,000
Cost of Production 1,08,24,000
(-) Closing stock of FG (1,08,24,000 x 4,000/1,24,000) 3,49,161
Cost of goods sold 1,04,74,839
To, Selling overheads 9,60,000
To, Profit 5,65,161
1,20,00,000 1,20,00,000

Cost Accounting
Dr. Financial Trading and P & L Account Cr.

To, Materials A/c 50,00,000 By, Dividend A/c 1,00,000
To, Wages A/c 30,00,000 By, Interest on deposit 20,000
To, Factory OH A/c 16,00,000 By, Sales A/c 1,20,00,000
To, Admn. OH A/c 7,00,000 By, Closing stock A/c
To, S & D OH A/c 9,60,000 Finished goods 3,20,000
To, Bad debts A/c 80,000 WIP 2,40,000
To, Preliminary expenses written off 40,000
To, Legal charges A/c 10,000
To, Net Profit 12,90,000
12,68,000 12,68,000
Profit as per Financial Accounts 12,90,000
Add: Over valuation of cl. Stock of Finished goods in Cost Accounts 29,161
Pure financial expenses not considered in Cost Accounts 1,30,000 1,59,161
(80,000 + 40,000 + 10,000)
Less: Over recovery of material 6,00,000
Over recovery of FOH 1,20,000
Over recovery of AOH 44,000
Financial incomes not considered in Cost Accounts. 1,20,000 8,84,000
Profit as per Cost Accounts 5,65,161
Illustration 14 :
The following represent the Trading and Profit and Loss Account of a manufacturer of a standard fire
extinguisher:
Dr. Trading and P&L Account Cr.

To, Materials used 29,150.00 By, Sales A/c 75,000.00
To, Productive Wages A/c 18,610.00 By, Stock of Finished Goods A/c 1,812.50
To, Factory Expenses A/c 14,055.00
To, Gross Profit c/d 20,527.50 By, Work-in-progress:
Materials 2,800.00
Labour 1,560.00
Overheads 1,170.00
82,342.50 82,342.50
To, Administration expenses A/c 13,650.00 By, Gross Profit b/d 20,527.00
To, Net Profit 6,877.50
20,527.50 20,527.50

Cost Book Keeping
1,550 Extinguishers were manufactured during the year, and 1,500 were sold during the same p eriod.
The cost records showed that Factory overheads work out at ` 8.25 and Administrative overheads at
` 9.0625 per article produced: the Cost Accounts showing an estimated total profit of ` 7,031.25 for the
year.
From the forgoing information you are required to prepare
(a) Factory Overhead Control of Account
(b) Administration overheads Control Account in costing books and
(c) An account showing reconciliation between the total net profit as per the Cost Accounts and
the net profit shown in Financial Books.
Solution:
Dr. Factory Overhead Control Account Cr.

To, GLA A/c 14,055 By, FG control (1550 x 8.25) 12,787.50
By, WIP 1,170.00
By, Under recovery 97.50
14,055 14,055
Dr. Administration Overhead Control Account Cr.

To, GLA A/c 13,650.000 By, FG (1550 x 9.0625) 14,046.875
To, Over recovery 396.875
14,046.875 14,046.875
Dr. Memorandum Reconciliation Account Cr.

To, Over recovery of AOH 396.875 By, Profit as per Financial A/c 6,877.500
To, Profit as per Cost Accounts 7,031.250 By, Under recovery of FOH 97.500
By, Over Valuation of Closing Stock 453.125
in Cost Accounts (50 x 9.0625)
7,428.125 7,428.125

Cost Accounting
4.5 INFRASTRUCTURE, EDUCATIONAL, HEALTHCARE AND PORT SERVICES
INFRASTRUCTURE SECTOR
The Infrastructure activity which, inter alia includes building / re-building / restoring structures or
infrastructure facilities, typically using civil, mechanical or other branches of engineering, plays an
important role in the development of the economy as it has multiplier effect across various sectors
creating investment opportunities.
The infrastructure industry contributes a significant share of the country’s GDP and employment.
Features of an infrastructure contract / project are as follows:
• Execution of projects as a contractor / sub-contractor or as a developer.
• Projects involving design, detailed engineering, procurement, manufacturing/fabrication,
installation, commissioning.
• The contracts / projects are finalised normally through a bidding process and the projects are
executed as per client’s requirements at client’s project site.
• The client normally makes payment based on the progress of work as per the contract.
• Contracts also normally stipulate work / quality certification by a client nominated third party
consultant.
• Contracts also lay down performance guarantee conditions, warranty / defect liability period,
liquidated damages for schedule delay, price variation clause if any, client’s obligations during
construction period, method to be followed for any change in scope of work, claim management,
force-majeure clause, arbitration etc.
• The duration of a project may vary from project to project for different industries. Normally the
projects are of long duration (more than 12 months) and revenue is recognised generally based
on Indian Accounting Standard (Ind AS-11) notified by Government of India, Ministry of Corporate
Affairs.
Cost Management in Infrastructure Sector

To have uniformity and consistency in the treatment of various elements of cost, it is desirable that
companies shall lay down a cost accounting policy which shall be adopted for determining the cost
of the project. The policy shall cover the following areas:
• Identification of cost centres / cost objects (projects) and cost drivers.
• Accounting for material cost, stores at store yards, employee cost, and other relevant cost
components.
• Accounting, allocation and absorption of Overheads
• Accounting for Depreciation / Amortization, Transfer in and transfer out of equipment from the site.
• Accounting for scarps, wastage etc.
• Basis for Inventory Valuation
• Methodology for valuation of Inter-Unit / Inter Company and Related Party transactions.
• Treatment of abnormal and non-recurring costs including classification of other non cost item.

Cost Book Keeping
EDUCATION SECTOR
Education imparts knowledge and skills and shapes values and attitudes. Education is vital for progress
of a civil society. Education forms the backbone of a nation and is one of the most important key
indicators of a country’s growth and development. The rise of knowledge economy at a global level
has reinforced education, in all its forms (elementary, secondary, higher, vocational, and adult), as the
key economic and business driver.
Education acts as a driver for technological innovation and facilitates absorption of developed
technology for the benefit of the mankind. It is now widely accepted that knowledge capital, holds
the key to development of economy.
With the emergence of India as a knowledge-based economy human capital has now become its
major strength. This has put the spotlight on severe inadequacies of India’s infrastructure for delivery of
education, particularly higher education.
The social rates of return on investments in all levels of education much exceed the long-term
opportunity cost of capital. At the same time, since it is difficult to measure the social rate of return, the
financial ROI, becomes a key driver for sustaining and enhancing the investments in education sector.
Cost Management in Education Sector
Today, the aim of the top management of colleges and universities is to improve
transparency into their services, operations and finances for their stakeholder and the public. There is
also a growing interest among the institutions of higher education to enhance risk management through
better controls over their entity systems, policies and procedures, and to promote the importance of
accountability among professionals.
Within these organizations, management information system, performance management and cost
review plays a pivotal role in working with administrators, management and boards to establish strong
cost spending controls and derive the many resulting benefits in terms of organizational performance
and cost efficiencies.
The cost/finance controller can help the Higher Educational Institutions in overcoming the threats
and weaknesses of their internal management and system. And can also open and widen the areas
according to their strengths and visible opportunities.
The Management of Higher Educational Institutions shall undertake the following review to evaluate
and improve the effectiveness of risk management, cost control and governance processes:
• Systems evaluation – assessing the control systems in place within a specific area, to support the
achievement of the areas objectives;
• Stock evaluation – undertake stock take of library books, IT equipment, laboratory equipment,
stationary, college furniture etc.
• Compliance evaluation – assessing compliance against an agreed set of standards, e.g. UGC
norms, AICTE norms ;
• Contract evaluation and cost review– auditing procurement projects and capital programmes,
assessing compliance with best practice (policies and procedures), cost reviews for expenditure
on institution infrastructure, staff payroll, administration etc.;
• Thematic work reviews – to be undertaken across a number of departments, identifying areas of
good practice and producing an overall report for all areas of Institution with respect to budgetary
controls, spending analysis, achieving value for money etc.;
• Revenue assurance – undertaking assurance review to confirm that departments have appropriate
controls in place for fee collections, timely deposits, etc.;
• Grant reviews – to ensure that the grants are used for the intended purpose.

Cost Accounting
HEALTHCARE SECTOR:
One of the important objectives of Government is to improve in standard of living and health status
of its population. For this, government endeavors to provide its populations accessible, affordable,
awareness and quality healthcare. Indian Government is also making continuous efforts to improve
the standard of living and health status of its population and it remains one of the primary objectives
in Indian planning. The 12th five year plans (2012-17) focuses on providing universal healthcare
infrastructure, promoting R&D and enacting strong regulation for the Health Sector. India’s health care
system have mixed treatment ownership patterns and with different systems of medicine – primary
Allopathy & Homoeopathy, co existing with indigenous system like Ayurvedic, Unani, and Siddha.
The proper goal of a health care delivery system is to “Touch & Enriching billion Lives with creating
certain set of value” i.e. Patient Centricity, Ownership, & integrity to patients. Objective in health care
is measured in terms of the patient outcomes achieved per rupee expended. It is not the number of
different services provided or the volume of services delivered that matters but the true status of health.
Cost Management can be a useful tool for management in Health Care Sector to:
• Estimate the reasonable cost of Health care resources used in patient care.
• Performance measurement of all the Cost & Revenue drivers.
• Lower health care cost without compromising on quality of services rendered or extended.
• Define the Health care delivery value chain.
• Determine the fees or tariffs for goods and services.
• Estimate the capacity of each resources and comparison with actual utilization.
• Authorise, modify or discontinue a programme or activity.
• Manage materials & its storage and associated costs in terms of consumables, drugs, etc.
Cost Management in Health Care Sector:

• Break down the revenue streams from different services
• Break down the costs to different cost centers & map costs to activities
• Match the revenues with costs using the activity links
• Remove non cost items like discretionary costs, sunk costs
• Remove non operating revenues like interest received, miscellaneous income
• Add risk premium to cover inherent risks in the project
• Identify and quantify cost drivers
• Match cost pools with suitable cost drivers
• Decide on suitable allocation keys and apportion costs to objects
• Compare cost of each service group with revenues generated and arrive at profitability

Cost Book Keeping
PORT SECTOR:
The ports sector in India is divided into “Major Ports” and “Non-Major Ports” which are under the
jurisdiction of Central Government and State Governments respectively. The legal framework governing
the sector comprises the Indian Ports Act of 1908 and the Major Port Trusts Act of 1963. Major Ports
under Central jurisdiction are governed by policy and directives of Ministry of Shipping of Government
of India. Minor Ports under State’s jurisdiction and governed by policy and directives of respective State
Government’s nodal departments/ agencies.
Tariff Authority for Major Ports (TAMP) has been constituted for regulating tariffs in major ports and its
functioning/role is being revised to ensure uniform and transparent norms relating to fixing tariffs as well
as prescribing quality of service for port authorities/terminal operators.
The Management of Port Sector shall undertake the following review to evaluate and improve the
effectiveness of risk management, cost control and governance process;
• To ensure that the internal control are in place as set by the management for the attainment of the
objective of the business,
• Management need to review that the internal control are in place in relation to revenue collection
and its proper accounting,
• To ensure that the grant if issued by the government must be used for the specific purpose for
which it is granted,
• To ensure that the contract enter with the various client is operating in order and its adherence are
in place as this is incidental with the revenue of the entity.

1. Give the specimen of Cost Sheet.
2. Discuss the Cost Management techniques used in the following sector:
a. Infrastructure sector
b. Education sector
c. Healthcare sector
d. Port sector
3. How do you prepare Cost Sheet?
PRACTICE PROBLEMS:
4. Prakash Transport Company has been given a route of 20 km long to run a bus. The bus costs
`12,50,000 with an estimated useful life of 5 years. It is insured @ 3% pa of the cost. Annual tax
amounted to `25,000. The garage rent is `5,000 per month. Annual repairs cost is estimated as
`50,000.
The driver is paid a salary of `7500 per month and the conductor is paid `5000 per month in addition
to a 10% of takings as commission to be shared equally by them.
Office Stationery would `1000 pm and Office Salaries `10000 pm.

Diesel will cost @ `30 per liter and the bus would travel a distance of 5 km per liter. The bus will
make 3 round trips carrying on an average 40 passengers on each trip. Assuming a profit of 15% on
takings, calculate the fare to be charged from each passenger. The bus will operate for 25 days
in a month.
[Ans: Price per Passenger KM = ` 0.85]

Cost Accounting
5. The City Pride Theatre has revealed the following estimates of their cinema hall:
Salary 1 manager `8000 pm, 10 door keepers `2000 pm, 2 operators `4000 pm, 4 booking clerks
`2500 pm
Annual expenses:
Electricity `1200000
Carbon `300000
Misc. expenses `150000
Advertising `750000 (it would earn income of `25000 on
advertisements shown in the hall)
Hire of films `1500000 per film on 15 films
Administration expenses `80000
The premises cost `60 lacs and are to be depreciated over 15 years. Projector and other equipments
cost `25 lacs and to be depreciated @ 25% pa.
The plan is to have 3 daily shows on all 360 days in a year. The capacity is 625 seats divided into
Lower class 250
Upper class 250 and
Balcony 125
20% of the seats are estimated to be vacant. The weightages to be given to the three classes are
in the ratio of 1:2:3.
If the management wishes to earn a profit of 25% on gross proceeds, find out the rates to be charged
for each class. Round off to nearest rupee.
[Ans: Rates of the ticket per seat Lower class ` 36.29; Upper class ` 72.57; Balcony ` 108.86.]

1. Which of the following items is not included in preparation of cost sheet?
A. Carriage inward
B. Purchase returns
C. Sales commission
D. Interest paid
2. Which of the following items is not excluded while preparing a cost sheet?
A. Goodwill written off
B. Provision for taxation
C. Property tax on Factory building
D. Transfer to reserves
E. Interest paid
3. Which of the following are direct expenses?
A. The cost of special designs, drawings or layouts
B. The hire of tools or equipment for a particular job

Cost Book Keeping
C. Salesman’s wages
D. Rent, rates and insurance of a factory
a. (1) and (2)
b. (1) and (3)
c. (1) and (4)
d. (3) and (4)
4. What is prime cost
A. Total direct costs only
B. Total indirect costs only
C. Total non-production costs
D. Total production costs
5. Which of the following is not an element of works overhead?
A. Sales manager’s salary
B. Plant manager’s salary
C. Factory repairman’s wages
D. Product inspector’s salary
6. In Reconciliations Statements Expenses shown only in financial accounts are.
A. Added to financial profit
B. Deducted from financial profit
C. Ignored
D. Added to costing profit
7. In Reconciliations Statements Expenses shown only in cost accounts are.
C. Ignored
D. Deducted from costing profit
8. In Reconciliations Statements, transfers to reserves are.
C. Ignored
9. In Reconciliations Statements, Incomes shown only in financial accounts are.
C. Ignored
D. Deducted from costing profit

Cost Accounting
10. In Reconciliations Statements, Closing Stock Undervalued in Financial accounts is

C. Ignored
11. Integral accounts eliminate the necessity of operating
A. Cost Ledger control account
B. Store Ledger control account
C. Overhead adjustment account
12. What entry will be passed under integrated system for purchase of stores on credit?
A. Dr. Stores
Cr. Creditors
B. Dr Stores ledger control A/c
Cr Creditors
C. Dr Stores Ledger control A/c
Cr General Ledger adjustment A/c
13. What entry will be passed under integrated system for payment to creditors for supplies made?
A. Dr Creditors
Cr Cash
B. Dr. Creditors
Cr Stores Ledger Control A/c
C. No entry
14. The accounting entry in integrated accounts for recording sales will be:
A. Dr. Cost ledger control account
Cr Profit and loss account
B. Dr. Sales account
Cr Profit and Loss A/c
C. Dr. Cash A/c
Cr. Sales A/c
15. What will be the accounting entry for absorption of factory overhead?
A. Dr. Works in progress control A/c
Cr Factory overhead control A/c
B. Dr. Factory overhead
Cr. Factory overhead control A/c
C. No entry is required
[Ans: D, C, A, A, A, A, B, A, B, A, A, B, A, C, A]

Cost Book Keeping
State the following statements are true or false:

1. Total cost = prime cost + All indirect costs.
2. Closing stock of work-in-progress should be valued on the basis of prime cost.
3. Closing stock of finished goods should be valued on the basis of cost of sales.
4. Production cost includes only direct costs related to the production.
5. Primary packaging cost is included in distribution cost.
6. Notional interest on Owner’s capital appears only in financial profit and loss A/c.
7. Goodwill written off appears only in cost accounts.
8. Overheads are taken on estimated basis in financial accounts.
9. Expenses which appears only in financial accounts and not in cost accounts, are Generally
notional items.
10. Need for Reconciliation arise in case of integrated system of accounts.
11. Cost ledger control account makes the cost ledger self balancing.
12. Stock ledger contains the accounts of all items of finished goods.
13. The purpose of cost control accounts is to control the cost.
14. Cost control accounts are prepared on the basis of double entry system.
15. The balancing in costing profit and loss account represents under or over absorption of overheads.
[Ans: T, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, T, T, F, T, F]
Fill in the Blanks:
1. Prime cost + Overheads =________
2. Total cost +Profit =________
3. ________+Profit = Sales.
4. Direct Material + _________+Direct Expenses=Prime Cost.
5. Salary paid to factory manager is an item of ____________.
6. In Reconciliations Statements, Incomes shown only in Financial accounts are _________.
7. In Reconciliations Statements, Expenses shown only in cost accounts are ____________.
8. In Reconciliations Statements, overheads Over-Recovered in cost accounts are__________.
9. In Reconciliations Statements, overheads Under Recovered in cost accounts are ___________.
10. Notional remuneration to owner is expense debited only in __________________.
11. All the transactions relating to materials are recorded through ____________.
12. The net balance of _______________ represents net profit or net loss.
13. WIP ledger contains the accounts of all the ______________ which are under _____.
14. The two traditional systems of accounting for integration of cost and financial accounts are the
________ and ____________.
15. Under integrated accounting system, the accounting entry for payment of wages is to debit _____
and to credit cash.

Cost Accounting
[Ans: Total cost, Selling Price, Cost of Sales, Direct wages, Factory Overhead, Added to costing profit,
Added to costing profit, Deducted from costing profit, Added to financial profit, Cost Accounts, Store
ledger control accounts, Costing profit and loss account, Jobs Execution, Double entry method –the
third entry method, Wages control Accounts.]
Column A Column B
1. Primary Packing Materials Consumed A Not shown in cost sheet but debited to profit &
loss account
2. Captive power plant expense B Forms part of office & adm. Expenses
3. Cash discount allowed C Forms part of selling expenses
4. Scrap value of abnormal loss of D Treated as part of factory expenses
finished output
5. Cost of free samples of products E Treated as direct expenses
distributed
6. Depreciation on computer purchased for F Not shown in cost sheet but credited to profit
office & loss account
7. Donations G Expenses debited only in the financial accounts
8. Interest paid on loan H Appropriations only in financial accounts
9. Notional Rent charged to I Expenses debited only in cost accounts
10. Notional interest on Owner’s capital J Income credited only in cost accounts
[Ans: E, D, A, F, C, B, H, G, J, I]

Methods of Costing
Study Note - 5
METHODS OF COSTING
5.1 Job Costing

5.2 Batch Costing
5.3 Contract Costing
5.4 Process Costing – Joint & By-Products
5.5 Operating Costing or Service Costing – Transport, Hotel and Hospital
5.1 JOB COSTING
Methods or Types of Costing

Costing is the technique and process of ascertaining costs. In order to do the same, it is necessary to
follow a particular method of ascertaining cost. Different methods of costing are applied to different
industries depending upon the type of manufacture and their nature. Broadly the costing methods are
classified into the following:
(a) Specific Order Costing (Job or Terminal Costing)
(b) Operation Costing or Process or Period Costing
Specific Order Costing: Specific order costing is the category of basic costing methods applicable where
the work consists of separate jobs, batches or contracts each of which is authorised by a specific order
or contract. It includes job costing consisting batch costing and contract costing.
Job Order Costing:
Industries which manufacture products or render services against specific orders as distinct from
continuous production for stock or sales use the job costing or job order method of cost accounting.
The method is also known under various other names, such as specific order costing, production order
costing, job lot costing or lot costing. Every order in job costing is separate and it is not essential that the
same manufacturing operations be carried out or the same materials be utilized in respect of each.
However, a number of identical orders or identical products may be combined together to form lots or
batches, each such lot or batch constituting a job order. In the job costing system, an order or a unit,
lot, or batch of a product may be taken as a cost unit, i.e. a job.
In job costing, there is no averaging of costs except to the extent that in the ascertainment of unit cost,
the cost of a lot of products in one order is obtained. A job or an order may extend to several accounting
periods and job costs are, therefore, not related to particular periods.
Job cost accounting is followed in three types of manufacturing organisations:
(i) Jobbing concerns.
(ii) Small firms.
(iii) Large enterprises manufacturing a variety of products.

Cost Accounting
(i) Jobbing concerns:

Some concerns manufacture a variety of products according to customer’s specifications and
do not generally confine their activities to producing uniformly any specific product for sale in the
market. The jobs, products or services are dissimilar or unique and non-repetitive having different
specifications and methods of manufacture, and each one requires different types, sizes and
quantities of materials and equipments and utilizes different labour hours. Such concerns must of
necessity to use job cost accounting.
(ii) Small firms:
Though manufacturing a number of specific products, small manufacturing concerns may find
process costing difficult to apply because due to small sales, no product can have a run long
enough to establish a product line. On account of the frequent changes from one product to
another, job costing would be suitable for determining the cost of each lot of products.
(iii) Large enterprises manufacturing a variety of products:
A single department would be manufacturing several products, perhaps all at a time, so that
none of the departments is specialized for continuous runs of product lines. As definite process
departments cannot be established, job costing is more suitable in such cases.
Job costing is applicable to engineering concerns, construction companies, ship-building, furniture
making, hardware and machine manufacturing industries, repair shops, automobile garages and
several such other industries where jobs or orders can be kept separate.
Procedure for Job Cost Accounting:
On receipt of an order from the customer or an indication from the sales department for manufacturing
a particular product, the production planning department prepares a suitable design for the product
or job. It also works out the requirements of materials for the product and prepares a list of operations
indicating the various operations to be carried out and their sequence, and the shops, departments,
plants or machines to be entrusted with each of the operations.
A Production Order is issued giving instructions to the shops to proceed with the manufacture of the
product. The production order constitutes the authority for work. Usually a production order contains
all relevant information regarding production, such as detailed particulars of the job or product, the
quantity or units to be manufactured, date of start of production, probable date of completion, details of
materials required as per the bill of materials, the operations and the various shops involved in performing
them and the route of the job should take.
The production order usually lays down only the quantities of materials required and the time allowed
for the operations, but the values of materials and labour are also sometimes indicated. In the later
case, the production order serves the combined purpose of an order for manufacture as well as the
cost sheet on which the cost of the order is compiled.
The production order also provides for the material and labour on account of normal wastage or spoilage
of the product in the final stage or during the various stages of manufacture.
Production orders may, in general, be of three types:
(i) Assembly type of order.
(ii) Sub-assembly type of order.
(iii) Components or parts production type.
(i) Assembly type of order:
Where components are purchased and assembled into a product in the factory. A production
order for assembly only is required.
(ii) Sub-assembly type of order:

Methods of Costing
Components are purchased and sub-assemblies and assemblies are made in the factory. Production
orders for each sub-assembly and final assembly will be necessary.
(iii) Components or parts production type:
Components are manufactured and sub-assembled and the sub-assemblies are assembled into the
final product. Separate production orders for each component, sub-assembly and final assembly
are issued.
Copies of Production Orders May be Distributed as Follows:

(a) One copy to the stores for provisioning and issue of materials on demand.
(b) One copy each to the departments or shops concerned to undertake production by demanding
materials and employing men and machines on the operations.
(c) One copy to the cost department for working out the cost of the job.
Separate job cost sheets are maintained for each job. If a job consists of several major or important
operations, separate cost sub-sheets for recording the costs of the various operations may be maintained
and the aggregate cost, in summary, shown in the main cost sheet.
Material Cost:
On receipt of a production order, the shop draws the requisite materials from the stores. Surplus, excess
or incorrect materials are returned from the shops to the stores on materials return notes. Scrap and
waste arising in the course of manufacture are returned in a similar manner. The materials requisitions,
materials return notes and materials transfer notes are ‘costed’ in accordance with the methods of
pricing adopted by the concern.
Labour Cost:
Labour summaries or wages analysis sheets are prepared for each accounting period and the totals of
these statements are debited to Work-in-Progress Account or Overhead Control Account by credit to
Wages Control Account. Amounts on account of overtime, idle time, shift differential and fringe benefits
may also be included in the wages analysis sheet. Direct labour costs are posted on the respective cost
sheets and indirect labour is treated in the manner indicated for indirect material.
Manufacturing Overhead:
Overhead costs are accumulated against standing order numbers and against cost centres. Overhead
rates, predetermined or actual as the case may be, are worked out for each such centre. The overhead
applied to each job is obtained by multiplying the overhead rate by the actual base variable spent
on the job.
Completion of Jobs:
Postings of direct material, direct labour, direct expenses and manufacturing overhead costs to the cost
sheet for a job or production order are made periodically throughout the run of the job or order. The
completion report is an indication that the manufacturing operations are over and further expenditure
on the job should cease so that the cost sheet may not be closed.
Work-in-Progress:
The cost of an incomplete job i.e., a job on which some manufacturing processes or operations are still
due before it can be made into the finished product is termed Work-in-Progress or Work-in-Process. If
a production order has been only partly completed by the end of an accounting period, it is essential
that the closing stock of the work-in-progress be determined.
Cost Control in Job Order System:
Control over job costs may be exercised by comparison of the actual costs with the estimated costs
established as basis for fixing job prices. Here again, adequate cost control is available for direct

Cost Accounting
material and direct labour only; overhead costs cannot be controlled in terms of individual jobs. Control
of overhead is, therefore, confined to the department as a whole for which predetermined overhead
rate has been determined.
Comparison may also be made with the costs of previous periods or of earlier batches of production,
if any.
Standard costs may be used in job type plants, particularly where the product or the particular operations
of the job are of a standardised nature.
Advantages of Job Costing:
Job costing offers the following advantages:
(a) The cost of material, labour and overhead for every job or product in a department is available
daily, weekly or as often as required while the job is still in progress.
(b) On completion of a job, the cost under each element is immediately ascertained. Costs may be
compared with the selling prices of the products in order to determine their profitability and to
decide which product lines should be pushed or discontinued.
(c) Historical costs for past periods for each product, compiled by orders, departments, or machines,
provide useful statistics for future production planning and for estimating the costs of similar jobs to
be taken up in future. This assists in the prompt furnishing of price quotations for specific jobs.
(d) The adoption of predetermined overhead rates in job costing necessitates the application of a
system of budgetary control of overhead with all its advantages.
(e) The actual overhead costs are compared with the overhead applied at predetermined rates; thus,
at the end of an accounting period, overhead variances can be analyzed.
(f) Spoilage and defective work can be easily identified with specific jobs or products.
(g) Job costing is particularly suitable for cost-plus and such other contracts where selling price is
determined directly on the basis of costs.
Limitations of Job Costing:
The limitations of job costing are:
(a) Job costing is comparatively more expensive as more clerical work is involved in identifying each
element of cost with specific departments and jobs.
(b) With the increase in the clerical processes, chances of errors are enhanced.
(c) The cost as ascertained, even where they are compiled very promptly, are historical as they are
compiled after incidence.
(d) The cost compiled under job costing system represents the cost incurred under actual conditions
of operation. The system does not have any scientific basis.
Reports in Job Costing System:
Report on profits on completed jobs:
A statement may be prepared monthly to indicate the gross profit earned on all jobs completed during
the month. This statement is useful for the management for evaluating past performances. Net profit
analysis may also be made in a similar manner if administration, selling and distribution overheads for
the job are included in the statement.
Report on cost variances:
If cost estimates are developed, a cost variance report showing the deviations of actual costs from
the estimated costs may be prepared in order that significant differences may be brought to light
and investigated. The report may be prepared separately for a job, or for a department showing the
variances in respect of all jobs undertaken by the department during a period.

Methods of Costing
Illustration 1:
As newly appointed Cost Accountant, you find that the selling price of Job No. 9669 has been calculated
on the following basis:

Materials 12.08
Direct Wages – 22 hours at 25 paise per hour 5.50
Department A – 10 hours,
B – 4 hours,
C - 8 hours
Prime Cost 17.58
Plus 33% on Prime Cost 5.86
23.44
An analysis of the previous year’s profit and loss account shows the following:

Materials Used 77,500 Factory Overheads:
Direct Wages: A 2,500
A 5,000 B 4,000
B 6,000 C 1,000
C 4,000 Selling Costs 30,000
You are required to:

(a) Calculate and enter the revised costs using the previous year’s figures as a basis;
(b) Draw up a Job Cost Sheet;
(c) Add to the total job cost 10% for profit and give the final selling price.
Solution:
(a)
In order to draw up Job Cost Sheet, the factory overhead rates of different departments and percentage
of selling cost will have to be determined first on the basis of previous year’s figures as follow:
Factory Overhead Rates: Amount (`)
Particulars Department
A B C
Direct Wages (i)
Factory Overheads (ii) 2,500 4,000 1,000
Direct Labour Hours (D.W. x 4) (iii) 20,000 24,000 16,000
Factory Overhead Rates per hour (ii ÷ iii) 0.125 0.167 0.063
Working Notes:
Materials used 77,500

Direct Wages [A = 5,000, B = 6,000, C = 4,000] 15,000
Factory Overhead [A = 2,500, B = 4,000, C = 1,000] 7,500
Works Cost 1,00,000
Selling Costs 30,000

Cost Accounting
` 30,000
Percentage of Selling Cost on Works Cost = × 100 = 30%
`1,00,000
(b) Cost Sheet
Job No. 9669 Period

Materials 12.08
Direct Wages:
Dept. A 2.50
Dept. B 1.00
Dept. C 2.00 5.50
Prime Cost 17.58
Factory Overheads:
Dept. A (10 hours. @ ` 0.125) 1.25
Dept. B (4 hours. @ ` 0.167) 0.67
Dept. C (8 hours. @ ` 0.063) 0.50 2.42
Works Cost 20.00
Selling Cost (30% of Works Cost) [Ref. working notes] 6.00
Cost of Sales 26.00
(c)
Profit (10% on Cost) 2.60
Selling Price 28.60
Illustration 2:
A work order for 100 units of a commodity has to pass through four different machines of which the
machine hour rates are: Machine P – ` 1.25, Machine Q – ` 2.50, Machine R – ` 3 and Machine S – ` 2.25
Following expenses have been incurred on the work order – Materials ` 8,000 and Wages ` 500.
Machine - P has been engaged for 200 hours. Machine - Q for 160 hours, Machine - R for 240 hours and
Machine - S for 132 hours.
After the work order has been completed, materials worth ` 400 are found to be surplus and are returned
to stores.
Office overhead used to be 40% of works costs, but on account of all-round rise in the cost of
administration, distribution and sale, there has been a 50% rise in the office overhead expenditure.
Moreover, it is known that 10% of production will have to be scrapped as not being upto the specification
and the sale proceeds of the scrapped output will be only 5% of the cost of sale.
If the manufacturer wants to make a profit of 20% on the total cost of the work order, find out the selling
price of a unit of commodity ready for sale.
Solution:
Statement showing the selling price of a unit

Materials used (` 8,000 – `400) 7,600
Direct Wages 500
Prime Cost 8,100

Methods of Costing
Works Overhead at machine hour rate:

Machine - P For 200 hours @ ` 1.25 per hour 250
Machine - Q For 160 hours. @ ` 2.50 per hour 400
Machine - R For 240 hours. @ ` 3 per hour 720
Machine - S For 132 hours. @ ` 2.25 per hour 297 1,667
Works Cost 9,767
Administration Overhead at 60% of works cost 5,860
15,627
Less: Sale proceeds of Scrap (5% of 10% of ` 15,627) 78
Total Cost of the work order 15,549
Profit at 20% of total Cost 3,110
Selling Price of 100 units 18,659
Selling Price of a unit 186.59
Note: It was known before that 10% of production will have to be scrapped, therefore, inputs must have
been made taking this factor into consideration. No other adjustment is necessary except deducting
the value of scrap from the cost of production.
Illustration 3:
The data pertaining to Heavy Engineering Ltd. using are as follows at the end of 31.3.2018. Direct material
` 9,00,000; Direct wages ` 7,50,000; Selling and distribution overhead ` 5,25,000; Administrative overhead
` 4,20,000, Factory overhead ` 4,50,000 and Profit ` 6,09,000.
(a) Prepare a cost sheet showing all the details.
(b) For 2017-18, the factory has received a work order. It is estimated that the direct materials would be
` 12,00,000 and direct labour cost ` 7,50,000. What would be the price of work order if the factory
intends to earn the same rate of profit on sales, assuming that the selling and distribution overhead
has gone up by 15%? The factory recovers factory overhead as a percentage of direct wages and
administrative and selling and distribution overheads as a percentage of works cost, based on the
cost rates prevalent in the previous year.
Solution:
(a) Statement of Cost

Direct Materials 9,00,000
Direct Wages 7,50,000
Factory Overheads (60% of wages) 4,50,000
Works Cost 21,00,000
Administration Overhead (20% of works cost) 4,20,000
Selling & Distribution Overheads (25% of Works Cost) 5,25,000
Profit (1/5 of Cost) 6,09,000
Sales 36,54,000

Cost Accounting
(b) Estimated price of work order

Direct Wages (or labour) 7,50,000
Factory Overheads (60% of wages) 4,50,000
Works Cost 24,00,000
Administration Overhead (20% of works cost) 4,80,000
Selling & Distribution Overheads (40% i.e., 25 % + 15% of Works Cost) 9,60,000
Profit (1/5 of Total Cost) 7,68,000
Estimated Sales price 46,08,000
Illustration 4:
A manufacturing company is divided into three production departments – A, B and C. All production is
to customers’ orders. All orders are dissimilar and they go through all the three departments.
Manufacturing Costs for a given period were as follows:
Particulars Dept A Dept B Dept C Total

Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`)
Direct material 1,80,000
Direct labour 40,000 20,000 30,000 90,000
Indirect manufacturing costs 20,000 40,000 30,000 90,000
The cost of producing a particular order was determined as follows:

Direct Labour: `
Department A 120
Department B 280
Department C 200 600
Indirect manufacturing Costs 600
2,200
The General Manager had a hazy idea that the jobs executed on orders of this nature are under-priced.
So, the services of a firm of cost accountants, of which you are a member, have been acquired for a
thorough investigation.
Can you detect, after a careful perusal of the limited available information, the fundamental fallacy
of the company’s method assuming that the direct labour cost is an acceptable basis for distributing
indirect manufacturing costs?
Prepare a revised cost for order distributing indirect manufacturing costs in a manner you consider more
correct than the company’s procedure.

Methods of Costing
Solution:
The predominant fault is the adoption of a blanket rate for the distribution of the indirect manufacturing
costs for all the three departments, i.e., 100% of total direct labour cost. This has been done despite of
the fact that there are glaring differences of the direct labour cost of three departments. For calculating
the revised cost of jobs, departmental rates based on indirect manufacturing cost percentage to direct
labour costs are calculated:
Particulars Departments
A B C
Indirect Mfg. Cost (`) (a) 20,000 40,000 30,000
Direct Labour (`) (b) 40,000 20,000 30,000
% of Mfg. Cost to Labour Cost [(a/b) x 100] 50% 200% 100%
On the assumption that direct labour cost method is considered to be a reasonable method of absorption
of overheads, it is quite possible that departmental application of overhead may be able to resolve
the difficulty faced by the manager regarding the costing of the job given. On this basis the amended
job cost sheet will be as under:
Revised Cost of Job

Direct Materials (Given) 1,000
Direct Labour:
Dept. A 120
Dept. B 280
Dept. C 200 600
1,600
Indirect Manufacturing Cost: (Revised)
Dept. A 50% of Direct Labour 60
Dept. B 200% of Direct Labour 560
Dept. C 100% of Direct Labour 200 820
Total Cost 2,420
Illustration 5:
A shop floor supervisor of a small factory presented the following cost for Job no.555 to determine selling
price.
Particulars Per unit (`)

Materials 70
Direct Wages 18 hours at 2.5 45
Dept. X-8 hours
Dept. Y-6 hours
Dept. Z-4 hours
Chargeable expenses (special stores items) 5
120
Plus 33% Overheads 40
160

Cost Accounting
Analysis of the Profit/Loss Account for 2016 shows the following
Particulars Amount (`) Amount (`) Particulars Amount (`) Amount (`)
Materials 1,50,000 Sales 2,50,000
Direct Wages:
Dept. X 10,000
Dept. Y 12,000
Dept. Z 8,000 30,000
Special stores items 4,000
Overheads:
Dept. X 5,000
Dept. Y 9,000
Dept. Z 2,000 16,000
2,00,000
Gross profit c/d 50,000
2,50,000 Gross profit b/d 2,50,000
Selling expenses 20,000 50,000
Net profit c/d 30,000
50,000 50,000
It is also noted that average hourly rates for the 3 departments, X, Y and Z are similar.
You are required:
(a) Draw up a job cost sheet;
(b) Calculate the entire revised cost using 2016 actual figures as basis;
(c) Add 20% to total cost to determine selling price.
Solution:
(a) Calculation of Departmental Overhead Rates
Amount (`)
Particulars Departments
X Y Z
(i) Direct Wages 10,000 12,000 8,000
(ii) Rate of wages per hour 2.5 2.5 2.5
(iii) Hours (i ÷ ii) 4000 4800 3200
(iv) Actual Overheads 5000 9000 2000
(v) Department Overhead Rates per hour (iv ÷ iii) 1.250 1.875 0.625

Methods of Costing
(b) Revised job cost sheet

Materials 70
Labour:
Dept. X 8 x 2.5 20
Dept. Y 6 x 2.5 15
Dept. Z 4 x 2.5 10 45
Direct Expenses 5
Prime Costs 120
Overheads:
Dept. X 8 x 1.250 10.00
Dept. Y 6 x 1.875 11.25
Dept. Z 4 x 0.625 2.50 23.75
Total Cost 143.75
(c)
Add: Profit 20% 28.75
Selling Price 172.50
Illustration 6 :
In a factory following the Job Costing Method, an abstract from the work in process as at 30th September,
was prepared as under. Amount (`)
Job No. Materials Direct Labour Factory Overheads Applied
115 1,325 400 hrs 800 640

118 810 250 hrs. 500 400
120 765 300 hrs 475 380
2,900 1,775 1,420
Materials used in October were as follows: Amount (`)
Material requisitions No. Job no. Cost

54 118 300
55 118 425
56 118 515
57 120 665
58 121 910
59 124 720
3,535

Cost Accounting
A summary of Labour Hours deployed during October is as under:
NUMBER OF HOURS
JOB NO.
SHOP A SHOP B
115 25 25
118 90 30
120 75 10
121 65 -
124 20 10
275 75
Indirect Labour:
Waiting for material 20 10
Machine breakdown 10 5
Idle time 5 6
Overtime premium 6 5
316 101
A shop credit slip was issued in October, that material issued under requisition No.54 was returned back
to stores as being not suitable. A material transfer note issued in October indicated that material issued
under requisition No.55 for Job 118 was directed to Job 124.
The hourly rate in shop A per labour hour is `3 while at shop B it is ` 2 per hour. The factory overhead is
applied at the same rate as in September; Jobs 115, 118 and 120 were completed in October.
You are asked to compute the factory cost of the completed jobs. It is practice of the management to
put a 10% on the factory cost to cover administration and selling overheads and invoice the job to the
customer on a total cost plus 20% basis what would be the invoice price of these three jobs?
Solution:
Calculation of selling price of the Job
Job No. 115 118 120

Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`)
Costs in September:
Material 1,325 810 765
Labour 800 500 475
Overheads 640 400 380
Total (A) 2,765 1,710 1,620
Costs in October:
Material - 515 665
Labour
(25 x 3)+(25 x 2) 125
(90 x 3)+(30 x 2) 330
(75 x 3)+(10 x 2) 245
Overheads (80% of Labour) 100 264 196
Total (B) 225 1,109 1,106
Total Factory Cost (A+B) 2,990 2,819 2,726
Add: Admn. Overheads’ 10% 299.0 281.9 272.6
3,289.0 3,100.9 2,998.6
Profit 20% 651.80 620.18 599.72
Selling Price 3,946.80 3,721.08 3,598.32

Methods of Costing
5.2 BATCH COSTING
Meaning
Batch Costing is that form of specific order costing under which each batch is treated as a cost unit and
costs are accumulated and ascertained separately for each batch. Each batch consists of a number
of like units.
Basic Features
(a) Each batch is treated as a cost unit.
(b) All costs are accumulated and ascertained for each batch.
(c) A separate Batch Cost Sheet is used for each batch and is assigned a certain number by which
the batch is identified.
(d) The cost per unit is ascertained by dividing the total cost of a batch by the number of items produced
in that batch.
Applications
Batch Costing is applied in those industries where the similar articles are produced in definite batches
for internal consumption in the production of finished products or for sale to customers generally. It is
generally applied in –
(a) Read made Garments Manufacturing Industries
(b) Pharmaceutical/ Drug Industries
(c) Spare parts and Components Manufacturing Industries
(d) Toys Manufacturing Industries
(e) Tyre and Tubes Manufacturing Industries.
Economic Batch Quantity (EBQ)

Meaning
Economic Batch Quantity refers to the optimum quantity batch which should be produced at a point
of time so that the Set up & Processing Costs and Carrying Costs are together optimized.
Setting up & Processing Costs
The setting up and processing costs refer to the costs incurred for setting up and processing operations
before the start of production of a batch. There is an inverse relationship between batch size and set
up & processing costs.
Large the Batch size : Lower the set up costs because of few batches
Smaller the Batch Size : Higher the set up costs because of more batches
Carrying Costs
The carrying costs refer to the costs incurred in maintaining a given level of inventory. There is positive
relationship between batch size and carrying costs.
Large the Batch size : Higher the carrying costs because of high average inventory
Smaller the Batch Size : Lower the carrying costs because of low average inventory

Cost Accounting
Trade off
The optimum quantity of batch which should be produced at a point of time determined after achieving
a trade off between set up costs and carrying costs. Such batch size is known as EBQ because annual
total cost of set up and carrying is minimum at this batch size.
FORMULA
2AS
E.B.Q =
C
Where, E.B.Q = Economic Batch Quantity

A = Annual Demand
S = Set up Cost per batch
C = Carrying Costs per unit per year
Illustration 7:
From the following information, calculate Economic Batch Quantity for a company using batch costing:
Annual Demand for the components 2400 units
Setting up cost per batch ` 100
Manufacturing cost per unit ` 200
Carrying cost per unit 6% p.a.
Solution :
2AS 2 × 2,400 × 100

EBQ = = = 200 Units
C 6% of 200
Illustration 8:
A customer has been ordering 90,000 special design metal columns at the columns at the rate of 18,000
per order during the past years. The production cost comprises `120 for material, ` 60 for labour and ` 20
for fixed overheads. It costs ` 1,500 to set up for one run of 18,000 column and inventory carrying cost
is 15% since this customer may buy at least 5000 columns this year, the company would like to avoid
making five different production runs. Find the most economic production run.
Solution :
Economic Production Run
2 × Annual Output × Setup Cost Per Pr oduction Run

=
Inventory Carrying Cost per unit p.a.
2 × 90,000 × 1,500
= = 3,000 units
15% of 200 (120 + 60 + 20)

Methods of Costing
Illustration 9:
AB Ltd.is committed to supply 24,000 bearings per annum to CD Ltd. On a steady basis. It is estimated
that it costs 10 paise as inventory holding cost per bearing per month and that the set-up cost per run
of bearing manufacture is ` 324.
(a) What would be the optimum run size for bearing manufacture?
(b) What is the minimum inventory holding cost at optimum run size?
(c) Assuming that the company has a police of manufacturing 6000 bearing per run, how much extra
costs would the company be incurring as compared to the optimum run suggested in (a)?
Solution :
2AS
(a) Optimum production Run Size (Q) =
C
Where, A = No. of units to be produced within one year = 24,000 (units) bearing
O = Set-up cost per production run = ` 324
C = Carrying cost per unit per annum = 0.10 × 12 = ` 1.2
2 × 24,000 × 324
= = 3,600 units (bearing)
1.2
(b) Minimum inventory Holding Cost, if run size is 3600 bearings

= Average inventory x carrying cost per unit
= ( 3600/2) x (.10 x 12) = ` 2160
(c) Statement showing Total Cost at Production Run sizes of 3600 and 6000 bearings
A. Annual requirements 24000 24000

B. Run size 3600 6000
C. No. of runs (A/B) 6.667 4
D. Set up cost per run ` 324 ` 324
E. Total set up cost (C X D) ` 2160 ` 1296
F. Average inventory( B/2) 1800 3000
G. Carrying cost per unit p.a. 1.20 1.20
H. Total carrying cost ( F x G) 2160 3600
I. Total cost (E + H) 4320 4896
Extra cost incurred , if run size is of 6000 = ` 4896 – ` 4320 = ` 576
Illustration 10:
Component ‘Gold’ is made entirely in cost centre 100. Material cost is 6 paise per component and
each component takes 10 minutes to produce. The machine operator is paid 72 paise per hour, and
machine hour rate is ` 1.50. The setting up of the machine to produce the component ‘Gold’ takes 2
hours 20 minutes.
On the basis of this information, prepare a cost sheet showing the production and setting up cost, both
in total and per component, assuming that a batch of :
(a) 10 components,
(b) 100 components, and
(c) 1000 components is produced.

Cost Accounting
Solution :
Cost Sheet Component ‘Gold’ Amount (`)
Particulars Batch Size

10 components 100 components 1000 components
Total Per Total Per Total Per
component component component
A. Setting up Cost:
Machine Operators wages
(2 hours 20minutes @ `72 p.h) 1.68 0.168 1.68 0.0168 1.68 0.00168
Overheads 3.50 0.350 3.50 0.0350 3.50 0.00350
2 hours 20minutes @ `1.50 p.h)
B. Production Cost:
Material Cost @ `0.06 per
component
0.60 0 .060 6.00 0.0600 60.00 0.06000
Machine Operators Wages 1.20 0.120 12.00 0.1200 120.00 0.12000
[(Refer to Working Note (i)]
Overheads
[(Refer to Working Note (ii)] 2.50 0.250 25.00 0.2500 250.00 0.25000
C. Total Cost : (A + B) 9.48 0.948 48.18 0.4818 43518 0.43518
Working Notes:
10 100 1000 Components

Components Components
(i) Operators Wages
Time taken in minutes by
machine operators and machine
100 1000 10000
@10minutes per component
Operators Wages @ ` 0.72 per
hour (`) [100/60 x 0.72]=1.2 [1000/60 x 0.72]=12 [10000/60 x 0.72]=120
(ii) Overhead expenses 2.50 25.00 250.00
Total overhead expenses
@ ` 1.50 per Machine hour [100/60 x ` 1.50] [1000/60 x `1.50] [10000/60 x `1.50]

Methods of Costing
5.3 CONTRACT COSTING
Contract Costing or Terminal Costing as it is often termed, is a variant of the job costing system, which is
applied in businesses engaged in building or other construction work. The jobs are usually the contracts
entered into with the customers. As the number of such contracts handled at a time by a business may
not be usually large, Contract Costing is comparatively simpler in operation than job costing system.
The basic principles applied in Contract Costing are the same as those used in job costing except that
these are modified to suit the particular requirements of the contracts.
Differences between Job costing and Contract costing:
(a) While the number of jobs in hand at any time in a concern may be large, only a few contracts may
be undertaken at a time.
(b) The accumulation, analysis, apportionment, allocation and control of costs is simplified in Contract
Costing.
(c) Most of the expenses are chargeable direct to the Contract Account. Direct allocation to such an
extent is not possible in job costing.
(d) As contracts may run for long periods, there arises the problem of assessment and crediting of
profits on incomplete contracts at the end of the accounting period.
Contract Costing is a type of costing used in constructional activities such as construction of buildings,
roads, bridges etc. The person who takes contract for a price is called the Contractor and the person from
whom it is taken is called the Contractee. We are mainly concerned with the books of the contractor.
To find out profit earned or loss incurred on the contract, the contractor prepares a nominal account
in his books called ‘Contract Account’. In this account, all the expenses incurred by the contractor are
debited and the income i.e mainly work certified is credited; the difference represents profit or loss.
The items generally debited are materials, wages, establishment expenses & other expenses. Depreciation
of assets used in the contract will also be debited, but unlike in other types of accounts it is customary
in Contract Accounts to debit the opening balance of the assets and credit the closing balance of
the same instead of depreciation, wherever it is convenient to do so. Amounts credited are work-in-
progress, which consists of work certified and cost of work uncertified and any scrap of materials etc.
Further some special items which are discussed here under will also be taken care of.
The contracts run for or number of years; however it is necessary to find out the profit or loss at the end
of every year. The profit earned on a Contract Account is primarily called Notional Profit and a portion
of which would be kept on reserve against contingencies. The profit to be transferred to Profit & Loss
Account out of notional profit is ascertained by taking into consideration the degree of completion of
the work, cash received etc.
Some special items under contract accounting are explained below:
(i) Sub-Contract:
Sub-contracting, usually of a part of the work, is another essential feature which we frequently come
across in contract work. Sub-contracting may be necessary under the following circumstances:
(a) Work of a specialized nature for which facilities are not internally available within the concern
is offered to a sub-contractor.
(b) It may be advantageous to get a part or component from outside, if it is costlier to manufacture
it.
(c) Consideration of opportunity cost; the management may not like to invest capital which may
be utilized for other more profitable lines.
(d) The capacity of the firm may be limited and in order to keep time schedule, work may be
speeded by offering it to sub-contractors.

Cost Accounting
The payments made to sub-contractors are charged in totals to the concerned Contract Account
as direct expense and no detailed records or break-up of the sub-contract amount is necessary
for cost purposes.
(ii) Surveyor’s Certificate and Retention Money:
In the case of contracts running for long periods of time, it is customary for the contractor’s firm to get
‘on account’ payments against the portion of contract completed. The amount received depends
upon the extent of work certified by the technical assessor i.e. on the surveyor’s certificates, as these
are called. Normally such payments are not received to the full extent of the work completed but
a small percentage is held back as retention money, payable on completion of the contract. The
retention money is a sort of safeguard available to the contractee in case the contractor is not
able to fulfill one or more of the conditions laid down in the contract.
(iii) Defective Work:
Defective work will not evidently be paid for by the contractee but the cost of such defective
work should be charged to the Contract Account. Sometimes, rectification of the defective work is
required to be made at the contractor’s cost; the cost of such rectification should also be charged
to the Contract Account but shown separately.
(iv) Escalation Clause:
Escalation clauses are often provided in contracts as safeguards against any likely changes in price
or utilisation of material and labour. Such a clause in a contract would provide that in the event of
a specified contingency happening, the contract price would be suitably enhanced. This clause is
particularly necessary where the price of certain raw materials are likely to rise, where labour rates
are anticipated to increase, or where the quantity of material or labour time cannot be properly
assessed or estimated unless the work has sufficiently advanced. There may also be ‘De-escalation
or Reserve Clause’ to provide for any future decrease in price etc. so that the benefit may be
passed on to the contractee.
(v) Work-in-progress:
In Contract Accounts, the value of the work-in-progress consists of:-
(a) the cost of work completed, both certified and uncertified,
(b) the cost of work not yet complete, and
(c) the amount of profit taken as credit.
In the Balance Sheet, the work-in-progress is usually shown under two heads, viz. certified and
uncertified. The cost of work completed and certified and the profit credited will appear under
the head ‘certified’ work-in-progress, while the completed work not yet certified and the cost of
labour, material and expenses of work which has not reached the stage of completion are shown
under the head ‘uncertified’ work-in-progress.
(vi) Profit on incomplete contracts:
For the purpose of finding out the portion of the profit out of notional profit to be transferred to Profit
and Loss Account, the contracts are divided in the following manner:-
(A) Contracts which have just commenced:
In this case no portion of the notional profit shall be transferred to Profit and Loss Account and the
entire amount is kept as reserve. There are no hard and fast rules to determine that a particular
contract is just commenced or reasonably advanced or almost complete. However, as per general
norms, the contracts in which less than 1/4th work is done are regarded as the contracts which have
just commenced.

Methods of Costing
(B) Contracts which have reasonably advanced:

In this case the profit to be transferred to Profit and Loss Account out of notional profit is based on
the degree of completion of the contract. The degree of completion of the contract can be found
out by comparing work certified and the contract price.
(a) If the degree of the completion of the contract is less than or equal to 1/4th no portion of the
notional profit shall be transferred to Profit and Loss Account and the entire amount would be
kept as reserve.
(b) If the degree of completion of work is (> 1/4 and < 1/2), 1/3 of the notional profit shall be
transferred to Profit and Loss Account and the remaining amount would be kept as reserve.
(c) If the degree of completion of work is more than or equal to 1/2, 2/3rd of the notional profit
shall be transferred to Profit and Loss Account and the remaining amount would be kept as
reserve.
The profit so arrived in the above manner shall further be reduced in the ratio of cash received to
work certified. Thus, the formula is as follows:
2 1 (Cash received)
(Notional Profit x or (as the case may be) x
3 3 (Work certified)

(C) Contracts which are almost complete:
In this case the portion of the profit to be transferred to Profit and Loss Account is calculated by
using the estimated total profit which is ascertained by subtracting the total cost to date and the
additional cost to complete the contract from the contract price. The different formulas for such
computations of profit are as follows:-
(Work certified)
(i) Estimated Profit x
(Contract price)
(Work certified) (Cash received)

(ii) Estimated Profit x x
(Contract price) (Work certified)
(Total cost to date)

(iii) Estimated Profit x
(Total cost)
(Total cost to date) (Cash received)

(iv) Estimated Profit x x
(Total cost) (Work certified)
Illustration 11:
A firm of Builders, carrying out large contracts kept in contract ledger, separate accounts for each
contract on 30th June, 2017, the following were shown as being the expenditure in connection with
Contract No. 555.
Amount (`)
Materials purchased 1,16,126
Materials issued from stores 19,570
Plant, which has been used on other contracts 25,046
Additional plant 7,220
Wages 1,47,268
Direct expenses 4,052
Proportionate establishment expenses 17,440

Cost Accounting
The contract which had commenced on 1st February, 2017 was for ` 6,00,000 and the amount certified
by the Architect, after deduction of 20% retention money, was ` 2,41,600 the work being certified on
30th June, 2017. The materials on site were ` 19,716. A contract plant ledger was also kept in which
depreciation was dealt with monthly the amount debited in respect of that account is ` 2260. Prepare
Contract Account showing profit on the contract.
Solution:
Dr. Contract Account Cr.
To, Materials purchased A/c 1,16,126 By, Work in progress A/c
To, Material issued A/c 19,570 - Work certified 3,02,000
To, Depreciation A/c 2,260
To, Wages A/c 1,47,268 By, Material stock A/c 19,716
To, Direct expenses A/c 4,052
To, Proportionate estab. expenses A/c 17,440
To, P & L A/c [15,000 x 2/3 x 4/5] 8,000
To, Reserve c/d 15,000
3,21,716 3,21,716
Illustration 12:
A contractor has undertaken a construction work at a price of ` 5,00,000 and begun the execution of
work on 1st January, 2016. The following are the particulars of the contract up to 31st December, 2016.

Machinery 30,000 Overheads 8,252
Materials 1,70,698 Materials returned 1,098
Wages 1,48,750 Work certified 3,90,000
Direct expenses 6,334 Cash received 3,60,000
Uncertified work 9,000 Materials on 31.12.2016 3,766
Wages outstanding 5,380
Value of plant on 31.12. 2016 22,000
It was decided that the profit made on the contract in the year should be arrived at by deducting the
cost of work certified from the total value of the architects certificate, that 1/3 of the profit so arrived at
should be regarded as a provision against contingencies and that such provision should be increased
by taking to the credit of Profit and Loss Account only such portion of the 2/3rd profit, as the cash
received to the work certified.

Methods of Costing
Solution:

To, Machinery A/c 30,000 By, Plant & Machinery A/c 22,000
To, Materials A/c 1,70,698 By, Materials returned A/c 1,098
To, Wages incl. outstanding A/c 1,54,130 By, Materials on hand A/c 3,766
To, Direct Expenses A/c 6,334 By, W.I.P A/c
To, Overheads A/c 8,252 Work certified 3,90,000
To, P & L A/c 34,738 Work uncertified 9,000 3,99,000
4,25,864 4,25,864
Illustration 13:
A contractor commenced the work on a particular contract on 1st April, 2016 he usually closes his books
of accounts for the year on 31st December of each year. The following information is revealed from his
costing records on 31st December, 2016.
Amount (`)
Materials sent to site 43,000
Jr. Engineer 12,620
Labour 1,00,220
A machine costing ` 30,000 remained in use on site for 1/5th of year. Its working life was estimated at 5
years and scrap value at ` 2,000
A supervisor is paid ` 2,000 per month and had devoted one half of his time on the contract.
All other expenses were `14,000 the materials on site were ` 2,500.
The contract price was ` 4,00,000. On 31st December, 2016 2/3rd of the contract was completed
however, the architect gave certificate only for ` 2,00,000. On which 80% was paid. Prepare Contract
Account.
Solution:
Contract Account
Dr. Cr.

To, Material A/c 43,000 By, W.I.P A/c
To, Jr. Engineer A/c 12,620 Work certified 2,00,000 2,44,365
To, Labour A/c 1,00,220 Work uncertified *44,365
To, Dep. On plant A/c 1,120 By, Material at site 2,500
[(30,000-2,000)/5] x 1/5
To, Supervisor (2,000 x 9 x 1/2) 9,000
To, Other expenses A/c 14,000
To, P & L A/c 35,683
2,46,865 2,46,865

Cost Accounting
Working notes:
Work uncertified:
For 2/3rd - `1,77,460
For 1/6 th
- ? (2/3 – 1/2 = 1/6)
* [(1,77,460 ÷ 2/3) x 1/6] = `44,365
Illustration 14:
The following figures are supplied to you by contractor for the year ending 31st December, 2016.

Work-in-Progress on 31-12-2015 ` 85,000
Less: Cash received from contractee ` 55,000 30,000
During the year:
Wages 8,500
Materials bought 6,000
Working expenses 1,500
Materials issued from stores 10,500
Administrative expenses (`250 are chargeable to Profit and Loss Account) 1,250
Plant 2,500
Material returned to supplier 450
Material returned to stores 550
Work certified 15,000
Contracts finished 22,500
Profits taken upon contracts 11,500
Advances from contractee 40,000
Prepare Contract Ledger Accounts, and the total contractee’s and show the work-in-progress as it
would appear in the Balance sheet.
Solution:
To, Work-in-Progress A/c 85,000 By, W.I.P A/c
To, Wages A/c 8,500 Work certified 15,000
To, Materials A/c 6,000 Work uncertified 88,000 1,03,000
To, Materials A/c 10,500 By, Material returned (supplier) 450
To, Working Expenses A/c 1,500 By, Material returned (stores) 550
To, Administration Expenses A/c 1,000 By, Contractee A/c 22,500
To, Plant 2,500
To, P & L A/c 11,500
1,26,500 1,26,500

Methods of Costing
Dr. Contractee Account Cr.

To, Contract A/c 22,500 By, Balance b/d 55,000
To, Balance c/d 72,500 By, Cash A/c 40,000
95,000 95,000
Balance Sheet as on …….
Liabilities Amount (`) Assets Amount (`)

W.I.P 1,03,000
(-) Cash received 72,500 30,500
Illustration 15:
The information given under has been extracted from the books of a contractor relating to contract
for `3,75,000.
I YEAR II YEAR III YEAR

Materials 45,000 55,000 31,500
Direct Expenses 1,750 6,250 2,250
Indirect expenses 750 1,000 ---
Wages 42,500 57,500 42,500
Total work certified 87,500 2,82,500 3,75,000
Uncertified work --- 5,000 ---
Plant 5,000 --- ---
The value of plant at the end of I year was `4,000 at the end of II year `2,500 and at the end of III year
it was `1,000. It is customary to pay 90% in cash of the amount of work certified. Prepare the contract
Account and show how the figures would appear in the balance sheet.
Solution:

Ist Year
To, Materials A/c 45,000 By, W.I.P A/c
To, Direct Expenses A/c 1,750 Work certified 87,500
To, Indirect Expenses A/c 750 Work uncertified Nil 87,500
To, Wages A/c 42,500 By, Plant A/c 4,000
To, Plant A/c 5,000 By, P & L A/c 3,500
95,000 95,000

Cost Accounting

IInd Year
To, Work in progress A/c 87,500 By, W.I.P A/c
To, Materials A/c 55,000 Work certified 2,82,500
To, Direct Expenses A/c 6,250 Work uncertified 5,000 2,87,500
To, Plant A/c 4,000 By, Plant A/c 2,500
To, Indirect Expenses A/c 1,000
To, P & L A/c 47,250
2,90,000 2,90,000
IIIrd Year
To, Work in progress A/c 2,87,500 By, Reserve b/d 31,500
To, Plant A/c 2,500 By, Contractee A/c 3,75,000
To, Materials A/c 31,500 By, Plant A/c 1,000
To, Direct expenses A/c 2,250
To, P & L A/c 41,250
4,07,500 4,07,500
Balance Sheet as on …….
Ist Year Work in progress 87,500
---- (-) Cash received (90%) 78,750 8,750
Plant 4,000
IInd Year Work in progress 2,87,500
---- (-) cash received (90%) 2,54,250
33,250
(-) Reserve 31,500 1,750
IIIrd Year ---- Plant 2,500
Illustration 16:
A firm of engineers undertook three contracts beginning on 1st Jan, 1st May and 1st August 2015. Their
accounts on 30th November, 2015 showed the following position:
Particulars Contract I Contract II Contract III
Contract price 80,000 54,000 60,000
Materials 14,400 11,600 4,000
Wages 22,000 22,500 2,800
General expenses 800 550 200
Cash received for
work certified 30,000 24,000 5,400
Work certified 40,000 32,000 7,200
Work uncertified 1,200 1,600 400
Wages outstanding 700 750 350
General expenses
outstanding 150 100 50
Plant installed 4,000 3,200 2,400
Materials on hand 800 800 400

Methods of Costing
On the respective †dates of the contracts, the plant was installed depreciation thereon being taken
at 15% p.a. You are required to prepare:
(a) Accounts in the Contract Ledger;
Solution:
Amount (`)
I II III I II III
To, Materials A/c 14,400 11,600 4,000 By, W.I.P A/c
To, Wages (incl. o/s) A/c 22,700 23,250 3,150 Work certified 40,000 32,000 7,200
To, Gen Expenses A/c 950 650 250 Work uncertified 1,200 1,600 400
To, Dep. On plant A/c 550 280 120 By, Material on hand A/c 800 800 400
(4,000 x 15% x 11/12) By, P & L A/c -- 1,380 --
(3,200 x 15% x 7/12)
(2,400 x 15% x 4/12)
To, Notional profit 3,400 -- 480
42,000 35,780 8,000 42,000 35,780 8,000
To, P & L A/c By, Notional profit 3,400 -- 480
(3,400 x 2/3 x 3/4) 1,700 -- --
To, Reserve c/d 1,700 -- 480
3,400 -- 480 3,400 -- 480
Illustration 17:
The following is the Trial Balance of Premier Construction Company, engaged on the execution of
contract No.747, for the year ended 31st December, 2015.
Contractee’s Account Amount (`) Amount (`)

Amount received 3,00,000
Buildings 1,60,000
Creditors 72,000
Bank Balance 35,000
Capital Account 5,00,000
Materials 2,00,000
Wages 1,80,000
Expenses 47,000
Plant 2,50,000
8,72,000 8,72,000
The work on Contract No.747 was commenced on 1st January, 2015 materials costing ` 1,70,000 were
sent to the site of the contract but those of ` 6,000 were destroyed in an accident. Wages of `1,80,000
were paid during the year. Plant with a cost of ` 2 lakhs was used from 1st January to 30th September
and was then returned to the stores. Materials of the cost of ` 4,000 were at site on 31st December, 2012.
The contract was for ` 6,00,000 and the contractee pays 75% of the work certified. Work certified was
80% of the total contract work at the end of 2012. Uncertified work was estimated at ` 15,000 on 31st
December, 2015.
Expenses are charged to the contract at 25% of wages. Plant is to be depreciated at 10% for the entire
year.

Cost Accounting
Solution:

To, Materials A/c 1,70,000 By, Costing P & L A/c 6,000
To, Wages A/c 1,80,000 By, Materials returned 4,000
By, W.I.P A/c 4,95,000
To, Dep. on plant A/c 20,000
Work certified 4,80,000
[2,50,000 x 9/12 x 10/100]
Work uncertified 15,000
[50,000 x 3/12 x 10/100]
To, Expenses (25%) 45,000
To, P & L A/c 45,000
5,05,000 5,05,000
Dr. Profit & Loss Account Cr.

To, Contract A/c 6,000 By, Profit from Contract A/c 45,000
To, Dep. on Plant 5,000
[2,00,000 x 10% x 3/12]
To, Expenses (47,000 – 45,000) A/c 2,000
To, Net Profit 32,000
45,000 45,000
Balance Sheet as on …………

To, Capital A/c 5,00,000 By, W.I.P A/c 4,95,000
To, P & L A/c 32,000 (-) Cash received 3,00,000
To, Creditors A/c 72,000 1,95,000
(-) Reserve 45,000 1,50,000
By, Buildings A/c 1,60,000
By, Bank A/c 35,000
By, Material stock A/c 34,000
By, Plant A/c 2,25,000
6,04,000 6,04,000
Illustration 18:
A company of builders took to a multi-storied structure for ` 40,00,000 estimating the cost to be ` 36,80,000.
At the end of the year, the company had received ` 14,40,000 being 90% of the work certified; work
done but not certified was `40,000. Following expenditure were incurred.
`
Materials 4,00,000
Labour 10,00,000
Plant 80,000
Materials costing ` 20,000 were damaged. Plant is considered as having depreciated at 25%.
Prepare Contract Account and show all the possible figures that can reasonably be credited to Profit
and Loss Account.

Methods of Costing
Solution:
To, Material 4,00,000 By, Costing P & L A/c 20,000
To, Labour 10,00,000 By, W.I.P A/c
To, Depreciation 20,000 Work certified 16,00,000
To, Notional Profit 2,40,000 Work uncertified 40,000 16,40,000
16,60,000 16,60,000
(i) 3,20,000 x (1,420/3,680) = 1,23,478
(ii) 3,20,000 x (1,420/3,680) x 90/100 = 1,11,130
(iii) 3,20,000 x 16/40 = 1,28,000
(iv) 3,20,000 x (16/40) x (90/100) = 1,15,200
Illustration 19:
The following Trial Balance was extracted on 31st December, 2015 from the books of Swastik Co. Ltd
contractors: Amount (`)
Dr. Cr.
Share Capital:
Shares of `10 each 3,51,800
P&L A/c on 1.1. 2015 25,000
Provision for Dep. on Machinery 63,000
Cash received on account Contract - 7 12,80,000
Creditors 81,200
Land and Buildings (Cost) 74,000
Machinery (Cost) 52,000
Bank 45,000
Contract 7:
Materials 6,00,000
Expenses 40,000
Machinery on site (Cost) 1,60,000
18,01,000 18,01,000
Contract 7 was begun on 1st Jan 2015. The contract price is ` 24,00,000 and the customer has so far
paid ` 12,80,000 being 80% of the work certified.
The cost of the work done since certification is estimated at ` 16,000. On 31st December, 2015, after the
above Trial Balance was extracted machinery costing ` 32,000 was returned to stores, and materials
then on site were value at `27,000.
Provision is to be made for direct labour due `6,000 and for depreciation of all machinery at 12 1/2 %
on cost.
You are required to prepare:
(a) The Contract Account;
(b) A Statement of Profit, if any, to be properly credited to profit and loss account for 2015 and
(c) The Balance Sheet of Swastik Co. Ltd as on 31st December.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
To, Material A/c 6,00,000 By, W.I.P A/c
To, Direct labour A/c 8,36,000 Work certified 16,00,000 16,16,000
To, Expenses A/c 40,000 Work uncertified 16,000
To, Dep. on machinery A/c 20,000 By, Material at site A/c 27,000
To, P & L A/c 78,400
16,43,000 16,43,000
Dr. Profit and Loss Account Cr.

To, Dep. on plant A/c 6,500 By, Balance b/d 25,000
To, Net profit 96,900 By, Profit from contract A/c 78,400
1,03,400 1,03,400
Balance Sheet as on …………
Share Capital 3,51,800 Machinery 2,12,000
P & L A/c 96,900 (-) Provision 63,000
Creditors 81,200 C.Year Depreciation 26,500 1,22,500
O/s Labour 6,000
W.I.P 16,16,000
(-) Cash received 12,80,000
3,36,000
(-) Reserve 68,600 2,67,400
Land & Buildings 74,000
Bank 45,000
Stock of materials 27,000
5,35,900 5,35,900
Illustration 20:
Kapur Engineering Company undertakes long term contract which involves the fabrication of pre stressed
concrete block and the reaction of the same on consumer’s life.
The following information is supplied regarding the contract which is incomplete on 31st March, 2017
Cost Incurred: Amount (`)
Fabrication cost to date:
Direct materials 2,80,000
Direct Labour 90,000
Overheads 75,000
4,45,000
Erection cost to date 15,000
Total 4,60,000
Contract price 8,19,000
Cash received on account 6,00,000

Methods of Costing
Technical estimate of work completed to date:

Fabrication: Direct materials 80%
Direct labour and overheads 75%
Erection 25%
You are required to prepare a statement for submission to the management indicating
(a) The estimated profit on the completion of the contract;
(b) The estimated profit to date on the contract.
Solution:
Statement showing computation of profit on completion of contract and profit to date: Amount (`)
Particulars Incurred to To be Total
date incurred
Material 2,80,000 70,000 3,50,000
Labour 90,000 30,000 1,20,000
Overheads 75,000 25,000 1,00,000
Erection 15,000 45,000 60,000
4,60,000 1,70,000 6,30,000
Profit * * 1,89,000
Contract Price 8,19,000
Profit to date = 1,89,000 x (6,00,000 / 8,19,000) = 1,38,461 (or)
= 1,89,000 x (4,60,000 / 6,30,000) = 1,38,000
Illustration 21:
The following particulars are obtained from the books of Vinay Construction Ltd. as on March, 2017.
`
Plant and equipment at cost 4,90,000
Vehicles at cost 2,00,000
Details of contract with remain uncompleted as on 31-3-2017.
Contract nos.
Particulars V.29 V.24 V.25
(`lacs) (`lacs) (`lacs)
Estimated final sales value 8.00 5.60 16.00
Estimated cost 6.40 7.00 12.00
Wages 2.40 2.00 1.20
Materials 1.00 1.10 0.44
Overheads (excluding dep.) 1.44 1.46 0.58
4.84 4.56 2.22
Value certified by architects 7.20 4.20 2.40
Progress payments received 5.00 3.20 2.00
Depreciation of plant and Equipment and Vehicle should be charged at 20% to the three contracts in
proportion to work certified. You are required to prepare statements showing contract-wise and total.
(a) Profit/loss to be taken to the P & L A/c for the year ended 31st March, 2017.
(b) Work-in-progress as would appear in the Balance Sheet as at 31-03-2017.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
(` in Lacs)
Particulars V.29 V.24 V.25 Particulars V.29 V.24 V.25

To, Expenses other than By, W.I.P A/c
depreciation 4.84 4.56 2.22 Work certified 7.20 4.20 2.40
To, Depreciation * 0.72 0.42 0.24 By, P & L A/c -- 0.78 0.06
To, Notional profit 1.64 -- --
7.20 4.98 2.46 7.20 4.98 2.46
To, P & L A/c *1.00 -- -- By Notional profit 1.64 -- --
To, Reserve A/c 0.64 -- --
1.64 -- -- 1.64 -- --
* V.29 ⇒ [6,90,000 x 20% x 7.2/13.8] = 0.72 and similarly for V.24 & V.25 also.
Profit to be transfer to Profit and Loss A/c = EP x CR/CP = 1.60 x 5.00/8 = 1*
Illustration 22:
A company is manufacturing building bricks and fire bricks. Both the products require two processes.
Brick forming and Heat treatment. The requirements for the two bricks are:
BUILDING BRICKS FIRE BRICKS
Forming per 100 bricks 3 hrs. 2 hrs.
Heat treatment per 100 bricks 2hrs. 5 hrs.
Total costs of the two departments in one month were:
Forming ` 21,200
Heat Treatment `48,800
Production during the month was:
Building Bricks 1,30,000 Nos.
Fire Bricks 70,000 Nos.
Prepare statement of manufacturing costs for the two varieties of bricks.
Solution:
Statement Showing Number of Hours
Particulars Buil. Bricks Fire Bricks Total

Forming
(1,30,000/100) x 3 3,900 1,400 5,300
(70,000/100) x 2
Heat treatment 2,600 3,500 6,100
(1,30,000/100) x 2
(70,000/100) x 5
Total 6,500 4,900 11,400
Cost of forming per hour = 21,200 / 5,300 = 4
Cost of Heat treatment per hour = 48,800 / 6,100 = 8

Methods of Costing
Statement showing computation of manufacturing cost per two varieties of bricks: Amount (`)
Particulars Buil. Bricks Fire Bricks Total

Forming
(3,900 x 4), (1,400 x 4) 15,600 5,600 21,200
Heat treatment 20,800 28,000 48,800
(2,600 x 8), (3,500 x 8)
Total 36,400 33,600 70,000
Illustration 23:
Deluxe limited undertook a contract for `5,00,000 on 1st July, 2016. On 30th June 2017 when the accounts
were closed, the following details about the contract were gathered:

Wages paid 45,000
General expenses 10,000
Plant Purchased 50,000
Materials on hand 30-6-2017 25,000
Wages accrued 30-6-2017 5,000
Cash received 1,50,000
Depreciation of Plant 5,000
Work uncertified 15,000
The above contract contained an escalator clause which read as follows:

“In the event of prices of materials and rates of wages increase by more than 5% the contract price
would be increased accordingly by 25% of the rise in the cost of materials and wages beyond 5% in
each case”.
It was found that since the date of signing the agreement the prices of materials and wage rates
increased by 25% the value of the work certify does not take into account the effect of the above clause.
Prepare the contract account. Working should form part of the answer.
Solution:
Cost of material & wages incurred = ` (1,00,000 + 45,000 + 5,000 – 25,000 )
= `1,25,000
Cost of material & wages before increase in prices = ` (1,25,000 x 100/125 )
= `1,00,000
Increase in contract price = `25/100 [1,25,000 – ` (1,00,000 x 105/100)]
= `5,000 *

Cost Accounting

To, Material purchased A/c 1,00,000 By, Material on hand 25,000
To, Wages A/c 50,000 Work certified 2,05,000 2,20,000
To, General Expenses A/c 10,000 Work uncertified 15,000
To, Depreciation on plant 5,000
To, P & L A/c 19,512
2,45,000 2,45,000
5.4 PROCESS COSTING AND JOINT & BY PRODUCTS
Process Costing
Process costing is that aspect of operation costing which is used to ascertain the cost of the product at
each process or stage of manufacture. This method of accounting used in industries where the process
of manufacture is divided into two or more processes. The objective is to find out the total cost of the
process and the unit cost of the process for each and every process. Usually the industries where process
costing used are textile, oil industries, cement, pharmaceutical etc.
Features of Process Costing:
(a) Production is done having a continuous flow of products having a continuous flow of identical
products except where plant and machinery is shut down for repairs etc.
(b) Clearly defined process cost centres and the accumulation of all costs by the cost centres.
(c) The maintenance of accurate records of units and part units produced and cost incurred by each
process.
(d) The finished product of one process becomes the raw material of the next process or operation
and so on until the final product is obtained.
(e) Avoidable and unavoidable losses usually arise at different stages of manufacture for various
reasons.
(f) In order to obtain accurate average costs, it is necessary to measure the production at various
stages of manufacture as all the input units may not be converted into finished goods.
(g) Different products with or without by-products are simultaneously produced at one or more stages
or processes of manufacture. The valuation of by-products and apportionment of joint cost before
joint of separation is an important aspect of this method of costing.
(h) Output is uniform and all units are exactly identical during one or more processes. So the cost
per unit of production can be ascertained only by averaging the expenditure incurred during a
particular period.
Applications of Process Costing:
The industries in which process costs may be used are many. In fact a process costing system can
usually be devised in all industries except where job, batch or unit or operation costing is necessary. In
particular, the following are examples of industries where process costing is applied:
Chemical works Textile, weaving, spinning etc.
Soap making Food products
Box making Canning factory
Distillation process Coke works
Paper mills Paint, ink and varnishing etc.
Biscuit works Meat products factory
Oil refining Milk dairy

Methods of Costing
Difference between Job Costing and Process Costing:
Job Costing Process Costing

(i) The form of specific order costing which applies That form of costing which applies where
where the work is undertaken to customer’s standardised goods are produced and
special requirements. production is in continuous flow, the products
being homogeneous.
(ii) The job is the cost unit and costs are collected Costs are collected by process or department
for each job. on time basis and divided by output for a period
to get an average cost per unit.
(iii) Losses are generally not segregated. Normal losses are carefully predetermined and
abnormal losses are segregated.
(iv) Overheads are allocated and apportioned to Units pass through the same processes.
cost centres then absorbed by jobs, in proportion Overheades are apportioned to processes on
to the time taken. some suitable basis, some times, pre-detarmined
rates may be used
(v) Joint products / By-products do not usually arise Joint products/By-products do arise and joint
in jobbing work. cost apportionment is necessary.
(vi) Standard costing is generally not suitable for The standardised nature of products and
jobbing work. processing methods lends itself to the adoption
of standard costing.
(vii) Work-in-progress valuation is specific and is For WIP valuation operating costs have to be
obtained from analysis of outstanding jobs. spread over fully complete output and partially
complete products using the concept of
equivalent units.
(viii) Each job is separate and independent of others. Products lose their individual identity as they are
Costs are computed when a job is complete. manufactured in a continuous flow. Costs are
calculated at the end of cost period.
(ix) There are usually no transfers from one job to Transfer of costs from one process to another is
another unless there is a surplus work or excess made, as the product moves from one process
production. to another.
(x) There may or may not be work-in-progress at There is always some work-in-process at
the beginning or end of the accounting period. the beginning as well as at the end of the
accounting period.
(xi) Proper control is comparatively difficult as each Proper control is comparatively easier, as the
product unit is different and the production is production is standardised and is more stable.
not continuous.
(xii) It requires more forms and details. It requires few forms and less details.
Normal Process Loss:
It is the loss which is unavoidable on account of inherent nature of production process. Such loss can
be estimated in advance on the basis of past experience or available data. The normal process loss is
recorded only in terms of quantity and the cost per unit of usable production is increased accordingly.
Where scrap possesses some value as a waste product or as raw material for an earlier process, the
value thereof is credited to the process account. This reduces the cost of normal output; process loss
is shared by usable units.
Abnormal Process Loss:
Any loss caused by unexpected or abnormal conditions such as plants breakdown, sub-standard
materials, carelessness, accident etc., or loss in excess of the margin anticipated for normal process loss
should be regarded as abnormal process loss. The units of abnormal loss or gain are calculated as under:

Cost Accounting
Abnormal loss (or gain) = Total Loss – Normal Loss

The valuation of abnormal loss should be done with the help of this formula:
(Normal Cost of Normal Output)

Value of Abnormal Loss = x Units of Abnormal Loss
(Normal Output)
Abnormal Gain:
We know that margin allowed for normal loss is an estimate, (i.e., on the basis of expectation in process
industries in normal conditions) and slight differences are bound to occur between the actual output of
a process and that anticipated. These differences will not always represent increased loss, on occasions
the actual loss will be less than that expected. Thus, when actual loss in a process is smaller than that
was expected, an abnormal gain results. The value of the gain will be calculated in similar manner to
an abnormal loss.
The Abnormal Gain Account is to be debited for the loss of income on account of less quantity of sale
of scrap available as a result of abnormal gain and Normal Process Loss Account credited accordingly.
The balance is transferred to Costing Profit and Loss Account as abnormal gain.
Equivalent Production:
This represents the production of a process in terms of completed units. In other words it means converting
the incomplete production units into its equivalent of complete units. In each process an estimate
is made of the percentage completion of any work-in-progress. A production schedule and a cost
schedule will then be prepared. The work-in-progress is inspected and an estimate is made of the degree
of completion, usually on a percentage basis. It is most important that this estimate is as accurate as
possible because a mistake at this stage would affects the stock valuation used in the preparation of
final accounts. The formula for equivalent production is:
Equivalent units of work-in-progress
= Actual no.of units in process of manufacture x Percentage of work completed
For example, if 20% work has been done on the average of 1,000 units still in process, then 1,000 such units
will be equal to 200 completed units. The cost of work-in-progress will be equal to 200 completed units.
Calculation of Equivalent Production:

The following steps are worth noting in its calculation:
(a) State the opening work-in-progress in equivalent completed units by applying the percentage of
work needed to complete the unfinished work of the previous period. If the opening work-in-progress
is 100 units which is 40 percent completed, then the equivalent units of this will be 100 x 60% i.e. 60
units.
(b) Add to (a), the number of units started and completed during the period. This can be found out by
deducting the units in the closing work-in-progress from the number of units put into the process.
(c) Add to the above, the equivalent completed units of closing work-in-progress. This can be found
out by applying the percentage of work done on the finished units at the end of the period.
There are mainly three methods of calculating cost per unit, out of which FIFO method and Weighted
Average Method is used in equivalent production.
First In First Out Method [FIFO]:
In this method, the assumption is that the incomplete units from the opening stock are completed first
and then the units introduced in the process are completed. The costs added in each process during
the current period is prorated to the production necessary to complete the opening work in progress, to

Methods of Costing
complete the units added in the process and units in the work in progress. The objective of the first in first
out method is to value the inventory at the current costs and as such the main problem is to calculate
the equivalent production under this method.
Average Method:
Process costs are sometimes computed on the basis of average costs. Where degree of completion of
opening work in progress is not given, average method is used. The average process cost is obtained
by adding the cost of opening work in progress and the cost of units introduced in the process during
the current period and dividing this total cost by total equivalent units obtained by adding the number
of units completed and equivalent units of the closing work in progress of each element, material, labor
and overheads. The main object of average method is to even out the fluctuations in prices and hence
is used when the prices fluctuate widely during a particular period.
Weighted Average Method:
If a manufacturing unit is manufacturing two or more products, which are quite dissimilar to each other,
weighted average method is used. Under this method, weighted average is computed and used in
valuation of the incomplete units.
Illustration 24:
The following particulars for process II are given:
Particulars UNITS Amount (`)

Transfer to process II at cost 4,000 9,000
Direct wages 2,000
Transfer to Finished stock 3,240
Factory overheads in process are absorbed at a rate of 400% of direct material. Allowance for Normal
loss is 20% of Units worked. Scrap value is ` 5 per unit.
Evaluate the cost of transfer to finished stock. Using the information supplied above, show the amount
of gain or loss in the process to be taken to Cost Profit and Loss A/c.
Solution:
Dr. PROCESS-II- Account Cr.
Particulars Units Amount Particulars Units Amount

(`) (`)
To, Transfer from Process - I 4000 9,000 By Normal Loss A/c 800 4000
To, Direct Wages A/c 2,000 (4000 x 20%) x 5
To, Direct Material A/c 3,000 By Transfer to Finished Stock A/c 3,240 22,275
To, Factory Overheads 12,000 @ 6.875 per unit
3000x 400%
To, Abnormal Gain A/c 40 275
(26000 - 4000)
×40 = 6.875
(4000 - 800)
4,040 26,275 4,040 26,275

Cost Accounting
Dr. Abnormal Gain Account Cr.

Particulars Units Amount (`) Particulars Units Amount (`)
To, Process - II A/c 40 200 By, Process II A/c 40 275
To, Costing Profit & Loss A/c - 75
40 275 40 275
Illustration 25:
Product-X is obtained after it passes through three distinct processes. You are required to prepare process
account from the following information:
PROCESSES
TOTAL I II III
Material 15,084 5,200 3,960 5,924
Direct wages 18,000 4,000 6,000 8,000
Production overheads 18,000 - - -
1,000 units @ ` 6 per unit was introduced in Process I production overhead to be distributed at 100% on
direct wages.
ACTUAL OUTPUT UNITS NORMAL LOSS VALUE OF SCRAP
(` per unit)
Process-I 950 5% 4
Process-II 840 10% 8
Process-III 750 15% 10
Prepare Process Accounts for I, II & III
Solution:
Dr. PROCESS-I- Account Cr.
(`) (`)
To, Material introduced 1000 1000 6,000 By, Normal Loss (5% of 950)×4 50 200
@ ` 6/-
To, Additional Material A/c 5,200 By, Transfer to Process-II A/c @ `20/- 950 19,000
per unit
To, Direct Labour A/c 4,000
To, Production Overheads A/c 4,000
1000 19,200 1000 19,200
Dr. PROCESS-II- Account Cr.

(`) (`)
To, Transfer from Process –I A/c 950 19,000 By, Normal Loss (10% of 840)×8 95 760
To, Direct Material 3,960 By, Abnormal Loss 15 600
To, Direct Labour 6,000 34960-760
×15
To, Production Overheads 6,000 950-95
By, Transfer to Process-III A/c @ `40/- 840 33,600
950 34,960 950 34,960

Methods of Costing
Dr. PROCESS-III- Account Cr.

To, Transfer from Process –II A/c 840 33,600 By, Normal Loss (15% of 840)×10 126 1,260
To, Direct Material A/c 5,924 By, Transfer to Finished Stock 750 57,000
To, Direct Labour A/c 8,000 A/c @ ` 76 per unit
To, Production Overheads A/c 8,000
To, Abnormal Gain A/c 36 2,736
55524-1260
×36
840-126
876 58,260 876 58,260
Illustration 26 :
A product passes through three processes— A, B and C. 10,000 units at a cost of `1.10 were issued to
Process A. The other direct expenses were as follows:
PROCESS-A PROCESS-B PROCESS-C

Sundry materials 1,500 1,500 1,500
Direct labour 4,500 8,000 6,500
Direct expenses 1,000 1,000 1,503
The wastage of process ‘A’ was 5% and in process ‘B’ 4%
The wastage of process ‘A’ was sold at `0.25 per unit and that of ‘B’ at ` 0.50 per unit and that of C at
` 1.00.
The overhead charges were 160% of direct labour. The final product was sold at `10 per unit fetching
a profit of 20% on sales. Find out the percentage of wastage in Process ‘C’
Solution:
Dr. PROCESS-A- Account Cr.

To, Material introduced A/c 10000 11,000 By Normal Loss A/c 500 125
(10000 x 5%) x 0.25
To, Additional Material A/c 1,500 By Transfer to Process-B A/c @ 9500 25075
`2.64 per unit
To, Direct Expenses A/c 1,000
To, Overheads A/c 7,200
10000 25,200 10000 25,200
Dr. PROCESS-B- Account Cr.
To, Transfer from Process–A A/c 9500 25,075 By, Normal Loss A/c 380 190
(9,500 x 4%) x 0.5
To, Direct Material A/c 1,500 By, Transfer to Process-C A/c 9120 48,185
To, Direct Labour A/c 8,000 @ ` 5.283
9,500 48,375 9,500 48,375

Cost Accounting
Dr.
PROCESS-C- Account Cr.

(`) (`)
To, Transfer from Process–B A/c 9120 48,185 By, Normal Loss A/c (Ref. Working 696 696
Notes)
To, Direct Material A/c 1,500 By, Transfer to Finished Stock A/c @ 8424 67,392
`8/- per unit
9120 68,088 9120 68,088
Working Notes:
(a) Sale Price per unit 10
(–) Profit @ 20% 2
Cost per unit 8
(b) Let the No. of units of loss in Process ‘C’ be ‘x’
Scrap value = X × 1 = ` X
68,088 – x = 8(9,120-x) units
68,088 = 72,960 – 7x
7x = 4,872
X= 696 units
696
Percentage of Normal wastage = × 100
9120
= 7.63%

Illustration 27:
Degree of completion
Opening stock 1,600 Units Material 70%
Labour 60%
Overhead 60%
Transfer from Process I 10,200 Units
Transfer to next process 9,200 Units
Units scrapped 800 Units
Normal loss 10% of Input
Closing stock 1,800 Units Material 60%
Labour 40%
Overhead 40%
Prepare a Statement of Equivalent Production.

Methods of Costing
Solution:
Statement of Equivalent Production
Input Output Units Material Labour Overheads

% Units % Units % Units
1600 Opening Stock 1600 30 480 40 640 40 640
10200 Normal Loss 1000 - - - - - -
Finished Units 7600 100 7600 100 7600 100 7600
Closing Stock 1800 60 1080 40 720 40 720
12000 9160 8960 8960
Less: Abnormal Gain 200 100 200 100 200 100 200
11800 11800 8960 8760 8760
Illustration 28:
From the following information compute (i) Equivalent production (ii) statement of apportionment of
cost, (iii) prepare Process Account.
Work-in-progress (opening) Stage of completion
200 units @ `4 per unit 100% Material
40% Labour & Overheads
Units introduced 1050
Transfer to next process 1100 units
Closing stock 150 units 100% Material
70% Labour and Overhead
Other information: Amount (`)

Material cost 1,050
Labour 2,250
Production Overhead 1,125
4,425
Solution:

200 Opening Stock 200 - - 60 120 60 120
1,050 Finished Stock 900 100 900 100 900 100 900
(1100-200)
during this period
Closing Stock 150 100 150 70 105 70 105
1250 1,250 1,050 1,125 1,125

Cost Accounting
Statement of Cost per unit Amount (`)

Particulars Amount (`) Equivalent units Cost per unit
Material 1,050 1,050 1
Labour 2,250 1,125 2
Production Overhead 1,125 1,125 1
Value of Closing Stock Amount (`)
Element Units Cost per unit Total Cost
Material 150 1 150
Labour 105 2 210
Overhead 105 1 105
465
Dr. Process Account Cr.
(`) (`)
To, Opening Stock A/c 200 800 By, Closing Stock 150 465
To, Material A/c 1050 1,050 By, Transfer to Finished Stock 1100 4,760
A/c @ ` 4.327 per unit
To, Labour A/c 2,250
1,250 5,225 1,250 5,225
Working Note for checking transfer value to the finished stock: Amount (`)
Material - - 800
Labour 120 2 240
Overhead 120 1 120
1,160
900 x 4 3,600
4,760
Illustration 29:
From the following information prepare process account.
OPENING STOCK DEGREE OF COMPLETION
800 Units @ `6 per unit ` 4,800 Material I - 100%
Material II - 60%
Labour & Overheads 40%
Transfer from Process NO - I
12,000 units costing `16,350
Transfer to next process 9,700 units
Normal process loss 10%
Closing stock 1,800 units
Degree of Completion: For units scrapped:- Material 100% Labour and Overheads 50%.
For closing stock: Material 60%; Labour and overheads 50%
Scrap realized Re.1.00 per unit
Other information: Material `10,500; Labour ` 20,760; Overheads `16,670

Methods of Costing
Solution:
Input Output Units Material-I Material - II Labour Overheads
% Units % Units % Units % Units
800 Opening Stock 800 - - 40 320 60 480 60 480
12000 Normal Loss
(800+12000-1800) x 10% 1100 - - - - - - - -
Finished Units (9700-800) 8900 100 8900 100 8900 100 8900 100 8900
Closing Stock 1800 100 1800 60 1080 50 900 50 900
12600 10700 10300 10280 10280
Add: Abnormal Loss 200 200 100 200 50 100 50 100
12800 12800 10900 10500 10380 10380
Statement of Cost per unit Amount (`)
Particulars Cost Equivalent Cost Cost per unit

Material-I 16350 10900 1.5
Material-II 10500 10500 1.0
Labour 20760 10380 2.0
Overhead 15570 10380 1.5
(16,670-1,100)
Value of Abnormal Loss Amount (`)

Material-I 200 1.5 300
Material-II 200 1.0 200
Labour 100 2.0 200
Overhead 100 1.5 150
850

Material-I 1800 1.5 2,700
Material-II 1080 1.0 1,080
Labour 900 2.0 1,800
Overhead 900 1.5 1,350
6,930
(`) (`)
To, Opening Stock A/c 800 4,800 By, Normal Loss A/c 1100 1,100
To, Transfer from Process-I A/c 12000 16,350 By, Closing Stock A/c 1800 6,930
To, Material A/c 10,500 By, Abnormal Loss A/c 200 850
To, Labour A/c 20,760 By, Transfer to Next Process A/c 9700 60,200
@ ` 6.206 per unit
12800 69,080 12800 69,080

Cost Accounting
Illustration 30:
SM Ltd., furnished you the following information relating to process B for the month of October, 2017.
(i) Opening work-in-progress- NIL
(ii) Units introduced - 10,000 units @ `3 per unit
(iii) Expenses debited to the process; Direct materials `14,650; Labour `21,148; Overheads ` 42,000
(iv) Finished output - 9,500 units
(v) Closing work-in-progress 350 units; Degree of completion : Material 100%; Labour and overheads
50%
(vi) Normal loss in process- one percent of input
(vii) Degree of completion of abnormal loss: Material 100% ; Labour and Overheads 80%
(viii) Units scrapped as normal loss were sold at `1 per unit
(ix) All the units of abnormal loss were sold at `2.50 per unit.
Prepare:
(a) Statement of Equivalent Production
(b) Statement of Cost
(c) Process - B Account
(d) Abnormal Loss Account
Solution:

10000 Normal Loss 100 - - - - - -
Finished Units 9500 100 9500 100 9500 100 9500
Closing Stock 350 100 350 50 175 50 175
Abnormal Loss 50 100 50 80 40 80 40
10000 10000 9900 9715 9715
Statement of Cost Amount (`)
Particulars Cost Equivalent units Cost per unit

Material 44,550 9,900 4.5000
(30000+14650)-100
Labour 21,148 9,715 2.1768
Overhead 42,000 9,715 4.3232
Value of Closing Stock

Material 350 4.5 1575.00
Labour 175 2.1768 380.94
Overhead 175 4.3232 756.56
2712.50 Say, ` 2713

Methods of Costing
Value of Abnormal Loss

Material 50 4.5 225.000
Labour 40 2.1768 87.072
Overhead 40 4.3232 172.928
485

Particulars Units Amount Particulars Units Amount (`)
(`)
To, Material Introduced 10000 30000 By, Normal Loss A/c 100 100
To, Material A/c 14650 By, Abnormal Loss A/c 50 485
To, Labour A/c 21148 By, Closing Stock A/c 350 2,713
To, Overheads A/c 42000 By, Transfer to Next Process
@ ` 11 per unit 9500 1,04,500
10000 107798 10000 1,07,798
Dr. Abnormal Loss Account Cr.

To, Process A/c 50 485 By, Debtors / Cash 50 125
By, Costing P & L A/c - 360
50 485 50 485
Illustration 31:
AB Ltd. is engaged in process Engineering Industry. During the month of April, 2015, 2,000 units were
introduced in Process ‘X’. The normal loss was estimated at 5% of input. At the end of the month 1,400
units had been produced and transferred to process Y. 460 units incomplete and 140 units after passing
through fully the entire process had to be scrapped. The incomplete units had reached the following
stage of completion.
Material 75% completed

Labour 50% completed
Overhead 50% completed
Following are the further information on the Process ‘X’

Amount
(`)
Cost of the 2,000 units 58,000
Additional Direct Material 14,400
Direct Labour 33,400
Direct Overheads 16,700
Units scrapped relaised ` 10 each. Prepare Statement of Equivalent Production, Statement of Cost,
Statement of Evaluation and the Process X Account.

Cost Accounting
Solution:

2000 Normal Loss 100 - - - - - -
Closing Stock 460 75 345 50 230 50 230
Finished Units 1,400 100 1,400 100 1,400 100 1,400
Abnormal Loss 40 100 40 100 40 100 40
2000 2,000 1,785 1,670 1,670
Statement of Cost Amount (`)
Particulars Cost Equivalent Units Cost per unit

Material (58000+14400)-1000 71,400 1,785 40
Direct Labour 33,400 1,670 20
Overhead 16,700 1,670 10

Material 345 40 13800
Labour 230 20 4600
Overhead 230 10 2300
20700
Value of Abnormal Loss Amount (`)

Material 40 40 1600
Labour 40 20 800
Overhead 40 10 400
2800

Methods of Costing
Dr. Process - ‘X’ Account Cr.

To, Material introduced 2000 58,000 By, Normal Loss 100 1,000
To, Additional Material 14,400 By, Abnormal Loss 40 2,800
To, Labour 33,400 By, Closing Stock 460 20,700
To, Overheads 16,700 By, Transfer to Next Process @
` 70 per unit.
1400 98,000
2000 1,22,500 2000 1,22,500
Illustration 32:
The product of a manufacturing unit passes through two distinct processes. From the past experience
the incidence of wastage is ascertained as under:
PROCESS ‘A’ 2%
PROCESS ‘B’ 10%
In each case the percentage of wastage is computed on the number of units entering the process
concerned. The sales realisation of wastage in Process A and B are ` 25 per 100 units and `50 per 100
units respectively.
The following information is obtained for the month of April, 2015; 40,000 units of crude material were
introduced in Process A at a cost of ` 16,000.
Particulars PROCESS A PROCESS B
Other Materials 16,000 5,000
Direct Labour 9,000 8,000
Direct Expenses 8,200 1,500
Units Units
Output 39,000 36,500
Finished Product Stock:
April 1 6,000 5,000
April 30 5,000 8,000
Value of stock per unit on April 1st 1.20 1.60
Stocks are valued and transferred to subsequent process at weighted average costs. Prepare respective
Process Accounts and Stock Accounts.
Solution:
Dr. Process A- Account Cr.
Particular Units Amount (`) Particular Units Amount (`)

To, Material Introduced 40000 16,000 By, Normal Loss A/c 800 200
(40,000 x 2%) x 25/100
To, Additional Materials 16,000 By, Abnormal Loss A/c 200 250
49,200–200
×200
40,000–800
To, Direct Labour A/c 9,000 By, Transfer to Process-A Finished 39,000 48,750
Stock A/c
40,000 49,200 40,000 49,200

Cost Accounting
Dr. Process – A Finished Stock Account Cr.

Particular Units Amount (`) Particular Units Amount (`)
To, Opening Stock A/c 6,000 7,200 By, Closing Stock A/c 5,000 6,217
To, Transfer from Process 39,000 48,750 55,950
×5000
–A-A/c 45,000
By, Transfer to Process B A/c 40,000 49,733
@ ` 1.243 per unit
45,000 55,950 45,000 55,950
Dr. Process-B- Account Cr.
To, Transfer from process – 40000 49,733 By, Normal Loss A/c 4000 2,000
A Finished Stock A/c
(40000x 10%) x 50/100
To, Other Materials 5,000 By, Transfer to Process-B 36500 63,097
Finished Stock A/c
To, Abnormal Gain A/c 500 864
64,233–2,000
×500
40,000–4,000
40,500 65,097 40,500 65,097
Dr. Process – B Finished Stock Account Cr.

To, Opening Stock A/c 5000 8,000 By, Closing Stock A/c 8000 13,705
To, Transfer from Process 36500 63,097 71,097
×8,000
–B A/c 41,500
By, Transfer to Next Process A/c @ 33500 57,392
` 1.7132 per unit
41500 71,097 41500 71,097
Illustration: 33
The following information is obtained in respect of process 3 of the month of August:
Opening Stock 1,000 units
Value Direct Material (I) ` 390; Direct material (II) ` 75;
Direct Labour - ` 112; Production overhead - ` 118.
Process 2 transfer 6,000 units at ` 2,360
Process 4 transfer 4,700 units.
Direct material added in process ` 520
Direct labour employed ` 1,036
Production Over Heads ` 1,541
Units scrapped 300
Degree of completion Direct material 100%
Direct labour 80%
Production overhead 60%
Closing stock 2,000 units
Degree of completion: Direct material 60%
Direct labour 50%
Production overhead 40%

Methods of Costing
Normal loss: 5% of production units scrap realised 0.20 each.

Prepare Process Account on weighted Average method.
Solution:
Input Particulars Output Material-II Labour Overheads

Units
Units % Units % Units % Units
1000 Opening stock -- -- -- -- --
6000 Normal loss 250 -- -- -- --
Finished units 4700 4700 100 4700 100 4700 100 4700
Closing stock 2000 2000 60 1200 50 1000 40 800
Abnormal Loss * 50 50 100 50 80 40 60 30
7000 7000 6750 5950 5740 5530
Statement of Cost
Material-I Material-II Labour Overheads

Opening stock 390 75 112 118
Add: during the period 2360 520 1036 1541
2750
Less: Scrap value of
Normal Loss (250 x 0.2) 50 2700 595 1148 1659
Cost per unit (`) 0.40 0.10 0.20 0.30
Calculation of closing stock:
Amount (`)
Material I 2000 x 0.40 = 800
Material II 1200 x 0.10 = 120
Labour 1000 x 0.20 = 200
Overheads 800 x 0.30 = 240
= 1360
Value of abnormal loss:
Amount (`)
Material I 50 x 0.40 = 20
Material II 50 x 0.10 = 5
Labour 40 x 0.20 = 8
Overheads 30 x 0.30 = 9
= 42

Cost Accounting
Dr. Process – 3 Account Cr.
Units Amount Units Amount

Particulars Particulars
(`) (`)
To, Opening Stock A/c 1000 695 By, Normal loss A/c 250 50
To, Transfer from Process 2 A/c 6000 2,360 By, Abnormal loss A/c 50 42
To, Material A/c 520 By, Closing stock A/c 2000 1,360
To, Labour A/c 1,036 By, Transfer to process 4 A/c 4700 4,700
To, Overheads A/c 1,541 @ ` 1 per unit
7000 6,152 7000 6,152
Joint and By-Products

Meaning of Joint Products:
In several industries more than one product emerge from the manufacturing process. These products
are sometimes produced intentionally while in some cases they emerge out of the main manufacturing
process. Such products are termed as either joint products or by-products. Though sometimes these terms
are used interchangeably, there is a major difference between the two and therefore it is necessary to
understand clearly the difference between them. Similarly there is a difference between the accounting
of the two and hence it is essential to define clearly the concepts of joint products and by-products.
In CIMA Terminology defines joint products as “two or more products separated in the course of processing
each having a sufficiently high value to merit recognition as a main product”. Joint products imply that
they are produced from the same basic raw material, are comparatively of equal importance, are
produced simultaneously by a common process and may require further processing after the point of
separation.
Difference Between Joint products and Co-products:
Joint products are frequently confused with co-products. However, there is significant difference between
the two, the former being indivisible and the latter divisible. Common costs are allocable among products
or services performed because each of the products or services could have been obtained separately.
Therefore, any shared cost of obtaining them can be meaningfully allocated on the basis of relative
usage of the common facilities. For example, the cost of fuel or power may be allocated to products
based on production volumes and metered usage. Co-products do not always arise from the same
operation or raw materials and the quantity of co-products is within the control of manufacturer. Thus
different quantities of car, jeep and trucks can be produced in car manufacturing industry according
to the need of the concern.
Features of Joint Products:
(a) Joint products are the result of utilization of the same raw material and same processing operations.
The processing of a particular raw material may result into the output of two or more products.
(b) All the products emerging from the manufacturing process are of the same economic importance.
In other words, the sales value of those products may be more or less same and none of them can
be termed as the major product.
(c) The products are produced intentionally which implies that the management of the concerned
organization has intention to produce all the products.
(d) Some of joint products may require further processing or may be sold directly after the split off point.
(e) The manufacturing process and raw material requirement is common up to a certain stage of
manufacturing. After the stage is crossed, further processing becomes different for each product.
This stage is known as ‘split off’ point. The expenditure incurred up to the split off point is called as

Methods of Costing
joint cost and the apportionment of the same to different products is the main objective of the
joint product accounting.
(f) The management has little or no control over the relative quantities of the various products that
will result.
(g) Joint products are commonly produced in industries like, chemicals, oil refining, mining, meatpacking,
automobile etc. In oil refining, fuel, oil, petrol, diesel, kerosene, lubricating oil are few examples of
the joint products.
Accounting for Joint Product Cost:
Before we proceed to discuss the methods of accounting in case of joint products and by-products, it
will be necessary to understand certain terms clearly. These terms are explained below:
(i) Split Off Point: This is a point up to which, input factors are commonly used for production of multiple
products, which can be either joint products or by-products. After this point, the joint products
or byproducts gain individual identity. In other words, up to a certain stage, the manufacturing
process is the same for all the products and a stage comes after which, the individual processing
becomes different and distinct. For example, in a dairy, several products like, milk, ghee, butter,
milk powder, ice-cream etc. may be produced. The common material is milk. The pasteurization
of milk is a common process for all the products and after this process; each product has to be
processed separately. This point is of special significance in the accounting of joint product and
by-products because the joint cost incurred before this point is to be apportioned appropriately
in the joint products.
(ii) Joint Costs: Joint cost is the pre separation cost of commonly used input factors for the production
of multiple products. In other words, all costs incurred before or up to the split off point are termed
as joint costs or pre separation costs and the apportionment of these costs is the main objective
of joint product accounting. Costs incurred after the split off point are post separation costs and
can be easily identified with the products.
Accounting Treatment:
In case of joint products, the main objective of accounting of the cost is to apportion the joint costs
incurred up to the split off point. As discussed earlier, the manufacturing process is same up to a certain
stage and after crossing that stage; each product has distinct manufacturing process. Therefore the
main problem is apportionment of the joint cost or the cost incurred up to the split off point. The total
cost of production of the joint product will be cost incurred up to the split off point duly apportioned
plus the cost incurred after the split off point. There is no problem of charging the cost incurred after the
split off point as the cost can be identified easily. The main problem therefore is that of apportionment
of the joint cost and the following methods are used for apportioning the same.
(i) Physical Quantity Method: Under this method, cost apportionment is made in proportion to the
volume of production. These physical measures may be units, pounds, liters, kilos, tones, gallons
etc.
(ii) Average Unit Cost Method: Under this method, the joint cost is apportioned to the joint products
by computing the average unit cost of the product units. The average unit cost is computed by
dividing the total manufacturing cost by the total number of units produced of all products. This
method is useful where all the products produced are uniform with each other in all the respects.
This method will not be useful if the production units are not similar with each other.
(iii) Weighted Average Method: Under this method, weights are assigned to each unit based upon
size of the units, difference in type of labor employed, material consumption, market share, efforts
of labour required and so on. The joint cost is apportioned on the basis of the weights assigned to
each product. This method is highly useful if the weights assigned are on objective basis. If subjective
element creeps in, the method may not give accurate results.

Cost Accounting
(iv) Selling Price Method: Under this method, the joint cost is apportioned on the basis of sales value at
the split off point. The logic is that a product should bear the share of the joint cost according to
its sale price. If sales price is higher than that of the other products, more share of joint cost should
be charged to that product and if it is comparatively less than that of other products, less share
of joint cost should be charged to the same. Though logically this method seems to be sound, in
practice, charging higher share of joint cost to the product with higher sales value may not be
justified due to the fact that lesser efforts are required for manufacturing of the same.
Meaning of By-Products:
The term ‘by-products’ is sometimes used synonymously with the term ‘minor products’. The by-product is
a secondary product, which incidentally results from the manufacture of a main product. By–products are
also produced from the same raw material and same process operations but they are secondary results
of operation. The main difference between the joint product and byproduct is that there is no intention
to produce the by-product while the joint products are produced intentionally. The relationship between
the by-product and the main product changes with changes in economic or industrial conditions or
with advancement of science. The by-product of an industry may become a main product and main
product may become a by-product subsequently.
For example, (a) in sugar industry, sugar is a main product and molasses is a by-product (b) in coke
ovens, gas and tar are incidentally produced in addition to the main product coke. Gas and tar are,
therefore, treated as by-products. These minor secondary products have saleable or usable value and
are incidentally produced in addition to the main product.
In CIMA Terminology, By-product is “a product which is recovered incidentally from the material used in
the manufacture of recognized main products such as having either a net realizable value or a usable
value which is relatively low in comparison with the saleable value of the main products. By products
may further be processed to increase their realizable value”.
Thus the term ‘by-product’ is generally used by businessmen and accountants to denote one or more
products of relatively small value that are produced simultaneously with a product of greater value.
Classification of By-Products:
By-products can be classified into two groups according to marketable conditions at the split off point:
(a) Those sold in the same form as originally produced, and
(b) Those which may undergo further processing before sale.
Accounting treatment:
By-products are jointly produced products of minor importance and do not have separate costs until the
split off point. They are not produced intentionally but are emerging out of the manufacturing process
of the main products. The following methods are used for accounting of by-products. The methods are
broadly divided into Non-Cost Methods and Cost Methods.
(A) Non-Cost Methods: The following methods are included in this category.
(i) Other income or miscellaneous income method: Under this method, sales value of by-products
is credited to the Profit and Loss Account and no credit is given in the Cost Accounts. The credit
to the Profit and Loss Account is treated as other income or miscellaneous income. No effort
is made for ascertaining the cost of the product. No valuation of inventory is made and all
costs and expenses are charged to the main product. This is the least scientific method and
is used where the sales value of the by-product is negligible.
(ii) Total sales less total cost: Under this method, sales value of by-product is added to the sales
value of the main product. Further the total cost of the main product including the cost of the

Methods of Costing
by-product is deducted from the sales revenue of the main product and by-product. All costs
and expenses are charged to the main product.
(iii) Total cost less sales value of by-product: In this method, the total cost of production is reduced
by the sales value of the by-product. This method seems to be more acceptable because like
waste and scrap, by-product revenue reduces the cost of major products.
(iv) Total cost less sales value of by-products after setting off selling and distribution overheads
of by-products: Sales value of the by-product minus the selling and distribution overheads of
byproduct is deducted from the total cost. Selling and distribution overheads are charged
against by-products actually sold.
Reverse cost method: This method is based on the view that the sales value of the by-product
(v)
contains an element of profit. It is agreed that this element of profit should not be credited
to the Profit and Loss Account. The cost of by-product is arrived at by working backwards.
Selling price of the by-product is deflated by an assumed gross profit margin. Thus under this
method, sales value of the by-product is first reduced by, an estimated profit margin, selling and
distribution expenses and then the post split off costs and then the cost of the main product
is thus reduced by this net figure.
(B) Cost Methods: The following methods are included in this category.
(i) Replacement or opportunity cost method: If the by-products are consumed captively, they
are valued at the opportunity cost method or replacement cost method. This means the
cost which would have been incurred had the by-product been purchased from outside. For
example, bagasse, which is one of the main by-product of sugar industry and which is used
for the factory as a fuel in the boiler is valued at the market value, i.e. the price that would
have been paid if it would have been purchased from outside.
(ii) Standard cost method: Under this method, the by-product is valued at the standard cost
determined for each product. The standard cost may be based on technical assessment.
Standard cost of the by-product is credited to the process account of the main product.
Accordingly, the cost control of main product can be exercised effectively.
(iii) Joint cost proration: Where the by-product is of some significance, it is appropriate that the
joint costs should be apportioned between the main products and by-products on a most
suitable and acceptable method. Thus in this method, no distinction is made between the
joint product and byproduct. Industries, where the by-products are quite important, use this
method. For example, in a petroleum refinery, gas was earlier considered as a by-product.
Now it has assumed the importance like petrol, diesel etc. and is being treated as joint product.
Accordingly, the joint cost is prorated between the joint product and the by-product.
Difference between Main product & Joint and By-Products:
It is very difficult to make distinction between the joint products, main products and by-products. There
are, however, two checks which may be applied to determine if a product is a by-product or a joint
product or a main product:
(i) Value: If one of the products is of considerably large value than the others it will usually be considered
the main product. Conversely any product which is of considerably less value is likely to be classified
as a by-product. If both or some or all the products are more or less of equal value, they are likely
to be classified as joint products.
(ii) Manufacturing objective: If the company’s objective is to produce A, then B, C and D produced
simultaneously will be classified as by-products. This is independent of the comparative values of
the various products. If the objective is to produce A and B, they become joint products and C
and D become by-products. For example, in coke oven, the objective being production of coke,
this is considered as the main product, and gas and tar as by-products.

Cost Accounting
There are instances when a by-product attains so much importance in terms of sales value and/or the
company objective, then it is regarded as a main product. There are also instances when a by-product
is more important than the main product, so that they by-product becomes the main product and the
main product becomes the by-product.
Illustration 34:
X, Y Ltd. manufactures product A which yields two by-products B and C. The actual joint expenses of
manufacturing for a period were ` 8,200.
The profits on each product as a percentage of sales are 33-1/3%, 25% and 15% respectively. Subsequent
expenses are as follows:
Products Amount (`)
Particulars ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’

Material 100 75 25
Direct 200 125 50
Overheads 150 125 75
450 325 150
Sales 6,000 4,000 2,500
Apportion the joint expenses
Solution:
Statement Showing Apportionment of Joint Expenses
Particulars A B C Total
Sales 6,000 4,000 2,500 12,500
(-) Profit 2,000 1,000 375 3,375
Total Cost (Joint & Separate cost) 4,000 3,000 2,125 9,125
Separate Expenses 450 325 150 925
Share of Joint Expenses 3,550 2,675 1,975 8,200
Illustration 35 :
A chemical process yields 60% of the material introduced as main Product - A and by Product B 15%
by - Product - C 20% and 5% being the wastage.
The ratio of absorption of Raw material and Labour in the process products is as follows :
(i) One unit of product C requires half the raw material required for one unit of product - B, one unit
of product - A requires 1 ½ time the raw material required for product - B.
(ii) Product A requires double the time needed for the production of one unit of B and one unit of C
(iii) Product C requires half the time required for the production of one unit of product B
(iv) Overheads are to be absorbed in the ratio of 6:1:1
(v) Cost Data: Input 1,000 units of cost `4,600
Direct labour `4,100
Overheads `6,000
Calculate cost of distribution between the above products.

Methods of Costing
Solution:
A = 1,000 x 60% = 600 units
B = 1,000 x 15% = 150 units
C = 1,000 x 20% = 200 units
Wasteage = 1,000 x 5% = 50 units
Statement showing apportionment of Joint Cost
Element Basis of Total Main By Product B By Product C

Apportionment
Product A
Material 18:3:2 4,600 3,600 600 400
Labour 36:3:2 4,100 3,600 300 200
Overheads 6:1:1 6,000 4,500 750 750
14,700 11,700 1,650 1,350
Material:
A : B : C = 3 x 600 : 2 x 150 : 1 x 200
= 1800 : 300 : 200
= 18 : 3 : 2
Labour:
A : B : C = 6 x 600 : 2 x 150 : 1 x 200
= 3600 : 300 : 200
= 36 : 3 : 2
Illustration 36:
The following data have been extracted from the books of M/s. Southern Coke Co. Ltd.
JOINT PRODUCTS YIELD IN LB OF RECOVERED
PRODUCTS PER TONNE OF COAL
Coke 1,420
Coal tar 120
Benzol 22
Sulphate of Ammonia 26
Gas 412
2,000
The price of coal is `80 per tonne. The direct labour and overhead costs to the point of split-off are `40
and `60 respectively per tonne of coal. Calculate the material, labour and total cost of each product
on the basis of weight.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Statement Showing Calculation of Material, Labour and Total Cost of Each Product : Amount (`)
Element Total (1420) (120) (22) (26) (412)

Coke Coal tar Benzol Sulphate Gas
Material 80.00 56.80 4.80 0.88 1.04 16.48
Labour 40.00 28.40 2.40 0.44 0.52 8.24
Overheads 60.00 42.60 3.60 0.66 0.78 12.36
180.00 127.80 10.80 1.98 2.34 37.08
Illustration 37:
A factory engaged in the production of Chemical X and in the course of manufacture in a by-product-Y
is produced which after a separate process has a commercial value. Following are the information for
the month of March.
JOINT EXPENSES SEPARATE EXPENSES

X Y
Materials (`) 10,000 2,000 2,800
Labour (`) 4,000 2,500 2,500
Overheads (`) 2,500 1,400 1,000
The output for the month was 150 quintals of X and 50 quintals of Y. The selling price of product Y is ` 200
per quintal. The profit on product Y is 33 1 % on cost price. Prepare an Account to show the cost of X
3
per quintal.
Solution:
Joint Expenses Account
Dr. Cr.

To, Material 10,000 By, Y A/c 1,200
To, Labour 4,000 By, X’s A/c 15,300
To, Overheads 2,500
16,500 16,500
X’s Account
Dr. Cr.

To, Material 2,000 By, Cost of production A/c
@ 141.33 per quintal.
To, Mabour 2,500 21,200
To, Overheads 1,400
To, Joint expenses A/c * 15,300
21,200 21,200

Methods of Costing
Y’s Account
Dr. Cr.

To, Material 2,800 By, Cost of production A/c.
To, Labour 2,500 (150 x 50) 7,500
To, Overheads 1,000
To, Joint expenses A/c 1,200
7,500 7,500
Illustration 38:
In manufacturing the main product ‘A’ a company processes the resulting waste material into two by
products B and C. Using reversal cost method of by products, prepare a comparative profit and loss
statement of the three products from the following data:
(i) Total cost upto separation point was ` 68,000 Amount (`)
A B C
(ii) Sales (all production) 1,64,000 16,000 24,000
(iii) Estimated net profit
% to sale value — 20% 30%
(iv) Estimated Selling expenses as
% of sales value 20% 20% 20%
(v) Costs after separation — 4,800 7,200
Solution:
Apportionment of Joint expenses for the products Amount (`)
Particulars B C
Sales 16,000 24,000
(-) Profit 3,200 7,200
Total Cost 12,800 16,800
(-) Selling expenses 3,200 4,800
Manufacturing cost 9,600 12,000
(-) Separate expenses 4,800 7,200
Joint Expenses 4,800 4,800
Joint expenses of A = 68,000 – (4,800 + 4,800) = 58,400.
Profit and Loss Statement: Amount (`)
Particulars A B C Total
(i) Joint cost 58,400 4,800 4,800 68,000
(ii) Separate cost -- 4,800 7,200 12,000
(iii) Manufacturing cost (I + II) 58,400 9,600 12,000 80,000
(iv) Selling expenses 32,800 3,200 4,800 40,800
(v) Total cost (III + IV) 91,200 12,800 16,800 1,20,800
(vi) Profit * 72,800 3,200 7,200 83,200
(vii) Sales 1,64,000 16,000 24,000 2,04,000

Cost Accounting
Illustration 39:
The progressive manufacturing company manufactures one main product and two by-products. Data
for month are shown below:
Particulars Main Product By-Product A By Product B

Sales 1,50,000 12,000 7,000
MANUFACTURING COST:
(a) Before separation 75,000 — —-
(b) After separation 23,000 2,200 1,800
Administration cost 12,000 1,500 1,000
Ratio of Distribution of
Selling cost 85% 10% 5%
Net profit in sales 20% 15% 10%
Assuming no beginning and ending inventories, apportion the joint cost among main product and the
byproducts.
Solution:
Calculation of Selling Expenses:

Sales of 3 products 1,69,000
(-) Profit (30,000 + 1,800 + 700) (32,500)
Total Cost 1,36,500
(-) Joint & Separate cost (75,000 + 27,000) (1,02,000)
34,500
(-) Administration cost 14,500
Selling Expenses 20,000
Statement showing apportionment of Joint Expenditure:
Particulars Main Product By Product A By Product B Total

(i) Sales 1,50,000 12,000 7,000 1,69,000
(ii) Profit 30,000 1,800 700 32,500
(iii) Total cost (i – ii) 1,20,000 10,200 6,300 1,36,500
(iv) Selling expenses 17,000 (85%) 2,000 1,000 20,000
(10%) (5%)
(v) Cost of production 1,03,000 8,200 5,300 1,16,500
(vi) Administration cost 12,000 1,500 1,000 14,500
(vii) Manufacturing cost (V-VI) 91,000 6,700 4,300 1,02,000
(viii) Separate expenses 23,000 2,200 1,800 27,000
(ix) Share of joint expenses (VII – VIII) 68,000 4,500 2,500 75,000

Methods of Costing
Illustration 40:
In a factory producing joint products of two varieties, the following data are extracted from the books:
TOTAL (`)
Sales of products X and Y 7,50,000
Direct Material 2,25,000
Variable Overhead (150% on Labour) 1,65,000
Fixed Overhead 2,00,000
The analysis of sales reveals that the percentage of sale of product X is 66 2 % .
3
Management contemplates to process further joint products so that they could be sold at higher
rates. Facilities for this are available. The additional expenditure for the further process and total sales
anticipated at higher selling prices are given below. Make recommendations presenting the affect of
the proposal.
PRODUCT X PRODUCT Y TOTAL

Sales after further processing 6,00,000 3,00,000 9,00,000
Additional material 50,000 20,000 70,000
Additional direct labour 20,000 8,000 28,000
Solution:
Amount (`)
Particulars X Y Total
(i) Sales after further processing 6,00,000 3,00,000 9,00,000
(ii) Sales at split off 5,00,000 2,50,000 7,50,000
(iii) Incremental sales 1,00,000 50,000 1,50,000
(iv) Incremental/Additional/further processing / Separate
cost:
Material 50,000 20,000 70,000
Labour 20,000 8,000 28,000
Variable Overheads 30,000 12,000 42,000
(v) Incremental Profit/Loss -- 10,000 10,000
It is recommended to further process Product Y because there is an incremental / additional profit `
10,000 where as product X need not be further processed because there is no additional profit.
Illustration 41:
A vegetable oil refining company obtains four products whose cost details are:
Joint costs of the four products: ` 8,29,600
Outputs : A - 5,00,000 litres; B -10,000 litres,C- 5,000 litres and D- 9,000 kgs.
Further processing costs: A ` 2,40,000; B ` 48,000, C-Nil and D-` 8,030.

Cost Accounting
The products can be sold as intermediates i.e., at split-off point without further processing. The sale
prices are:
As finished Product As Intermediate
A ` Per litre 1.84 1.20
B ` Per litre 8.00 4.00
C ` per litre 6.40 6.40
D ` Per Kg. 26.67 24.00
(a) Calculate the product-wise profit allocating joint costs on Net Realisable Values (NRV).
(b) Compare the profitability in selling the products with and without further processing.
Solution:
(a) Statement showing computation of profit after further processing: Amount (`)
Particulars A B C D Total
(i) Sales after further processing 9,20,000 80,000 32,000 2,40,030 12,72,030
(ii) Separate / further costs 2,40,000 48,000 -- 8,030 2,96,030
(iii) Sales at split off
(being NRV) (I-II) 6,80,000 32,000 32,000 2,32,000 9,76,000
(iv) Joint costs (NRV basis) 5,78,000 27,200 27,200 1,97,200 8,29,600
(v) Profit 1,02,000 4,800 4,800 34,800 1,46,400
Statement Showing Computation of Profit Before Further Processing: Amount (`)
(I) Sales at split off 6,00,000 40,000 32,000 2,16,000 8,88,000
(II) Joint costs as apportioned above 5,78,000 27,200 27,200 1,97,200 8,29,600
(III) Profit (I – II) 22,000 12,800 4,800 18,800 58,400
(b) Statement Showing Computation of Incremental or Additional Profit by Further Process: Amount (`)
(I) Sales after further processing 9,20,000 80,000 32,000 2,40,030 12,72,030
(II) Sales before further processing 6,00,000 40,000 32,000 2,16,000 8,88,000
(III) Incremental or additional sales (I-II) 3,20,000 40,000 - 24,030 3,84,030
(IV) Incremental cost 2,40,000 48,000 - 8,030 2,96,030
(III) Additional Profit or Loss (III-IV) 80,000 (8,000) - 16,000 88,000
Products A&D should be further process, because there is incremental profit and where as products B
and C need not be further process.

Methods of Costing
Alternative Method:
Statement Showing Computation of Profit Before Further Processing (on the basis of sales): Amount (`)
(I) Sales before further processing/split off 6,00,000 40,000 32,000 2,16,000 8,88,000
(II) Joint costs 8,29,000 x (6,00,000/8,88,000) 5,60,540 37,369 29,895 2,01,796 8,29,600
(III) Profit 39,460 2,631 2,105 14,204 58,400
Statement Showing Computation of Profit After Further Processing (on basis of sales) Amount (`)
(I) Sales at split off 6,80,000 32,000 32,000 2,32,000 9,76,000
(II) Joint costs as apportioned above. 5,60,540 37,369 29,895 2,01,796 8,29,600
(III) Profit or Loss 1,19,460 (5,369) 2,105 30,204 1,46,400
Illustration 42:
T Ltd., in the course of refining crude oil obtains four joint products A, B, C and D. The total cost till the
split off point was ` 97,600. The output and sales in the year 2015 were as follows:
Product Output Sales Separate Costs
(Balance) Amount (`) Amount (`)
A 5,00,000 1,15,000 30,000
B 10,000 10,000 6,000
C 5,000 4,000 —
D 9,000 30,000 1,000
You are required:
(a) Calculate the net income for each of the products if the joint costs are apportioned on the basis
of sales value of the different products.
(b) What would be the net income of the company from each product if it decides to sell the products
at the split off point itself A@ `15 paise, B @ ` 50 paise, C @ ` 80 paise and D @ ` 3 per gallon.
(c) In case the company expects to operate at the same level of production and sales in the year
2012 could the company increase the net income by altering its processing decisions? If so, what
would be the expected overall net income? Which product should be sold at split off? Assume
that all costs incurred after the split -off are variable.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Statement Showing Computation of Profit After Further Processing: Amount (`)
(I) Sales at further processing 1,15,000 10,000 4,000 30,000 1,59,000
(II) Separate cost 30,000 6,000 -- 1,000 37,000
(III) Sales at Split off (I) - (II) 85,000 4,000 4,000 29,000 1,22,000
(IV) Joint Costs (On basis of NRV) 68,000 3,200 3,200 23,200 97,600
(V) Profit (III) - (IV) 17,000 800 800 5,800 24,400
(I) Sales at split off 75,000 5,000 4,000 27,000 1,11,000
(II) Joint Cost (as apportioned above) 68,000 3,200 3,200 23,200 97,600
(III) Profit (I) - (II) 7,000 1,800 800 3,800 13,400
Statement Showing Computation Of Incremental Profit By Further Processing : Amount (`)
(I) Sales after further process 1,15,000 10,000 4,000 30,000 1,59,000
(II) Sales at split off (I) - (II) 75,000 5,000 4,000 27,000 1,11,000
(III) Incremental sales 40,000 5,000 -- 3,000 48,000
(IV) Incremental/Separate costs 30,000 6,000 -- 1,000 37,000
(V) Incremental Profit (loss) (III) - (IV) 10,000 (1,000) -- 2,000 11,000
Product ‘A’ and ‘D’ should be further processed because there is additional profit where as product
‘B’ and ‘C’ need not be further processed because there is no additional profit.
Computation of Profit by implementing decision:
Amount (`)
Profit from A = 17,000
Profit from B = 1,800
Profit from C = 800
Profit from D = 5,800
= 25,400
Illustration 43:
Beauty soap, company manufactures four different brands of soaps namely Komal, Lovely, Makeup
and Nice. The data on production and sale of these brands during 2015 is reproduced below.
Brand Name Komal Lovely Makeup Nice
Production & Sales (units) 3,00,000 5,00,000 70,000 40,000
Sale value (` Lakhs) 15 31 2.8 1.2
All the above soaps are manufactured jointly up to a particular process. At split off point they are formed
into cake-sand packed. The annual cost data were as under.

Methods of Costing
Direct Material Cost ` 30 lakhs

Value added ` 20 lakhs
(includes profit at 25% on total cost)
Out of the above brands, Make up is sold in unpacked condition without further processing while other
3 brands further processed at an additional cost:
Komal `1,20,000
Lovely `1,30,000 and
Nice ` 50,000
You are required to:-
(a) Work out the profit and cost of each brand of soap after allocating joint cost on the basis of Net
Realisable value at split up point. (per unit cost not required).
(b) Find out revised cost and profit on each brand if the company decides to sell all soaps at split up
point at following prices; Komal ` 4.50; Lovely `6.00; Make up ` 4.00 and Nice ` 1.50 per unit.
Assume that for allocation of joint cost net Realisable value method is used.
(c) With the working results in (a) and (b) above advise Beauty Soap Company about the processing
decision as to which soap to ;be sold at split of point and which to be processed further so as to
maximise profit. Substantiate your decision with suitable costing technique.
Solution:
Computation of Joint Cost

Direct material 30,00,000
(+) value added 20,00,000
Total Sales 50,00,000
(-) Profit @ 25% on cost (i.e. 20% on sales) 10,00,000
(-) Separate Cost (120 + 130 + 50) 3,00,000
Joint Cost 37,00,000
Statement Showing Computation of Profit After Further Processing: Amount (`)
Particulars K L M N Total
(I) Sales after further processing 15,00,000 31,00,000 2,80,000 1,20,000 50,00,000
(II) Separate cost 1,20,000 1,30,000 - 50,000 3,00,000
(III) Sales before further processing NRV= 13,80,000 29,70,000 2,80,000 70,000 47,00,000
(I-II)
(IV) Joint Costs (on basis of NRV) 10,86,383 23,38,085 2,20,426 55,106 37,00,000
(V) Profit or Loss (III-IV) 2,93,617 6,31,915 59,574 14,894 10,00,000

Cost Accounting

(I) Sales at split off 13,50,000 30,00,000 2,80,000 60,000 46,90,000
(II) Joint Cost (as apportioned above) 10,86,383 23,38,085 2,20,426 55,106 37,00,000
(III) Profit or Loss 2,63,617 6,61,915 59,574 4,894 9,90,000
Statement Showing Computation of Incremental Profit By Further Processing Amount (`)

(I) Sales after further process 15,00,000 31,00,000 2,80,000 1,20,000 50,00,000
(II) Sales before further process 13,50,000 30,00,000 2,80,000 60,000 46,90,000
(III) Incremental sales (I-II) 1,50,000 1,00,000 - 60,000 3,10,000
(IV) Separate costs 1,20,000 1,30,000 - 50,000 3,00,000
(V) Incremental Profit (loss) (III-IV) 30,000 (30,000) - 10,000 10,000
Products K and N are to be further Process and whereas Products L and M need not to be further process
Illustration 44:
In the course of manufacture of the main product ‘P’ by products ‘A’ and ‘B’ also emerge. The joint
expenses of manufacture amount to ` 1,19,550. All the three products are processed further after
separation and sold as per details given below:
Main product By products
P A B
Sales 90,000 60,000 40,000
Cost incurred after separation 6,000 5,000 4,000
Profit as percentage on sales 25 20 15
Total fixed selling expenses are 10% of total cost of sales which are apportioned to the three products
in the ratio of 20 : 40 : 40.
(a) Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of joint costs to the main product and the two
by products.
(b) If the by-product A is not subjected to further processing and is sold the point of separation for which
there is a market, at `58,500 without incurring any selling expenses. Would you advise its disposal
at this stage. Show the workings.
Solution:
(a) Statement showing computation of share of joint expenses: Amount (`)
Particulars Main Product P By Product A By Product B Total
(i) Sales 90,000 60,000 40,000 1,90,000
(ii) Profit 22,500 12,000 6,000 40,500
(iii) Cost of sales (I - II) 67,500 48,000 34,000 1,49,500
(iv) Selling expenses 2,990 5,980 5,980 14,950
(v) Manufacturing cost (III - IV) 64,510 42,020 28,020 1,34,550
(vi) Separate costs 6,000 5,000 4,000 15,000
(vii) Share of joint expenses (V – VI) 58,510 37,020 24,020 1,19,550

Methods of Costing
Amount (`)
Sales at split off (A) = 58,500
(-) Joint Cost (A) = 37,020
= 21,480
(b) It is better to sell By-Product ‘A’ at split off point because it gives more profit ` 21,480 against profit
after processing ` 12,000.
Illustration 45 :
“If the products are truly joint products the cost of the process can be applied to these products”.
(i) On the basis of the weight or other physical quantity of each product.
(ii) In respect of the marginal cost of the process on the basis of physical quantities and in respect of
fixed costs of the process on the basis of the contribution made by the various products.
(iii) On the basis of selling values of the different products
Illustrate the above statement by using the following figures in respect of joint production of A and B
for a month.
TOTAL COST: Direct Material 5,000
Direct labour 3,000
Variable Overheads 2,000
Fixed Overheads 2,000
Sales ——— A 100 Qtls. ` 80 per qtl
Sales ——— B 150 Qtls. ` 40 per qtl
Solution:
Computation of Profit by Distributing Joint Costs on the basis of Weight.
Amount (`)
Particulars A B Total
(i) Sales 8,000 6,000 14,000
(ii) Costs (100 : 150) 4,800 7,200 12,000
(iii) Profit / (Loss) 3,200 (1,200) 2,000
Computation of Profit by Distributing Variable Cost on the Basis of Weight & Fixed Cost on basis of
Contribution: Amount (`)
(i) Sales 8,000 6,000 14,000
(ii) Variable costs (100 : 150) 4,000 6,000 10,000
(iii) Contribution 4,000 -- 4,000
(iv) Fixed cost 2,000 -- 2,000
(v) Profit 2,000 -- 2,000

Cost Accounting
Computation of Profit by distribution on the basis of Sales : Amount (`)
(i) Sales 8,000 6,000 14,000
(ii) Total cost 6,857 5,143 12,000
(iii) Profit 1,143 857 2,000
5.5 OPERATING COSTING OR SERVICE COSTING – TRANSPORT, HOTEL AND HOSPITAL
Operating or Service Costing

Cost Accounting has been traditionally associated with manufacturing companies. However in the
modern competitive market, cost accounting has been increasingly applied in service industries like
banks, insurance companies, transportation organizations, electricity generating companies, hospitals,
passenger transport and railways, hotels, road maintenance, educational institutions, road lighting,
canteens, port trusts and several other service organizations. The costing method applied in these
industries is known as ‘Operating Costing’.
According to CIMA [London] operating costing is, ‘that form of operating costing which applies where
standardized services are provided either by an undertaking or by a service cost center within an
undertaking’.
Nature of Operating Costing:

The main objective of operating costing is to compute the cost of the services offered by the organization.
For doing this, it is necessary to decide the unit of cost in such cases. The cost units vary from industry
to industry. For example, in goods transport industry, cost per ton kilometer is to be ascertained while in
case of passenger transport, cost per passenger kilometer is to be computed. Cost units used in different
service units are explained in detail later in chapter. The next step is to collect and identify various costs
under different headings.
The headings used are,
(a) Fixed or standing charges
(b) Semi-fixed or maintenance charges
(c) Variable or running charges.
One of the important features of operating costing is that mostly such costs are fixed in nature. For
example, in case of passenger transport organization, most of the costs are fixed while few costs like
diesel and oil are variable and dependent on the kilometers run.
Because of the diverse nature of activities carried out in service undertakings, the cost system used is
obviously different from that of manufacturing concern. Let us discuss the method of computing costs
in various service organisations .
Transport Organisation:
Costing in a transport industry consists of determining the operating cost of each vehicle and applying
this cost to find out the cost per unit of service rendered by a vehicle. The cost unit is selected with proper
care keeping in view the needs of each concern, the weight, bulk, volume and type of goods carried
and distance covered in each trip. Transport undertakings include goods transport organizations as well
as passenger transport organizations. The cost unit is either ton kilometer or passenger kilometer. The
meaning is cost of carrying one ton over a distance of one kilometer or cost of carrying one passenger
for a distance of one kilometer.

Methods of Costing
Collection of Costs: A log book is maintained for each vehicle to record details of trips made by the
vehicle during a specified period of time. Log book is maintained usually on a daily basis. The details
shown in the log book enables the management to make suitable allocation of vehicles, to avoid the
duplicate trips, or to avoid idle running capacity. The log book also provides the information relating
to the fuel consumed, distance travelled, no of hours travelled, chargeable kilo meters. The log book
provide the data for proper allocation of cost and in this respect these may be compared with the
production details available in a manufacturing concern
Classification of Costs:
The costs of a transport organisation can be classified and accumulated under the following heads:-
(a) Fixed or stand-by costs: These costs which include garage charges, insurance, taxes, license,
depreciation, wages of drivers, cleaner’s salary, establishment cost of workshop and office. Out
of the above some of the costs are directly identifiable for each vehicle such as license fee and
some are apportioned such as office expenses
(b) Maintenance Charges: These costs are in the nature of semi-variable nature includes expenditure
on maintenance, repairs, tyres, tubes and other charges.
(c) Operating and Running costs: These costs are variable in nature, includes fuel, lubricating oil, wages
of drivers / cleaners (if paid on per trip / kilometer). These costs can be easily identifiable with each
of the vehicle.
Significance of Operating or Running Costs:

(i) Control of operating and running cost and avoidance of waste of fuel and other consumable
material.
(ii) Cost of running own vehicles may compared with the hired or other forms of transport.
(iii) Facilitates quotation of hiring rates to outside parties who ask for the transport service.
(iv) If transport service is treated as a separate department or service cost center, the costs to be
charged to the requesting department may be easily determined.
(v) Suitable information is obtained for efficient routing of vehicles.
(vi) Cost of idle vehicles and lost running time is easily obtained.
Illustration 46 :
There are two warehouses for storing finished goods produced in a factory. Warehouse ‘A’ is at a distance
of 10 kms. and Warehouse ‘B’ is at a distance of 15 kms from the factory. A fleet of 5 tonne lorries is
engaged in transporting the finished goods from the factory. The records show that the lorries average
a speed of 30 kms. per hour when running and regularly take 40 minutes to load at the factory. At
warehouse ‘A’ unloading takes 30 minutes per load while at warehouse ‘B’ it takes 20 minutes per load.
Drivers’ Wages, depreciation, insurance and taxes amount to `18 per hour operated. Fuel oil, tyres,
repairs and maintenance cost ` 2.40 per kilometer. You are required to draw up a statement showing
the cost per tonne kilometer of carrying the finished goods to the two warehouses.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Statement showing computation of total cost and cost per tonne kilometer of carrying finished goods
to warehouses:
Particulars A B
Time for travelling 40 Min 60 Min
Time for loading 40 Min 40 Min
Time for unloading 30 Min 20 Min
110 Min 120 Min
Cost of Insurance, wages, tax, etc. [(110/60) x 18] 33.00
[(120/60) x 18] ` 36.00
Fuel & oil etc. (20 x 2.4) (30 x 2.4) ` 48.00 72.00
Total Cost ` 81.00 108.00
Tonne Kilometers (5 x 10) (5 x 15) ` 50.00 75.00
Cost per tonne KM ` 1.62 1.44
Illustration 47 :
A transport service company is running 4 buses between two towns which are 50 miles apart. Seating
capacity of each bus is 40 passengers. The following particulars were obtained from their books for
April, 2015.
Amount (`)
Wages of Drivers, Conductors and Cleaners 2,400
Salaries of Office and Supervisory Staff 1,000
Diesel and oil and other oil 4,000
Repairs and Maintenance 800
Taxation, Insurance, etc. 1,600
Depreciation 2,600
Interest and Other Charges 2,000
14,400
Actual passengers carried were 75% of the seating capacity. All the four buses ran on all days of the
month. Each bus made one round trip per day. Find out the cost per passenger mile.
Solution:
Computation of Cost per Passenger Mile:
Passenger miles = No. of buses x Distance x Round trip x No. of Passengers x No. of days in
month x Capacity.
= 4 x 50 x 2 x 40 x 30 x 75%
= 3,60,000 miles
Cost per passenger mile = 14,400 / 3,60,000
= ` 0.04

Methods of Costing
Illustration 48:
Mr. Sohan Singh has started transport business with a fleet of 10 taxies. The various expenses incurred
by him are given below:
(i) Cost of each taxi ` 75,000
(ii) Salary of office Staff ` 1,500 p.m.
(iii) Salary of Garage’s Supervisor ` 2,000 p.m.
(iv) Rent of Garage ` 1,000 p.m
(v) Drivers Salary (per taxi) ` 400 pm.
(vi) Road Tax and Repairs per taxi ` 2,160 p.a.
(vii) Insurance premium @ 4% of cost p.a.
The life of a taxi is 3,00,000 km. and at the end of which it is estimated to be sold at ` 15,000. A taxi runs
on an average 4,000 Km. per month of which 20% it runs empty, petrol consumption 9 Km. per litre of
petrol costing ` 6.30 per litre. Oil and other sundry expenses amount to ` 10 per 100 Km.
Calculate the effective cost of running a taxi per kilometre. If the hire charge is ` 1.80 per Kilometre, find
out the profit that Mr.Shoan may expect to make in the first year of operation.
Solution:
Statement Showing Computation of Effective Cost and Profit for the Year

Fixed expenses:
Salary of staff 1,500
Salary of garage supervisor 2,000
Rent of garage 1,000
Driver Salary (10 x 400) 4,000
Road tax and repairs (2,160 x 10/12) 1,800
Insurance premium (75,000 x 4 % x 10/12) 2,500 12,800
Fixed cost of 10 taxi’s per month
Cost per taxi = ` 12,800/10 = ` 1,280
Cost per km = 1280/4,000 = 0.32 0.32
Running Costs:
Depreciation [(75,000-15,000) / 3,00,000] 0.20
Petrol (6.3/9) 0.70
Oil & sundry expenses (10/100) 0.10
1.32
Effective cost per Km = 1.32 x (100/80) 1.65
Profit for year = (1.80 – 1.65) x 10 x 3,200 x 12

= ` 57,600

Cost Accounting
Illustration 49:
Janata Transport Co. has been given a route 20 km. long for running buses. The company has a fleet of
10 buses each costing ` 50,000 and having a life of 5 years without any scrap value.
From the following estimated expenditure and other details calculate the bus fare to be charged from
each passenger.
(i) Insurance charges 3 % p.a.
(ii) Annual tax for each bus ` 1,000
(iii) Total garage charges `1,000
(iv) Drivers’ salary for each bus `150 p.m
(v) conductor’s salary for each bus `100 p.m
(Vi) Annual repairs to each bus `1,000
(vii) Commission to be shared by the driver and conductor
equally: 10% of the takings
(viii) Cost of stationary `500 p.m.
(ix) Manager’s salary `2,000 p.m.
(x) Accountant’s salary `1,500 p.m.
(xii) Petrol and oil `25 per 100 km
Each bus will make 3 round trips carrying on an average 40 passengers on each trip. The bus will run
on an average for 25 days in a month. Assuming 15% profit on takings, calculate, the bus fare to be
charged from each passenger.
Solution:

Insurance (50,000 x 3% x 10/12) 1,250
Tax (1,000 x 10/12) 833.33
Garage charges 1,000
Drivers salary (150 x 10) 1,500
Conductor salary (100 x 10) 1,000
Repairs (1,000 x 10/12) 833.33
Cost of stationary 500
Managers salary 2,000
Accountant salary 1,500
Depreciation (50,000 x 10/5 x 1/12) 833.33
Petrol * (30,000/100) x 25 7,500
Commission of conductor & driver 35,000 x (10/100) 3,500
29,750
(+) Profit @ 15% on takings (35,000 x 15/100) 5,250
35,000
* 10 x 20 x 3 x 2 x 25 = 30,000
Let ‘X’ be the takings
X = 26,250 + (10/100 X) + (15/100 X)
100 X = 26,25,000 + 25 X

Methods of Costing
⇒ X = 35,000
Fare per passenger Km = 35,000 / (30,000 x 40)
= 0.0292 = ` 0.03
Illustration 50 :
Union Transport Company supplies the following details in respect of a truck of 5 tonne capacity
Cost of truck ` 90,000
Estimated life 10 years
Diesel, oil, grease ` 15 per trip each way
Repairs and maintenance `500 p.m.
Driver’s wages ` 500 p.m.
Cleaner’s wages ` 250 p.m.
Insurance ` 4,800 per year
Tax `2,400 per year
General supervision charges `4,800 per year
The truck carries goods to and from the city covering a distance of 50 kms. each way.
On outward trip freight is available to the extent of full capacity and on return 20% of capacity.
Assuming that the truck runs on an average 25 days a month, work out:
(a) Operating cost tonne-km.
(b) Rate for tonne per trip that the company should charge if a profit of 50% on freight is to be earned.
Solution:

Repairs & Maintenance 500
Drivers wages 500
Cleaners wages 250
Insurance 400
Tax 200
Supervision charge 400
Depreciation [(90,000/10) x (1/12)] 750
Diesel, oil, grease (15 x 2 x 25) 750
3,750
(+) 50% profit on freight (100% on cost) 3,750
7,500
Tonne Kms = 25 [(50x 5) + (20/100 x 50 x 5)]

= 7,500
Cost per tonne km = 3,750 / 7,500 = 0.50
(+) Profit @ 50% on freight = 0.50
= 1.00

Cost Accounting
Illustration 51 :
Manar lodging home is being run in a small hill station with 50 single rooms. The home offers concessional
rates during six off- season months in a year. During this period, half of the full room rent is charged. The
management’s profit margin is targeted at 20% of the room rent. The following are the cost estimates
and other details for the year ending on 31st March 2016. [Assume a month to be of 30 days].
(i) Occupancy during the season is 80% while in the off- season it is 40% only.
(ii) Expenses:
• Staff salary [Excluding room attendants] ` 2,75,000
• Repairs to building ` 1,30,500
• Laundry and linen ` 40,000
• Interior and tapestry ` 87,500
• Sundry expenses ` 95,400
(iii) Annual depreciation is to be provided for buildings @ 5% and on furniture and equipments @ 15%
on straight-line basis.
(iv) Room attendants are paid ` 5 per room day on the basis of occupancy of the rooms in a month.
(v) Monthly lighting charges are ` 120 per room, except in four months in winter when it is ` 30 per room
and this cost is on the basis of full occupancy for a month.
(vi) Total investment in the home is ` 100 lakhs of which ` 80 lakhs relate to buildings and balance for
furniture and equipments.
You are required to work out the room rent chargeable per day both during the season and the off-
season months on the basis of the foregoing information.
Solution:
(i) Computation of Estimated Cost for the year ending 31st March, 2016

Salary 2,75,000
Repairs 1,30,500
Laundry and linen 40,000
Interior decoration 87,500
Depreciation:
5% on ` 80 lakhs: ` 4,00,000
15% on ` 20 lakhs: ` 3,00,00 7,00,000
Sundry expenses 95,400
Total costs 13,28,400
(ii) Number of room days in a year:

Occupancy during season for 6 months @ 80% (50 x0.80 x 6 x 30) = 7,200
Off-season occupancy for 6 months @ 40% (50 x 0.40 x 6 x 30) = 3,600
Total number of room days during a year = 10,800

Methods of Costing
(iii) Attendant’s salary

For 10,800 room days @ ` 5 per day = ` 54,000
(iv) Light charges for 8 months @ ` 120 per month i.e. ` 120/30 = ` 4 per room day.
Light charges for 4 months @ ` 30 per month, i.e. ` 30/30 = ` 1 per room day
Total lighting charges:
During season @ ` 4 for 7200 days = ` 28,800
During off season 2 months @ ` 4 for 1200 days (2/6 x 3600) = ` 4,800
During 4 months of winter @ Re. 1 for 2,400 days (4/6 x 3600) = ` 2,400
Note:
It is given in the example that during four months of winter, the lighting is ` 30 per room, which is 1/4th of
the lighting charges during the remaining period of the year. Hence the rate of room day which is ` 4
will also be 1/4th for winter period and so it is taken as Re. 1 per room day.
Statement of Total Estimated Cost

Expenses as shown in I above 13,28,000
Attendant’s salary as shown in III above 54,000
Lighting charges as shown in IV above 36,000
Total cost 14,18,400
Computation of total Full Room Days
During season : 7,200
Off-season : 1,800 (Equivalent to 50% rate of 3,600 days)
Total Full Room Days : 9,000
Computation of Room Rent
Cost per room day : ` 14,18,400 / 9,000 = ` 157.60
Add: Profit margin at 20% of rent or 25%
Of cost = ` 39.40
Room Rent = ` 197.00
Therefore, during season, room rent of ` 197 is to be charged while in the off-season room rent of ` 98.50
is to be charged.

Cost Accounting
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS:
1. Job costing is used in

A. Furniture making
B. Repair shops
C. Printing press
D. All of the above
2. In a job cost system, costs are accumulated
A. On a monthly basis
B. By specific job
C. By department or process
D. By kind of material used
3. The most suitable cost system where the products differ in type of material and work performed
is
A. Operating Costing
B. Job costing
C. Process costing
D. All of these.
4. Cost Price is not fixed in case of
A. Cost plus contracts
B. Escalation clause
C. De escalation clause
D. All of the above
5. Most of the expenses are direct in
A. Job costing
B. Batch costing
C. Contact costing
6. Cost plus contact is usually entered into those cases where
A. Cost can be easily estimated
B. Cost of certified and uncertified work
C. Cost of certified work, cost of uncertified work and amount of profit transferred to Profit and
Loss Accounts.
7. Equivalent production of 1,000 units, 60% complete in all respects, is :
A. 1000 units
B. 1600 units
C. 600 units
D. 1060 units

Methods of Costing
8. In a process 8000 units are introduced during a period. 5% of input is normal loss. Closing work
in progress 60% complete is 1000 units. 6600 completed units are transferred to next process.
Equivalent production for the period is:
A. 9000 units
B. 7440 units
C. 5400 units
D. 7200 units
9. Cost of service under operating costing is ascertained by preparing:
A. Cost sheet
B. Process account
C. Job cost sheet
D. Production account
10. Operating costing is applicable to:
A. Hospitals
B. Cinemas
C. Transport undertaking
D. All of the above
[Ans: D, B, B, A, C, B, C, D, A, D]
State whether the following statements are True or False:

1. Operating costing is applied to ascertain the cost of products.
2. Cost of operating the service is ascertained by preparing job account.
3. The problem of equivalent production arises in case of operating costing.
4. FIFO methods are followed for evaluation of equivalent production when prices are fluctuating.
5. Work in progress is the inherent feature of processing industries.
6. Costs incurred prior to the split off point are known as “Joint Costs”
7. No distinction is made between Co products and Joint Products.
8. Contact costing is variant of job costing.
9. In contact costing, the unit of cost is a job.
10. Job costing is applied only in small concerns.
[Ans: F, F, F, F, T, T, F, T, F, F]

Cost Accounting
Fill in the Blanks:

1. Cost of _____ los is not borne by good units.
2. If the actual loss in a process is less than the normal loss, the difference is known as
___________________.
3. _________ Costs are incurred after split off point.
4. The ____ product generally has a greater sale value than by product.
5. Statement of cost per unit of equivalent production shows the per unit cost ________.
6. Two principle method of evaluation of equivalent production are ______________ and
__________________.
7. In hospital the cost unit is __________.
8. In electricity companies, the cost unit is _______________.
9. The method of costing used in undertaking like gas companies, cinema houses, hospitals etc is
known as _________________.
10. In motor transport costing two example of fixed cost are __________ and ________________.
[Ans: Abnormal, Abnormal gain, Subsequent, main, Element wise, FIFO and Average
method, per bed, Kilowatt, Operating costing, Insurance and Depreciation]
Column A Column B
1. The contact which provide for payment of actual A. Average price method
cost plus an agreed percentage of profit.
2. In contact costing, the cost unit is B. Kilowatt
3. Abnormal loss is transferred to C Job costing
4. Job costing is used in D Normal Output
5. Under job order cost system, each job is assigned E Cost Plus
one identifying job.
6. Cost of normal loss is borne by F Per bed
7. Inherent features of process industry G Per contract
8. The method which is followed for evaluation of H Automobile garages
equivalent production when prices are fluctuating.
9. In hospital the cost unit is I Costing Profit and loss account
10. In electricity companies, the cost unit is J Work in progress
[Ans: E, G, I, H, C, D, J, A, F, B]

Cost Accounting Techniques
Study Note - 6
COST ACCOUNTING TECHNIQUES
6.1 Marginal Costing

6.2 Standard Costing & Variance Analysis
6.3 Budget and Budgetary Control
6.1 MARGINAL COSTING
Marginal Cost is defined as “the amount at any given volume of output by which aggregate costs are
changed if the volume of output is increased or decreased by one unit.” Marginal Cost also means
Prime Cost plus Variable Overheads. Marginal Cost is a constant ratio which may be expressed in
terms of an amount per unit of output. On the other hand, fixed cost which is not normally traceable to
particular unit denotes a fixed amount of expenditure incurred during an accounting period. Fixed cost
is, therefore, also called time cost, period cost, standby cost, capacity cost, or constant cost. Variable
cost or marginal cost is also termed as direct cost, activity cost, volume cost or out-of-pocket cost.
From the above definition and analysis of marginal cost, we can understand that is the cost which
varies according to the variations in the volumes of output. However, by definition marginal cost is the
change in the total cost for addition of one unit. It is to be noted that for an economist marginal cost
and variable cost would be different. But for an accountant both marginal cost and variable cost are
same and are interchangeably used. Therefore, for our study, we use marginal cost and variable cost
synonymously.
Marginal Costing:
Marginal costing is “the ascertainment of marginal costs and of the effect on profit of changes in volume
or type of output by differentiating between fixed costs and variable costs.” Several other terms in use
like direct costing, contributory costing, variable costing, comparative costing, differential costing and
incremental costing are used more or less synonymously with marginal costing.
It is a process whereby costs are classified into fixed and variable and with such a division so many
managerial decisions are taken. The essential feature of marginal costing is division of total costs into fixed
and variable, without which this could not have existed. Variable costs vary with volume of production
or output, whereas fixed costs remains unchanged irrespective of changes in the volume of output. It
is to be understood that unit variable cost remains same at different levels of output and total variable
cost changes in direct proportion with the number of units. On the other hand, total fixed cost remains
same disregard of changes in units, while there is inverse relationship between the fixed cost per unit
and the number of units.
Features of Marginal Costing:
The main features of Marginal Costing may be summed up as follows:
1. Appropriate and accurate division of total cost into fixed and variable by picking out variable
portion of semi variable costs also.
2. Valuation of stocks such as finished goods, work-in-progress is valued at variable cost only.
3. The fixed costs are written off soon after they are incurred and do not find place in product cost
or inventories.

Cost Accounting
4. Prices are based on Marginal Cost and Marginal Contribution.

5. It combines the techniques of cost recording and cost reporting.
Advantages or Merits or Applications of Marginal Costing:
1. Marginal costing system is simple to operate than absorption costing because they do not involve
the problems of overhead apportionment and recovery.
2. Marginal costing avoids, the difficulties of having to explain the purpose and basis of overhead
absorption to management that accompany absorption costing. Fluctuations in profit are easier
to explain because they result from cost volume interactions and not from changes in inventory
valuation.
3. It is easier to make decisions on the basis of marginal cost presentations, e.g., marginal costing
shows which products are making a contribution and which are failing to cover their avoidable
(i.e., variable) costs. Under absorption costing the relevant information is difficult to gather, and
there is the added danger that management may be misled by reliance on unit costs that contain
an element of fixed cost.
4. Marginal costing is essentially useful to management as a technique in cost analysis and
cost presentation. It enables the presentation of data in a manner useful to different levels of
management for the purpose of controlling costs. Therefore, it is an important technique in cost
control.
5. Future profit planning of the business enterprises can well be carried out by marginal costing. The
contribution ratio and marginal cost ratios are very useful to ascertain the changes in selling price,
variable cost etc. Thus, marginal costing is greatly helpful in profit planning.
6. When a business concern consists of several units and produces several products and evaluation
of performance of such components can well be made with the help of marginal costing.
7. It is helpful in forecasting.
8. When there are different products, the determination of number of units of each product, called
Optimum Product Mix, is made with the help of marginal costing.
9. Similarly, optimum sales mix i.e., sales of each and every product to get maximum profit can also
be determined with the help of marginal costing.
10. Apart from the above, numerous managerial decisions can be taken with the help of marginal
costing, some of which, may be as follows:-
(a) Make or buy decisions,
(b) Exploring foreign markets,
(c) Accept an order or not,
(d) Determination of selling price in different conditions,
(e) Replace one product with some other product,
(f) Optimum utilisation of labour or machine hours,
(g) Evaluation of alternative choices,
(h) Subcontract some of the production processes or not,
(i) Expand the business or not,
(j) Diversification,
(k) Shutdown or continue,
Limitations of Marginal Costing:
a. The separation of costs into fixed and variable present’s technical difficulties and no variable cost
is completely variable nor is a fixed cost completely fixed.

b. Under the marginal cost system, stock of finished goods and work-in-progress are understated.
After all, fixed costs are incurred in order to manufacture products and as such, these should form
a part of the cost of the products. It is, therefore, not correct to eliminate fixed costs from finished
stock and work-in-progress.
c. The exclusion of fixed overhead from the inventories affects the Profit and Loss Account and
produces an unrealistic and conservative Balance Sheet, unless adjustments are made in the
financial accounts at the end of the period.
d. In marginal costing system, marginal contribution and profits increase or decrease with changes in
sales volume. Where sales are seasonal, profits fluctuate from period to period. Monthly operating
statements under the marginal costing system will not, therefore, be as realistic or useful as in
absorption costing.
e. During the earlier stages of a period of recession, the low profits or increase in losses, as revealed
in a magnified way in the marginal costs statements, may unduly create panic and compel the
management to take action that may lead to further depression of the market.
f. Marginal costing does not give full information. For example, increased production and sales may
be due to extensive use of existing equipments (by working overtime or in shifts), or by an expansion
of the resources, or by the replacement of labour force by machines. The marginal contribution
fails to reveal these.
g. Though for short-term assessment of profitability marginal costs may be useful, long term profit is
correctly determined on full costs basis only.
h. Although marginal costing eliminates the difficulties involved in the apportionment and under
and over-absorption of fixed overhead, the problem still remains so far as the variable overhead
is concerned.
i. With increased automation and technological developments, the impact on fixed costs on products
is much more than that of variable costs. A system which ignores fixed costs is therefore, less effective
because a major portion of the cost, such as not taken care of.
j. Marginal costing does not provide any standard for the evaluation of performance. A system of
budgetary control and standard costing provides more effective control than that obtained by
marginal costing.
Limitations of Absorption Costing:
1. Being dependent on levels of output which vary from period to period, costs are vitiated due to
the existence of fixed overhead. This renders them useless for purposes of comparison and control.
(If, however, overhead recovery rate is based on normal capacity, this situation will not arise).
2. Carryover of a portion of fixed costs, i.e., period costs to subsequent accounting periods as part
of the cost of inventory is a unsound practice because costs pertaining to a period should not be
allowed to be vitiated by the inclusion of costs pertaining to the previous period.
3. Profits and losses in the accounts are related not only to sales but also to production, including the
production which is unsold. This is contrary to the principle that profits are made not at the stage
when products are manufactured but only when they are sold.
4. There is no uniformity in the methods of application of overhead in absorption costing. These
problems have, no doubt, to be faced in the case of marginal costing also but to a less extent
because of the exclusion of fixed costs, as different assumptions made in the matter of application
of fixed overhead will not arise in the case of marginal costing.
5. Absorption costing is not always suitable for decision making solutions to various types of problems of
management decision making, where the absorption cost method would be practically ineffective,
such as selection of production volume and optimum capacity utilisation, selection of production
mix, whether to buy or manufacture, choice of alternatives and evaluation of performance can
be had with the help of marginal cost analysis. Sometimes, the conclusion drawn from absorption
cost data in this regard may be misleading and lead to losses.

Cost Accounting
Differences between Absorption Costing and Marginal Costing:
Absorption Costing Marginal Costing

1. Both fixed and variable costs are considered for Only variable costs are considered for product
product costing and inventory valuation. costing and inventory valuation.
2. Fixed costs are charged to the cost of production. Fixed costs are regarded as period costs. The
Each product bears a reasonable share of fixed profitability of different products is judged by
cost and thus the profitability of a product is their P/V ratio.
influenced by the apportionment of fixed costs.
3. Cost data are presented in conventional Cost data are presented to highlight the total
pattern. Net profit of each product is determined contribution of each product.
after subtracting fixed cost along with their
variable cost.
4. The difference in the magnitude of opening The difference in the magnitude of opening
stock and closing stock affects the unit cost of stock and closing stock does not affect the unit
production due to the impact of related fixed cost of production.
cost.
5. In case of absorption costing the cost per unit In case of marginal costing the cost per unit
reduces, as the production increases as it is fixed remains the same, irrespective of the production
cost which reduces, whereas, the variable cost as it is valued at variable cost.
remains the same per unit.
Difference in profit under Marginal and Absorption Costing:

• No opening and closing stock: In this case, profit/loss under absorption and marginal costing will
be equal.
• When opening stock is equal to closing stock: In this case, profit/loss under two approaches will be
equal provided the fixed cost element in both the stocks is same amount.
• When closing stock is more than opening stock: In other words, when production during a period
is more than sales, then profit as per absorption approach will be more than that by marginal
approach. The reason behind this difference is that a part of fixed overhead included in closing
stock value is carried forward to next accounting period.
• When opening stock is more than the closing stock: In other words when production is less than
the sales, profit shown by marginal costing will be more than that shown by absorption costing.
This is because a part of fixed cost from the preceding period is added to the current year’s cost
of goods sold in the form of opening stock.
Differential Cost Analysis

Differential Cost is the change in the costs which results from the adoption of an alternative course
of action. The alternative actions may arise due to change in sales volume, price, product mix (by
increasing, reducing or stopping the production of certain items), or methods of production, sales, or
sales promotion, or they may be due to ‘make or buy’ or ‘take or refuse’ decisions. When the change
in costs occurs due to change in the activity from one level to another, differential cost is referred to as
incremental cost or decremental cost, if a decrease in output is being considered, i.e. total increase in
cost divided by the total increase in output. However, accountants generally do not distinguish between
differential cost and incremental cost and the two terms are used to mean one and the same thing.
The computation of differential cost provides an useful method of analysis for the management for
anticipating the results of any contemplated changes in the level or nature of activity. When policy
decisions have to be taken, differential costs worked out on the basis of alternative proposals are of
great assistance.

The determination of differential cost is simple. Differential cost represents the algebraic difference
between the relevant costs for the alternatives being considered. Thus, when two levels of activities
are being considered, the differential cost is obtained by subtracting the cost at one level from the
cost of another level.
The essential features of differential costs are as follows:-

1. The basis data used for differential cost analysis are costs, revenue and the investment factors
which are relevant in the problem for which the analysis is undertaken.
2. Total differential costs rather than the costs per unit are considered.
3. Differential cost analysis is made outside the accounting records.
4. As the differences in the costs at two levels are considered, absolute costs at each level are not
as relevant as the difference between the two. Thus, items of costs which do not change but are
identical for the alternatives under consideration, are ignored.
5. The differentials are measured from a common base point or position.
6. The stage at which the difference between the revenue and the cost is the highest, measured from
the common base point, determines the choice from amongst a number of alternative actions.
7. In computing differential costs, historical or standard costs may be used but they should be adjusted
to the requirements of future conditions.
8. The elements and items of cost to be considered in differential cost analysis will depend upon the
nature of the problem and the alternatives being considered.
Differential Costs Analysis and Marginal Costing:

Although the techniques of differential costs analysis are similar to those of marginal costing, the two
should not be confused. The points of similarity and difference between differential costs analysis and
marginal costing are summarized below:
Similarity:
a. Both the techniques of cost analysis and cost presentation.
b. Both are made use of by the management in decision making and in formulating policies.
c. The concepts of differential costs and marginal costs mainly arise out of the difference in the
behaviour of fixed and variable costs.
d. Differential costs compare favourably with the economist’s definition of marginal cost, viz. that
marginal cost is the amount which at any given volume of output is changed if output is increased
or decreased by one unit.
Difference:
a. Differential cost analysis can be made in the case of both absorption costing as well as marginal
costing.
b. While marginal costing excludes the entire fixed costs, some of the fixed costs may be taken into
account as being relevant for the purpose of differential cost analysis.
c. Marginal costs may be embodied in the accounting system whereas differential costs are worked
out separately as analysis statements.
d. In marginal costing, margin of contribution and contribution ratio are the main yardsticks for
performance evaluation and for decision making. In differential cost analysis, differential costs are
compared with the incremental or decremental revenues, as the case may be.

Cost Accounting
Practical Application of Differential Costs:

They are useful in managerial decisions, which are enumerated below:
(i) Determination of most profitable levels of production and price.
(ii) Acceptance of offer at a lower price or offering a quotation at lower selling price in order to
increase capacity.
(iii) It is used to decide whether it will be more profitable to sell a product as it is or to process it further
into a different product to be sold at an increased price.
(iv) Determining the suitable price at which raw material may be purchased.
(v) Decision of adding a new product or business segment.
(vi) Discontinuing a product or business segment in order to avoid or reduce the present loss or increase
profit.
(vii) Changing the product mix.
(viii) Make or buy decisions.
(ix) Decision regarding alternative capital investment and plant replacement.
(x) Decision regarding change in method of production.
Tools and Techniques of Marginal Costing:
1. Contribution:
In common parlance, contribution is the reward for the efforts of the entrepreneur or owner of a
business concern. From this, one can get in his mind that contribution means profit. But it is not so.
Technically or in Costing terminology, contribution means not only profit but also fixed cost. That is
why; it is defined as the amount recovered towards fixed cost and profit.
Contribution can be computed by subtracting variable cost from sales or by adding fixed costs
and profit.
Symbolically, C = S-V  (1)
Where C = Contribution
S = Selling Price
V = Variable Cost
Also C = F+P  (2)
Where F = Fixed Cost
P = Profit
From (1) and (2) above, we may deduce the following equation called Fundamental Equation of
Marginal Costing i.e.
S-V = F+P  (3)
Contribution is helpful in determination of profitability of the products and/or priorities for profitabilities
of the products. When there are two or more products, the product having more contribution is
more profitable.
For example: The following are the three products with selling price and cost details:
Particulars A B C
Selling price (`) 100 150 200
Variable cost (`) 50 70 100
Contribution (`) 50 80 100

In the above example, one can say that the product ‘C’ is more profitable because, it has more
contribution. This proposition of product having more contribution is more profitable is valid, as long
as, there are no limitations on any factor of production. In this context, factors of production means,
the factors that are responsible for producing the products such as material, labour, machine hours,
demand for sales etc.,
Limiting Factor (or) Key Factor:
In the above example, we find that product having more contribution is more profitable. However, when
there is a limitation on any input factor, the profitability of the product cannot simply be determined
by finding out the contribution of the unit, but it can be found out by ascertaining the contribution per
unit of that factor of production which is limited in the given situation. Such factor of production which
is limited in the question is called key factor or limiting factor.
Continuing the above example, it may be explained as follows:
The three products take same raw material. A takes 1 kg, B requires 2 kgs, C requires 5 kgs and the raw
material is not abundant.
Then profitability of the above products is determined as follows:
Contribution
Profitability = 1 Key Factor 2
A B C
50 / 1 = ` 50 80 / 2 = ` 40 100 / 5 = ` 20
Now, product A is more profitable because it has more contribution per kg of material.
The key factor can also be called as scarce factor or Governing factor or Limiting factor or Constraining
factor etc., whatever may be the name, it indicates the limitation on the particular factor of production.
From the above, it is essentially understandable that contribution is helpful in determination of profitability
of the products, priorities for profitability of the products and in particular, profitabilities when there are
limitation on any factor.
2. Profit Volume Ratio (P/V Ratio) or Contribution Ratio:
First of all, a ratio is a statistical or mathematical tool with the help of which a relationship can be
established between the variables of the same kind. Further, it may be expressed in different forms
such as fractional form, quotient, percentage, decimal form, and proportional form.
For example:
Gross profit ratio: It may be expressed as follows:
 Gross profit is ¼th of sales
 Sales is 4 times that of gross profit
 Gross profit ratio is 25%
 Gross profit is 0.25 of sales and lastly
 Gross profit and sales are in the ratio of 1:4
So, P/V ratio or contribution ratio is association of two variables. From this, one may assume that it is the
ratio of profit and sales. But it is not so. It is the ratio of Contribution to Sales.
Contribution
Symbolically, P/V ratio = ×100  (1)
Sales
C
⇒ P/V ratio = ×100
S

Cost Accounting
⇒ Contribution = Sales x P/V ratio  (2)

Contribution
⇒ Sales =  (3)
P
Ratio
V
When cost accounting data is given for two periods, then:
P/V ratio = Change in Contribution ×100
Change in Sales
Change in Profit
P/V ratio = ×100
Change in Sales
It is to be noted that the above two formulas are valid as long as there are no changes in prices,
means input prices and selling prices.
Usually, Sales = Cost + Profit
i.e. it can also be written as Sales = Variable Cost + Fixed Cost + Profit and this is called general
sales equation.
Since Sales consists of variable costs and contribution, given the variable cost ratio, P/V ratio can
be found out. Similarly, given the P/V ratio, variable cost ratio can be found out.
For example, P/V ratio is 40%, then variable cost ratio is 60%, given variable cost ratio is 70%, then
P/V ratio is 30%. Such a relationship is called complementary relationship. Thus P/V ratio and variable
cost ratios are said to be complements of each other.
P/V ratio is also useful like contribution for determination of profitabilities of the products as well as
the priorities for profitabilities of the products. In particular, it is useful in determination of profitabilities
of the products in the following two situations:
i. When sales potential in value is limited.
ii. When there is a greater demand for the products.
Break Even Point:
When someone asks a layman about his business he may reply that it is alright. But a technical man may
reply that it is break even. So, Break Even means the volume of production or sales where there is no profit
or loss. In other words, Break Even Point is the volume of production or sales where total costs are equal
to revenue. It helps in finding out the relationship of costs and revenues to output. In understanding the
breakeven point, cost, volume and profit are always used. The break even analysis is used to answer
many questions of the management in day to day business.
The formal break even chart is as follows:
Y Total Sales
b Total Cost
Cost & Revenue
Angle of Incidence
FC
a
O X
Unit
a = Losses b = Profits

When no. of units are expressed on X-axis and costs and revenues are expressed on Y-axis, three lines
are drawn i.e., fixed cost line, total cost line and total sales line. In the above graph we find there
is an intersection point of the total sales line and total cost line and from that intersection point if a
perpendicular is drawn to X-axis, we find break even units. Similarly, from the same intersection point a
parallel line is drawn to X-axis so that it cuts Y-axis, where we find Break Even point in terms of value. This
is how, the formal pictorial representation of the Break Even chart.
At the intersection point of the total cost line and total sales line, an angle is formed called Angle of
Incidence, which is explained as follows:
Angle of Incidence:
Angle of Incidence is an angle formed at the intersection point of total sales line and total cost line in
a formal break even chart. If the angle is larger, the rate of growth of profit is higher and if the angle is
lower, the rate of growth of profit is lower. So, growth of profit or profitability rate is depicted by Angle
of Incidence.
Break Even Analysis (or) Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis (CVP analysis):
From the breakeven charts breakeven point and profits at a glance can be found out. Besides,
management makes profit planning with the help of breakeven charts. It can clearly be understood by
way of charts to know the changes in profit due to changes in costs and output. Such profit planning is
made with the variables mainly cost, profit and volume, such an analysis is called breakeven analysis.
Throughout the charts relationship is established among the cost, volume and profit, it is also called Cost-
Volume-Profit Analysis (CVP analysis). That is why it is popularly said by S.C.Kuchal in his book “Financial
Management - An Analytical and Conceptual Approach”, that Cost-volume-profit analysis, break
even analysis and profit graphs are interchangeable words. The analysis is further explained as follows:
The change in profit can be studied through Break even charts in different situations in the following
manner:
(i) Increase in No. of Units
Y Total Sales
Total Cost
Cost & Revenue
Angle of Incidence
FC
O
X
Unitso

‘……’ line indicates increase in total cost and total sales.
In the above chart, if we clearly observe we find that there is no change in BEP even if there is
increase or decrease in No. of units.

Cost Accounting
(ii) Increase in Sales due to increase in selling price.

NTS = New Total Sales line
Y NTS
Total Sales
Total Cost
Cost & Revenue

Angle of Incidence
FC
O BEP X
Units
‘……’ line indicates changes in break even point and changes in sales.
From the above chart, we observe that profit is increased by increasing the selling price and also,
if there is change in selling price, BEP also changes. If selling price is increased then BEP decreases.
If selling price is decreased then BEP increases. Thus, we say that there is an inverse relationship
between selling price and BEP.
(iii) Decrease in variable cost:
Y NTS
Total Sales
Total Cost
Cost & Revenue
Angle of Incidence
FC
O BEP X
Units
‘……’ line indicates decrease in total cost and decrease in B.E.P

From the above chart, we observe that when variable costs are decreased, no doubt, profit is
increased. If there is change in variable cost then BEP also changes. If variable cost is decreased
then BEP also decreases. If variable cost is increased then BEP also increases. Thus there is direct
relationship between variable cost and BEP.

(iv) Change in fixed cost:
Total Sales
Y
Total Cost
Cost & Revenue

Additional Profit
Angle of Incidence
FC
O
Units X
‘……’ line indicates decrease in fixed cost and total cost and also decrease in BEP.
NTC = New Total Cost Line
NFC = New Fixed Cost Line
From the above chart also we find that there is increase in profit due to decrease in fixed cost. If
fixed cost is increased then BEP also increases. If fixed cost is decreased then BEP also decreases.
Thus there is a direct relationship between fixed cost and BEP.
Non linear Break Even Chart:
Loss
Total
Costs
Profit
Revenues and Costs
Fixed Costs
Sales
Lower Max Upper

BEP profit BEP
In some cases on account of non-linear behaviour of cost and sales there may be two or more break
even points. In such a case the optimum profit is earned where the difference between the sales and
the total costs is the largest. It is obvious that the business should produce only upto this level. This is
being illustrated in the above chart.

Cost Accounting
Cash Break-Even Point:

When break-even point is calculated only with those fixed costs which are payable in cash, such a
break-even point is known as cash break-even point. This means that depreciation and other non-cash
fixed costs are excluded from the fixed costs in computing cash break-even point. Its formula is-
Cash break even point = Cash fixed costs / Contribution per unit.
COMPUTATION OF BREAK EVEN POINT:

F× S
Break Even Point in value = ... (1)
S−V
F× S ... (2)
=
c
F× S ... (3)
=
F +P
F ... (4)
=
P.V. Ratio
F
or =
C
S
F
or =
S−V
S
F
= ... (5)
V
1−
S
Break Even Point (in units) = Fixed Cost / Contribution per unit
Proof for basic breakeven:
Let, V be the variable cost per unit
U be the volume of output i.e., No. of units
P be the Profit
F be the Fixed Cost
S be the Selling Price
By substituting the notations in general sales equation:
Sales = Fixed cost + Variable cost + Profit
SU = F + VU + P
At Break Even, SU = F +VU (Since P = 0)
 SU – VU = F
 U(S – V) = F
F
 U = S-V
OR

No. ofUnits = Fixed Cost
Contributionper Unit

Break even sales

F× S
SU (Sales) =
S−V
Uses and applications of Break even Analysis (Or) Profit Charts (Or) Cost Volume Profit Analysis:
The important uses to which cost-volume profit analysis or break-even analysis or profit charts may be
put to use are:
a. Forecasting costs and profits as a result of change in Volume determination of costs, revenue and
variable cost per unit at various levels of output.
b. Fixation of sales Volume level to earn or cover given revenue, return on capital employed, or rate
of dividend.
c. Determination of effect of change in Volume due to plant expansion or acceptance of order, with
or without increase in costs or in other words, determination of the quantum of profit to be obtained
with increased or decreased volume of sales.
d. Determination of comparative profitability of each product line, project or profit plan.
e. Suggestion for shift in sales mix.
f. Determination of optimum sales volume.
g. Evaluating the effect of reduction or increase in price, or price differentiation in different markets.
h. Highlighting the impact of increase or decrease in fixed and variable costs on profit.
i. Studying the effect of costs having a high proportion of fixed costs and low variable costs and
vice-versa.
j. Inter-firm comparison of profitability.
k. Determination of sale price which would give a desired profit for break-even.
l. Determination of the cash requirements as a desired volume of output, with the help of cash break-
even charts.
m. Break-even analysis emphasizes the importance of capacity utilization for achieving economy.
n. During severe recession, the comparative effects of a shutdown or continued operation at a loss
are indicated.
o. The effect on total cost of a change in the fixed overhead is more clearly demonstrated through
break-even charts.
Limitations of Break-even Analysis:
a. That Costs are either fixed or variable and all costs are clearly segregated into their fixed and
variable elements. This cannot possibly be done accurately and the difficulties and complications
involved in such segregation make the break-even point inaccurate.
b. That the behavior of both costs and revenue is not entirely related to changes in volume.
c. That costs and revenue patterns are linear over levels of output being considered. In practice, this
is not always so and the linear relationship is true only within a short run relevant range.
d. That fixed costs remain constant and variable costs vary in proportion to the volume. Fixed costs
are constant only within a limited range and are liable to change at varying levels of activity and
also over a long period, particularly when additional plants and equipments are introduced.
e. That sales mix is constant or only one product is manufactured. A combined analysis taking all the
products of the mix does not reflect the correct position regarding individual products.

Cost Accounting
f. That production and sales figures are identical or the change in opening and closing stocks of the
finished product is not significant.
g. That the units of production on the various product range are identical. Otherwise, it is difficult to
find a homogeneous factor to represent volume.
h. That the activities and productivity of the concern remain unchanged during the period of study.
i. As output is continuously varied within a limited range, the contribution margin remains relatively
constant. This is possible mainly where the output is more or less homogeneous as in the case of
process industries.
Margin of Safety:
It is the sales point beyond the breakeven point. Margin of safety can be obtained by subtracting break
even sales from Total sales. It is useful to determine financial soundness of business enterprise. If margin
of safety is high, then the financial position of the enterprise is sound.
Margin of Safety = Total Sales – Break Even Sales  (1)
Total Sales = Break Even Sales + Margin of Safety Sales  (2)
 Margin of safety can also be computed as follows:
Margin of Safety = Profit / P/V ratio  (3)
A relative measure to the margin of safety is its ratio to total sales.
 Margin of safety ratio is the ratio of Margin of safety sales to Total sales.
Margin of safety ratio = [Margin of safety / Total sales] x 100  (4)
 Margin of safety ratio and Break even sales ratios are complements of each other.
 If the sales amount, P/V ratio and M/S ratio are given, then profit can be computed as
follows:
Profit = Total sales x P/V ratio x M/S ratio  (5)
Apart from the above formulae, various formulae that are used in the chapter to find out different results
are as follows:
Profit = (Sales x P/V ratio) – Fixed Cost
 
Fixed Cost + desired profit 
Sales value to earn desired profit =  and
 P ratio 
 V 
 Fixed Cost + desired profit 

Required units to earn desired profit =  Contribution per unit 
 
Fixed cost = (Sales x P/V ratio) – Profit
Total sales = Break even sales + Margin of safety sales
Break even sales = Total sales – Margin of safety sales
Margin of safety sales = Total sales – Break even sales
Fixed cost = Break even sales x P/V ratio
 
Fixed Cost − Shut down costs 
Shut down sales = 
 P ratio 
 V 

 Fixed Cost − Shut down costs 

Shut down Units =  
 Contribution per unit 
The level at which profits are same or the level at which costs are same for two methods or two alternatives
 Difference in fixed costs 
i.e., Indifference Point =  Difference in variable costs per unit 
 
Practical Problem:
Illustration 1:
The sports material manufacturing company budgeted the following data for the coming year.
Amount (`)
Sales (1,00,000 units) 1,00,000
Variable cost 40,000
Fixed cost 50,000
Find out
(a) P/V Ratio, B.E.P and Margin of Safety
(b) Evaluate the effect of
(i) 20% increase in physical sales volume
(ii) 20% decrease in physical sales volume
(iii) 5% increase in variable costs
(iv) 5% decrease in variable costs
(v) 10% increase in fixed costs
(vi) 10% decrease in fixed costs
(vii) 10% decreases in selling price and 10% increase in sales volume
(viii) 10% increase in selling price and 10% decrease in sales volume
(ix) ` 5,000 variable cost decrease accompanied by ` 15,000 increase in fixed costs.
Solution:
(a) P/V ratio, B.E.P and Margin of Safety
Contribution = Sales – Variable cost
= 1,00,000 – 40,000
= ` 60,000
P/V Ratio = (Contribution / Sales) x 100
= (60,000 / 1,00,000) x 100
= 60%
B.E.P sales = Fixed cost / PV ratio
= 50,000 / 60%
=` 83,333

Cost Accounting
Margin of Safety = Total sales – B.E.P sales

= 1,00,000 – 83,333
= `16,667
(b) Amount (`)
Contribution P/V ratio BE Sales Margin of safety

(i) Increase in volume by 1,20,000 – 48,000 (72,000 / 1,20,000) x 100 (50,000 / 60%) 1,20,000 – 83,333
20% = 72,000 = 60% = 83,333 = 36,667
(ii) Decrease in volume by 80,000 – 32,000 (48,000 / 80,000) x 100 (50,000 / 60%) 80,000 – 83,333
20% = 48,000 = 60% = 83,333 = (3,333)
(iii) 5% increase in variable 1,00,000 – 42,000 (58,000 / 1,00,000) x 100 (50,000 / 58%) 1,00,000 – 86,207
cost = 58,000 = 58% = 86,207 = 13,793
(iv) 5% decrease in variable 1,00,000 – 38,000 (62,000 / 1,00,000) x100 (50,000 / 62%) 1,00,000 – 80,645
cost = 62,000 = 62% = 80,645 = 19,355
(v) 10% increase in fixed 1,00,000 – 40,000 (60,000 / 1,00,000) x 100 (55,000 / 60%) 1,00,000 – 91,667
cost = 60,000 = 60% = 91,667 = 8,333
(vi) 10% decrease in fixed 1,00,000 – 40,000 (60,000 / 1,00,000) x 100 (45,000 / 60%) 1,00,000 – 75,000
costs = 60,000 = 60% = 75,000 = 25,000
(vii) 10% decreases in selling 99,000 – 44,000 (55,000 / 99,000) x 100 (50,000 / 99,000 – 90,009
price and 10% increase = 55,000 = 55.55% 55.55%) = 8,991
in sales volume = 90,009
(viii) 10% increase in selling 99,000 – 36,000 (63,000 / 99,000) x 100 (50,000 / 99,000 – 78,579
price and 10% decrease = 63,000 = 63.63% 63.63%) = 20,421
in sales volume = 78,579
(ix) ` 5,000 variable cost 1,00,000 – 35,000 (65,000/1,00,000) x 100 (65,000 / 65%) 1,00,000 – 1,00,000
decrease accompanied = 65,000 = 65% = 1,00,000 =0
by ` 15,000 increase in
fixed costs.
Illustration 2:
Two businesses AB Ltd and CD Ltd sell the same type of product in the same market. Their budgeted
profits and loss accounts for the year ending 30th June, 2016 are as follows: Amount (`)
AB Ltd CD Ltd
Sales 1,50,000 1,50,000
Less: Variable costs 1,20,000 1,00,000
Fixed Cost 15,000 1,35,000 35,000 1,35,000
Profit 15,000 15,000
You are required to calculate the B.E.P of each business and state which business is likely to earn greater
profits in conditions.
(a) Heavy demand for the product
(b) Low demand for the product.

Solution:
Statement Showing Computation of P/V ratio, BEP and Determination of Profitability in Different conditions:
Particulars AB Ltd CD Ltd

I. Sales 1,50,000 1,50,000
II. Variable cost 1,20,000 1,00,000
III. Contribution 30,000 50,000
IV. P/V ratio [(30,000/1,50,000) x 100] 20% 33 1/3%
[(50,000/1.50,000) x 100]
V. Fixed cost 15,000 35,000
VI. Profit 15,000 15,000
VII. Breakeven sales (V/IV) 75,000 1,05,000
From the above computation, it was found that the product produced by CD Ltd is more profitable in
conditions of heavy demand because its P/V ratio is higher. On the other hand, in the condition of low
demand, the product produced by AB Ltd is more profitable because its BEP is low.
Illustration 3 :
A factory is currently working to 40% capacity and produces 10,000 units. At 50% the selling price falls by
3%. At 90% capacity the selling price falls by 5% accompanied by similar fall in prices of raw material.
Estimate the profit of the company at 50% and 90% capacity production.
The cost at present per unit is:
Material ` 10
Labour `3
Overheads ` 5(60% fixed)
The selling price per unit is ` 20/- per unit.
Solution:
Statement Showing Computation of Profit at 50% and 90% Capacity as well as at Current Capacity:
40% 50% 90%

Particulars Amount (`) Amount (`) Amount (`)
Unit Total Unit Total Unit Total
I. Selling price 20.00 2,00,000 19.40 2,42,500 19.00 4,27,500
II. Variable cost
Material 10.00 1,00,000 10.00 1,25,000 9.50 2,13,750
Labour 3.00 30,000 3.00 37,500 3.00 67,500
Variable OH 2.00 20,000 2.00 25,000 2.00 45,000
15.00 1,50,000 15.00 1,87,500 14.50 3,26,250
III. Contribution 5.00 50,000 4.40 55,000 4.50 1,01,250
IV. Fixed cost 3.00 30,000 30,000 30,000
V. Profit 20,000 25,000 71,250
VI. F× S  1,20,000 1,32,273 1,26,667
B.E. sales  
 C 

Cost Accounting
Illustration 4 :
The sales turnover and profit during two periods were as follows:
Amount (`)
Period Sales Profit

1 2,00,000 20,000
2 3,00,000 40,000
What would be probable trading results with sales of `1,80,000? What amount of sales will yield a profit
of ` 50,000?
Solution:
P/V ratio = (Change in profit / Change in sales) x 100
= (20,000 / 1,00,000) x 100 = 20%
Fixed cost = (Sales x P/V ratio) – Profit
= (2,00,000 x 0.2) – 20,000 = ` 20,000
Sales required to earn desired profit = Fixed cost + desired profit
P/V ratio
= (20,000 + 50,000) / 20% = ` 3,50,000
Illustration 5 :
The following results of a company for the last two years are as follows:
Amount (`)
Year Sales Profit

2014 1,50,000 20,000
2015 1,70,000 25,000
You are required to calculate:
(i) P/V Ratio
(ii) B.E.P
(iii) The sales required to earn a profit of ` 40,000
(iv) Profit when sales are ` 2,50,000
(v) Margin of safety at a profit of ` 50,000 and
(vi) Variable costs of the two periods.
Solution:
(i) P/V ratio = (Change in profit / Change in sales) x 100
= (5,000 / 20,000) x 100 = 25%
Fixed cost = (Sales x P/V ratio) – Profit = (1,50,000 x 25%) – 20,000 = ` 17,500
(ii) Break even sales = Fixed cost / PV ratio = 17,500 / 25% = ` 70,000
(iii) Sales required to earn a profit of ` 40,000 = Fixed cost + desired profit
P/V ratio
= (17,500 + 40,000) / 25% = ` 2,30,000

(iv) Profit at sales ` 2,50,000 = (Sales x P/V ratio) – Fixed cost

= (2,50,000 x 25%) – 17,500 = ` 45,000
(v) Margin of safety at profit of ` 50,000 = Profit / PV ratio
= 50,000 / 25% = ` 2,00,000
(vi) Variable cost for 2011 = 1,50,000 x 75% = ` 1,12,500
Variable cost for 2012 = 1,70,000 x 75% = ` 1,27,500
Illustration 6:
SV Ltd a multi product company furnishes you the following data relating to the year 2015:
Amount (`)
First Half of the year Second Half of the year

Sales 45,000 50,000
Total cost 40,000 43,000
Assuming that there is no change in prices and variable cost and that the fixed expenses are incurred
equally in the two half year period, calculate for the year, 2015
(i) The P/V Ratio, (iii) Break-even sales
(ii) Fixed Expenses (iv) Percentage of Margin of safety.
Solution:
(i) P/V ratio = [(7,000 – 5,000) / (50,000 – 45,000)] x 100 = 40%
(ii) Fixed expenses for first half year : = (Sales x PV ratio) – Profit
= (45,000 x 0.4) – 5,000 = ` 13,000
Fixed expenses for the year = 13,000 + 13,000 = ` 26,000
(iii) Break even sales = 26,000 / 40% = ` 65,000
(iv) Margin of safety = (50,000 + 45,000) – 65,000 = ` 30,000
Margin of safety ratio = [30,000 / (50,000 + 45,000)] x 100 = 31.58%
Illustration 7 :
S Ltd. furnishes you the following information relating to the half year ended 30th June, 2015.
Fixed expenses ` 45,000
Sales value `1,50,000
Profit ` 30,000
During the second half the year the company has projected a loss of `10,000.
Calculate:
(1) The B.E.P and M/S for six months ending 30th June, 2015.
(2) Expected sales volume for the second half of the year assuming that the P/V Ratio and Fixed
expenses remain constant in the second half year also.
(3) The B.E.P and M/S for the whole year for 2015.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
(1) P/V ratio = (Fixed cost + Profit) / Sales
P/V ratio : = [(45,000 + 30,000) / 1,50,000] x 100 = 50%
BE sales for I half year = 45,000 / 50% = ` 90,000
Margin of safety for I half year = 1,50,000 – 90,000 = ` 60,000
For II half year:
(2) P/V ratio = (Fixed cost + Profit) / Sales
0.5 = [45,000 + (-) 10,000] / Sales
0.5 sales = 35,000
⇒ Sales = ` 70,000
(3) BE sales for 2015 = (45,000 + 45,000) x 50% = 1,80,000
Margin of safety for 2015 = (1,50,000 + 70,000) – 1,80,000 = ` 40,000
Illustration 8:
The following is the statement of a Radical Co. for the month of June.
Amount (`)
Products Total
L M
Sales 60,000 60,000 1,20,000
Variable costs 42,000 30,000 72,000
Contribution 18,000 30,000 48,000
Fixed cost 36,000
Net Income 12,000
You are required to compute the P/V ratio for each product and then compute the P/V Ratio, Break-
even Point and net profit for the following assumption.
(i) Sales revenue divided 60% to Product L & 40% to Product M.
(ii) Sales revenue divided 40% to Product L & 60% to Product M.
Also calculate the profit estimated on sales upto ` 1,80,000/- p.m. for each of the sales mix provided
above.
Solution:
Computation of P/V ratio
Particulars L M Total
P/V ratio = (C/S) x 100 30% 50% 40%

(i) For Assumption I:

Statement showing computation of P/V ratio, Break even point and profit: Amount (`)
Sr. No. Particulars L M Total
I. Sales 72,000 48,000 1,20,000
II. Variable cost (L - 70%); (M – 50%) 50,400 24,000 74,400
III. Contribution (L – 30%); (M – 50%) 21,600 24,000 45,600
IV. Fixed cost 36,000
V. Profit 9,600
P/V ratio (45,600 x 1,20,000) / 100 = 38% 30% 50% 38%
Break even sales = 36,000 / 38% = ` 94,737
(ii) For Assumption II:
Statement showing computation of P/V ratio, Break even point and profit: Amount (`)
Sr. No. Particulars L M Total
I. Sales 48,000 72,000 1,20,000
II. Variable cost (L - 70%); (M – 50%) 33,600 36,000 69,600
III. Contribution (L – 30%); (M – 50%) 14,400 36,000 50,400
V. Profit 14,400
P/V ratio (50,400 x 1,20,000) / 100 = 42% 30% 50% 42%
Break even sales = 36,000 / 42% = ` 85,714
Illustration 9 :
Accelerate Co. Ltd., manufactures and sells four types of products under the brand names of A, B, C and
1 2 2 1
D. The sales Mix in value comprises 33 %, 41 %, 16 and 8 %,of products A, B, C & D respectively.
3 3 3 3
The total budgeted sales (100% are `60,000 p.m). Operating costs are:
Variable Costs:
Product A 60% of selling price
Product B 68% of selling price
Product C 80% of selling price
Product D 40% of selling price
Fixed Costs: ` 14,700 p.m.
(a) Calculate the break - even - point for the products on overall basis and
(b) Also calculate break-even-point, if the sales mix is changed as follows the total sales per month
remaining the same. Mix: A - 25% : B - 40% : C - 30% : D - 5%.
Solution:
Particulars A(`) B(`) C(`) D(`) Total(`)
I. Sales 20,000 25,000 10,000 5,000 60,000
II. Variable cost 12,000 17,000 8,000 2,000 39,000
III. Contribution 8,000 8,000 2,000 3,000 21,000
V. Profit 6,300
P/V ratio = (C/S) x 100 40% 32% 20% 60% 35%

Cost Accounting
(a) Break even sales

Break even sales = 14,700 / 35% = ` 42,000
(b) Amount (`)
I. Sales 15,000 24,000 18,000 3,000 60,000
II. Variable cost 9,000 16,320 14,400 1,200 40,920
III. Contribution 6,000 7,680 3,600 1,800 19,080
V. Profit 4,380
P/V ratio = (C/S) x 100 40% 32% 20% 60% 31.8 %
Break even sales = 14,700 / 31.8% = ` 46,226
Illustration 10 :
Present the following information to show to management:
(i) The marginal product cost and the contribution p.u.
(ii) The total contribution and profits resulting from each of the following sales mix results.
Amount (`)
Particulars Product Per unit

Direct Materials A 10
Direct Materials B 9
Direct wages A 3
Direct wages B 2
Fixed Expenses – ` 800
(Variable expenses are allotted to products at 100% Direct Wages)
Sales Price ----- A ` 20
Sales Price ----- B `15
Sales Mixtures: (a) 100 units of Product A and 200 of B.
(b) 150 units of Product A and 150 of B.
(c) 200 units of Product A and 100 of B.
Solution:
(i)
Statement of Marginal Product cost Amount (`)
Sr. No. Particulars A B

I. Selling price 20.00 15.00
II. Variable cost
Direct material 10.00 9.00
Direct wages 3.00 2.00
Variable OHs (100% of direct wages) 3.00 2.00
16.00 13.00
III. Contribution (I – II) 4.00 2.00

(ii) Profit at Mix (a): Amount (`)
Sr. No. Particulars A B Total

I. No. of units 100 200
II. ‘C’ per unit 4 2
III. Total contribution (II x I) 400 400 800
IV. Fixed cost 800
V. Profit (III - IV) Nil
Profit at Mix (b): Amount (`)

III. Total contribution (II x I) 600 300 900
IV. Fixed cost 800
V. Profit (III - IV) 100
Profit at Mix (c): Amount (`)

III. Total contribution (I x II) 800 200 1000
IV. Fixed cost 800
V. Profit (III - IV) 200
here ‘C’ means ‘Contribution’ .
Illustration 11:
The following particulars are extracted from the records of a company:
PER UNIT
PRODUCT A PRODUCT B
Sales (`) 100 120
Consumption of material 2 Kg 3 Kg
Material cost (`) 10 15
Direct wages cost (`) 15 10
Direct expenses (`) 5 6
Machine hours used 3 Hrs 2 Hrs
Overhead expenses:
Fixed (`) 5 10
Variable (`) 15 20
Direct wages per hour is ` 5
(a) Comment on profitability of each product (both use the same raw material) when :
1) Total sales potential in units is limited;
2) Total sales potential in value is limited;
3) Raw material is in short supply;
4) Production capacity (in terms of machine hours) is the limiting factor.
(b) Assuming raw material as the key factor, availability of which is 10,000 Kgs. and each product
cannot be sold more than 3,500 units find out the product mix which will yield the maximum profit.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
(a) Statement showing computation of contribution per unit of different factors of production and
determination of profitability
Amount (`)
Sr.No. Particulars A B
I. Sales 100 120
II. Variable cost
Material 10 15
Labour 15 10
Direct expenses 5 6
Variable OH 15 20
45 51
III. Contribution (I - II) 55 69
IV. P/V ratio (III - I) 55% 57.5%
V. Contribution per kg of material 55/2 69/3
= 27.5 = 23
VI. Contribution per machine hour 55/3 69/2
= 18 1/3 = 34.5
From the above computations, we may comment upon the profitability in the following manner.
1. If total sales potential in units is limited, product B is more profitable, it has more contribution per
unit.
2. When total sales in value is limited, product B is more profitable because it has higher P/V ratio.
3. If the raw material is in short supply, Product A is more profitable because it has more contribution
per Kg of material.
4. If the production capacity is limited, product B is more profitable, because it has more contribution
per machine hour.
(b) Statement showing optimum mix under given conditions and computation of profit at that mix:
Amount (`)
Sr.No. Particulars A B Total

I. No. of units 3,500 1,000
II. Contribution per unit 55 69
III. Total contribution 1,92,500 69,000 2,61,500
IV. Fixed cost (3500 x 5) (3500 x 10) 17,500 *35,000 52,500
V. Profit 2,09,000
* Fixed cost is taken at maximum capacity (3,500 x 10)
Working Notes: Kg.

Available material = 10,000
(-) utilized for A (3,500 x 2) = 7,000
= 3,000
Units of B = 3,000 / 3 = 1,000

Illustration 12 :
A company has a capacity of producing 1 lakh units of a certain product in a month. The sales
department reports that the following schedule of sales prices is possible.
VOLUME OF PRODUCTION SELLING PRICE PER UNIT
% `
60 0.90
70 0.80
80 0.75
90 0.67
100 0.61
The variable cost of manufacture between these levels is 15 paise per unit and fixed cost ` 40,000.
Prepare a statement showing incremental revenue and differential cost at each stage. At which volume
of production will the profit be maximum?
Solution:
Statement showing computation of differential cost, incremental revenue and determination of
capacity at which profit is maximum: Amount (`)
Capacity Units Sales V. Cost Fixed cost Total Cost Differential Incremental
% @ (`) 0.15 Cost Revenue
60% 60,000 54,000 9,000 40,000 49,000 -- --
70% 70,000 56,000 10,500 40,000 50,500 1,500 2,000
80% 80,000 60,000 12,000 40,000 52,000 1,500 4,000
90% 90,000 60,300 13,500 40,000 53,500 1,500 300
100% 1,00,000 61,000 15,000 40,000 55,000 1,500 700
From the above computation, it was found that the incremental revenue is more than the differential
cost up to 80% capacity, the profit is maximum at that capacity.
Illustration 13:
A company is at present working at 90 per cent of its capacity and producing 13,500 units per annum.
It operates a flexible budgetary control system. The following figures are obtained from its budget.
90% 100%
Sales 15,00,000 16,00,000
Fixed expenses 3,00,500 3,00,600
Semi-fixed expenses 97,500 1,00,500
Variable expenses 1,45,000 1,49,500
Units made 13,500 15,000
Labour and material costs per unit are constant under present conditions. Profit margin is 10 per cent.
(a) You are required to determine the differential cost of producing 1,500 units by increasing capacity
to 100%
(b) What would you recommend for an export price for these 1,500 units taking into account that
overseas prices are much lower than indigenous prices?

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Computation of material and labour cost:

Sales at present 15,00,000
(-) Profit @ 10% 1,50,000
Total cost 13,50,000
(-) All costs other than material & labour
Fixed expenses 3,00,500 5,43,000
Semi fixed expenses 97,500
Variable expenses 1,45,000
Material & Labour cost 8,07,000
(a) Statement showing differential cost of 1500 units:

Material & Labour (8,07,000 x 1500/13500) 89,667
Fixed expenses (3,00,600 – 3,00,500) 100
Semi fixed expenses (1,00,500 – 97,500) 3,000
Variable expenses (1,49,500 – 1,45,000) 4,500
Differential cost 97,267
(b) Differential cost per unit = 97,267 / 1,500 = ` 64.84
The minimum price for these 1,500 units should not be less than ` 64.84
Illustration 14 :
The operating statement of a company is as follows: Amount (`)
Sales (80,000 @ `15 each) 12,00,000
Costs:
Variable: (`)
Material 2,40,000
Labour 3,20,000
Overheads 1,60,000
7,20,000
Fixed Cost 3,20,000 10,40,000
PROFIT 1,60,000
The capacity of the plant is 1 lakh units. A customer from U.S.A. is desirous of buying 20,000 units at a net
price of `10 per unit. Advice the producer whether or not offer should be accepted. Will your advice
be different, if the customer is local one.

Solution:
Statement showing computation of profit before and after accepting the order:
Amount (`)
Sr. Particulars Present Position Order Value Total

No. (Before accepting) (20,000) (After
80,000 accepting)
1,00,000
I. Sales 12,00,000 2,00,000 14,00,000
II. Variable Cost
Material 2,40,000 60,000 3,00,000
Labour 3,20,000 80,000 4,00,000
Variable OH 1,60,000 40,000 2,00,000
7,20,000 1,80,000 9,00,000
III. Contribution (I - II) 4,80,000 20,000 5,00,000
IV. Fixed cost 3,20,000 -- 3,20,000
V. Profit (III - IV) 1,60,000 20,000 1,80,000
As the profit is increased by ` 20,000 by accepting the order, it is advised to accept the same. If the
order is from local one, it should not be accepted because it will adversely affect the present market.
Illustration 15 :
A company manufactures scooters and sells it at `3,000 each. An increase of 17% in cost of materials
and of 20% of labour cost is anticipated. The increased cost in relation to the present sales price would
cause at 25% decrease in the amount of the present gross profit per unit.
At present, material cost is 50%, wages 20% and overhead is 30% of cost of sales.
You are required to :
(a) Prepare a statement of profit and loss per unit at present and;
(b) Compute the new selling price to produce the same percentage of profit to cost of sales as
before.
Solution:
Let X and Y be the cost and profit respectively.
X + Y = 3,000 → (1)
Material = X x 50/100 = 0.5X
Labour = X x 20/100 = 0.2X
Overheads = X x 30/100 = 0.3X
After increase of cost:
Material = 0.5 X x 117/100 = 0.585 X
Labour = 0.2X x 120/100 = 0.240 X
Overheads = 0.300 X
= 1.125 X

Cost Accounting
Profit = Y x 75/100 = 0.75Y

∴ New Equation 1.125X + 0.75Y = 3,000 → (2)
Multiplying Eq. (1) by 0.75 0.75X + 0.75Y = 2,250
0.375X = 750
X = 750/0.375 = ` 2,000
Y = 3,000 – 2,000 = ` 1,000
Statement of cost & profit per unit at present:
Amount (`)
Material = 2,000 x 50% = 1,000
Labour = 2,000 x 20% = 400
Overheads = 2,000 x 30% = 600
= 2,000
(+) profit @ 50% of cost = 1,000
=
3,000
Computation of new selling price to get same percentage of profit:

Amount (`)
Material = 1,000 x 117/100 = 1,170
Labour = 400 x 120/100 = 480
Overheads = 600
Cost = 2,250
(+) Profit @ 50% = 1,125
New selling price = 3,375
Illustration 16 :
An umbrella manufacturer marks an average net profit of ` 2.50 per piece on a selling price of `14.30
by producing and selling 6,000 pieces or 60% of the capacity. His cost of sales is
Amount (`)
Direct material 3.50
Direct wages 1.25
Works overheads (50% fixed) 6.25
Sales overheads (25% variable) 0.80
During the current year, he intends to produce the same number but anticipates that fixed charges
will go up by 10% which direct labour rate and material will increase by 8% and 6% respectively but he
has no option of increasing the selling price. Under this situation, he obtains an offer for further 20% of
the capacity. What minimum price you will recommend for acceptance to ensure the manufacturer
an overall profit of `16,730.

Solution:
Computation of profit at present after increase in cost:

I. Selling price 14.30
II. Variable cost
Material (3.5 x 106/100) 3.710
Labour (1.25 x 108/100) 1.350
Works overhead 3.125
Sales overhead 0.200
Total 8.385
III. Contribution per unit (I-II) 5.915
IV. Total contribution (6,000 x 5.915) 35,490
V. Fixed cost
Works OH 3.125 24,585
Sales OH 0.600 [3.725 x 6,000 = 22,350 x 110/100]
VI. Profit (iv - v) 10,905
Computation of selling price of the order: (`)
Variable cost of order (2,000 x 8.385) = 16,770
(+) required profit (16,730 – 10,905) = 5,825
Sales required = 22,595
Selling price of order = 22,595/2,000 = 11.2975 (or) ` 11.30
Illustration 17 :
The Dynamic company has three divisions. Each of which makes a different product. The budgeted
data for the coming year are as follows:
Amount (`)
A B C
Sales 1,12,000 56,000 84,000
Direct Material 14,000 7,000 14,000
Direct Labour 5,600 7,000 22,400
Direct Expenses 14,000 7,000 28,000
Fixed Cost 28,000 14,000 28,000
61,600 35,000 92,400
The Management is considering to close down the division C’. There is no possibility of reducing fixed
cost. Advise whether or not division C’ should be closed down.

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Statement showing computation of profit before closing down of division C:
Amount (`)
Sr. No. Particulars A B C Total

I. Sales 1,12,000 56,000 84,000 2,52,000
II. Variable cost
Direct Material 14,000 7,000 14,000 35,000
Direct Labour 5,600 7,000 22,400 35,000
Direct expenses 14,000 7,000 28,000 49,000
III. Total Variable Cost 33,600 21,000 64,400 1,19,000
IV. Contribution (i - iii) 78,400 35,000 19,600 1,33,000
V. Fixed cost 70,000
Statement showing computation of profit after closing ‘C’:

Amount (`)

I. Sales 1,12,000 56,000 1,68,000
II. Variable cost
Direct Material 14,000 7,000 21,000
Direct Labour 5,600 7,000 12,600
Direct expenses 14,000 7,000 21,000
III. Total Variable Cost 33,600 21,000 54,600
IV. Contribution (i - iii) 78,400 35,000 1,13,400
V. Fixed cost 70,000
From the above computations, it was found that profit is decreased by (`63,000 - `43,400) ` 19,600 by
closing down division ‘C’, it should not be closed down. In other words, as long as if there is a contribution
of ` 1, from division ‘C’, it should not be closed down.
Illustration 18 :
Mr. Young has ` 1,50,000 investment in a business. He wants a 15% profit on his money. From an analysis
of recent cost figures he finds that his variable cost of operating is 60% of sales; his fixed costs are `75,000
per year. Show supporting computations for each answer.
(a) What sales volume must be obtained to break-even?
(b) What sales volume must be obtained to his 15% return on investment?
(c) Mr. Young estimates that even if he closed the doors of his business he would incur `25,000 expenses
per year. At what sales would be better off by locking his sales up?

Solution:
P/V ratio (V. cost ratio 60%) = 40%

(a) Break even sales = 75,000 / 40% = ` 1,87,500
(b) Required sales to get desired income = (75,000 + 22,500) / 40% = ` 2,43,750 = ` 2,43,750
(c) Shut down sales = Fixed cost – shut down cost
P/V Ratio
= (75,000 – 25,000) / 40% = ` 1,25,000
Illustration 19 :
The manager of a Co. provides you with the following information:
Amount (`)
Sales : 4,00,000
Costs: Variable
(60% of sales)
Fixed cost : 80,000
Profit before tax : 80,000
Income-tax (60%)
Net profit : 32,000
The company is thinking of expanding the plant. The increased fixed cost with plant expansion will be
`40,000. It is estimated that the maximum production in new plant will be worth `2,40,000. The company
also wants to earn additional income `3,200 on investment. On the basis of computations give your
opinion on plant expansion.
Solution:
Statement showing computation of profit before and after plant expansion:
Amount (`)
Sr. Particulars Present Expansion Total

No. (Before expansion) value (After expansion)
I. Sales 4,00,000 2,40,000 6,40,000
II. Variable cost (60%) 2,40,000 1,44,000 3,84,000
III. Contribution (i - ii) 1,60,000 96,000 2,56,000
IV. Fixed cost 80,000 40,000 1,20,000
V. Profit before tax (iii - iv) 80,000 56,000 1,36,000
VI. Profit after tax (V x 0.40) 32,000 22,400 54,400
From the above computations, it was found that the profit is increased by ` 22,400 by expanding the
plant, which is much higher than the expected income of ` 3,200, one’s opinion should be in favour of
plant expansion.

Cost Accounting
1. If sales are ` 90,000 and variable cost to sales is 75%, contribution is

A. ` 21,500
B. ` 22,500
C. ` 23,500
D. ` 67,500
2. Variable cost
A. Remains fixed in total
B. Remains fixed per unit
C. Varies per unit
D. Nor increase or decrease
3. If sales are ` 150,000 and variable cost are ` 50,000. Compute P/V ratio.
A. 66.66%
B. 100%
C. 133.33%
D. 65.66%
4. Marginal Costing technique follows the following basic of classification
A. Element wise
B. Function Wise
C. Behaviour wise
D. Identifiability wise
5. P/V ratio will increase if the
A. There is an decrease in fixed cost
B. There is an increase in fixed cost
C. There is a decrease in selling price per unit.
D. There is a decrease in variable cost per unit.
6. The technique of differential cost is adopted when
A. To ascertain P/V ratio
B. To ascertain marginal cost
C. To ascertain cost per unit
D. To make choice between two or more alternative courses of action
7. Difference between the costs of two alternative is known as the
A. Variable cost
B. Opportunity cost
C. Marginal cost
D. Differential cost

8. Contribution is ` 300,000 and sales is ` 1,500,000. Compute P/V ratio.

A. 15%
B. 20%
C. 22%
D. 17.5%
9. Variable cost to sales ratio is 40%. Compute P/V ratio.
A. 60%
B. 40%
C. 100%
D. None of the these
10. Fixed cost is 30,000 and P/V ratio is 20%. Compute breakeven point.
A. ` 160,000
B. ` 150,000
C. ` 155,000
D. ` 145,000
[Ans: B, B, A, C, D, D, D, B, A, B]
State whether the statesments are True or False:
1. Contribution= Sales * P/V ratio.
2. Margin of Safety = Profit / P/V ratio
3. P/ V ratio remains constant at all levels of activity.
4. Marginal Costing follows the behaviours wise classification of costs.
5. At breakeven point, contribution available is equal to total fixed cost.
6. Breakeven point = Profit / P/V ratio.
7. Marginal cost is aggregate of Prime Cost and Variable cost.
8. Variable cost remains fixed per unit.
9. Contribution margin is equal to Sales – Fixed cost.
10. Variable cost per unit is variable.
[Ans: T, T, T, T, T, F, F, T, F, F]

Cost Accounting
Fill in the Blanks:
1. Variable cost per unit is ______________.
2. Marginal cost is the ___________ of sales over contribution.
3. P/V ratio is the ratio of __________________ to sales.
4. If variable cost to sales ratio is 60%, P/V ratio is _____________.
5. ___________ + Variable overhead = Marginal Cost.
6. When sales are ` 300,000 and variable cost is ` 180,000, P/V ratio will be ____________.
7. Variable cost remains __________________.
8. Margin of safety is _____________.
9. Breakeven point is ____________.
10. Contribution margin equals to _____________________.
[Ans: Fixed, Excess, Contribution, 40, Prime cost, 40%, fixed per unit, Actual sales-
Sales at breakeven point, Total Fixed cost/ P/V ratio, Sales – Variable cost.]
Column A Column B
1. Indifference point (in units) A Difference in Fixed Cost/ Difference in P/V ratio
2. Breakeven point (in Value) B Fixed Cost / Contribution per unit
3. Variable cost per unit C Total sales less BEP sales
4. P/V ratio D Marginal Cost
5. Prime cost + Variable overhead E Fixed Cost / P/V ratio
6. Breakeven point (in Quantity) F Difference in Fixed Cost/ Difference in
contribution per unit
7. Indifference point (in Value) G Total contribution /Total Sales Value *100
8. Shut Down point (in Quantity) H Avoidable Fixed Cost/ P/V Ratio
9. Shut Down point (in value) I Fixed
10. Margin of Safety J Avoidable Fixed Cost/ Contribution per unit
[Ans: F, E, I, G, D, B, A, J, H, C]

6.2 STANDARD COSTING & VARIANCE ANLYSIS
Standard Cost:
Standard Cost is defined as “the predetermined cost that is calculated at the management’s standards
of efficient operations and the relevant necessary expenditure”.
From this we understand that it is the cost calculated when all the people working in the organisation
to their utmost, the expenditure incurred for producing the product can be taken as standard cost.
The optimum efficiency can not at all time exists. Therefore, optimum efficiency is assumed and that is
why standard cost is called assumed cost. Further, all the inputs of cost scientifically analysed using so
many industrial engineering techniques such as work measurement, method study, time and motion
study, merit rating, job evaluation and other scientific techniques, it can also be called as Scientific Cost.
Standard Costs and Estimated Costs:
The distinction between Standard Costs and Estimated Costs should be clearly understood. While both
Standard Costs and Estimated Costs are predetermined costs, their objectives are different. The main
differences between the two types of costs are:
1. Estimated Costs are intended to determine what the costs ‘will’ be. Standard Costs aim at what
costs ‘should’ be.
2. Estimated Costs are based on average of past actual figures adjusted for anticipated changes
in future. Anticipated wastes, spoilage and inefficiencies, all of which tend to increase costs are
included in estimated costs. Standard Costs are planned costs determined on a scientific basis
and they are based upon certain assumed conditions of efficiency and other factors.
3. In Estimated Costing Systems, stress is not so much on cost control, but costs are used for other
purposes such as fixation of prices to be quoted in advance. Standard Costs serve as effective
tools for cost control.
Setting of Standard Costs:
While setting production costs standards, the following preliminaries should be considered:
a. Study of the technical and operational aspects of the concern, such as methods of manufacture
and the processes involved, management of organisation and line of assignment of responsibilities,
division of the organisation into cost centres, units of measurement of input and output, anticipation
of wastes, rejections and losses, expected efficiency, and capacity likely to be utilized.
b. Review of the existing costing system and the cost records and forms in use.
c. The type of standard to be used, i.e, whether current, basic, or normal standard costs are to be set.
The choice of a particular type of standard will depend upon two factors, viz. which type would
be most effective for cost control in the organization, and whether the standards will be merged
in the accounting system or kept outside the accounts as statistical data.
d. Proper classification of the accounts so that variances may be determined in the manner desired.
e. Fixation of responsibility for setting standards. As definite responsibility for variances from standards
is ultimately to be laid on individuals or departments, it is but natural that all those individuals or
departments should be associated with the setting of standards.
Stock Valuation:
The function of a Balance Sheet is to give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of a company on
a particular date. A true and fair view also implies the consistent application of generally accepted
principles. Stocks valued at standard costs are required to be adjusted at actual costs in the following
circumstances:

Cost Accounting
(a) As per Accounting Standards – 2, closing stock to be valued either at cost price or at net realisable
value (NRV) whichever is less.
(b) The standard costing system introduced is still in an experimental stage and the variances merely
represent deviations from poorly set standards.
(c) Occurrence of certain variances which are beyond the control of the management. (Unless the
stocks are adjusted for uncontrollable factors, the values are not correctly started).
Maintenance of Raw Material Stock at Standard Cost:
In the single plan, the inventory in the stores ledger may be carried either at standard costs or at actual.
Although both the methods are in use, the consensus is in favour of standard costs. The advantages of
adopting standard costs for inventory valuation are as follows:
a. Stores ledger may be maintained in quantities only and the standard price noted at the top in the
ledger sheets. This economises the use of forms as well as reduces clerical costs as no columns for
rates need be maintained.
b. Pricing of materials requisitions is simplified as only one standard price for each item of material is
required to be used.
c. Price variance is promptly revealed at the time of purchase of material.
The disadvantages are:
a. The stores ledger does not reveal the current prices.
b. If the material stock is shown in the Balance Sheet at standard costs, the variances have the effect
of distorting the profit or loss. Standard cost of the closing inventory is required to be adjusted to
actual cost based on price variance to comply with the statutory requirement of the Companies
Act, 2013.
c. A revision of the standard necessitates revision of the cost of the inventory.
Difference between Standard Costing and Budgetary Control:

Like Budgetary Control, Standard Costing assume that costs are controllable along definite lines of
supervision and responsibility and it aims at managerial control by comparison of actual performances
with suitable predetermined yardsticks. The basic principles of cost control, viz., setting up of targets
or standards, measurement of performance, comparison of actual with the targets and analysis
and reporting of variances are common to both standard costing and budgetary control systems.
Both techniques are of importance in their respective fields are complementary to each other. Thus,
conceptually there is not much of a difference between standard costs and budgeted and the terms
budgeted performance and standard performance mean, for many concerns one and the same thing.
Budgets are usually based on past costs adjusted for anticipated future changes but standard costs
are of help in the preparation of production costs budgets. In fact, standards are often indispensable
in the establishment of budgets. On the other hand, while setting standard overhead rates of standard
costing purposes, the budgets framed for the overhead costs may be made use of with modifications,
if necessary. Thus, standard costs and budgets are interrelated but not inter-dependent.
Despite the similarity in the basic principles of Standard Costing and Budgetary Control, the two systems
vary in scope and in the matter of detailed techniques. The difference may be summarized as follows:
1. A system of Budgetary Control may be operated even if no Standard Costing system is in use in
the concern.
2. While standard is an unit concept, budget is a total concept.
3. Budgets are the ceilings or limits of expenses above which the actual expenditure should not
normally rise; if it does, the planned profits will be reduced. Standards are minimum targets to be
attained by actual performance at specified efficiency.

4. Budgets are complete in as much as they are framed for all the activities and functions of a concern
such as production, purchase, selling and distribution, research and development, capital utilisation,
etc. Standard Costing relates mainly to the function of production and the related manufacturing
costs.
5. A more searching analysis of the variances from standards is necessary than in the case of variations
from the budget.
6. Budgets are indices, adherence to which keeps a business out of difficulties. Standards are pointers
to further possible improvements.
Advantages of Standard Costing:
The advantages derived from a system of standard costing are tabulated below:
1. Standard Costing system establishes yard-sticks against which the efficiency of actual performances
is measured.
2. The standards provide incentive and motivation to work with greater effort and vigilance for
achieving the standard. This increase efficiency and productivity all round.
3. At the very stage of setting the standards, simplification and standardisation of products, methods,
and operations are effected and waste of time and materials is eliminated. This assists in managerial
planning for efficient operation and benefits all the divisions of the concern.
4. Costing procedure is simplified. There is a reduction in paper work in accounting and less number
of forms and records are required.
5. Cost are available with promptitude for various purposes like fixation of selling prices, pricing of inter-
departmental transfers, ascertaining the value of costing stocks of work-in-progress and finished
stock and determining idle capacity.
6. Standard Costing is an exercise in planning - it can be very easily fitted into and used for budgetary
planning.
7. Standard Costing system facilities delegation of authority and fixation of responsibility for each
department or individual. This also tones up the general organisation of the concern.
8. Variance analysis and reporting is based on the principles of management by exception. The top
management may not be interested in details of actual performance but only in the variances
form the standards, so that corrective measures may be taken in time.
9. When constantly reviewed, the standards provide means for achieving cost reduction.
10. Standard costs assist in performance analysis by providing ready means for preparation of
information.
11. Production and pricing policies may be formulated in advance before production starts. This helps
in prompt decision-making.
12. Standard costing facilitates the integration of accounts so that reconciliation between cost accounts
and financial accounts may be eliminated.
13. Standard Costing optimizes the use of plant capacities, current assets and working capital.
Limitations of standard costing:
1. Establishment of standard costs is difficult in practice.
2. In course of time, sometimes even in a short period the standards become rigid.
3. Inaccurate, unreliable and out of date standards do more harm than benefit.
4. Sometimes, standards create adverse psychological effects. If the standard is set at high level, its
non achievement would result in frustration and build-up of resistance.

Cost Accounting
5. Due to the play of random factors, variances cannot sometimes be properly explained, and it is
difficult to distinguish between controllable and non-controllable expenses.
6. Standard costing may not sometimes be suitable for some small concerns. Where production cannot
be carefully scheduled, frequent changes in production conditions result in variances. Detailed
analysis of all of which would be meaningless, superfluous and costly.
7. Standard costing may not, sometimes, be suitable and costly in the case of industries dealing
with non-standardized products and for repair jobs which keep on changing in accordance with
customer’s specifications.
8. Lack of interest in standard costing on the part of the management makes the system practically
ineffective. This limitation, of course, applies equally in the case of any other system which the
management does not accept wholeheartedly.
Material Cost Variance
Usage Price
Variance Variance
Sub-usage Mix Yield
Labour Cost Variance
Efficiency Rate
Variance Variance
Sub-efficiency Mix Yield

(or)
Gang (or)
Composition
Idle Time Variance
Direct Materials Cost Variance: Direct materials cost variance is the difference between the actual direct
material cost incurred and the standard direct material cost specified for the production achieved.
1. Direct Materials Price Variance: The difference between the actual and standard price per unit of
the material applied to the actual quantity of material purchased or used.
Direct materials price variance = (Standard Price minus Actual Price) x Actual Quantity, or
= (SP-AP) AQ
= (Standard Price x Actual Quantity) minus (Actual Price x Actual Quantity)
= (AQSP-AQAP)

Causes of Material Price Variance:

a. Change in basic purchase price of material.
b. Change in quantity of purchase or uneconomical size of purchase order.
c. Rush order to meet shortage of supply, or purchase in less or more favourable market.
d. Failure to take advantage of off-season price, or failure to purchase when price is cheaper.
e. Failure to obtain (or availability of) cash and trade discounts or change in the discount rates.
f. Weak purchase organisation.
g. Payment of excess or less freight.
h. Transit losses and discrepancies, if purchase price is inflated to include the loss.
i. Change in quality or specification of material purchased.
j. Use of substitute material having a higher or lower unit price.
k. Change in materials purchase, upkeep, and store-keeping cost. (This is applicable only when such
changes are allocated to direct material costs on a predetermined or standard cost basis.)
l. Change in the pattern or amounts of taxes and duties.
2. Direct Materials Usage Variance: The difference between the actual quantity used and the amount
which should have been used, valued at standard price.
Direct materials usage variance = (Standard Quantity for actual output x Standard Price) minus
(Standard Price x Actual Quantity)
= SQSP-AQSP or
= Standard Price x (Standard Quantity for actual output minus Actual Quantity)
= SP (SQ-AQ)
Causes of Materials Usage Variance:
a. Variation in usage of materials due to inefficient or careless use, or economic use of materials.
b. Change in specification or design of product.
c. Inefficient and inadequate inspection of raw materials.
d. Purchase of inferior materials or change in quality of materials
e. Rigid technical specifications and strict inspection leading to more rejections which require more
materials for rectification.
f. Inefficiency in production resulting in wastages
g. Use of substitute materials.
h. Theft or pilferage of materials.
i. Inefficient labour force leading to excessive utilisation of materials.
j. Defective machines, tools, and equipments, and bad or improper maintenance leading to
breakdowns and more usage of materials.
k. Yield from materials in excess of or less than that provided as the standard yield.
l. Faulty materials processing. Timber, for example, if not properly seasoned may be wasted while
being used in subsequent processes.
m. Accounting errors, e.g. when materials returned from shop or transferred from one job to another
are not properly accounted for.

Cost Accounting
n. Inaccurate standards
o. Change in composition of a mixture of materials for a specified output.
(i) Direct Materials Mix Variance: One of the reasons for materials usage variance is the change in
the composition of the materials mix. The difference between the actual quantity of material used
and the standard proportion, priced at standard price.
Mix variance = (Revised Standard Quantity minus Actual Quantity) x Standard Price.
= RSQSP-AQSP
(ii) Direct Materials Yield Variance: Yield variance is the difference between the standard cost of
production achieved and the actual total quantity of materials used, multiplied by the standard
weighted average price per unit.
Material yield variance = (Standard Yield for Actual Mix minus Actual Yield) x Standard Yield Price
(Standard yield price is obtained by dividing the total cost of the standard units by the total cost
of the standard mixture by the total quantity (number of physical units).
(1) (2) (3) (4)

SQSP RSQSP AQSP AQAP
(1-2) (2-3)
(1-3) (3-4)
(1-4)
Where
SQ = Standard Quantity for Actual Production or Output
SP = Standard Price
AQ = Actual Quantity of Materials Consumed
AP = Actual Price
RSQ = Revised Standard Quantity
1. SQSP = Standard Cost of Standard Material
2. RSQSP = Revised Standard Cost of Standard Material
3. AQSP = Standard cost of Actual Material
4. AQAP = Actual Cost of Actual Material
(a) Material Sub-Usage or Yield Variance = 1-2
(b) Material Mix Variance = 2-3
(c) Material Usage Variance = 1-3
(d) Material Price Variance = 3-4
(e) Material Cost Variance = 1-4
II. Direct Labour Cost Variance: Direct Labour Cost Variance (also termed Direct Wage Variance) is
the difference between the actual direct wages incurred and the standard direct wages specified
for the activity achieved.

1. Direct Labour Rate Variance (Wage Rate Variance): The difference between the actual and
standard wage rate per hour applied to the total hours worked.
Wages rate variance = (Standard Rate minus Actual Rate) x Actual Hours
= (SR-AR) x AH
= SRAH-ARAH
Causes of Direct Labour Rate Variances:
a. Change in basic wage structure or change in piece-work rate. These will give rise to a variance
till such time the standards are not revised.
b. Employment of workers of grades and rates of pay different from those specified, due to
shortage of labour of the proper category, or through mistake, or due to retention of surplus
labour.
c. Payment of guaranteed wages to workers who are unable to earn their normal wages if such
guaranteed wages form part of direct labour cost.
d. Use of a different method of payment, e.g. payment at day-rates while standards are based
on piece-work method of remuneration.
e. Higher or lower rates paid to casual and temporary workers employed to meet seasonal
demands, or urgent or special work.
f. New workers not being allowed full normal wage rates.
g. Overtime and night shift work in excess of or less than the standard, or where no provision
has been made in the standard. This will be applicable only if overtime and shift differential
payments form part of the direct labour cost.
h. The composition of a gang as regards the skill and rates of wages being different from that
laid down in the standard.
2. Direct Labour Efficiency Variance (also termed Labour Time Variance): The difference between
the standard hours which should have been worked and the hours actually worked, valued at the
standard wage rate.
Direct Labour Efficiency Variance = (Standard Hours for Actual Production minus Actual Hours) x
Standard Rate
= (SH-AH) x SR
= SRSH-SRAH
Causes for Labour Efficiency Variance:
a. Lack of proper supervision or strict supervision than specified.
b. Poor working conditions.
c. Delays due to waiting for materials, tools, instructions, etc. if not treated as idle time.
d. Defective machines, tools and other equipments.
e. Machine break-down, if not booked to idle time.
f. Work on new machines requiring less time than provided for, till such time standard is not
revised.
g. Basic inefficiency of workers due to low morale, insufficient training, faulty instructions, incorrect
scheduling of jobs, etc.
h. Use of non-standard material requiring more or less operation time.

Cost Accounting
i. Carrying out operations not provided for a booking them as direct wages.
j. Incorrect standards
k. Wrong selection of workers, i.e., not employing the right type of man for doing a job.
l. Increase in labour turnover.
m. Incorrect recording of performances, i.e., time or output.
i. Direct Labour Composition or Mix or Gang Variance: This is a sub-variance of labour efficiency
variance. This variance arises due to change in the composition of a standard gang, or, combination
of labour force
Mix or Gang or Composition Variance = (Actual Hours at Standard Rate of Standard Gang) minus
(Actual Hours at Standard Rate of Actual Gang)
ii. Direct Labour Yield Variance: Just as material yield variance is calculated, similarly labour yield
variance can also be known. It is the variation in labour cost on account of increase or decrease
in yield or output as composed to the relative standard. The formula is –
Standard Output Actual

Direct Labour Yield Variance = Standard Cost Per Unit ×
for Actual Mix
– Output
3. Idle time variance: This variance which forms a portion of wages efficiency variance, is represented
by the standard cost of the actual hours for which the workers remain idle due to abnormal
circumstances.
Idle time variance = (Standard rate x Actual hours paid for) minus (Standard rate x Actual hours
worked) or
= Standard Rate x Idle Hours
(1) (2) (3) (4)
SRSH SRRSH SRAH ARAH
(1-2) (2-3)
(1-3) (3-4)
(1-4)

SR = Standard Rate of Labour Per Hour

SH = Standard Hours for Actual Production or Output
RSH = Revised Standard Hours
AH = Actual Hours
AR = Actual Rate of Labour per Hour
1. SRSH = Standard Cost of Standard Labour
2. SRRSH = Revised Standard Cost of Labour
3. SRAH = Standard Cost of Actual Labour

4. ARAH = Actual Cost of Labour

a. Labour Sub-Efficiency or Yield Variance = 1-2
b. Labour Mix or Gang or Composition Variance = 2-3
c. Labour Efficiency Variance = 1-3
d. Labour Rate Variance = 3-4
e. Labour Cost Variance = 1-4
Idle Time Variance = Idle Time Hours x Standard Rate per Hour.
It is to be noted that this is the part and parcel of efficiency ratio and always it is adverse.
Illustration 1:
Product A required 10 kg of material at a rate of `4 per kg. The actual consumption of material for the
manufacturing product A comes to 12 kg of material at the rate of `4.50 per kg.
Calculate: (a) Material Cost Variance
(b) Material Usage Variance
(c) Material Price Variance.
Solution:
Computation of Required Values
Let (1) SQSP = Standard Cost of Standard Material
(2) AQSP = Standard Cost of Actual Material
(3) AQAP = Actual Cost of Material
Given Values:
SQ = Standard Quantity of Material = 10 kg
AQ = Actual Quantity of Material = 12 kg
SP = Standard Price = ` 4 per kg
AP = Actual Price = ` 4.50 per kg.
(1) SQSP = (10 x 4) = ` 40
(2) AQSP = (12 x 4) = ` 48
(3) AQAP = (12 x 4.50) = ` 54
Computation of Required Material Variances
a. Material Usage Variance = (1) – (2) = 40-48 = `8 (A)
b. Material Price Variance = (2) – (3) = 48-54 = `6 (A)
c. Material Cost Variance = (1) – (3) = 40-54 = `14 (A)

Cost Accounting
Illustration 2:
The standard quantity and standard price of raw material required for one unit of product A are given
as follows
Quantity (kg.) S.P. (`)
Material X 2 3
Material Y 4 2
The actual production and relevant data are as follows:
Material X 1,100 kgs. @ ` 3,410
Material Y 1,800 kgs. @ ` 3,960
Calculate Variances. Actual production was 500 units.
Solution:
Analysis of Given Data
Amount (`)
Standard Data Actual Data

Material Quantity (Kg.) Price Value Quantity (Kg.) Price Value
A 1000 (500 x 2) 3.00 3,000 1,100 3.10 3,410
B 2000 (500 x 4) 2.00 4,000 1,800 2.20 3,960
3000 7,000 2,900 7,370
Amount (`)
Material SQSP RSQSP AQSP AQAP

X 966.67 x 3 = 2,900 1,100 x 3
Y 1933.33 x 2 = 3,867 1,800 x 2

Total 7,000 6,767 6,900 7,370
Where (1) SQSP = Standard Cost of Standard Material = ` 7,000

(2) RSQSP = Revised Standard Cost of Material = ` 6,767
(3) AQSP = Standard Cost of Actual Material = ` 6,900
(4) AQAP = Actual Cost of Material = ` 7,370
Computation of Variances
(a) Material Sub-usage variance = (1) – (2) = 7,000 – 6,767 = ` 233 (F)
(b) Material Mix variance = (2) – (3) = 6,767 – 6,900 = ` 133 (A)
(c) Material Usage variance = (1) – (3) = 7,000 – 6,900 = `100 (F)
(d) Material price variance = (3) – (4) = 6,900 – 7,370 = ` 470 (A)
(e) Material cost variance = (1) – (4) = 7,000 – 7,370 = ` 370 (A)

Illustration 3:
From the following you are required to calculate
(a) Material Usage Variance
(b) Material Price Variance
(c) Material Cost Variance
Quantity of material purchased 3,000 units
Value of material purchased ` 9,000
Standard quantity of material required
for one tonne of finished product 25 units
Standard rate of material ` 2 per unit
Opening stock of material NIL
Closing stock of material 500 units
Finished production during the period 80 tonnes
Solution:
Given Values:
SQ = Standard Quantity for Actual Production = 25 x 80 = 2,000 units.
AQ = Actual Quantity = 2,500 units (3,000 units – 500 units)
SP = Standard Price = ` 2
AP = Actual Price = ` 3
(1) SQSP = Standard Cost of Standard Material = 2,000 x 2 = `4,000
(2) AQSP = Standard Cost of Actual Material = 2,500 x 2 = ` 5,000
(3) AQAP = Actual Cost of Material = ` 7,500 (2,500 units × ` 3 per unit)
Computation Of Material Variances:
a. Material usage variance = (1) – (2) = ` (4,000 – 5,000) = ` 1,000 (A)
b. Material price variance = (2) – (3) = ` (5,000 – 7,500) = ` 2,500 (A)
c. Material cost variance = (1) – (3)= ` (4,000 – 7,500) = ` 3,500 (A)
Illustration 4:
From the following information, compute (a) Mix, Price and Usage Variances.
Quantity (Kg.) Unit Rate (`) Total (`)

Standard:
Material A 10 2 20
Material B 20 3 60
Material C 20 6 120
50 200
Actual:
5 3 15
Material A
10 6 60
Material B
Material C 15 5 75
30 150

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Amount (`)
Materials (1) SQSP (2) RSQSP (3) AQSP (4) AQAP

A 10 x 2 = 20 6 x 2 = 12 5 x 2 = 10 5 x 3 = 15
B 20 x 3 = 60 12 x 3 = 36 10 x 3 = 30 10 x 6 = 60
C 20 x 6 = 120 12 x 6 = 72 15 x 6 = 90 15 x 5 = 75
200 120 130 150
RSQ For A = 10/50 × 30 = 6 units

RSQ For B = 20/50 x 30 = 12 units
RSQ For C = 20/50 x 30 =12 units
Where (1) SQSP = Standard Cost of Standard Material = ` 200
(2) RSQSP = Revised Standard Cost of Material = ` 120
(3) AQSP = Standard Cost of Actual Material = ` 130
(4) AQAP = Actual Cost of Material = ` 150
Computation of Required Variances:
(a) Material Sub-Usage Variance = (1) – (2) = ` 200 – ` 120 = `80 (F)
(b) Material Mix Variance = (2) – (3) = ` 120 – ` 130 = `10 (A)
(c) Material Usage Variance = (1) – (3) = ` 200 – `130 = `70 (F)
(d) Material Price Variance = (3) – (4) = `130 – `150 = `20 (A)
(e) Material Cost Variance = (1) – (4) = ` 200 – ` 150 = `50 (F)
Illustration 5:
From the data given below, calculate the Material Price Variance, Material Usage Variance and
Material Mix Variance:
Raw Material Standard Actual

A 40 units @ `50 per unit 50 units @ `50 per unit
B 60 units @ `40 per unit 60 units @ `45 per unit
Solution: Amount (`)
Material Q P Value Q P Value

A 40 50 2,000 50 50 2,500
B 60 40 2,400 60 45 2,700
100 4,400 110 5,200
Computation of Required Values Amount (`)
Material (1)SQSP (2) RSQSP (3) AQSP (4) AQAP

A 40 x 50 = 2,000 44 x 50 = 2,200 50 x 50 = 2,500 50 x 50 = 2,500
B 60 x 40 = 2,400 66 x 40 = 2,640 60 x 40 = 2,400 60 x 45 = 2,700
4,400 4,840 4,900 5,200

RSQ For A = 40/100 x 110 = 44 units
RSQ For B = 60/100 ×110 = 66 units
Where (1) SQSP = Standard Cost of Standard Material = ` 4,400
(3) AQSP = standard Cost of Actual Material = ` 4,900
(4) AQAP = Actual Cost of Material = ` 5,200

(a) Material Sub-Usage Variance = (1) – (2) = ` 440 (A) [` 4,400 – ` 4,840]
(b) Material Mix Variance = (2) – (3) = ` 60 (A) [` 4,840 – ` 49,00]
(c) Material Usage Variance = (1) – (3) = ` 500 (A) [` 4,400 – ` 4,900]
(d) Material Price Variance = (3) – (4) = ` 300 (A) [` 4,900 – ` 5,200]
(e) Material Cost Variance = (1) – (4) = ` 800 (A) [` 4,400 – ` 5,200]
Illustration 6:
The standard material cost for 100 kg of chemical D is made up :
Chemical A 30 kg. @ ` 4 per kg
Chemical B 40 kg. @ ` 5 per kg
Chemical C 80 kg. @ ` 6 per kg
In a batch 500 kg. of chemical D were produced from a mix of

Chemical A 140 kg. @ ` 588
Chemical B 220 kg. @ ` 1,056
Chemical C 440 kg. @ ` 2,860
How do you yield mix and price of factors contribute to the variance in the actual cost per 100 kg. of
chemical D over the standard cost ?
Solution:
Amount (`)
Chemical Standard Data Actual Data

Quantity Price Value Quantity Price Value
A 30 4 120 28 117.60
B 40 5 200 44 211.20
C 80 6 480 88 572.00
150 800 160 900.80
Less: Loss 50 - 60 -
100 800 100 900.80

Cost Accounting

Amount (`)
Chemical (1) SQSP (`) (2) RSQSP (`) (3) AQSP (`) (4) AQAP (`)
A 30 × 4 =120 32.00 x 4 = 128.00 28 x 4 = 112.00 117.60
B 40 × 5 = 200 42.67 x 5 = 213.35 44 x 5 = 220.00 211.20
C 80 × 6 = 480 85.33 x 6 = 512.00 88 x 6 = 528.00 572.20
800.00 853.35 860.00 900.80
Computation of RSQ:
 SQ for that product 
RSQ =   x AQ for that product
 SQ for all product 
 30 
For A =   x 160 = 32.00 units.
 150 
 40 
For B =   x 160 = 42.67 units.
 150 
 80 
For C =   x 160 = 85.33 units.
 150 
Where (1) SQSP = Standard cost for Standard material = `800

(2) RSQSP = Revised standard cost of material = ` 853.35
(3) AQSP = Standard cost of actual material = ` 860.00
(4) AQAP = Actual cost of material = ` 900.80
Computation of Required Variances
(a) Material Yield variance = (1) – (2) = `53.35 (A) [`800 – `853.35]
(b) Material Mix variance = (2) – (3) = `6.65 (A) [`853.35 – `860]
(c) Material usage variance = (1) – (3) = `60 (A) [`800 – `860]
(d) Material price variance = (3) – (4) = `40.80 (A) [`860 – `900.80]
(e) Material cost variance = (1) – (4) = `100.80 (A) [`800 – `900.80]
Illustration 7:
Material Standard Quantity Price Total

(Kg.) (`) (`)
A 500 6.00 3,000
B 400 3.75 1,500
C 300 3 900
1,200
5,400
Less: 10% Normal loss 120
1,080 5,400

Material Actual Quantity Price Total

A 400 6.00 2,400
B 500 3.60 1,800
C 400 2.80 1,120
1,300
5,320
Less: Actual loss 220
1,080 5,320
Calculate:
a. Material Cost Variance
b. Material Price Variance
c. Material Mix Variance
d. Material Yield Variance
e. Material Usage Variance
Solution:
Amount (`)
SQSP (1) RSQSP (2) AQSP (3) AQAP (4)

A 3,000 541.67 x 6 = 3,250 400 x 6 = 2,400 2,400
B 1,500 433.33 x 3.75 = 1,625 500 x 3.75 = 1,875 1,800
C 900 325 x 3 = 975 400 x 3 = 1,200 1,120
5400 5,850 5,475 5,320
Computation of RSQ:
 500 
For A =   x 1,300 = 541.67 units.
 1,200 
 400 
For B =   x 1,300 = 433.33 units.
 1,200 
 300 
For C =   x 1,300 = 325.00 units.
 1,200 
Where
1. SQSP = Standard Cost for Standard Material = ` 5,400
2. RSQSP = Revised Standard Cost of Material = ` 5,850
3. AQSP = Standard Cost of Actual Material = ` 5,475
4. AQAP = Actual Cost of Material = ` 5,320
Computation of Required Variances
a. Material Yield Variance = (1) – (2) = ` 450 (A) [`(5,400 – 5,850)]
b. Material Mix Variance = (2) – (3) = ` 375 (F) [`(5,850 – 5,475)]
c. Material usage variance = (1) – (3) = `75 (A) [`(5,400 – 5,475)]
d. Material price variance = (3) – (4) = `155 (F) [`(5,475 – 5,320)]
e. Material cost variance = (1) – (4) = `80 (F) [`(5,400 – 5,320)]

Cost Accounting
Illustration 8:
A manufacturing concern which has adopted standard costing furnishes the following information.
Standard
Material for 70 Kg of finished product of 100 Kg
Price of materials Re.1 per kg
Actual
Output 2,10,000 kg.

Material used 2,80,000 kg.
Cost of materials ` 2,52,000
Calculate:
a. Material Usage Variance
b. Material Price Variance
c. Material cost Variance
Solution:
Amount (`)
(1) SQSP (2) AQSP (3) AQAP

[2,10,000 x 100/70] x 1 2,80,000 x 1
3,00,000 2,80,000 2,52,000

a. Material Usage Variance = (1) – (2) = ` 20,000 (F)
b. Material Price Variance = (2) – (3) = ` 28,000(F)
c. Material Cost Variance = (1) – (3) = ` 48,000(F)
Illustration 9:
The standard set for material consumption was 100kg. @ ` 2.25 per kg.
In a cost period:
Opening stock was 100 kg. @ ` 2.25 per kg.
Purchases made 500 kg. @ ` 2.15 per kg.
Consumption 110 kg.
Calculate: a) Usage b) Price variance
1) When variance is calculated at point of purchase
2) When variance is calculated at point of issue on FIFO basis
3) When variance is calculated at point of issue on LIFO basis

Solution:
a) Computation of Material Usage Variance
Material Usage Variance = SQSP – AQSP
= SP (SQ – AQ)
= 2.25(100-110)
= 22.50 (A)
b) Computation of Price variance:
1) When Variance is calculated at the point of purchase:
Price variance = AQSP – AQAP
= (110 x 2.25) – (110 x 2.15)
= 11 (F)
2) When variance is calculated at the point of issue on FIFO basis
= (110 x 2.25) – ([100 x 2.25]+[10 x 2.15])
= 1 (F)
3) When variance is calculated at the point of issue on LIFO basis
= (110 x 2.25) – (110 x 2.15)
= 247.50-236.50
= 11 (F)
Illustration 10:
Using the following information calculate each of three labour variance for each department.
Dept X Dept Y
Gross wages direct (`) 28,080 19,370
Standard hours produced 8,640 6,015
Standard rate per hour (`) 3 3.40
Actual hours worked 8,200 6,395
Solution:
Dept. X : Computation of Required Values
SRSH (1) SRAH (2) ARAH (3)

3 x 8640 3 x 8200
` 25,920 ` 24,600 ` 28080
1. SRSH = Standard Cost of Standard Labour

2. SRAH = Standard Cost of Actual Labour

Cost Accounting
3. ARAH = Actual Cost of Labour

a. Labour Efficiency Variance = (1) – (2) = ` 1,320 (F) [` (25,920 – 24,600)]
b. Labour Rate Variance = (2) – (3) = ` 3,480 (A) [` (24,600 – 28,080)]
c. Labour Cost Variance = (1) – (3) = ` 2,160 (A) [` (25920 – 28,080)]
Dept. Y Computation of Required Values
Amount (`)
SRSH (1) SRAH (2) ARAH (3)

3.4 x 6,015 3.4 x 6,395
` 20,451 ` 21,743 ` 19,370
a. Labour efficiency variance = (1) – (2) = ` 1,292 (A)
b. Labour rate variance = (2) – (3) = ` 2,373 (F)
c. Labour Cost Variance = (1) – (3) = ` 1,081 (F)
Illustration 11:
Calculate variances from the following:
STANDARD ACTUAL
INPUT MATERIAL (`)/KG TOTAL INPUT MATERIAL (`)/KG TOTAL
400 A @ 50 20,000 420 A @ 45 18,900
200 B @20 4,000 240 B @ 25 6,000
100 C @15 1,500 90 C @15 1,350
700 25,500 750 26,250
LABOUR HOURS LABOUR HOURS
100 @ `2 per hour 200 120 @ `2.50 per hour 300
200 woman @ ` 1.50 300 500 240 woman @ ` 1.60 384 684
25 Normal Loss 75 Actual Loss
675 26000 675 26,934
Solution:
Calculation of Material Variances:
Amount (`)
(1) (2) (3) (4)

SQSP RSQSP AQSP AQAP
A 428.57 x 50 420 x 50
B 214.29 x 20 240 x 20
C 107.14 x 15 90 x 15
A 20,000 21,429 21,000 18,900
B 4,000 4,289 4,800 6,000
C 1,500 1,607 1,350 1,350
25,500 27,325 27,150 26,250

RSQ for
A = 400/700 x 750 = 428.67 units
B = 200/700 x 750 = 214.29 units
C = 100/700 x 750 = 107.14 units
1. SQSP = Standard Cost of Standard Material = ` 25,500
2. RSQSP= Revised Standard Cost of Material = ` 27,325
3. AQSP= Standard Cost of Actual Material = ` 27,150
4. AQAP = Actual Cost of Material = ` 26,250
a. Material Yield Variance (1-2) = ` 1,825 (A)
b. Material Mix Variance (2-3) = ` 175 (F)
c. Material Usage Variance (1-3) = ` 1,650 (A)
d. Material Price Variance (3-4) = ` 900 (F)
e. Material Cost Variance (1-4) = ` 750 (A)
Calculation of Labour Variances:

Amount (`)
(1) (2) (3) (4)

SRSH SRRSH SRAH ARAH
Men 2 x 107.14 2 x 120
Women 1.50 x 214.28 1.50 x 240
Men 200 214.28 240 300
Women 300 321.42 360 384
` 500 ` 536 ` 600 ` 684
RSH for
Men = 100/700 x 750 = 107.14 units.
Women = 200/700 x 750 = 214.28 units.
1. SRSH = Standard Cost of Standard Labour = ` 500
2. SRRSH = Revised Standard Cost of Labour = ` 536
3. SRAH = Standard Cost of Actual Labour = ` 600
4. ARAH = Actual Cost of Labour = ` 684
a. Labour Yield Variance (1-2) = ` 36 (A)
b. Labour Mix Variance (2-3) = ` 64 (A)
c. Labour Efficiency Variance (1-3) = ` 100 (A)
d. Labour Rate Variance (3-4) = ` 84 (A)
e. Labour Cost Variance (1-4) = ` 184 (A)

Cost Accounting
Illustration 12:
The standard labour complement and the actual labour complement engaged in a week for a job
are as under:
Skilled Semi-skilled Unskilled
workers workers workers
a) Standard no. of workers in the gang 32 12 6
b) Standard wage rate per hour (`) 3 2 1
c) Actual no. of workers employed in the gang during
28 18 4
the week
d) Actual wage rate per hour (`) 4 3 2
During the 40 hour working week the gang produced 1,800 standard labour hours of work. Calculate
1) Labour Efficiency Variance 2) Mix Variance
3) Rate of Wages Variance 4) Labour Cost Variance
Solution:
Amount (`)
Standard Data Actual Data

Hours Rate Value Hours Rate Value
Skilled 32 × 40 = 1,280 3 3,840 28 × 40 = 1,120 4 4,480
Semi skilled 12 × 40 = 480 2 960 18 × 40 = 720 3 2,160
Unskilled 6 × 40 = 240 1 240 4 × 40 = 160 2 320
2,000 5,040 2,000 6,960
Amount (`)
SRSH (1) SRRSH (2) SRAH (3) ARAH (4)

Men 3 x 1,152 = 3,456 3,840 3 x 1,120 = 3,360 4,480
Women 2 x 432 = 864 960 2 x 720 = 1,440 2,160
Boys 1 x 216 = 216 240 1 x 160 = 160 320
4,536 5040 4,960 6,960
Computation of SH
 SH for that worker 

SH =   x AQ for that worker
 SH for all the worker 
For Skilled worker =  1,280  × 1,800 = 1,152

 2,000 
 480 
For Semiskilled worker =  2,000  × 1,800 = 432
 
 240 
For Unskilled worker =   × 1,800 = 216
 2,000 
Where (1) SRSH = Standard Cost of Standard Labour = ` 4,536

(2) SRRSH = Revised Standard Cost of Labour = ` 5,040
(3) SRAH = Standard Cost of Actual Labour = ` 4,960
(4) ARAH = Actual Cost of Labour = ` 6,960
Computation of Labour Variances:

a. Labour Sub-Efficiency Variance = (1) – (2) = ` 504 (A) [`(4,536 – 5,040)]
b. Labour Mix or Gang Variance = (2) – (3) = `80 (F) [`(5,040 – 4,960)]
c. Labour Efficiency Variance = (1) – (3) = `424 (A) [`(4,536 – 4,960)]
d. Labour Rate Variance = (3) – (4) = `2,000 (A) [`(4,960 – 6,960)]
e. Labour Cost Variance = (1) – (4) = `2,424 (A) [`(4,536 – 6,960)]
Illustration 13:
A chemical company gives you the following standard and actual data of its Chemical No.1456. You
are required to calculate variances (material).
Standard Data
450 kg. of Material A @ `20 per kg. 9,000
360 kg. of Material B @ `10 per kg. 3,600
810 12,600
2,400 Skilled hours @ `2 4,800

1,200 Unskilled hours @ `1 1,200
6,000
90 Normal loss
720 18,600
Actual Data
450 kg. of Material A @ `19 per kg. 8,550

360 kg. of Material B @ `11 per kg. 3,960
810 12,510
2,400 Skilled hours @ `2.25 5,400
1,200 Unskilled hours @ `1.25 1,500
6,900
50 Normal loss
760 19,410

Cost Accounting
Solution:
Material SQSP (1) RSQSP (2) AQSP (3) AQAP (4)

A 475 x 20 9,000 450 x 20
= 9,500 = 9,000
B 380 x 10 3,600 360 x 10
= 3,800 = 3,600
13,300 12,600 12,600 12,510
Computation of Sq:
 SQ for that material 

SQ =   × AQ for that material
 SQ for all material 
 450 
For A =   × 760 = 475 units.
 720 
 360 
For B =   × 760 = 380 units.
 720 
Where (1) SQSP = Standard Cost of standard Material = ` 13,300
(3) AQSP = Standard Cost of Actual Material = ` 12,600
(4) AQAP = Actual Cost of Material = ` 12,510.
a. Material Yield Variance = (1) – (2) = `700 (F) [`(13,300 – 12,600)]
b. Material Mix Variance = (2) – (3) = Nil [`(12,600 – 12,600)]
c. Material Usage Variance = (1) – (3) = `700 (F) [`(13,300 – 12,600)]
d. Material Price Variance = (3) – (4) = `90 (F) [`(12,600 – 12,510)]
e. Material Cost Variance = (1) – (4) = `790 (F) [`(13,300 – 12,510)]


1. Excess of actual cost over standard cost is known as
A. Abnormal effectiveness
B. Unfavourable variance
C. Favourable variance
D. None of these.
2. Difference between standard cost and actual cost is called as
A. Wastage
B. Loss
C. Variance
D. Profit
3. Standards cost is used
A. To ascertain the breakeven point
B. To establish cost-volume profit relationship
C. As a basis for price fixation and cost control through variance analysis.
4. Standard price of material per kg ` 20, standards consumption per unit of production is 5 kg.
Standard material cost for producing 100 units is
A. ` 20,000
B. ` 12,000
C. ` 8,000
D. ` 10,000
5. Standard cost of material for a given quantity of output is ` 15,000 while the actual cost of material
used is ` 16,200. The material cost variance is:
A. ` 1,200 (A)
B. ` 16,200 (A)
C. ` 15,000 (F)
D. ` 31,200 (A)
6. For the purpose of Proof, Material Cost Variance is equal to:
A. Material Usage Variance + Material Mix variance
B. Material Price Variance + Material Usage Variance
C. Material Price Variance + Material yield variance
D. Material Mix Variance + Material Yield Variance
7. Cost variance is the difference between
A. The standard cost and marginal cost
B. The standards cost and budgeted cost
C. The standards cost and the actual cost
D. None of these

Cost Accounting
8. Standard price of material per kg is ` 20, standard usage per unit of production is 5 kg. Actual
usage of production 100 units is 520 kgs, all of which was purchase at the rate of ` 22 per kg.
Material usage variance is
A. ` 400 (F)
B. ` 400 (A)
C. ` 1,040 (F)
D. ` 1,040 (A)
9. Standard price of material per kg is ` 20, standard usage per unit of production is 5 kg. Actual
usage of production 100 units is 520 kgs, all of which was purchase at the rate of ` 22 per kg.
Material cost variance is
A. 2,440 (A)
B. 1,440 (A)
C. 1,440 (F)
D. 2,300 (F)
10. Standard quantity of material for one unit of output is 10 kgs. @ ` 8 per kg. Actual output during a
given period is 800 units. The standards quantity of raw material
A. 8,000 kgs
B. 6,400 Kgs
C. 64,000 Kgs
D. None of these.
[Ans: B, C, C, D, A, B, C, B, B, A]
State whether the statements are True or False:
1. Excess of Actual cost over Standards Cost is treated as unfavourable variance.
2. Variances are calculated for both material and labour.
3. While fixing standards, normal losses and wastages are taken into account.
4. Under the system of standard costing, there is no need for variance analysis.
5. Standard costing is an ideal name given to the estimate making.
6. Standards cost, once fixed cannot be altered.
7. Predetermined standards provide a yardstick for the measurement of efficiency.
8. Material cost variance and labour cost variance are always equal.
9. Fixing standards is the work of industrial engineer or the production people and not of cost
accountant.
10. Standards costing are more profitability employed in job order industries than in process type
industries.
[Ans: T, T, T, F, F, T, T, F, F, F]

Fill in the Blanks:
1. Standard cost is a ___________ cost.
2. Standard cost when fixed is recorded on _____________ card.
3. Historical costing uses post period costs while standards costing uses _____________ costs.
4. Three types of standards are ____________________.
5. The _____________ is usually the co-ordinator of the standards committee.
6. Standards cost when fixed recorded on ________ card.
7. Basically there are two types of standards viz, a) Basic standards, and ___________.
8. When actual cost is less than the standards cost, it is known as _________________ variance.
9. Standard Costing is one of the __________________ techniques.
10. Standard means a criterion or a yardstick against which actual activity can be compared to
determine the ______________ between two.
[Ans. Predetermined, Standard cost, Predetermined, Current, basic and Normal standard, Cost
Accountants, Standard cost, Current standard, Favourable, Cost control, difference.]

Column A Column B
1. Direct material yield variance A (Standard hour for actual production minus
Actual hours) x Standard Rate
2. Direct Labour rate variance B (Actual Hours at standard rate of standard
gang) minus (Actual Hours at standards Rate of
Actual Gang)
3. Material price variance C Management by Exception
4. Variance Analysis D (Standard Rate minus Actual Rate) x Actual
hour
5. Direct labour yield variance E (Standard rate x Actual hours paid for) minus
(Standard rate x Actual hours worked)
6. Direct Labour efficiency variance F (Standard price minus Actual Price) X Actual
Quantity
7. Direct material mix variance G (Standard Quantity for actual output X Standard
Price) minus (Standard price X Actual Quantity)
8. Gang variance H Standard cost per unit x (Standard output for
actual mix – Actual output)
9. Ideal time variance I (Standard yield for actual Mix minus Actual
Yield) x Standard yields Price.
10. Direct material usage variance J (Revised Standard Quantity minus Actual
Quantity) X Standard Price
[Ans: I, D, F, C, H, A, J, B, E, G]

Cost Accounting
6.3 BUDGET AND BUDGETARY CONTROL
The literary meaning of the word Budget is a statement of income and expenditure of a certain period.
In principle, the meaning is same in the context of business also. An individual will have his own budget,
a family, a local authority, state and country etc. All will have their respective budgets. So also the
business concern must have its budget so as to attain their objectives.
CIMA defines a budget as, “A budget is a financial and/or quantitative statement, prepared prior to
a defined period of time, of the policy to be pursued during that period for the purpose of attaining a
given objective.”
Features of Budget
An analysis of the above definition reveals the following as features of the budget.
(i) A Budget must be expressed either in quantitative form i.e., the number of units of different products
or it may be expressed in rupees of each product or it may be quantitative and financial form i.e.,
the number of units and rupees of each product etc.,
(ii) It must be prepared before the time for which it is required, for example, if budget is required for
the year 2013-14, it must be prepared in the year 2012-13.
(iii) Budget must be prepared for a definite period.
(iv) Budget must be prepared in accordance with the policies of the business enterprise.
(v) Budgets are prepared normally for attaining organisational objectives, because policies are
formulated to achieve the objectives and those are translated into quantitative and financial form.
Objectives of the Budget:

(i) A budget is a blue print for the desired plan of action. Since budgets are prepared in accordance
with the policies of various functions of the organisation such as purchase, production sales etc.,
these will be helpful as plan of action to discharge the above functions.
(ii) Budgets are useful for forecasting the operating activities and financial position of a business
enterprise.
(iii) Budgets are helpful in establishing divisional and departmental responsibilities.
(iv) Budgets provide a means of coordination for the business as a whole. When the budgets are
established various factors such as production capacity, sales responsibilities, procurement of
material, deployment of labour etc., are balanced and synchronised so that all the activities are
processed according to the objective. Thereby Budgets are very much useful in coordination of
factors and functions.
(v) Budget ensures good business practice because they plan for future.
(vi) Budgets are means of communication. The complex plans that are laid down by the top
management are to be passed on to the operative personnel, those who actually put the plans
into action. Budgets are very much helpful in processing such information to the lowest personnel
in the organisation.
(vii) Budgets are devised to obtain more economical use of capital and all other inputs.
(viii) Budgets are more definite assurance of earning of the proper return on capital invested.
(ix) Budgets facilitate centralised control with delegated responsibilities and authorities. Budgets
are instruments of managerial control by means of which the management can measure the
performances in every part of the business concerns and corrective action can be taken soon
after deviations are found out.

Limitations of Budgets:
(i) Budgets fail if estimates are not accurate:
Budgets mainly depend upon the accuracy of the estimates. So estimates should be made on
the basis of all the information available. Though forecasting is not an exact science, accurate
estimates can be made by using advanced statistical techniques. Thus preparation of budgets
involves certain amount of judgment and proper interpretation of reports.
(ii) Risk of Rigidity:
Budgeting process creates a sense of rigidity in the minds of people who are working in the
organisation. But in the modern business world, which is more dynamic in nature, such rigidity will
create problems. Therefore budgeting process should also be dynamic in nature, so that it can be
updated according to the situation.
(iii) Budgeting is an expensive process:
The installation and implementation of the budgeting process involves too much time and costs.
Therefore small organisations can not afford to it. Even for large organisations cost benefit analysis
should be conducted before installing such a system. It can be adopted only if the benefits exceed
the costs.
(iv) Budgeting is not a substitute for management:
Budgeting is only a tool for management. Installation of Budgeting system does not relieve the
managers from their duties. It involves only in effective management of the resources of the
organisation. It is only a misconception to think that the introduction of budgeting is alone sufficient
to ensure success and to guarantee future profits. It is only a means for achieving the end.
(v) Continuous monitoring is required:
Installation of budgeting system does not imply that it is effectively implemented. Management
must continuously monitor the operating system (whether the goals intended) how far the plans
and budgets are helpful in achieving the goals of the organisation.
Classification of Budgets:
(A) On the basis of time:
(i) Long term budget: Though there is no exact definition of long term budget, yet we can say
that a budget prepared covering a period of more than a year can be taken as long term
budget. Of course, it may be for 3 years, 5 years, 10 years and even 20 years etc.,
(ii) Short term budget: It is a budget prepared for a period covering a year or less than a year.
(B) On the basis nature of expenditure and receipts:
(i) Capital Budget: It is a budget prepared for capital receipts and expenditure such as obtaining
loans, issue of shares, purchase of assets, etc.,
(ii) Revenue Budget: A Budget covering revenue receipts and expenses for a certain period is
called Revenue Budget. Examples: Sales, other incomes, purchases, administrative expenses
etc.,
(C) On the basis of functions:
Functional Budget: If budgets are prepared of a business concern for a certain period taking each
and every function separately such budgets are called functional budgets. Example: Production,
Sales, purchases, cost of production, cash, materials etc.

Cost Accounting
The following are the various functional budgets, some of which are briefly explained here under:
(i) Sales Budget: The sales budget is a forecast of total sales, expressed in terms of money or quantity
or both. The first step in the preparation of the sales budget is to forecast as accurately as possible,
the sales anticipated during the budget period. Sales forecasts are usually prepared by the sales
manager assisted by the market research personnel.
Factors to be considered in preparing Sales Budget:-

As business existence depends upon the sales it is going to make and therefore it is an important one to
be prepared meticulously. It is the forecast of what it can reasonably sell to its customers during the period
for which budget is prepared. The company’s profit mostly depends upon the ability to sell its products
to customers. In the present era it is indispensable to establish the demand for the product even before
it is produced. It is the sales order book that the company’s continuity depends upon. Also, a reasonable
degree of accuracy must be there in preparing a sales budget unless its sales are accurately forecast,
production estimates will also become erroneous. A good amount of experience must be necessary to
prepare the sales budget. Yet the following factors must be considered in preparing the sales budget:
(a) The locality of the market i.e., domestic or export
(b) The target customers i.e., industry or trade or a section or group of general public etc.,
(c) The product portfolio i.e., the number of products offered and their popularity among the target
customers.
(d) The market share of each product and its influence on the product portfolio and the total market
(e) The effectiveness of existing marketing policy on the current sales volume and value.
(f) The market share of competitor’s products and their effect on the company’s sales.
(g) Seasonal fluctuation in sales.
(h) Expenditure on advertisement and its impact on sales.
(ii) Production Budget: The production budget is a forecast of the production for the budget period.
Production budget is prepared in two parts, viz. production volume budget for the physical units of
the products to be manufactured and the cost of production or manufacturing budget detailing
the budgeted cost under material, labour, and factory overhead in respect of the products.
Factors to be considered in Production Budget:
Next to the sales budget, the main function of a business concern is the production and for this, a budget
is prepared simultaneously with the sales budget. It is the forecast of production during the period for
which the budget is prepared. It can also be prepared in two parts viz., production volume budget for
the physical units i.e., the number of units, the tonnes of production etc., and the cost of production
or manufacture showing details of all elements of the manufacture. While preparing the production
budget, the following factors must be taken into consideration:-
(a) Production plan:-
Production planning is an important part of the preparation of the production budget. Optimum
utilisation of plant capacity is taken by eliminating or reducing the limiting factors and thereby
effective production planning is made.
(b) The capacity of the business concern:-
It is to be ensured that the capacity of the organisation will coincide the budgeted production or
not. For this purpose, plant utilisation budget will also be necessary. The production budget must
be based on normal capacity likely to be achieved and it should not be too high or too low.

(c) Inventory Policy:-

While preparing the production budget it is also necessary to see to what extent materials are
available for producing the budgeted production. For that purpose, a purchase budget or a
purchase plan must also be studied. Similarly, on the other hand, it is also necessary to verify the
extent to which the inventory of finished goods is to be carried.
(d) Sales budgets must also be considered before preparing production budget because it may so
happen that the entire production of the concern may not be sold. In such a case the production
budget must be in line with the sales budget.
(e) A plan of the sequence of operations of production for effective preparation of a production
budget should always be there.
(f) Last, but not the least, the policy of the management should also be considered before preparing
the production budget.
Objectives and Advantages of Production budget:
• Optimum utilisation of the productive resources of the organisation;
• Maintaining low inventory which results in risk of deterioration and fall in prices;
• Focus on the factors that are necessary to frame policies and plan sequence of operations;
• Projection of policies framed, on the basis of past performance, into the future to get the desired
results;
• To see that right materials are provided at right place and at right time;
• Helps in scheduling of production so that delivery dates are met and customer satisfaction is gained;
• Helpful in preparation of projected profit and loss statement, which is useful in evaluation of
performance and profitability.
(iii) Materials Budget: The material budget includes quantities of direct materials; the quantities of each
raw material needed for each finished product in the budget period is specified. The input data
for this budget is obtained by applying standard material usage rates by each type of material to
the volume of output budgeted.
(iv) Purchase Budget: The purchase budget establishes the quantity and value of the various items of
materials to be purchased for delivery at specified points of time during the budget period taking
into account the production schedule of the concern and the inventory requirements. It takes into
account the requirements for the entire budget plan as per the sales, materials, maintenance,
research and development, and capital budgets. Purchases may be required to be made in respect
of direct and indirect materials, finished goods for resale, components and parts, and purchased
services. Before incorporation in the purchase budget, these purchase requirements should be
suitably ascertained. Purchase budget also includes material procurement budget.
(v) Cash Budget: Cash Budget is estimated receipts and expenses for a definite period, which usually
are cash sales, collection from debtors and other receipts and expenses and payment to suppliers,
payment of wages, payment of other expenses etc.
(vi) Direct Labour Budget.
(vii) Human Resources Budget.
(viii) Selling and Distribution cost budget.
(ix) Administration Cost Budget.
(x) Research and Development Cost Budget etc.

Cost Accounting
Master Budget: Master budget is the budget prepared to cover all the functions of the business
organisation. It can be taken as the integrated budget of business concern, that means, it shows the
profit or loss and financial position of the business concern such as Budgeted Profit and Loss Account,
Budgeted Balance Sheet etc. Master budget, also known as summary budget or finalized profit plan,
combines all the budgets for a period into one harmonious unit and thus, it shows the overall budget
plan. The master budget incorporates all the subsidiary functional budgets and the budgeted Profit
and Loss Account and Balance Sheet. Before the budget plan is put into operation, the master budget
is considered by the top management and revised if the position of profit disclosed therein is not found
to be satisfactory. After suitable revision is made, the master budget is finally approved and put into
action. Another view regards the budgeted Profit and Loss Account and the Balance Sheet as the
master budget.
(D) On the basis of capacity:

(i) Fixed or Rigid budget: When budgets are prepared for a fixed or standard volume of activity, they
are called static or rigid or fixed budgets. They do not change with the changes in the volume
of the output. These are prepared normally 3 months in advance of the year. However these will
not be much helpful in comparing the actual activity, as these are prepared at a fixed volume of
output. It, however, does not mean that the fixed budget is a rigid one, not to be changed at all.
Though not adjusted to the actual volume attained, a fixed budget is liable to revision if due to
business conditions undergoing a basic change or due to other reasons, actual operations differ
widely from those planned in the fixed budget.
Fixed budgets are most suited for fixed expenses. In case of discretionary costs situations where
the expenditure is optional and has no relation with the output, e.g. expenditure on research and
development, advertising, and new projects. A fixed budget has only a limited application and
is ineffective as a tool for cost control. Fixed budgets are useful where the plan permits maximum
stabilization of production, as for example, for concerns which manufacture to build up inventories
of finished products and components.
(ii) Flexible Budget: A flexible budget is a budget that is prepared for different levels of activity or
capacity utilization or volume of output. If the budgets are prepared in such a way so as to change
in accordance with the volume of output, they are called flexible budgets. These can be prepared
from fixed budget which are also called revised budgets. These are much helpful in comparison with
actual because the exact deviations are found for which timely corrective action can be taken.
The basic idea of a flexible budget is that there shall be some standard of cost and expenditures.
Thus, a budget prepared in a manner to give budgeted costs for any level of activity is known as
flexible budget. Such budget is prepared after considering the variable and fixed elements of costs
and the changes, which may be expected for each item at various levels of operations. Thus a
flexible budget recognises the difference in behaviour between fixed and variable costs in relation
to fluctuations in production or sales and is designed to change appropriately with such fluctuations.
In flexible budget, data relating to costs, expenditures may progressively be changed in any month
in accordance with actual output achieved. While preparing flexible budgets, estimates of costs
and expenditures on the basis of standards determined are made from minimum to maximum level
of operations.

Difference between Fixed and Flexible Budgets:
Fixed / Rigid Budget Flexible Budget

(i) It does not change with actual volume of It can be recasted on the basis of activity level
activity achieved. Thus it is known as rigid or to be achieved. Thus it is not rigid.
inflexible budget.
(ii) It operates on one level of activity and under It consists of various budgets for different levels
one set of conditions. It assumes that there will of activity.
be no change in the prevailing conditions,
which is unrealistic.
(iii) Here as all costs like – fixed, variable and Here analysis of variance provides useful
semi-variable are related to only one level of information as each cost is analysed according
activity so variance analysis does not give useful to its behaviour.
information.
(iv) If the budgeted and actual activity levels Flexible budgeting at different levels of activity
differ significantly, then the aspects like cost facilitates the ascertainment of cost, fixation of
ascertainment and price fixation do not give a selling price and tendering of quotations.
correct picture.
(v) Comparison of actual performance with It provides a meaningful basis of comparison
budgeted targets will be meaningless specially of the actual performance with the budgeted
when there is a difference between the two targets.
activity levels.
Principal Budget Factor:
Budgets cover all the functional areas of the organisation. For the effective implementation of the
budgetary system, all the functional areas are to be considered which are interlinked. Because of these
interlinks, certain factors have the ability to affect all other budgets. Such factor is known as principle
budget factor.
Principal Budget factor is the factor the extent of influence of which must first be assessed in order to
ensure that the functional budgets are reasonably capable of fulfillment. A principal budget factor
may be lack of demand, scarcity of raw material, non-availability of skilled labour, inadequate working
capital etc. If for example, the organisation has the capacity to produce 2500 units per annum. But the
production department is able to produce only 1800 units due to non-availability of raw materials. In this
case, non-availability of raw materials is the principal budget factor (limiting factor). If the sales manger
estimates that he can sell only 1500 units due to lack of demand. Then lack of demand is the principal
budget factor. This concept is also known as key factor, or governing factor. This factor highlights the
constraints with in which the organisation functions.
BUDGETARY CONTROL
Budgetary control is defined as “the establishment of budgets relating the responsibilities of executives
to the requirements of a policy and the continuous comparison of actual with budgeted results, either
to secure by individual action the objective of that policy or to provide a basis for its revision.”
From the above definition, the steps for Budgetary Control can be drawn as follows: -
(i) Establishment of Budgets:
Budgetary control primarily aims at preparation of various budgets such as sales Budget, production
budget, overhead expenses budget, cash budget etc.,
(ii) Responsibilities of executives:
The budgetary control system is designed to fix responsibilities on executives through preparation of
budgets.

Cost Accounting
(iii) Policy making:

The established policies of the organisation are designed as budgets so as to fix responsibility on
executives.
(iv) Comparison of actuals with budgets:
After establishing the budgets, the actuals are compared with them and any deviations, if any are
called variances.
(v) Achieving the desired result:
The desired result of the budgetary control system is comparison of actuals with the budgeted results
and the causes of variances, if any, are analysed.
(vi) Reporting to Top Management:
After the causes of Variances are analysed, the variances and their causes are reported to top
management so that the remedial action can be taken.
Advantages of Budgetary Control:
(i) Budgetary control aims at maximisation of profits through optimum utilisation of resources.
(ii) It is a technique for continuous monitoring of policies and objectives of the organisation.
(iii) It helps in reducing the costs, thereby helps in better utilisation of funds of the organisation.
(iv) All the departments of the organisation are closely coordinated through establishment of plans
resulting in smooth functioning of the organisation.
(v) Since budgets fix the responsibilities of the executives, they act as a plan of action for them there
by reducing some of their work.
(vi) It facilitates analysis of variances, thereby identifying the areas where deficiencies occur and proper
remedial action can be taken.
(vii) It facilitates the management by exception.
(viii) Budgets act as a motivating force to achieve the desired objective of the organisation.
(ix) It assists delegation of authority and is a powerful tool of responsibility accounting.
(x) It helps in stabilizing the conditions in industries which face seasonal fluctuations.
(xi) It helps as a basis for internal audit.
(xii) It provides a suitable basis for introducing the payment by results system.
(xiii) It ensures adequacy of working capital to the organisation.
(xiv) It aids in performance analysis and performance reporting system.
(xv) It aids in obtaining bank credit.
(xvi) Budgets are forerunners of standard costs in the sense that they create necessary conditions to suit
setting up of standard costs.
Responsibility Accounting:
One of the recent developments in the field of management accounting is the responsibility accounting,
which is helpful in exercising cost control. ‘Responsibility Accounting is a system of accounting that
recognizes various responsibility centers throughout the organization and reflects the plans and actions
of each of these centers by assigning particular revenues and costs to the one having the pertinent
responsibility. It is also called profitability accounting and activity accounting.
It is a system in which the person holding the supervisory posts as president, function head, foreman,
etc are given a report showing the performance of the company or department or section as the case
may be. The report will show the data relating to operational results of the area and the items of which
he is responsible for control. Responsibility accounting follows the basic principles of any system of cost

control like budgetary control and standard costing. It differs only in the sense that it lays emphasis
on human beings and fixes responsibilities for individuals. It is based on the belief that control can be
exercised by human beings, so responsibilities should be fixed for individuals.
Principles of responsibility accounting are as follows:
(a) A target is fixed for each department or responsibility center.
(b) Actual performance is compared with the target.
(c) The variances from plan are analysed so as to fix the responsibility.
(d) Corrective action is taken by higher management and is communicated.
Performance Budgeting:
Performance Budgeting is synonymous with Responsibility Accounting which means thus the responsibility
of various levels of management is predetermined in terms of output or result keeping in view the authority
vested with them. The main concepts of such a system are enumerated below:
(a) It is based on a classification of managerial level for the purpose of establishing a budget for each
level. The individual in charge of that level should be made responsible and held accountable for
its performance over a given period of time.
(b) The starting point of the performance budgeting system rests with the organisation chart in which
the spheres of jurisdiction have been determined. Authority leads to the responsibility for certain
costs and expenses which are forecast or present in the budget with the knowledge of the manager
concerned.
(c) The costs in each individual’s or department’s budget should be limited to the cost controllable
by him.
(d) The person concerned should have the authority to bear the responsibility.
Illustration 1:
Prepare a Production Budget for three months ending March 31, 2016 for a factory producing four
products, on the basis of the following information.
Type of Product Estimated Stock on Jan. Estimated Sales during Desired closing stock on
1, 2016 Jan. to Mar. 2016 31.3.2016
A 2,000 10,000 3,000
B 3,000 15,000 5,000
C 4,000 13,000 3,000
D 3,000 12,000 2,000
Solution:
Production Budget for the 3 Months ending 31st March 2016
Particulars Product A Product B Product C Product D

Sales 10,000 15,000 13,000 12,000
Add: Closing Stock 3,000 5,000 3,000 2,000
13,000 20,000 16,000 14,000
Less: Opening Stock 2,000 3,000 4,000 3,000
Production (Units) 11,000 17,000 12,000 11,000

Cost Accounting
Illustration 2:
Budgeted production and production costs for the year ending 31st December are as follows:
PRODUCT- X PRODUCT -Y
Production (units) 2,20,000 2,40,000
Direct material/unit ` 12.5 `19.0
Direct wages/unit ` 4.5 `7.0
Total factory overheads for each type of product (variable) ` 6,60,000 `9,60,000
A company is manufacturing two products X and Y. A forecast about the number of units to be sold in
the first seven months is given below:
MONTH JAN FEB MAR APRIL MAY JUNE JULY

Product – X 10,000 12,000 16,000 20,000 24,000 24,000 20,000
Y 28,000 28,000 24,000 20,000 16,000 16,000 18,000
It is anticipated that:
(a) There will be no work-in-progress at the end of any month.
(b) Finished units equal to half the sales for the next month will be in stock at the end of each month
(including December of previous year).
Prepare for 6 months ending 30th June a Production Budget and a summarised cost of production budget.
Solution:
Production Budget for 6 Months ending 30th June (Product X)
Particulars Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun

Sales 10,000 12,000 16,000 20,000 24,000 24,000
Add: Closing Stock 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 12,000 10,000
16,000 20,000 26,000 32,000 36,000 34,000
Less: Opening
Stock 5,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 12,000
Production (units) 11,000 14,000 18,000 22,000 24,000 22,000
Total Production of X for 6 months = 11,000 + 14,000 + 18,000 + 22,000 + 24,000 + 22,000 = 1,11,000 units.
Production Budget for 6 Months ending 30th June (Product Y)

Sales 28,000 28,000 24,000 20,000 16,000 16,000
Add: Closing Stock 14,000 12,000 10,000 8,000 8,000 9,000
42,000 40,000 34,000 28,000 24,000 25,000
Less: Opening Stock 14,000 14,000 12,000 10,000 8,000 8,000
Production (units) 28,000 26,000 22,000 18,000 16,000 17,000
Total production of Y for 6 months = 28,000 + 26,000 + 22,000 + 18,000 + 16,000 + 17,000 = 1,27,000 units.

Summarised Cost of Production Budget for 6 Months Ending 30th June

Amount (`)
Particulars Product X (1,11,000 units) Product Y (1,27,000 units) Total

Materials 13,87,500 24,13,000 38,00,500
Direct Wages 4,99,500 8,89,000 13,88,500
Variable Factory Overhead (wn) 3,33,000 5,08,000 8,41,000
Summarised cost of Production 22,20,000 38,10,000 60,30,000
Working Notes:
1. Computation of Variable Factory Overhead
 6,60,000 
For Product X =  × 1,11,000  = 3,33,000
 2,20,000 
 9,60,000 
For product Y=  × 1,27,000  = 5,08,000
 2,24,000 
Illustration 3 :
Draw a Material Procurement Budget (Quantitative) from the following information:
Estimated sales of a product 40,000 units. Each unit of the product requires 3 units of material A and 5
units of material B.
Estimated opening balances at the commencement of the next year:
Finished product = 5,000 units
Material A = 12,000 units
B = 20,000 units
Material on order:
Material B = 11,000 units
The desirable closing balance at the end of the next year:
Finished product = 7,000 units
B = 25,000 units
Material on order:
B = 10,000 units
Solution:
Production = Sales + Closing Stock - Opening Stock
= 40,000 + 7,000 - 5,000
= 42,000 units

Cost Accounting
Raw Materials Purchase Budget
Particulars Product A Product B

Material Required 1,26,000 2,10,000
(42,000 x 3) (42,000 x 5)
Add: Closing Stock 15,000 25,000
Add: Closing Stock on order 8,000 10,000
1,49,000 2,45,000
Less: Opening Stock 12,000 20,000
Less: Opening Stock on order 7,000 11,000
Raw Material Purchase 1,30,000 2,14,000
Illustration 4:
From the following figures prepare the raw material purchase budget for January, 2017:
Materials
A B C D E F
Estimated Stock on Jan 1 16,000 6,000 24,000 2,000 14,000 28,000
Estimated Stock on Jan 31 20,000 8,000 28,000 4,000 16,000 32,000
Estimated Consumption 1,20,000 44,000 1,32,000 36,000 88,000 1,72,000
Standard Price per Unit 25 p. 5 p. 15 p. 10 p. 20 p. 30 p.
Solution:
Raw Materials Purchase Budget For January 2015
Type A B C D E F Total
Estimated Consumption (units) 1,20,000 44,000 1,32,000 36,000 88,000 1,72,000
Add: Estimated stock on Jan 31, 20,000 8,000 28,000 4,000 16,000 32,000
2017 (units)
1,40,000 52,000 1,60,000 40,000 1,04,000 2,04,000
Less: Estimated stock on Jan1, 2017 16,000 6,000 24,000 2,000 14,000 28,000
(units)
Estimated purchase (units) 1,24,000 46,000 1,36,000 38,000 90,000 1,76,000 6,10,000
Rate per unit (`) 0.25 0.05 0.15 0.10 0.20 0.30
Estimated purchases (`) 31,000 2,300 20,400 3,800 18,000 52,800 1,28,300
Illustration 5 :
A company manufactures product - A and product -B during the year ending 31st December 2016, it is
expected to sell 15,000 kg. of product A and 75,000 kg. of product B at `30 and `16 per kg. respectively.
The direct materials P, Q and R are mixed in the proportion of 3: 5: 2 in the manufacture of product A,
Materials Q and R are mixed in the proportion of 1:2 in the manufacture of product B. The actual and
budget inventories for the year are given below:

Opening Stock Expected Closing stock Anticipated cost per Kg.

Kg. Kg. `
Material – P 4,000 3,000 `12
Material –Q 3,000 6,000 10
Material – R 30,000 9,000 8
Product - A 3,000 1,500 —
B 4,000 4,500 —
Prepare the Production Budget and Materials Budget showing the expenditure on purchase of materials
for the year ending 31-12-2016.
Solution:
Production Budget for the Products A & B
Particulars Product A Product B

Sales 15,000 75,000
Add: Closing Stock 1,500 4,500
16,500 79,500
Less: Opening Stock 3,000 4,000
Production 13,500 75,500
Material Purchase Budget for the Year ending Dec 31st 2016
Particulars P Q R Total
Material required for product A in the ratio of 3:5:2 4,050 6,750 2,700 13,500
Material required for product B in the ratio of 1:2 - 25,167 50,333 75,500
Total requirement 4,050 31,917 53,033
Add: Closing Stock 3,000 6,000 9,000
7,050 37,917 62,033
Less: Opening Stock 4,000 3,000 30,000
Purchases (in units) 3,050 34,917 32,033
Cost per Kg. 12 10 8
Total Purchase cost (`) 36,600 3,49,170 2,56,264 6,42,034

Cost Accounting
Illustration 6:
The following details apply to an annual budget for a manufacturing company.
QUARTER 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Working Days 65 60 55 60
Production (Units per working day) 100 110 120 105
Raw material purchases (% by weight of annual total) 30% 50% 20% —
Budgeted purchase price/Kg.( `) 1 1.05 1.125 —
Quantity of raw material per unit of production 2 kg. Budgeted closing stock of raw material 2,000 kg.
Budgeted opening stock of raw material 4,000 kg. (Cost ` 4,000)
Issues are priced on FIFO Basis. Calculate the following budgeted figures.
(a) Quarterly and annual purchase of raw material by weight and value.
(b) Closing quarterly stocks by weight and value.
Solution:
Material Purchase Budget
Particulars Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4 Total

Production 6,500 6,600 6,600 6,300 26,000
(65x100) (60x110) (120x55) (60x105)
Material Required (Production x 2) 13,000 13200 13,200 12,600 52,000
Add: Closing Stock 2,000
54,000
Less: Opening Stock 4,000
Purchases by Weight 15,000 25,000 10,000 - 50,000
Computation of Purchases by Value
Particulars Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4 Total

Purchases (Weight) 15,000 25,000 10,000 -
(50,000 x 30%) (50,000 x 50%) (50,000 x 20%)
Cost per Kg. 1 1.05 1.125 -
Purchases (`) 15,000 26,250 11,250 - 52500
Budget Showing Closing Quarterly Stocks by Weight and Value
Particulars Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4

Opening Stock 4,000 6,000 17,800 14,600
Purchases 15,000 25,000 10,000 -
19,000 31,000 27,800 14,600
Material consumed 13,000 13,200 13,200 12,600
Closing Stock by Weight 6,000 17,800 14,600 2,000
Closing Stock by Value (`) 6,000 18,690 16,080 2,250
(6,000 x 1) (17,800 x 1.05) {(10,000 x 1.125)+ (2,000 x 1.125)
(4,600 x 1.05)}

Illustration 7 :
You are required to prepare a Selling Overhead Budget from the estimates given below:
Amount (`)
Advertisement 1,000
Salaries of the Sales Dept. 1,000
Expenses of the Sales Dept.(Fixed) 750
Salesmen’s remuneration 3,000
Salesmen’s and Dearness Allowance - Commission @ 1% on sales affected
Carriage Outwards: Estimated @ 5% on sales
Agents Commission: 7½% on sales
The sales during the period were estimated as follows:
(a) `80,000 including Agent’s Sales `8,000
(b) `90,000 including Agent’s Sales `10,000
(c) `1,00,000 including Agent’s Sales `10,500
Solution:
Selling Overhead Budget
(`)
Sales 80,000 90,000 1,00,000

(A) Fixed overhead:
Advertisement 1,000 1,000 1,000
Salaries of the sales dept. 1,000 1,000 1,000
Expenses of the sales dept. 750 750 750
Salesmen remuneration 3,000 3,000 3,000
Total (A) 5,750 5,750 5,750
(B) Variable overhead:
Commission 720 800 895
(72,000 x 1%) (80,000 x 1%) (89,500 x 1%)
Carriage outwards (5% on sales) 4,000 4,500 5,000
Agents Commission 600 750 788
(8,000 x 7.5%) (10,000 x 7.5%) (10,500 x 7.5%)
Total (B) 5,320 6,050 6,683
Grand Total (A+B) 11,070 11,800 12,433

Cost Accounting
Illustration 8:
ABC Ltd. a newly started company wishes to prepare Cash Budget from January. Prepare a cash budget
for the first six months from the following estimated revenue and expenses.
Amount (`)
Overheads
Month Total Sales Materials Wages
Production Selling & Distribution
January 20,000 20,000 4,000 3,200 800
February 22,000 14,000 4,400 3,300 900
March 28,000 14,000 4,600 3,400 900
April 36,000 22,000 4,600 3,500 1,000
May 30,000 20,000 4,000 3,200 900
June 40,000 25,000 5,000 3,600 1,200
Cash balance on 1st January was `10,000. A new machinery is to be installed at `20,000 on credit, to
be repaid by two equal installments in March and April, sales commission @5% on total sales is to be
paid within a month following actual sales.
`10,000 being the amount of 2nd call may be received in March. Share premium amounting to `2,000
is also obtained with the 2nd call. Period of credit allowed by suppliers — 2months; period of credit
allowed to customers — 1month, delay in payment of overheads 1 month. Delay in payment of wages
½ month. Assume cash sales to be 50% of total sales.
Solution:
Cash Budget for the First 6 Months

Opening Balance (A) 10,000 18,000 29,800 27,000 24,700 33,100
Add: Receipts (B)
Cash Sales (50%) 10,000 11,000 14,000 18,000 15,000 20,000
Collection from debtors - 10,000 11,000 14,000 18,000 15,000
Share call money (including share - - 12,000 - - -
premium)
Total (A+B) 20,000 39,000 66,800 59,000 57,700 68,100
Less: Payments
Materials - - 20,000 14,000 14,000 22,000
Wages 2,000 4,200 4,500 4,600 4,300 4,500
Overheads - 4,000 4,200 4,300 4,500 4,100
Sales Commission - 1,000 1,100 1,400 1,800 1,500
Installment of Machinery purchase - - 10000 10000 - -
Total Payments(C) 2,000 9,200 39,800 34,300 24,600 32,100
Closing Balance (A+B-C) 18,000 29,800 27,000 24,700 33,100 36,000
Note: According to credit terms wages to be taken at half of the current month plus half of the previous
month.

Illustration 9:
Prepare a Cash Budget for the three months ending 30th June, 2016 from the information given below:
(a) Amount (`)
MONTH SALES MATERIALS WAGES OVERHEADS

February 14,000 9,600 3,000 1,700
March 15,000 9,000 3,000 1,900
April 16,000 9,200 3,200 2,000
May 17,000 10,000 3,600 2,200
June 18,000 10,400 4,000 2,300
(b) Credit terms are:
Sales / Debtors : 10% sales are on cash, 50% of the credit sales are collected next month and the balance
in the following month.
Creditors: Materials 2 months
Wages 1/4 month
Overheads 1/2 month.
(c) Cash and bank balance on 1st April, 2016 is expected to be ` 6,000.
(d) Other relevant information are:
(i) Plant and machinery will be installed in February 2016 at a cost of ` 96,000. The monthly
installment of `2,000 is payable from April onwards.
(ii) Dividend @ 5% on preference share capital of ` 2,00,000 will be paid on 1st June.
(iii) Advance to be received for sale of vehicles ` 9,000 in June.
(iv) Dividends from investments amounting to ` 1,000 are expected to be received in June.
Solution:
Cash Budget for the 3 Months Ending 30th June 2016 (Amount in `)
Particulars April May June
Opening Balance 6,000 3,950 3,000
Add: Receipts :
Cash Sales 1,600 1,700 1,800
Collection from debtors [see note(1)] 13,050 13,950 14,850
Advance for sale of vehicles - - 9,000
Dividends from Investments - - 1,000
Total (A+B) 20,650 19,600 29,650
Less: Payments
Materials 9,600 9,000 9,200
Wages (see note2) 3,150 3,500 3,900
Overheads 1,950 2,100 2,250
Installment of Plant & Machinery 2,000 2,000 2,000
Preference Dividend - - 10,000
Total (C) 16,700 16,600 27,350
Closing Balance (A+B-C) 3,950 3,000 2,300

Cost Accounting
Working Notes:
(i) Computation of Collection from Debtors (Amount in `)
Month Credit
Total Sales Feb Mar Apr May June
Sales
Feb 14,000 12,600 - 6,300 6,300 - -
Mar 15,000 13,500 - - 6,750 6,750 -
Apr 16,000 14,400 - - - 7,200 7,200
May 17,000 15,300 - - - - 7,650
13,050 13,950 14,850
(ii) Wages payment in each month is to be taken as three-fourths of the current month plus one-fourth
of the previous month.
Illustration 10:
For production of 10,000 units the following are budgeted expenses:
Amount (`)
Per Unit
Direct Materials 48
Direct Labour 24
Variable Overheads 20
Fixed Overheads (`1,20,000) 12
Variable Expenses (Direct) 4
Selling Expenses (10% fixed) 12
Administration Expenses (`40,000 fixed) 4
Distribution Expenses (20% fixed) 4
128
Prepare a budget for production of 7,000 units and 9,000 units.
Solution:
Flexible Budget
10000 Units 7000 Units 9000 Units

Particulars
CPU Total CPU Total CPU Total
A) Marginal Cost:
Direct Material 48 4,80,000 48 3,36,000 48 4,32,000
Direct Labour 24 2,40,000 24 1,68,000 24 2,16,000
Variable Expenses 4 40,000 4 28,000 4 36,000
Variable overheads 20 2,00,000 20 1,40,000 20 1,80,000
Selling expenses (90% of ` 12) 10.80 1,08,000 10.80 75,600 10.80 97,200
Distribution expenses (80% of ` 4) 3.20 32,000 3.20 22,400 3.20 28,800
Total (A) 110.00 11,00,000 110.00 7,70,000 110.00 9,90,000

B) Fixed Cost:
Fixed Overheads 12.00 1,20,000 1,20,000 1,20,000
Selling expenses 1.20 12,000 12,000 12,000
Administration overheads 4.00 40,000 40,000 40,000
Distribution expenses 0.80 8,000 8,000 8,000
Total (B) 18.00 1,80,000 1,80,000 1,80,000
Grand Total (A+B) 128.00 12,80,000 9,50,000 11,71,000
Illustration 11 :
Draw up a flexible budget for overhead expenses on the basis of the following data and determine the
overhead rates at 70%, 80% and 90%
Amount (`)
Plant Capacity At 80% capacity

Variable Overheads:
Stores including spares 4,000
Semi Variable:
Power (30% - Fixed: 70% -Variable) 20,000
Repairs (60%- Fixed: 40% -Variable) 2,000
Fixed Overheads:
Depreciation 11,000
Insurance 3,000
Salaries 10,000
Total overheads 62,000
Estimated Direct Labour Hours 1,24,000
Solution:
Flexible Budget at Different Capacities and Determination of Overhead Rates
Amount (`)
Particulars 70% 80% 90%

(A) Variable Overheads:
Indirect labour 10,500 12,000 13,500
Stores including spares 3,500 4,000 4,500
Total (A) 14,000 16,000 18,000
(B) Semi Variable Overheads:
Power (See Note) 18,250 20,000 21,750
Repairs (See Note) 1,900 2,000 2,100
Total (B) 20,150 22,000 23,850
(C) Fixed Overheads:
Depreciation 11,000 11,000 11,000
Insurance 3,000 3,000 3,000
Salaries 10,000 10,000 10,000
Total (C) 24,000 24,000 24,000
Grand Total (A+B+C) 58,150 62,000 65,850

Cost Accounting
Labour Hours 10,8,500 1,24,000 1,39,500

 7  9
1,24,000 × 8  1,24,000 × 8 
   
Overhead rate per hour (`) = 0.536 = 0.50 = 0.472
 58,150   62, 000   65,850 

 1,08,500     1,39,500 
   1, 24, 000   
Working Notes: Semi Variable Overheads:

70% 90%
Power:
Variable  7  9
14,000 × 8  =12,250 14,000 × 8  =15,750
   
Fixed 6,000 6,000
Total 18,250 21,750
Repairs:
Variable  7  9
 800 × 8  = 700  800 × 8  = 900
   
Fixed 1,200 1,200
Total 1 900 2 100
Illustration 12:
From the following information relating to 2014 and conditions expected to prevail in 2015, prepare a
budget for 2015.
2014 Actual: Amount (`)

Sales (40,000 units) 1,00,000
Raw materials 53,000
Wages 11,000
Variable Overhead 16,000
Fixed Overheads 10,000
2015 Prospects:
Sales (60,000 units) 1,50,000
Raw Materials 5% increase in prices
Wages 10% increase in wage rate
5% increase in productivity
Additional plant: One Lathe ` 25,000
One Drill `12,000
10% Depreciation to be considered.

Solution:
Budget Showing Costs and Profits for the Year 2015
I. Sales 1,50,000
II. Costs:
 6 105 
Raw Materials  53,000 × × 83,475
 4 100 
 110 6 100 
Wages 11,000 × × × 17,285
 100 4 105 
 6
Variable Overheads 16,000 ×  24,000
 4
  10  
Fixed Overheads 10,000  3,70,000 ×  13,700
  100 
1,38,460
iii. Profit (i – ii) 11,540
Illustration 13:
Production costs of a factory for a year are as follows:
Amount (`)
Direct Wages 80,000

Production Overheads: Fixed 40,000
Variable 60,000
During the forthcoming year it is anticipated that:
a. The average rate for direct labour remuneration will fall from `0.80 per hour to `0.75 per hour.
b. Production efficiency will be reduced by 5%
c. Price per unit of direct material and of other materials and services which comprise overheads will
remain unchanged, and
d. Production in the coming year will increase by 33 1 % . Draw up a production cost budget.
3
Solution:
Production Cost Budget for the Forthcoming Year

 1  0.75  100 
i. Wages 80,000 × 133 %  ×  1,05,263
 3  0.80  95 
 1 
ii. Materials 1,20,000 × 133 %  1,60,000
 3 
 1 
iii. Variable Overheads 60,000 × 133 %  80,000
 3 
iv. Fixed Overheads 40,000
Production cost 3,85,263

Cost Accounting
Illustration 14:
A company manufactures two products, A and B and the budgeted data for the year are as follows:
Amount (`)
Product A Product B
Sales price per unit 100 75
Direct material per unit 20 10
Direct wages per unit 5 4
Total works overhead 10,105 9,009
Total marketing overhead 1,200 1,100
The sales manager forecasts the sales in units as follows:
Product A (units) Product B (units)

January 28 10
February 28 12
March 24 16
April 20 20
May 16 24
June 16 24
July to January (next year) Per month 18 20
It is assumed that (i) there will be no work in progress at the end of any month, and (ii) finished units
equal to half the sales for the following month will be kept in stock.
Prepare (a) A Production Budget for each month and (b) A Summarized Profit and Loss Statement for
the year.
Solution:
(a) Production Budget (in number of units)
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC TOTAL
Product –A
Sales 28 28 24 20 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 240
Add: Closing Stock 14 12 10 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
42 40 34 28 24 25 27 27 27 27 27 27
Less: Opening Stock
14 14 12 10 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9
Production 28 26 22 18 16 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 235
Product- B
Sales 10 12 16 20 24 24 20 20 20 20 20 20 226
Add: Closing Stock 6 8 10 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
16 20 26 32 36 34 30 30 30 30 30 30
Less: Opening Stock
5 6 8 10 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 10
Production 11 14 18 22 24 22 20 20 20 20 20 20 231

(b) Summarised Product Cost Budget

Amount (`)
Output Particulars Product A 235 units Product B 231 units Total
Direct Material : A @ ` 20 4,700
B @ ` 10 2310 7,010
Direct Labour : A @ ` 5 1,175
B @ ` 4 924 2,099
Works overheads 10,105 9009 19,114
Total production Cost 15,980 12243 28,223
Cost per unit 68 53
(15,980/235) (12,243/231)
Summarised Profit and Loss Statement for the Year

Amount (`)
Particulars Product A Product B Total

Sales 24,000 16,950 40,950
Less: 16,320 11,978
Production Cost of goods sold (240 x 68) 1,200 1,100
(226 x 53)
Marketing Overheads
Total (ii) Cost (ii) 17,520 13,078 30,598
Profit (i - ii) 6,480 3,872 10,352
Illustration 15 :
Three Articles X, Y and Z are produced in a factory. They pass through two cost centers A and B. From
the data furnished compile a statement for budgeted machine utilization in both the centers.
(a) Sales budget for the year
Annual Budgeted Sales Opening stock of

Product Closing stock
(units) finished products (units)
X 4800 600 Equivalent to 2 months sales
Y 2400 300 --DO--
Z 2400 800 --DO--
(b) Machine hours per unit of product
Cost centers
Product
A B
X 30 70
Y 200 100
Z 30 20

Cost Accounting
(c) Total number of machines
Cost Centre: A 284

B 256
Total 540
(d) Total working hours during the year: Estimated 2500 hours per machine.
Solution:
Calculation of Units of Production of Different Products
Particulars Product X Product Y Product Z

Sales 4800 2400 2400
Add: Closing Stock 800 400 400
5600 2800 2800
Less: Opening stock 600 300 800
Production 5000 2500 2000
MACHINE UTILISATION BUDGET
A B
Particulars
X Y Z Total X Y Z Total
(i) Production (Units) 5000 2500 2000 5000 2500 2000
(ii) Hours per unit 30 200 30 70 100 20
(iii) Total Machine Hours 1,50,000 5,00,000 60,000 7,10,000 3,50,000 2,50,000 40,000 6,40,000
(iv) Number of Machines 60 200 24 284 140 100 16 256
Required
Illustration 16 :
The monthly budgets for manufacturing overhead of a concern for two levels of activity were as follows:
Amount (`)
Capacity 60% 100%

Budgeted production (units) 600 1,000
Wages 1,200 2,000
Consumable stores 900 1,500
Maintenance 1,100 1,500
Power and fuel 1,600 2,000
Depreciation 4,000 4,000
Insurance 1,000 1,000
9,800 12,000
You are required to:
(i) Indicate which of the items are fixed, variable and semi-variable;
(ii) Prepare a budget for 80% capacity and
(iii) Find the total cost, both fixed and variable per unit of output at 60%, 80% and 100%capacity.

Solution:
(i) Fixed  Depreciation and insurance.
Variable  Wages and consumables stores.
Semi-variable Costs  Maintenance, Power and fuel.
Seggregation Of Semi Variable Costs
 1,500 − 1,100 
Maintenance =   = ` 1 per unit variable and
 400 
`500 fixed (i.e., 1,100-600)

 2,000 − 1,600 
Power and fuel =   = ` 1 per unit variable and
 400 
`1000 (i.e.,1,600-600) is fixed.
(ii) Budget for 80% capacity(output 800 units):
Amount (`)
Wages @`2 per unit 1,600
Consumables stores @ ` 1.50 per unit 1,200
Maintenance: ` 500 + `. 1.00 per unit 1,300
Power & fuel ` 1,000 + `.1 per unit 1,800
Depreciation 4,000
Insurance 1,000
Total cost: 10,900
(iii)
Capacity 60% 80% 100%

Units 600 800 1000
Total Per
Total (`) Per unit Total (`) Per unit
(`) unit
Fixed Costs:
Depreciation 4,000 4,000 4,000
Insurance 1,000 1,000 1,000
Maintenance 500 500 500
Power and fuel 1,000 1,000 1,000
6,500 10.83 6,500 8.125 6,500 6.50
Variable costs:
Wages @ `2perunit 1,200 1,600 2,000
Consumable stores @ ` 1.50 per unit 900 1,200 1,500
Maintenance @ `.1 Per unit 600 800 1,000
Power and fuel @ `.1 per unit 600 800 1,000
3,300 5.50 4,400 5.500 5,500 5.50
16.33 13.625 12.00

Cost Accounting

1. Budgets are shown in ……. Terms
A. Qualitative
B. Quantitative
C. Materialistic
D. both (b) and (c)
2. Which of the following is not an element of master budget?
A. Capital Expenditure Budget
B. Production Schedule
C. Operating Expenses Budget
D. All above
3. Which of the following is not a potential benefit of using a budget?
A. Enhanced coordination of firm activities
B. More motivated managers
C. Improved interdepartmental communication
D. More accurate external financial statements
4. Which of the following is a long-term budget?
A. Master Budget
B. Flexible Budget
C. Cash Budget
D. Capital Budget
5. Materials become key factor, if
A. quota restrictions exist
B. insufficient advertisement prevails
C. there is low demand
D. there is no problem with supplies of materials
6. The difference between fixed cost and variable cost assumes significance in the preparation of
the following budget.
A. Master Budget
B. Flexible Budget
C. Cash Budget
D. Capital Budget
7. The budget that is prepared first of all is …
A. Master budget
B. Budget, with key factor
C. Cash Budget
D. Capital expenditure budget

8. Sales budget is a …
A. expenditure budget
B. functional budget
C. Master budget
D. None of these
9. A flexible budget requires a careful study of
A. Fixed, semi-fixed and variable expenses
B. Past and current expenses
C. Overheads, selling and administrative expenses.
D. None of these.
10. The basic difference between a fixed budget and flexible budget is that a fixed budget…….
A. is concerned with a single level of activity, while flexible budget is prepared for different levels
of activity
B. Is concerned with fixed costs, while flexible budget is concerned with variable costs.
C. is fixed while flexible budget changes
D. None of these.
[Ans: D, B, D, D, A, B, B, B, A,A]
States whether the statements are True or False:

1. Budget is a means and budgetary control is the end result.
2. To achieve the anticipated targets, Planning, Co-ordination and Control are the important main
tasks of management, achieved through budgeting and budgetary control.
3. A key factor or principal factor does not influence the preparation of all other budgets.
4. Budgetary control does not facilitate introduction of ‘Management by Exception’.
5. Generally, budgets are prepared to coincide with the financial year so that comparison of
the actual performance with budgeted estimates would facilitate better interpretation and
understanding.
6. A flexible budget is one, which changes from year to year.
7. A flexible budget recognises the difference between fixed, semi-fixed and variable cost and is
designed to change in relation to the change in level of activity
8. Sales budget, normally, is the most important budget among all budgets.
9. The principal factor is the starting point for the preparation of various budgets.
10. A budget manual is the summary of all functional budgets.
[Ans. 1. True 2. True 3. False 4. False 5. True 6. False 7. True 8. True 9. True 10. False.]

Cost Accounting
Fill in the Blanks:
1. Budgets are ______ plans.
2. The key factor in a budget does not remain the _____ every year.
3. Cash budget is a part of _____________ budget.
4. ____________ budgets are subsidiary to master master budget.
5. _______________ leads to budgeting and budgeting leads to budgetary control.
6. _________ Control involves checking and evaluation of actual performance.
7. The document which describes the budgeting organisation, procedure etc is known as
________________.
8. A budget is a ________ to management.
9. The principle budget factor for consumer goods manufacture is normally ________.
10. A budget is a projected plan of action in __________________.
[Ans. Action, Same, Financial, Functional, Forecasting, Budgetary, Budget

manual, Aid, Sales Demand, Physical units & monetary terms]
Column A Column B
1. Master budget denotes the summary of A Financial means.
2. A flexible budget takes into the account. B A specified period.
3. A budget is expressed in terms of. C Flexible Budget
4. Which budget is prepared for a longer period. D Mater Budget
5. Budget is generally prepared for how long. E Fixed, variable and semi variable costs.
6. Which budget is prepared for more than one F Functional Budget
level of activity
7. The summary of all functional budgets. G Principle Key factor
8. Which budget is prepared at first. H Capital Expenditure Budget
9. Which budget shows utilisation of liquid cash I Decision Package
10. Zero based budgeting J Cash Budget
[Ans: F, E, A, H, B, C, D, G, J, I]

Previous Terms Question Papers
PREVIOUS TERMS QUESTION PAPERS
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION
June 2019 P-8 (CAC)
Syllabus 2016
Cost Accounting
Time Allowed: 3 Hours Full Marks: 100
The figures in the margin on the right side indicate the full marks.
All Sections are compulsory. Each section contains instructions
regarding the number of questions to be answered within the section.
All working notes must form part of the answer.
Wherever necessary, candidates may make appropriate assumptions
and clearly state them.
No present value factor table or other statistical table will be provided in
addition to this question paper.
Section-A
Section A contains Question Number 1. All parts of this question are compulsory.
1. Answer the following questions:

(a) Choose the correct answer from the given alternatives (You may write only the Roman numeral and the
alphabet chosen for your answer): 1x10=10
(i) The main purpose of Cost Accounting is

(A) to maximise profit.
(B) to help in inventory valuation.
(C) to help in the fixation of selling price.
(D) to provide information to management for decision making.
(ii) Which of the following is considered to be a normal loss of material?

(A) Loss due to accident
(B) Pilferage
(C) Loss due to breaking the bulk
(D) Loss due to careless handling of material

Cost Accounting
(iii) In Reconciliation Statement expenses shown only in financial accounts are

(A) added to financial profit.
(B) added to costing profit.
(C) ignored.
(D) deducted from financial profit.
(iv) Which of the following is a service department?

(A) Refining department
(B) Machining department
(C) Receiving department
(D) Finishing department
(v) Which of the following items is not included in preparation of cost sheet?
(A) Purchase returns
(B) Carriage inwards
(C) Sales commission
(D) Interest paid
(vi) In job costing to record the issue of direct materials to a job which of the following document is
used?
(A) Purchase order
(B) Goods receipt note
(C) Material requisition
(D) Purchase requisition
(vii) In a process 4000 units are introduced during a period. 5% of input is normal loss. Closing work-in-
progress 60% complete is 500 units. 3300 completed units are transferred to next process. Equivalent
production for the period is
(A) 3550 units
(B) 3600 units
(C) 3800 units
(D) 3950 units
(viii) Product A generates a contribution to sales ratio of 40%. Fixed cost directly attributable to A amount
` 60,000. The sales revenue required to achieve a profit of ` 15,000 is
(A) ` 2,00,000
(B) ` 1,85,000
(C) ` 1,87,500
(D) ` 2,10,000

(ix) During a period 13600 labour hours were worked at a standard rate of ` 8 per hour. The direct labour
efficiency variance was ` 8,800 (Adv). How many standard hours were produced?
(A) 12000 hours
(B) 12500 hours
(C) 13000 hours
(D) 13500 hours
(x) Cash Budget of ABC Ltd. forewarns of a short-term surplus. Which of the following would be
appropriate action to be taken in such a situation?
(A) Purchase new fixed assets
(B) Repay long-term loans
(C) Write off preliminary expenses
(D) Pay creditors early to obtain a cash discount
(b) Match the statement in Column I with the most appropriate statement in Column II
(You may opt to write only the Roman numeral and the matched alphabet instead of copying contents
into the answer books): 1x5=5
Column I Column II
(i) Pharma Industry (A) Opportunity Cost
(ii) Management by exception (B) Direct Allocation
(iii) Assessment of employee (C) Joint Cost
with respect to a job
(iv) Royalties (D) Batch Costing
(v) CAS-19 (E) Merit Rating
(F) Variance Analysis
(G) Job Evaluation
(H) Notional Cost
(c) State whether the following are ‘True’ or ‘False’: (You may write only the Roman numeral and whether
‘True’ or ‘False’ without copying the statements into the answer books): 1 x5=5
(i) Bin card is maintained by the costing department.
(ii) CAS-8 deal with the principles and methods of determining the direct expenses.
(iii) FIFO method is followed for evaluation of equivalent production when prices are fluctuating.
(iv) Profit Volume ratio remains constant at all levels of activity.
(v) The principal factor is the starting point for the preparation of various budgets.
(d) Fill in the blanks: (You may write only the Roman numeral and the content filling the blanks): 1x5=5
(i) Differential cost is the change in the cost due to change in ________ from one level to another.
(ii) CAS ________ stands for cost of service cost centre.
(iii) In contract costing, the cost unit is ________ .
(iv) Marginal cost is the ________ of sales over contribution.
(v) When actual cost is less than the standard cost, it is known as ________ variance.

Cost Accounting
Section - B
Answer any five questions from question numbers 2 to 8.
Each question carries 15 marks.
15x5=75
2. (a) ZINTES LTD. a manufacturing company has its factories at two locations. Rowan plan is in use at location A
and Halsey plan at location B. Standard time and basic rate of wages are same for a job which is similar
and is carried out on similar machinery. Time allowed is 60 hours.
Job at location A is completed in 36 hours while at B, it has taken 48 hours. Conversion costs at respective
places are ` 1224 and ` 1500. Overheads amount to ` 20 per hour.

Required:
(i) Find out the normal wage rate, and
(ii) Compare conversion costs. 7
(b) ALPHA LTD. has three Production Departments and two Service Departments. The overhead distribution
sheet of the company showed the following totals:
Production Department: Amount (`)
P 75,500
Q 72,000
R 96,500
Service Department:
X 46,250
Y 15,750
Other information is as follows:

(a) Working hours of production departments are P-6226 hours, Q-4028 hours and R-4066 hours.
(b) Services rendered by service departments are as under:
P Q R X Y
Department X 20% 30% 40% — 10%
Department Y 40% 20% 30% 10% —
Required:
(i) Calculate the total overhead of production departments distributing the cost of service departments
by Simultaneous Equation Method.
(ii) Calculate the overhead rate per hour of production departments. 8
3. (a) What is the Employee Cost as defined in CAS-7 (Limited Revision 2017)? Also discuss the general principles
of its measurement as per CAS-7. (any five only) 6
(b) The following information has been extracted from the financial books of ABC Ltd. for the year ended 31st
March, 2019:


Direct materials consumption 10,00,000
Factory Overhead 3,20,000
Administrative Overhead 1,40,000
Selling and Distribution Overhead 1,92,000
Bad debts 16,000
Preliminary expenses written-off 8,000
Legal expenses 2,000
Dividend received 20,000
Interest on deposits received 4,000
Sales(24000 units) 24,00,000
Closing stock of finished goods (800 units) 64,000
Closing stock of work-in-progress 48,000
The cost accounts for the same period reveal that the direct materials consumption was `11,20,000.
Factory overheads recovered at 20% of prime cost; Administration overheads recovered @ ` 6 per unit of
production; and selling and distribution overheads recovered at ` 8 per unit sold.
Required:
(i) Find out the profit as per financial books.
(ii) Prepare the cost sheet and ascertain the profit per cost accounts.
(iii) Prepare a statement reconciling profit shown by financial and cost accounts. 9
4. (a) VIPUL LTD. submits the following information on 31st March, 2019:

Sales for the year 55,00,000
Purchases of material for the year 22,00,000
Direct labour 13,00,000
Inventories at the beginning of the year—
Finished goods 1,40,000
Work-in-progress 80,000
Materials inventory—
At the beginning of the year 60,000
At the end of the year 80,000
Inventories at the end of the year—
Finished goods 1,60,000

Cost Accounting
Factory overheads were 60% of the direct labour cost.

Administration expenses were 5% of sales.
Selling & distribution expenses were 10% of sales.
You are required to prepare a Cost Sheet with all elements. 8
(b) WEST LAND LTD. in the course of refining crude oil obtains four joint products P, Q, R and S. The total cost till
the split-off point was ` 9,76,640. The output and sales in the year 2018 were as follows:
Product Output Sales Amount Separate Costs

(Gallon) (`) Amount (`)
P 50,000 12,50,000 2,60,000
Q 10,000 30,000 20,000
R 5,000 50,000 —
S 8,000 80,000 10,000
Required:
(i) Calculate the net income for each of the products if the joint costs are apportioned on the basis of
Net realisable values (NRV) of the different products.
(ii) Calculate the net income of each of the products if the company decides to sell the products at the
split-off point itself as-P@ `18, Q @ `1.50, R @ `10 and S @ `7.80 per gallon. 7
5. (a) CARLHAMS LTD. runs a lodging home in a hill station. For this purpose, it has hired a building at a rent
of `1,20,000 per month along with 5% of total takings. The lodging home has three types of suites for its
customers, viz., single room, double rooms and triple rooms.
Following information is given:
Type of Suite Number Occupancy %

Single Room 100 80%
Double Rooms 40 60%
Triple Rooms 20 50%
The rent of double rooms suite is to be fixed at 1.5 times of the single room suite and that of triple rooms
suite as twice of the double rooms suite.
The expenses for the year 2018 are as follows:

Staff salaries 32,50,000
Room attendants’ wages 12,00,000
Lighting, heating and power 9,75,000
Repairs & renovation 4,80,000
Laundry charges 1,65,000
Interior decoration 1,80,000
Sundry expenses 1,94,000
Provide profit @ 20% on total takings and assume 360 days in a year.
You are required to work out the room rent chargeable per day for each type of suite. 8

(b) NIRVANA LTD. undertook a contract for `50,00,000 on 1st April, 2018. On 31st March, 2019 when the
accounts of the company were closed, the following details about the contract were gathered:

Wages paid 4,50,000
General expenses 1,00,000
Plant purchased 5,00,000
Materials on hand on 31.03.2019 2,50,000
Wages accrued on 31.03.2019 50,000
Cash received 15,00,000
Work uncertified 1,50,000
Depreciation of plant 50,000
The above contract contained an escalation clause which read as follows:
“In the event of prices of materials and rates of wages increase by more than 5%, the contract price would
be increased accordingly by 25% of the rise in the cost of materials and wages beyond 5% in each case.”
It was found that since the date of signing the agreement, the price of materials and wage rates increased
by 25%. The value of work certified does not take into account the effect of the above clause.
Required:
Prepare Contract Account of the company as on 31st March, 2019. 7
6. (a) MODERN LTD. has three departments X, Y and Z, each of which makes a different product. The budgeted
data for the coming year are as follows:
Amount (`)
Particulars X Y Z
Sales 22,40,000 11,20,000 16,80,000
Direct materials 2,80,000 1,40,000 2,80,000
Direct labour 1,12,000 1,40,000 4,48,000
Direct expenses 2,80,000 1,40,000 5,60,000
Fixed cost 5,60,000 2,80,000 5,60,000
The management of the company is considering to close down department ‘Z’. There is a possibility of
reducing fixed cost by `1,50,000 if department ‘Z’ is closed down.
Advise the management whether or not department ‘Z’ should be closed down. 8
(b) SRIJAN LTD. had incurred fixed expenses of `9,00,000 with sales of `20,00,000 and earned a profit of `3,00,000
during the first half-year. In the second-half, it suffered a loss of `1,50,000.
Required:
Calculate the following:
(i) The P/V Ratio, Break Even Point and Margin of Safety for the first half-year.
(ii) The expected sales amount for the second half-year assuming that the selling price and fixed
expenses remained unchanged during the second half-year.
(iii) The Break Even point and Margin of Safety for the whole year. 7

Cost Accounting
7. (a) BENCO LTD. a manufacturing concern which has adopted standard costing furnishes the following
information for the month ending March 31, 2019:
The standard mix to produce one unit of product Z is as under—
Material A 30kg @ ` 30 per kg
Material B 40kg @ ` 50 per kg
Material C 50kg @ ` 40 per kg
During the month of December 2018, 10 units of product Z were actually produced and consumption was
as under—
Material A 320kg @ ` 35 per kg
Material B 475kg @ ` 55 per kg
Material C 435kg @ ` 36 per kg
Required:
Calculate the following Material Variances:
(i) Material Cost Variance
(ii) Material Price Variance
(iii) Material Usage Variance
(iv) Material Mix Variance
(v) Material Yield Variance 8
(b) ANKRITI LTD. manufactures product X and product Y during the year ending on 31st March, 2019. It is
expected to sell 7500 kg of product X and 37500 kg of product Y @ ` 60 and ` 32 per kg respectively.
The direct materials A, B and C are mixed in the proportion of 4:4:2 in the manufacture of Product X and
in the proportion of 3:5:2 in the manufacture of product Y. The actual and budget inventories for the year
are as follows:
Particulars Opening Expected Anticipated

Stock (kg) Closing Stock Cost per kg
(kg) (`)
Material A 3000 2400 10
Material B 2500 5800 8
Material C 16000 17300 6
Product X 1500 2000 —
Product Y 3000 3500 —
Required:
Prepare the Production Budget and Materials Budget showing the purchase cost of materials for the year
ending 31 st March, 2019. 7
8. Answer any three out of the following four questions: 5x3=15

(a) Distinguish between Cost Allocation and Cost Apportionment.
(b) State the main objectives of Cost Accounting.
(c) List out the various measures to reduce the Labour Turnover (any five).
(d) Write a brief note on Master Budget.

December 2018 P-8 (CAC)
Syllabus 2016
Cost Accounting
Section-A

(i) Joint Cost is suitable for
(a) Oil Industry
(b) Fertilizer Industry
(c) Ornament Industry
(d) Infrastructure Industry
(ii) Cost of idle time arising due to non-availability of raw materials is
(a) recovered by inflating the raw materials cost.
(b) recovered by inflating the wage rate.
(c) charged to factory overheads.
(d) charged to costing profit and loss account.
(iii) Charging to a cost center those overheads that result solely for the existence of that cost center is
known as
(a) Allotment
(b) Allocation
(c) Absorption
(d) Apportionment

Cost Accounting
(iv) Standard deals with the cost of service cost center is

(a) CAS-9
(b) CAS- 13
(c) CAS-16
(d) CAS-22
(v) In Reconciliation Statement income shown only in financial accounts is
(a) added to financial profit.
(b) deducted from financial profit.
(c) ignored.
(d) deducted from costing profit.
(vi) The most suitable cost system where the products differ in type of material and work performed is
(a) Process Costing
(b) Batch Costing
(c) Job Costing
(d) Operating Costing
(vii) In a process 10000 units are introduced during a period. 10% of input is normal loss. Closing work-in-
process 70% complete is 1500 units. 7500 completed units are transferred to next process. Equivalent
(a) 9550 units
(b) 9000 units
(c) 8550 units
(d) 8500 units
(viii) The sales and profit of a firm for the year 2016 are ` 1,50,000 and ` 20,000 and for the year 2017 are
` 1,70,000 and ` 25,000 respectively. The P/V Ratio of the firm
(a) 15%
(b) 20%
(c) 25%
(d) 30%
(ix) Standard quantity of material for one unit output is 10 kg @ ` 8 per kg. Actual output during a given
period is 600 units. The standard quantity of material for actual output is
(a) 1200 kg
(b) 6000 kg
(c) 4800 kg
(d) 48000 kg
(x) Which of the following is a long-term Budget?
(a) Master Budget
(b) Production Budget
(c) Flexible Budget
(d) Capital Budget

(b) Match the statement in Column I with the most appropriate statement in Column II
into the Answer Books): 1 x5=5
Column I Column II
(i) Cash discount allowed (A) Joint Cost
(ii) Escalation Clause (B) Imputed Cost
(iii) CAS-19 (C) Direct Expenses
(iv) Notional Cost (D) Not shown is cost sheet but debited to profit
and loss account
(v) Zero base budgeting (E) Sunk Cost
(F) Contract Costing
(G) Decision Package
(H) Variable Cost
(c) State whether the following statements are ‘True’ or ‘False’ (You may write only the Roman numeral and
whether True’ or ‘False’ without copying the statements into the Answer Book): 1x5=5
(i) Multiple costing is suitable for banking industry.
(ii) Slow moving materials have a high turnover ratio.
(iii) Cost ledger control account makes the cost ledger self-balancing.
(iv) There is inverse relationship between batch size and carrying costs.
(v) Marginal costing follows the identifiability wise classification of costs.
(d) Fill in the blanks (You may write only the Roman numeral and the content filling blanks): 1x5=5
(i) _______ is discount allowed to the bulk purchaser.
(ii) CAS _______ stands for cost of utilities.
(iii) Under integrated accounting system, the accounting entry for payment of wages is to debit _______
and to credit cash account.
(iv) If the actual loss in a process is less than the normal loss, the difference is known as _______.
(v) The principal budget factor for consumer goods manufacturer is normally _______ .
Section-B
Each question carries 15 marks. 15x5=75
2. (a) ZEDYAAH TUBES LTD. manufactures a special product, which requires ZEDY. The following particulars were
collected for the year 2017-18:
(i) Monthly demand of Zedy : 7500 units
(ii) Cost of placing an order : `500
(iii) Re-order period : 5 to 8 weeks
(iv) Cost per unit : ` 60
(v) Carrying cost % p.a. : 10%

Cost Accounting
(vi) Normal usage : 500 units per week

(vii) Minimum usage : 250 units per week
(viii) Maximum usage : 750 units per week
Required:
(i) Re-order quantity
(ii) Re-order level
(iii) Minimum stock level
(iv) Maximum stock level
(v) Average stock level
(b) SONAX LTD. has three Production Departments and two Service Departments. The overhead distribution
sheet showed the following totals:
`
Production Departments:
A 25,000
B 31,000
C 28,000
Service Departments:
S 8,000
T 13,900
Required:
Using the following bases of apportionment, distribute the cost of service departments under Simultaneous
Equation Method:
A B C S T
Department S 30% 20% 40% - 10%
Department T 40% 15% 25% 20% -
3. (a) What are the various types of materials included in the Material Cost as dealt with by CAS-6 relating to
Cost Accounting Standard on Material Cost?
State the objective and scope of the Standard. 6
(b) The following information is available from the financial books of PQR Ltd. having a normal production
capacity of 60000 units for the year ended 31 st March. 2018:
(i) Sales ` 10,00,000 (50000 units)
(ii) There was no opening and closing stock of finished units.
(iii) Direct material and direct wages costs were ` 5,00.000 and ` 2,50,000 respectively.
(iv) Actual factory expenses were ` 1,50,000 of which 60% are fixed.
(v) Actual administrative expenses were `45,000 which are completely fixed.

(vi) Actual selling and distribution expenses were ` 30.000 of which 40% are fixed.
(vii) Interest and dividends received ` 15,000
You are required to

(A) find out profit as per financial books for the year ended 31st March, 2018.
(B) prepare the cost sheet and ascertain the profit as per cost accounts for the year ended 31st March,
2018 assuming that the indirect expenses are absorbed on the basis of normal production capacity.
(C) prepare a statement reconciling profits shown by financial and cost books. 9
4. (a) Z Ltd., manufactured and sold 200 typewriters in the year 2017. Its summarised Trading and Profit & Loss
Account for the year 2017 is as follows:
Total Output (in units) 200
Particulars ` Particulars `
To Cost of Material consumed 1,20,000 By Sales 6,00,000
To Direct Wages 1.80,000
To Manufacturing Charges 75,000
To Gross Profit c/d 2,25,000
6,00,000 6,00,000
To Management Expenses 90,000 By Gross Profit b/d 2,25,000
To General Expenses 30,000
To Rent. Rates & Taxes 15,000
To Selling Expenses 45,000
To Net Profit 45,000
2,25,000 2,25,000
For the year 2018, it is estimated that

(i) The output and sales will be 300 typewriters.
(ii) Price of material will rise by 25% compared to previous year level.
(iii) Wages per unit will rise by 10%.
(iv) Manufacturing charges will increase in proportion to the combined cost of material and wages.
(v) Selling expenses per unit will remain unchanged.
(vi) Other expenses will remain unaffected by the rise in output.
Required:
Prepare a Cost Sheet showing the cost at which typewriters will be manufactured in 2018 and give price
at which it should by marketed so as to show profit of 10% on selling price. 8

Cost Accounting
(b) The following details are extracted from the costing records of EVINIE LTD., an oil mill for the year ended
31st March, 2018. Purchased 2000 tons of copra for `1,00,000 and other expenses were as under:
Crushing (`) Refining (`) Finishing (`)

Cost of Labour 10,000 6,000 4,000
Sundry Material 4,000 3,000 2,000
Electric Power 3,000 2,000 1,600
Steam 2,000 2,000 1,500
Repair of Machine 2,000 1,000 500
Cost of Casks – – 7,500
Factory Expenses were `10,000 to be apportioned on the basis of wages. 1700 tons of crude oil was
produced; 1540 tons of oil was refined and finally 1500 tons of oil was finished for delivery. Realised `2,000
from sale of sacks; `5,000 by sale of 250 tons of copra residue and `5,100 by sale of 120 tons of by-products
in refining pro,
Prepare Process Accounts for the year ending on 31st March, 2018. 7
5. (a) GOLDEN TRANSPORT CO. has been given a route 20km. long for running buses. The company has a fleet
of 10 buses each costing ` 60,000 and having a life of 5 years without any scrap value.
The following are estimated expenditure and other details:
(i) Insurance charges 3% p.a.
(ii) Annual tax for each bus ` 3,000
(iii) Total garage charges ` 4,000 p.m.
(iv) Driver’s salary for each bus ` 10,000 p.m.
(v) Conductor’s salary for each bus ` 7,000 p.m.
(vi) Annual repairs to each bus ` 6,000
(vii) Commission to be shared by the driver and
conductor equally: 10% of the takings
(vii) Cost of stationary ` 1,500 p.m.
(ix) Manager’s salary ` 12,000 p.m.
(x) Accountant’s salary ` 9,000 p.m.
(xi) Petrol and oil ` 400 per 100 km
Each bus will make 3 round trips carrying on an average 40 passengers on each trip. The bus will run on an
average for 25 days in a month.
Assuming 15% profit on takings, Calculate the bus fare to be charged from each - passenger. 8
(b) OMEGA LTD. undertook a contract for ` 5,00,000 on 1st January, 2017. The company furnishes the following
details for the year ended 31st December, 2017:
`
Materials consumed 1,65,000
Direct Expenses 5,000
Wages 30,000
Materials returned to stores 5,000
Materials stolen from site 10,000
Insurance claim admitted 6,000

Works expenses @ 20% on wages

Office expenses @ 10% on works cost
Materials in hand on 31.12.2017 15.000
Cash received to the extent of 90% of works certified 2,70,000
Cost of work uncertified 11,000
Plant sent to site costing ` 60,000 with a scrap value of ` 10,000 and its useful life is 5 years. The plant was
used on the contract for 146 days.
Required:
Prepare Contract Account showing therein the cost of materials issued to site and the amount of profit or
loss to be transferred to the Profit & Loss Account. 7
6. (a) A company budgets for a production of 5 lakh units at a variable cost of ` 20 each. The fixed costs are `20
lakh. The selling price is fixed to yield a profit of 25% on cost.
You are required to calculate
(i) P/V Ratio and Break even point.
(ii) If the selling price is reduced by 20%,
Ascertain:
(A) The effect of price reduction on the P/V Ratio and BEP.
(B) The number of units required to be sold at the reduced selling price to obtain an increase of 20% over
the budgeted profit.
(b) AVONA LTD.. a toy factory presents the following information ior the year endi March, 2018:
`
Material cost 1,20,000
Labour cost 2,40,000
Fixed overheads 1,20,000
Variable overheads 60,000
Units produced 12,000
Selling Price per Unit 50
The available capacity is a production of 20000 units per year. The firm has an offer for the purchase of
5000 additional units ai a price of ` 40 per unit. It is expected that accepting this offer there will be a saving
of rupee one per unit in material cost on all ui manufactured, the fixed overhead will increase by ` 35.000
and the overall efficiency will drop by 2% on all production.
State whether offer is acceptable or not.
7. (a) The details regarding the composition and the weekly wage rates of labour force of PB LTD engaged on
a job scheduled to be completed in 30 weeks are as follows:
Category of Workers Standard Actual

No. of Weekly Wage Rate No. of Weekly Wage Rate
Workers per worker (`) Workers per worker (`)
Skilled 75 60 70 70
Semi-Skilled 45 40 30 50
Unskilled 60 30 80 20
The work is actually completed in 32 weeks.

Cost Accounting
Calculate the following Labour Variances: 8

(i) Labour Cost Variance (LCV)
(ii) Labour Rate Variance (LRV)
(iii) Labour Efficiency Variance (LEV)
(iv) Labour Revised Efficiency Variance (LREV)
(v) Labour Mix Variance (LMV)
(b) NP LTD produces a standard product. The estimated costs are given below:
`
Raw Materials 10
Direct Wages 8
Direct Expenses 2
Variable Overheads 3
23
Semi-variable overheads at 100% capacity level (10,000 units) are expected to be ` 40,000 and these
overheads vary in steps of ` 2,000 for each change in output of 1,000 units. Fixed overheads are estimated
at ` 50,000. Selling price per unit is expected to be ` 40.
Required:
Prepare a Flexible Budget at 50%, 70% and 90% level of activity on marginal cost basis. 7

(a) State the advantages of cost control (any five).
(b) Descnbe briefly the main scope of cost accountancy.
(c) What is just-in-time (JIT) system? List out its main benefits.
(d) Write a briet note on Performance Budgeting describing its main concepts.

June 2018 P-8 (CAC)
Syllabus 2016
Cost Accounting
Section-A

(i) Batch costing is suitable for
(a) Oil Industry
(b) Sugar Industry
(c) Chemical Industry
(d) Pharmaceutical Industry
(ii) Idle time is
(a) Time spent by workers in office
(b) Time spent by workers in factory
(c) Time spent by workers off their work
(d) Time spent by workers on their job
(iii) Warehouse expense is an example of
(a) Production overhead
(b) Administration overhead
(c) Selling overhead
(d) Distribution overhead

Cost Accounting
(iv) Standard deals with the principles and methods of determining depreciation and amortization cost
is
(a) CAS-8
(b) CAS-11
(c) CAS-16
(d) CAS-20
(v) In Reconciliation Statement expenses shown only in cost accounts are
(a) Added to financial profit
(b) Deducted from financial profit
(c) Ignored
(d) Deducted from costing profit
(vi) In a job cost system, costs are accumulated
(a) On a monthly basis
(b) By specific job
(c) By department or process
(d) By kind of material used
(vii) In a process 6,000 units are introduced during a period. 5% of input is normal loss. Closing work-in-
process 60% complete is 800 units. 4,900 completed units are transferred to next process. Equivalent
(a) 6,800 units
(b) 5,700 units
(c) 5,680 units
(d) 5,380 umts
(viii) Which of the following best describes a fixed cost?
(a) It may change in total where such change is unrelated to changes in production.
(b) It may change in total where such change is related to changes in production.
(c) It is constant per unit of change in production.
(d) It may change in total where such change depends on production within the relevant range.
(ix) Z Ltd. is planning to sell 1,00,000 units of product A for ` 12.00 per unit. The fixed costs are ` 2,80,000.
In order to realize a profit of ` 2,00,000, what would the variable costs be?
(a) ` 4,80,000
(b) ` 7,20,000
(c) ` 9,00,000
(d) ` 9,20,000
(x) Sales budget is an example of
(a) Expenditure budget
(b) Functional budget
(c) Capital budget
(d) Master budget

(b) Match the statement in Column I with the most appropriate statement in Column II:
into the answer Books) 1x5=5
Column I Column II
(i) Imputed costs A Cost control technique
(ii) FSN analysis B Treated as part of factory expenses
(iii) Captive power plant expenses C Costing profit and loss account
(iv) Abnormal loss is transferred to D Process of classifying material
(v) Variance analysis E Direct allocation
F Not involving cash outlay
G Management by exception
H Decision package
(c) State whether the following statements are ‘True’ or ‘False’:(You may write only the Roman numeral and
whether ‘True’ or ‘False’ without copying the statements into the answer books): 1x5=5
(i) Factory overhead cost applied to a job is usually based on a pre-determined rate.
(ii) CAS-19 deals with the principles and methods of determining the manufacturing cost of excisable
goods.
(iii) Cost ledger control account makes the cost ledger self-balancing.
(iv) FIFO method is followed for evaluation of equivalent production when prices are fluctuating.
(v) Standard costs and budgeted costs are inter-related and inter-dependent.
(d) Fill in the blanks : (You may write only the Roman numeral and the content filling the blanks) 1x5=5
(i) _______ is the process of regulating the action so as to keep the element of cost within the set
parameters.
(ii) In absorption costing _______ is added to inventory.
(iii) CAS _______ stands for cost of service cost centre.
(iv) At _______ contribution available is equal to total fixed cost.
(v) The document which describes the budgeting organisation, budgeting procedure etc. is known as
_______.
Section-B
Each question carries 15 marks. 15x5=75
2. (a) The existing Incentive system of SHRISTI LTD is as under:

Normal working week : 5 days of 8 hours each plus 3 late shifts of 3 hours each
Rate of Payment : Day work : ?160 per hour
Late shift : `225 per hour
Average output per operator
for 49-hours week i.e. including

Cost Accounting
3 late shifts : 120 articles.

In order to increase output and eliminate overtime, it was decided to switch on to a system of payment by
results. The following information is obtained:
Time-rate (as usual) : `160 per hour
Basic time allowed for 15 articles : 5 hours
Piece-work rate : Add 20% to basic piece-rate
Premium Bonus : Add 50% to time.
Required:
Prepare a Statement showing hours worked, weekly earnings, number of articles produced and labour
cost per article for one operator under the following systems: (i) Existing time-rate
(ii) Straight piece-work
(iii) Rowan system
(iv) Halsey premium system
Assume that 135 articles are produced in a 40-hour week under straight piece work, Rowan Premium
System, the Halsey Premium System above and worker earns half the time saved under Halsey Premium
System. 9
(b) The following figures are taken from the accounts of BALEN LTD a manufacturing concern for the month of
October, 2017:
Indirect Materials : Production Departments : X `19,000; Y `24,000; Z `4,000;
Service Departments : Maintenance ` 30,000; Stores ` 8,000.
Indirect Wages : Production Departments : X `18,000; Y `22,000; Z `6,000;
Service Departments : Maintenance ` 20,000; Stores ` 13,000.
Other Expenses : Power and Light : `1,20,000; Rent and Rates `56,000; Insurance of Assets `20,000; Meal
Charges `60,000; Depreciation @ 6% p.a. on capital value of assets.
Departmental Data
Items Production Departments Service Department

X Y Z Maintenance Stores
Area (Sq. Ft.) 4,000 4,000 3,000 2,000 1,000
Capital Value of Assets (`) 20,00,000 24,00,000 16,00,000 12,00,000 8,00,000
Kilowatt Hours 2,000 2,200 800 750 250
Number of Employees 180 240 60 80 40
Service rendered by Maintenance Department to Production Departments:
X 50%; Y 30%; Z 20%.
Service rendered by Stores Department to Production Departments:
X 40%; Y 40%; Z 20%.
From the above data, prepare a Departmental Distribution Summary showing apportion of costs of Service
Departments to the Production Departments and the Total Overheads of the Production Departments. 6
3. (a) What are the Direct Expenses as defined in CAS-10 (Limited Revision 2017)? Also discuss the general
principles of its measurement as per CAS-10. (any five only) 6

(b) The net profit of X Ltd., appeared at `41,800 as per financial records for the year ending 31st March, 2018.
A scrutnity of the figures from both the sets of accounts revealed the following facts:
`
Works overhead under-recovered in costs 1,500
Administrative overheads over-recovered in costs 850
Depreciation charged in financial accounts 5,600
Depreciation recovered in costs 6,250
Interest on investments not included in costs 3,000
Loss due to obsolescence charged in financial accounts 2,850
Income tax reserve made in financial accounts 20,150
Bank interest and transfer fee credited in financial books 370
Stores adjustment (credit) in financial books 230
Value of opening stock in : Cost accounts 24,800
: Financial accounts 26,300
Value of closing stock in : Cost accounts 25,000
: Financial accounts 23,000
Interest charged in cost accounts 2,000
Imputed rent charged in cost accounts 1,000
Goodwill written off 5,000
Loss on sale of furniture 600
Selling and distribution expenses not charged in cost accounts 10,000
Donations to Prime Minister’s Relief Fund 5,100
Transfer to Debenture Redemption Fund 9,000
Transfer to Dividend Equalisation Fund 20,500
Required:
Prepare a statement showing the reconciliation statement and findout the profit as per cost Accounts. 9
4. (a) The following data are available from the books and records of VEEMYES Ltd. for the month of November
2017.
Direct Labour cost : ` 20,000 (125% of factory overheads)
Inventory accounts show the following figures:
November 1 November 30
` `
Raw materials 10,000 20,000
Work in progress 8,000 4,000
Finished goods 10,000 5,000
Selling expenses 15,000
Office expenses 10,000
Sales 1,25,000

Cost Accounting
The company maintains a profit of 25% on cost.

You are required to prepare a cost sheet for the month of November 2017 with all elements. 8
(b) CBA Ltd. , manufactures certain grades of products known as M, Bl and B2. In course of manufacture of
product M (main product), by-products- Bl and B2 emerge. The joint expenses of manufacture amount to
`2,37,600.
All the three products are processed further after separation and sold as per details given below:
Product-M (By products)
Product B1 Product B2
Sales (`) 2,00,000 1,20,000 80,000
Cost incurred after separation (`) 20,000 15,000 10,000
Profit as percentage on sales 25 20 15
Total fixed selling expenses are 10% of total cost of sales which are apportioned to the three products in
the ratio of 20:40:40.
Required:
(i) Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of joint costs to the products (M, Bl andB2)
(ii) If the product Bl (by product) is not subject to further processing and is sold at the point of separation,
for which there is a market at `1,00,440 without incurring any selling expenses, would you advise its
disposal at this stage? Show the workings. 7
5. (a) JANATA TRANSPORT LTD. a Transport Company is running 4 buses between two towns which are 50 kms.
away. Seating capacity of each bus is 40 passengers. The following information is obtained from its books
for November, 2017:
Particulars `
Wages of drivers, conductors and cleaners 24,000
Salaries of office and supervisory staff 10,000
Diesel, oil and other lubricants 40,000
Repairs and maintenance 8,000
Taxes, insurance etc. 16,000
Depreciation of buses 26,000
Interest and other charges 20,000
Actual passengers carried were 75% of the seating capacity. All the 4 buses ran on all the days of the
month. Each bus made one to and fro round trip per day.
Prepare the Operating Cost Statement and determine the cost per passenger km. for each bus. 8
(b) A contractor, who prepare his accounts on 31st March each year, commenced a Contract No. 220 on 1st
July, 2016. The following information is revealed from his costing records on 31st March, 2017:
Particulars (`)
Materials sent to site 2,51,000
Labour 5,65,600
Foreman’s salary 81,300
A machine costing `2,60,000 remained in use on site for 146 days. Its working life is estimated at 7 years and
final scrap value at `15,000. A supervisor is paid `8,000 per month and has devoted one half of his time on
the contract. All other expenses amount to `1,36,500. Materials at site on 31st March, 2017 cost `35,400.

The contract price is `20,00,000. On 31st March, 2017 two-third of the contract was completed, however,
the architect gave certificate only for 50% of the contract price and `7,50,000 had so far been paid on
account.
Prepare Contract Account and state how much profit or loss should be included on 31st March, 2017 in
financial accounts. 7
6. (a) ANKIT LTD. a manufacturing Company which produces three products furnishes the following information
for the year 2016-17:
Particulars Products
A B C
Selling Price (per unit) `200 `150 `100
Profit Volume Ratio 10% 20% 40%
Raw Material content as a % of Variable Cost 50% 50% 50%
Maximum Sales Potential (units) 40,000 25,000 10,000
Fixed costs are estimated at `12 lakhs. The firm uses same raw material in all the three products. Raw
material is in ‘Short Supply’. The firm has a quota for the supply of raw materials of the value of `36 lakhs for
the year 2016-17 for the production of three products to meet sales demand.
Required:
Determine the optimal product mix and ascertain the maximum profit therefrom. 8
(b) The following figures are obtained from the records of P. Ltd.:
2015-16 (`) 2016-17 (`)
Sales 80,000 1,00,000
Net Profit 10,000 16,000
Required’.
(i) Profit Volume Ratio
(ii) Break Even Point
(iii) Profit or loss at sales of `40,000
(iv) Sales required to earn a profit of `22,000
(v) Margin of Safety if sales in `55,000 7
7. (a) The standard cost card of A & Co. shows the following costs:
Material cost - 2 kg @ `2.50 each `5.00 per unit
Wages - 2 hours @ 50 paise each `1.00 per unit
The actual data from business operations are as follows:
Production 8,000 units
Actual total cost of production:
Material cost - 16,500 kg @ ` 2.40 each `39,600
Wages -18,000 hours @ 40 paise each `7,200

Cost Accounting
Calculate the following variances:

(i) Material Cost Variance (MCV);
(ii) Material Price Variance (MPV);
(iii) Material Usage Variance (MUV);
(iv) Labour Cost Variance (LCV);
(v) Labour Rate Variance (LRV);
(vi) Labour Efficiency Variance (LEV). 8
(b) Summarised below are the revenue and expenditure figures of AB Ltd. for the month of March to August,
2017:
Month Sales (`) Purchases (`) Wages (`) Expenses (`)

March 6,50,000 4,00,000 1,20,000 50,000
April 7,00,000 4,80,000 1,50,000 50,000
May 7,50,000 4,50,000 1,50,000 60,000
June 8,00,000 4,80,000 1,80,000 60,000
July 8,20,000 4,00,000 1,80,000 80,000
August 8,90,000 5,00,000 2,00,000 80,000
The following further information is available:
(i) 10% Purchases and sales are on cash basis.
(ii) Advance payment of income tax in August, 2017 `50,000.
(iii) Plant purchased and price to be paid in June, 2017 `1,00,000.
(iv) Time lag–
Credit sales 2 months

Credit purchases 1 month
Wages 1/2 month
Expenses 1/2 month
Required:
Prepare a Cash Budget for 3 months starting on 1st June, 2017 when cash balance is `2,00,000. 7

(a) Differentiate between cost control and cost reduction.
(b) Cost accounting has emerged as a specialized discipline due to various factors. List out these factors.
(Any five)
(c) What is Economic Order Quantity (EOQ)? State the assumptions underlying EOQ.
(d) What is Principal Budget Factor? Explain your answer with suitable example.
The Directorate of Studies is committed to keep abreast of CMA Students with the
latest amendments/notifications/advancements on each subject on regular basis.
Students are requested to visit CMA Students’ Portal [https://icmai.in/studentswebsite/]
regularly to view the updates.

Paper-8-Cost AC CMA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Paper-8-Cost AC CMA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Paper-8-Cost AC CMA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTERMEDIATE : PAPER - 8

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

Copyright of these Study Notes is reserved by the Institute of Cost

Introduction to Cost Accounting

Study Note 2 : Cost Ascertainment - Elements of Cost

Study Note 3 : Cost Accounting Standards

Study Note 4 : Cost Book Keeping

Study Note 5 : Methods of Costing

Study Note 6 : Cost Accounting Techniques

This Study Note includes

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 1

2 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 3

Financial Accounting Cost Accounting

4 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

Cost Accounting and Management Accounting:

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 5

6 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

Material Labour Expenses

Direct Materail Direct Labour Direct Expenses

Indirect Material Indirect Labour Indirect Expenses

Direct Material + Direct Labour + Direct Expenses = Prime Cost

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 7

Indirect Material Cost

Direct Labour / Employee Cost

Indirect Labour/ Employee Cost

8 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 9

10 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 11

Advantages of Cost Control

The advantages of cost control are mainly as follows

(ii) Increase in productivity of the available resources

(iii) Reasonable price of the customers

(iv) Continued employment and job opportunity for the workers

(v) Economic use of limited resources of production

(vi) Increased credit worthiness

(vii) Prosperity and economic stability of the industry

(i) By reducing expenditure, the volume of output remaining constant, and

12 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

Cost Control Cost Reduction

1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF COST

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 13

(a) Classification by Nature of Expense

Cost Classification by nature

Material Labour Expenses

Cost Classification by relation to cost centre

Material Labour Expenses Material Labour Expenses

14 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

Cost classification by function

Production Administration Research & Selling Distribution

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 15

Cost classification by behaviour

Fixed Variable Semi-variable

16 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India 17

Cost Classification by nature of Production or Process

Batch Process Operation Operating Contract Joint

18 The Institute of Cost Accountants of India

Standard Cost Estimated Cost